PV Elite Manual

12777 Jones Rd. Ste.
480
Houston, TX 77070
Tel: 281 890-4566
FAX: 281 890-3301
Web: www.coade.com
January 1, 2005
Dear PVElite User,
Enclosed please find Version 2005 of the PVElite Pressure Vessel Design and Analysis software
program. This package includes a CD-ROM and this letter. The program installs using the Setup
program on the CD. The CD contains an auto-run feature that should automatically start the
installation process. If it does not start, execute the setup program contained on the CD. The
installation serial number is located on the inside of the CD jacket. Do not discard the jacket.
Some New Features of Version 2005 are:
• Added ASME Code 2004 Updates, including UHX and Appendix 26 updates
• Updated PVElite interface with new Grid based input
• Added All new Material Database Editor for ASME, PD: 5500 and EN-13445
• Added EN-13445 Material Database
• Added PD: 5500 Yield Stress Database
• Updated Output Processor
• Enhanced Word Generation in the Output
• Added Metric Bolts per TEMA, British Standards and South African Standards
• Added Several Structural Steel Databases Including Korean/JIS, British, German, South African, Australian and Indian
• Implemented ASME Steel Stack Design per STS-2000
• Added the ability to account for External Corrosion Allowance
• Added Nominal Thickness Input
• Stress Analysis of Openings and ligaments in Skirts
• Added the ability to change the Units and Design Code from the new Units toolbar
• Added the Australian Wind Code
• Added the European Wind Code
• Added the Mexican Seismic Code
• Increased the number of input points for India’s Response Spectrum Input
• Added Selection of Plate Densities for Platforms
• Added Piping Detail Input (overhead line) with the Mass/Equipment Detail
• Enhanced the Wind Analysis Output for several wind codes including ASCE-7 /93/95/98/02
• Added Flange Thickness Input field to the flange dialog
• Added an Input for Additional Static Pressure
• Integrated Thick Expansion Joint Analysis for UHX based Exchanger Designs
• Added ability to sort Nozzle Schedule Report with Weld and Pad sizes
• Added PD: 5500 Annex G updates
• Added PD: 5500 Enhancements for MDMT calculations
Component (CodeCalc) Analysis Features
• Added ASME 2005 addenda updates including UHX and Appendix 26 updates
• Added updates to the VIII-1, VIII-2, and yield stress databases
• Incorporation of the thick expansion joint analysis in the ASME tubesheet module
• Added TEMA Metric, British and South African Metric bolt look up tables in flange, basering, tubesheets, floating
head and Leg-Lug modules.
• Enhancements were made to the user interface for the Flange module including the on-screen display of results.
• Added inputs for the partition gasket thickness and the nubbin width. In earlier versions of the program, the gasket
thickness and nubbin width of the main gasket was being used for partition gasket.
• Added an option to print the membrane stress at nozzle edge in Annex-G module.
• Made Modifications to the treatment of full strength tube-tubesheet joint in the tubesheet modules.
• Enhanced the program for network users.
• Implemented the Appendix 9 Jackets in the Shell/Head module. These jackets could cover the shell (completely or
part of it) and/or the head.
• Added On-screen display of error messages, warnings and important results is available for the ASME UHX and
TEMA tubesheet modules.
• Added analysis of a vessel on 2 support lugs. Analysis for vessel supported on more than 2 lugs was previously
available.
Plus many others
This version of PVElite has been extensively tested according to the QA standards established at
COADE. At least 150 different vessel jobs have been run to verify the results of the program.
Important Release Notes
This version of PVElite was developed under the Windows 2000 and XP operating systems. Note
that Microsoft has abandoned support and development for its older operating systems including
Windows 95/98 series as well as Windows NT. Since PVElite has not been tested or installed on
these older versions of Windows, we cannot guarantee its behavior or if it function on the outdated
versions of Windows at all.
This version of PVElite requires an update to the ESL. In many cases the ESL will automatically
update itself for the new version. In some cases it may not. If you receive error 5007 when the new
version starts, please contact COADE or your local dealer to update the ESL. If the ESL does not
update itself, please do not take this personally. Note that the new version will function for 15 days
after the installation before the 5007 error is generated. This is the grace period. During that time,
please update your ESL.
We very much hope that you enjoy using this new version of PVElite.
Sincerely,
PVElite Development Staff

PVElite User Guide 2005
PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT
Licensor: COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 12777 Jones Road, Suite 480, Houston, Texas
77070
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER
YOU SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE
USING THIS PACKAGE. USING THIS PACKAGE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
The enclosed proprietaries encoded materials, hereinafter referred to as the Licensed Program(s), are the
property of COADE and are provided to you under the terms and conditions of this License Agreement.
You assume responsibility for the selection of the appropriate Licensed Program(s) to achieve the
intended results, and for the installation, use and results obtained from the selected Licensed Program(s).
LICENSE GRANT
In return for the payment of the license fee associated with the acquisition of the Licensed Program(s)
from COADE, COADE hereby grants you the following non-exclusive rights with regard to the Licensed
Programs(s):
1 Use of the License Program(s) on one machine. Under no circumstance is the License Program to be
executed without a COADE External Software Lock (ESL).
2 To transfer the Licensed Program(s) and license it to a third party if the third party acknowledges in
writing its agreement to accept the Licensed Program(s) under the terms and conditions of this License
Agreement; if you transfer the Licensed Program(s), you must at the same time either transfer all
copies whether printed or in machine-readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not so
transferred; the requirement to transfer and/or destroy copies of the Licensed Program(s) also pertains
to any and all modifications and portions of Licensed Program(s) contained or merged into other
programs.
You agree to reproduce and include the copyright notice as it appears on the Licensed Program(s) on any
copy, modification or merged portion of the Licensed Program(s).
THIS LICENSE DOES NOT GIVE YOU ANY RIGHT TO USE COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER
THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) OR ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION
THEREOF, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT.
IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION OF

THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) TO ANOTHER PARTY, THE LICENSE GRANTED HEREUNDER
TO YOU IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.
TERM
This License Agreement is effective upon acceptance and use of the Licensed Program(s) until terminated
in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement. You may terminate the License Agreement at
any time by destroying the Licensed Program(s) together with all copies, modifications, and merged
portions thereof in any form. This License Agreement will also terminate upon conditions set forth
elsewhere in this Agreement or automatically in the event you fail to comply with any term or condition of
this License Agreement. You hereby agree upon such termination to destroy the Licensed Program(s)
together with all copies, modifications and merged portions thereof in any form.
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Licensed Program(s), i.e. the tangible proprietary software, is provided "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND EXPLICITLY
EXCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the Licensed Program(s)
is with you.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of limited warranties, and, in those jurisdictions the above
exclusions may not apply. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have
other rights, which vary from one jurisdiction to another.
COADE does not warrant that the functions contained in the Licensed Program(s) will meet your
requirements or that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error free.
COADE does warrant, however, that the CD(s), i.e. the tangible physical medium on which the Licensed
Program(s) is furnished, to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you as evidenced by a copy of your receipt.
COADE warrants that any program errors will be fixed by COADE, at COADE's expense, as soon as possible
after the problem is reported and verified. However, only those customers current on their
update/maintenance contracts are eligible to receive the corrected version of the program.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This written Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties concerning the Licensed
Program(s). No agent, distributor, salesman or other person acting or representing themselves to act on
behalf of COADE has the authority to modify or supplement the limited warranty contained herein, nor any
of the other specific provisions of this Agreement, and no such modifications or supplements shall be
effective unless agreed to in writing by an officer of COADE having authority to act on behalf of COADE in
this regard.
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES
COADE's entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:

1 the replacement of any CD not meeting COADE's "Limited Warranty" as defined herein and which is
returned to COADE or an authorized COADE dealer with a copy of your receipt, or
2 if COADE or the dealer is unable to deliver a replacement CD which is free of defects in materials or
workmanship you may terminate this License Agreement by returning the Licensed Program(s) and
associated documentation and you will be refunded all monies paid to COADE to acquire the Licensed
Program(s).
IN NO EVENT WILL COADE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, AND OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) EVEN IF
COADE OR AN AUTHORIZED COADE DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR

INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT THE ABOVE LIMITATION AND
EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY IN THOSE JURISDICTIONS. FURTHERMORE, COADE DOES
NOT PURPORT TO DISCLAIM ANY LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY
DEFECTS IN THE DISKETTES OR OTHER PRODUCTS PROVIDED BY COADE PURSUANT TO
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
GENERAL
You may not sublicense, assign, or transfer your rights under this License Agreement or the Licensed
Program(s) except as expressly provided in this License Agreement. Any attempt otherwise to sublicense,
assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is void and constitutes a breach of this
License Agreement giving COADE the right to terminate as specified herein. This Agreement is governed
by the laws of the State of Texas, United States of America.
The initial license fee includes 1 year of support, maintenance and enhancements to the program. After
the first 1-year term, such updates and support are optional at the then current update fee.
Questions concerning this License Agreement, and all notices required herein shall be made by contacting
COADE in writing at COADE, 12777 Jones Road, Suite. 480, Houston, Texas, 77070, or by telephone, 281-
890-4566.
DISCLAIMER
Copyright (c) COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 2005, all rights reserved.
This proprietary software is the property of COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. and is provided to
the user pursuant to a COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license agreement containing
restrictions on its use. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third
parties, or used in any manner except as expressly permitted by the COADE/Engineering Physics Software,
Inc. program license agreement.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. SHALL NOT
HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE USER IN EXCESS OF THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO COADE
UNDER THE COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR
THIS SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT WILL COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. BE
LIABLE TO THE USER FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE
EVEN IF COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES. IT IS THE USERS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THE RESULTS OF THE
PROGRAM.
HOOPS' License Grant
COADE grants to PVElite users a non-exclusive license to use the Software Application under the terms
stated in the Agreement.
PVElite users agree to not alter, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Software Application. PVElite users
will not copy the Software except: (i) a as necessary to install the Software Application onto a
computer(s)...or (ii) to create an archival copy. PVElite users agree that any such copies of the Software
Application shall contain the same proprietary notices which appear on and in the Software Application.
Title to and ownership of the intellectual property rights associated with the Software Application ADA
any copies remain with COADE and its suppliers.
PVElite user are hereby notified that Tech Soft America , L.L.C. 1301 Marina Village Parkway, Suite 300,
Alameda CA 94501 ("Tech Soft America") is a third-party beneficiary to this Agreement to the extent that
this Agreement contains provisions which relate to PVElite users' use of the Software Application. Such
provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Tech Soft America and are enforceable by Tech Soft
America in addition to COADE.
In no event shall COADE or its suppliers be liable in any way for indirect, special or consequential
damages of any nature, including without limitations, lost business profits, or liability or injury to third
persons, whether foreseeable or not, regardless of whether COADE or its suppliers have been advised of
the possibility of such damages.
TRADEMARKS
HOOPS' is a trademark of Tech Soft America, L.L.C. Windows (95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP), Access, SQL
Server, Excel, Word are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Oracle is a trademark of Oracle
Corporation. Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
1
Contents
PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT....................................................................................................2
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER...................................................2
LICENSE GRANT ............................................................................................................................2
TERM................................................................................................................................................3
LIMITED WARRANTY...................................................................................................................3
ENTIRE AGREEMENT ...................................................................................................................3
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES ......................................................................................................3
GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................4
DISCLAIMER...................................................................................................................................4
HOOPS' License Grant......................................................................................................................5
TRADEMARKS................................................................................................................................5
Chapter 1: Introduction 1-1

What is PVElite?....................................................................................................................................... 1-2
What is the Purpose and Scope of PVElite? ............................................................................................. 1-2
What Distinguishes PVElite from our competitors? ................................................................................. 1-3
What Applications are Available? ............................................................................................................ 1-4
About the Documentation ......................................................................................................................... 1-8
Program Support / User Assistance .......................................................................................................... 1-9
Updates ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-9
COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers............................................................................................ 1-9
Chapter 2: The Installation/Configuration Process 2-1

Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
System and Hardware Requirements ........................................................................................................ 2-2
External Software Lock ............................................................................................................................ 2-3
Starting the Installation Procedure............................................................................................................ 2-3
Installing PVElite...................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Network Installation / Usage .................................................................................................................... 2-7
Software Installation on a Network Drive ..................................................................................... 2-7
ESL Installation on a Network.................................................................................................................. 2-8
Novell File Server ESL Installation............................................................................................... 2-8
Novell Workstation ESL Installation............................................................................................. 2-9
Windows Server Installation ......................................................................................................... 2-9
2 Contents
Notes on Network ESLs ........................................................................................................................... 2-9
Chapter 3: Tutorial/Master Menu 3-1

Program Structure and Control ................................................................................................................. 3-2
A Road Map for PVELITE ....................................................................................................................... 3-3
The Input Processor .................................................................................................................................. 3-3
Other Input Processors.............................................................................................................................. 3-6
Error Checking.......................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Analysis .................................................................................................................................................. 3-10
Tools Menu............................................................................................................................................. 3-11
Output Review and Report Generation................................................................................................... 3-13
Design and Analysis of Vessel Details ................................................................................................... 3-15
Input Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-18
Main Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-21
File Menu................................................................................................................................................ 3-22
Analyze Menu......................................................................................................................................... 3-24
Output Menu........................................................................................................................................... 3-25
Tools Menu............................................................................................................................................. 3-25
Create / Review Units.................................................................................................................. 3-31
Edit / Add Materials .................................................................................................................... 3-31
Calculator .................................................................................................................................... 3-33
Diagnostics Menu ................................................................................................................................... 3-34
View Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-34
Inspecting the Model in 3D .................................................................................................................... 3-37
ESL Menu............................................................................................................................................... 3-39
Help Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 3-40
PVElite Quick Start ................................................................................................................................ 3-41
Entering PVElite.......................................................................................................................... 3-41
Defining the Basic Vessel............................................................................................................ 3-42
Adding Details ........................................................................................................................................ 3-43
Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image .................................................................................. 3-44
Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints........................................................................ 3-46
Performing the Analysis ......................................................................................................................... 3-49
Reviewing the Results ............................................................................................................................ 3-50
Analyzing Individual Vessel Components Details ................................................................................. 3-50
DXF File Generation Option .................................................................................................................. 3-53
Setting Up the Required Parameters ....................................................................................................... 3-54
User Border Creation................................................................................................................... 3-54
DXF File Generated by PVElite During Runtime .................................................................................. 3-55
Invoking the Drawing.................................................................................................................. 3-55
Chapter 4: Element Data 4-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Element Basic Data................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Element's From Node .................................................................................................................... 4-3
Element's To Node ........................................................................................................................ 4-4
Element's Diameter........................................................................................................................ 4-4
Distance or Straight Flange Length ............................................................................................... 4-4
Finished Thickness ........................................................................................................................ 4-5
Corrosion Allowance..................................................................................................................... 4-5
Wind Load Diameter Multiplier .................................................................................................... 4-5
Contents 3
Material Name ............................................................................................................................... 4-6

Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal and Circumferential Seams ...................................................... 4-6
Design Internal Pressure................................................................................................................ 4-6
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure ..................................................................................... 4-7
Design External Pressure............................................................................................................... 4-7
Design Temperature for External Pressure .................................................................................... 4-7
Swap Diameter Basis..................................................................................................................... 4-7
Element Additional Data .......................................................................................................................... 4-7
Cylindrical Shell ............................................................................................................................ 4-8
Elliptical Head ............................................................................................................................... 4-8
Head Factor ................................................................................................................................... 4-8
Inside Head Depth ......................................................................................................................... 4-8
Sump Head?................................................................................................................................... 4-8
Torispherical Head.................................................................................................................................... 4-9
Crown Radius ................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Knuckle Radius ............................................................................................................................. 4-9
Sump Head?................................................................................................................................... 4-9
Spherical Head........................................................................................................................................ 4-10
Conical Head or Shell Segment................................................................................................... 4-10
To Node Diameter ....................................................................................................................... 4-10
Cone Length ................................................................................................................................ 4-10
Half Apex Angle.......................................................................................................................... 4-11
Toriconical................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Toricone Dialog........................................................................................................................... 4-11
Large End Knuckle Radius.......................................................................................................... 4-12
Large End Knuckle Thickness..................................................................................................... 4-12
Small End Knuckle Radius.......................................................................................................... 4-12
Small End Knuckle Thickness..................................................................................................... 4-12
Welded Flat Head ................................................................................................................................... 4-12
Attachment Factor ....................................................................................................................... 4-13
Non-Circ. Small Diameter ........................................................................................................... 4-13
Appendix 14 Large Opening ....................................................................................................... 4-13
Flange Analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 4-15
Body Flange................................................................................................................................. 4-15
Skirt Support with Basering.................................................................................................................... 4-16
Inside Diameter at Base............................................................................................................... 4-17
Basering Dialog ........................................................................................................................... 4-17
Flange Input Data ................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Basering Analysis ................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Brownell and Young Method of Design...................................................................................... 4-18
Tailing Lug Analysis .............................................................................................................................. 4-18
Tailing Lug Input Data ........................................................................................................................... 4-19
Perform Tailing Lug Analysis ..................................................................................................... 4-19
Tail Lug Type .............................................................................................................................. 4-19
Centerline Offset ......................................................................................................................... 4-19
Lug Thickness ............................................................................................................................. 4-19
Pin Hole Diameter ....................................................................................................................... 4-19
Weld Size Thickness ................................................................................................................... 4-19
Lug Height (only if no Top Ring)................................................................................................ 4-19
Discussion of Results................................................................................................................... 4-20
4 Contents
Chapter 5: Vessel Detail Data 5-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Assigning Detail ....................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Detail Definition Buttons.......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Defining the Details .................................................................................................................................. 5-7
Rings......................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Inside Diameter of Ring ................................................................................................................ 5-9
Outside Diameter of Ring.............................................................................................................. 5-9
Thickness of Ring.......................................................................................................................... 5-9
Ring Material................................................................................................................................. 5-9
Moment of Inertia........................................................................................................................ 5-10
Cross Sectional Area ................................................................................................................... 5-10
Distance to Ring Centroid ........................................................................................................... 5-10
Name of Section Type ................................................................................................................. 5-10
Nozzle Dialog Data................................................................................................................................. 5-11
Nozzle Analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 5-12
Nozzle Input Data ................................................................................................................................... 5-14
Nozzle Description ...................................................................................................................... 5-14
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell ................................................................................................ 5-14
Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline (L1) ................................................................. 5-14
Class for Attached B16.5 Flange ................................................................................................. 5-14
Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange ................................................................................................ 5-14
Modification of Reinforcing Limits............................................................................................. 5-15
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit........................................................................... 5-15
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit ......................................................................... 5-15
Do you want to set Area1 or Area 2 to 0 ..................................................................................... 5-16
Nozzle Material Specification ..................................................................................................... 5-16
Nozzle Diameter Basis ................................................................................................................ 5-16
Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle....................................................................................... 5-16
Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis ................................................................................................ 5-16
Actual Diameter and Thickness................................................................................................... 5-16
Nominal Diameter and Thickness ............................................................................................... 5-17
Minimum Diameter and Thickness ............................................................................................. 5-17
Actual Thickness of Nozzle......................................................................................................... 5-17
Nominal Schedule of Nozzle ....................................................................................................... 5-17
Nozzle Corrosion Allowance....................................................................................................... 5-17
Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which Nozzle Passes..................................................... 5-17
Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck.................................................................................................. 5-18
Insert Nozzle or Abutting Nozzle ................................................................................................ 5-18
Nozzle Outside Projection ........................................................................................................... 5-18
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad ........................................................ 5-18
Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel ................................................................... 5-18
Nozzle Inside Projection.............................................................................................................. 5-18
Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell ........................................................... 5-18
Local Shell Thickness.................................................................................................................. 5-19
Shell Tr Value.............................................................................................................................. 5-19
Tapped Hole Area Loss ............................................................................................................... 5-19
Overriding Nozzle Weight........................................................................................................... 5-19
Nozzle Orientation....................................................................................................................... 5-20
Additional Reinforcing Pad Data............................................................................................................ 5-28
Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface ............................................................................... 5-28
Pad Width .................................................................................................................................... 5-28
Contents 5
Pad Thickness.............................................................................................................................. 5-28

Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter ..................................................................................... 5-28
Depth of Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck ............................................................... 5-28
Pad Material................................................................................................................................. 5-29
ASME Code Weld Type.............................................................................................................. 5-29
Flange Type ................................................................................................................................. 5-29
Flange Material............................................................................................................................ 5-29
Lugs ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-29
Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint................................................................................. 5-30
Lug Bearing Width ...................................................................................................................... 5-30
Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate........................................................................................ 5-30
Length of Bottom Lug Support Plate........................................................................................... 5-30
Thickness of Bottom Plate........................................................................................................... 5-31
Distance between Gussets ........................................................................................................... 5-31
Mean Width of Gussets ............................................................................................................... 5-31
Height of Gussets ........................................................................................................................ 5-31
Thickness of Gussets ................................................................................................................... 5-31
Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring .................................................................................................. 5-31
Thickness of Top Plate/Ring ....................................................................................................... 5-31
Overall Height of Lug.................................................................................................................. 5-31
Overall Width of Lug .................................................................................................................. 5-31
Weight of One Lug ...................................................................................................................... 5-31
Number of Lugs........................................................................................................................... 5-32
Perform WRC 107 Calc............................................................................................................... 5-32
Pad Width .................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Pad Thickness.............................................................................................................................. 5-32
Pad Length................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Weights ................................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Miscellaneous Weight ................................................................................................................. 5-33
Offset from Centerline................................................................................................................. 5-33
Is this a Welded Internal .............................................................................................................. 5-33
Forces and Moments............................................................................................................................... 5-33
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction ...................................................................................................... 5-33
Moment about X, Y, or Z Axis.................................................................................................... 5-34
Acts During Wind or Seismic...................................................................................................... 5-34
Force/Moment Combination Method .......................................................................................... 5-34
Platforms................................................................................................................................................. 5-34
Platform Start Angle (degrees) .................................................................................................... 5-35
Platform End Angle (degrees) ..................................................................................................... 5-35
Platform Wind Area..................................................................................................................... 5-35
Platform Weight .......................................................................................................................... 5-35
Platform Railing Weight.............................................................................................................. 5-35
Platform Grating Weight ............................................................................................................. 5-35
Platform Width ............................................................................................................................ 5-35
Platform Height ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
Platform Clearance ...................................................................................................................... 5-36
Platform Force Coefficient .......................................................................................................... 5-36
Platform Wind Area Calculation [Installation \ Misc. Options] .................................................. 5-36
Platform Length (Non- Circular) ................................................................................................. 5-36
Saddles.................................................................................................................................................... 5-36
Width of Saddle........................................................................................................................... 5-37
Centerline Dimension (B)............................................................................................................ 5-37
Saddle Contact Angle (degrees) .................................................................................................. 5-37
Height of Composite Stiffener..................................................................................................... 5-37
Width of Wear Plate .................................................................................................................... 5-38
6 Contents
Thickness of Wear Plate .............................................................................................................. 5-38

Wear Plate Contact Angle (degrees)............................................................................................ 5-38
Saddle Dimension A.................................................................................................................... 5-38
Perform Saddle Check ................................................................................................................. 5-38
Material Yield Stress ................................................................................................................... 5-38
E for Plates .................................................................................................................................. 5-38
Baseplate Length ......................................................................................................................... 5-38
Baseplate Width........................................................................................................................... 5-38
Baseplate Thickness .................................................................................................................... 5-38
Number of Ribs ........................................................................................................................... 5-39
Rib Thickness .............................................................................................................................. 5-39
Web Thickness ............................................................................................................................ 5-39
Web Location .............................................................................................................................. 5-39
Height of Center Web.................................................................................................................. 5-39
Trays ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-39
Number of Trays.......................................................................................................................... 5-40
Tray Spacing................................................................................................................................ 5-40
Tray Weight Per Unit Area.......................................................................................................... 5-40
Height of Liquid on Tray............................................................................................................. 5-40
Density of Liquid on Tray ........................................................................................................... 5-40
Legs ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-40
Distance from Outside Diameter: or Diameter at Leg Centerline ............................................... 5-41
Leg Orientation............................................................................................................................ 5-41
Number of Legs ........................................................................................................................... 5-42
Section Identifier ......................................................................................................................... 5-42
Length of Legs............................................................................................................................. 5-42
Vessel Translates During Occasional Load ................................................................................. 5-42
Packing ................................................................................................................................................... 5-42
Height of Packed Section ............................................................................................................ 5-43
Density of Packing ...................................................................................................................... 5-43
Liquid...................................................................................................................................................... 5-44
Height/Length of Liquid .............................................................................................................. 5-45
Liquid Density ............................................................................................................................. 5-45
Insulation ................................................................................................................................................ 5-46
Height/Length of Insulation / Fireproofing ................................................................................. 5-47
Thickness of Insulation or Fireproofing ...................................................................................... 5-47
Insulation Density........................................................................................................................ 5-47
Lining...................................................................................................................................................... 5-48
Height/Length of Lining .............................................................................................................. 5-48
Thickness of Lining ..................................................................................................................... 5-48
Density of Lining......................................................................................................................... 5-48
Half Pipe Jacket ...................................................................................................................................... 5-49
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 5-49
Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis............................................................................................ 5-49
Discussion of Input Data ............................................................................................................. 5-50
Contents 7
Chapter 6: General Vessel Data 6-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Design Data .............................................................................................................................................. 6-2
Installation Options................................................................................................................................... 6-8
Design Modification ............................................................................................................................... 6-11
Nozzle Design Modifications ................................................................................................................. 6-14
Wind & Seismic Data ............................................................................................................................. 6-16
Wind Data............................................................................................................................................... 6-16
ASCE Wind Data.................................................................................................................................... 6-17
UBC Wind Data...................................................................................................................................... 6-19
NBC Wind Data...................................................................................................................................... 6-21
ASCE 95 Wind Data............................................................................................................................... 6-22
IS 875 Wind Code .................................................................................................................................. 6-24
User-Defined Wind Profile ..................................................................................................................... 6-26
Percent Wind for Hydrotest ......................................................................................................... 6-26
Wind Profile Data........................................................................................................................ 6-26
Mexican Wind Code 1993 ...................................................................................................................... 6-27
British Wind Code BS-6399 ................................................................................................................... 6-33
Seismic Data ........................................................................................................................................... 6-37
Seismic Design Code................................................................................................................... 6-37
8 Contents
ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data........................................................................................................................ 6-39

ASCE7-93 Seismic Data........................................................................................................................ 6-41
UBC Seismic Data .................................................................................................................................. 6-42
NBC Seismic Data .................................................................................................................................. 6-43
India's Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and SCM ............................................................................ 6-46
ASCE - 95 Seismic Data......................................................................................................................... 6-47
Seismic Load Input in G's....................................................................................................................... 6-48
UBC 1997 Earthquake Data.................................................................................................................... 6-48
IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters.......................................................................................................... 6-50
Response Spectrum................................................................................................................................. 6-52
Chapter 7: PVElite Analysis 7-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Results ............................................................................... 7-3
Optional Steps........................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Component Analysis............................................................................................................................... 7-10
Chapter 8: Output/Review 8-1

Generating Output .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
The Review Screen ................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Using Review............................................................................................................................................ 8-3
Component Analysis................................................................................................................................. 8-3
Chapter 9: HEAT EXCHANGERS 9-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................... 9-2
Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis......................................................................................................... 9-2
Analyzing Heat Exchangers...................................................................................................................... 9-3
Building Heat Exchangers ........................................................................................................... 9-11
Chapter 10: Component Analysis Tutorial 10-1

Purpose of this Chapter........................................................................................................................... 10-2
Starting CodeCalc from PVElite............................................................................................................. 10-2
Main Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 10-3
File Menu .................................................................................................................................... 10-3
Edit Menu .................................................................................................................................... 10-5
Analysis Menu............................................................................................................................. 10-6
Output Menu................................................................................................................................ 10-7
Tools Menu.................................................................................................................................. 10-7
Computation Control Tab............................................................................................................ 10-8
Miscellaneous Tab..................................................................................................................... 10-11
Diagnostic Menu ....................................................................................................................... 10-17
View Menu ................................................................................................................................ 10-18
ESL Menu.................................................................................................................................. 10-18
Help Menu ................................................................................................................................. 10-19
Performing an Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 10-19
Reviewing the Results - The Output Option ......................................................................................... 10-26
Printing or Saving Reports to a File .......................................................................................... 10-27
Contents 9
Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel .................................................................................... 10-27

Tutorial Problem Printout ..................................................................................................................... 10-29
Chapter 11: SHELLS 11-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 11-2
Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis....................................................................................................... 11-2
Discussion of Input Data......................................................................................................................... 11-4
Main Input Fields ........................................................................................................................ 11-4
Pop-up Input Fields ..................................................................................................................... 11-8
Results .................................................................................................................................................. 11-12
API 579 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 11-14
Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis.................................................................................................... 11-14
Discussion of Input Data....................................................................................................................... 11-18
Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 11-27
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 11-28
Jacket .................................................................................................................................................... 11-28
Chapter 12: NOZZLES 12-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 12-2
Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis...................................................................................................... 12-2
Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................. 12-10
Actual Nozzle Diameter Thickness ........................................................................................... 12-14
Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle................................................................................... 12-14
UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness ................................................................................ 12-15
Required and Available Areas ................................................................................................... 12-15
Selection of Reinforcing Pad ..................................................................................................... 12-15
Large Diameter Nozzle Calculations......................................................................................... 12-15
Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits ................................................................... 12-15
Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits ................................................................... 12-16
Minimum Design Metal Temperature ....................................................................................... 12-16
Weld Size Calculations.............................................................................................................. 12-16
Weld Strength Calculations ....................................................................................................... 12-16
Failure Path Calculations........................................................................................................... 12-16
Iterative Results Per Pressure, Area, And UG-45...................................................................... 12-16
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 12-17
Chapter 13: FLANGES 13-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
10 Contents

Example ................................................................................................................................................ 13-22
Chapter 14: CONICAL SECTIONS 14-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 14-2
Pop-Up Input Fields .................................................................................................................... 14-7
Discussion of Results.............................................................................................................................. 14-9
Internal Pressure Results ............................................................................................................. 14-9
External Pressure Results ............................................................................................................ 14-9
Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure................................................................ 14-10
Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure............................................................... 14-10
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 14-11
Chapter 15: FLOATING HEADS 15-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 15-2
Internal Pressure Results for the Head:...................................................................................... 15-13
External Pressure Results for Heads:......................................................................................... 15-13
Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head: ........................................................... 15-14
Required Thickness Calculations: ............................................................................................. 15-14
Soehrens Calculations: .............................................................................................................. 15-14
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 15-15
Chapter 16: HORIZONTAL VESSELS 16-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 16-2
Discussion of Input ................................................................................................................................. 16-2
Saddle Wear Plate Design..................................................................................................................... 16-14
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 16-16
Chapter 17: TUBESHEETS 17-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 17-2
Contents 11

Example ................................................................................................................................................ 17-36
Chapter 18: WRC 107\FEA 18-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 18-2
Additional Input for WRC 107 .................................................................................................. 18-16
Additional Input for FEA .......................................................................................................... 18-18
WRC 107 Stress Calculations.................................................................................................... 18-19
WRC107 Stress Summations..................................................................................................... 18-22
ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle .................................................... 18-23
Finite Element Analysis (FEA): ................................................................................................ 18-25
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 18-27
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 18-30
Chapter 19: LEGS and LUGS 19-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 19-2
Vessel Leg Input ..................................................................................................................................... 19-8
Leg Results ........................................................................................................................................... 19-10
Support Lug Input................................................................................................................................. 19-10
Lifting Lug Input .................................................................................................................................. 19-13
Output ................................................................................................................................................... 19-16
Baseplate Input ..................................................................................................................................... 19-17
Main Input Fields ...................................................................................................................... 19-17
Baseplate Results .................................................................................................................................. 19-20
Trunnion Input ...................................................................................................................................... 19-20
Main Input Fields ...................................................................................................................... 19-21
Trunnion Results................................................................................................................................... 19-24
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 19-24
Chapter 20: PIPES and PADS 20-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 20-2
Output ..................................................................................................................................................... 20-7
Example .................................................................................................................................................. 20-8
Chapter 21: BASE RINGS 21-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 21-2
Calculations ............................................................................................................................................ 21-2
Calculation Techniques ............................................................................................................... 21-2
12 Contents

Pop-up Input Fields ................................................................................................................... 21-12
Tailing Lug Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 21-15
Discussion of Input ............................................................................................................................... 21-15
Tailing Lug Input....................................................................................................................... 21-15
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 21-17
Chapter 22: THIN JOINTS 22-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 22-2
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 22-10
Chapter 23: THICK JOINTS 23-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 23-2
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 23-11
Chapter 24: ASME TUBESHEETS 24-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 24-2
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 24-27
Chapter 25: HALF-PIPES 25-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 25-2
Contents 13

Example .................................................................................................................................................. 25-7
Chapter 26: LARGE OPENINGS 26-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 26-2
Example Problem.................................................................................................................................... 26-4
Chapter 27: RECTANGULAR VESSELS 27-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 27-2
Ligament Efficiency Calculations ............................................................................................. 27-17
Reinforcement Calculations ...................................................................................................... 27-17
Stress Calculations..................................................................................................................... 27-18
Allowable Calculations.............................................................................................................. 27-18
Highest Percentage of Allowable Calculations.......................................................................... 27-19
MAWP Calculations.................................................................................................................. 27-19
External Pressure Calculations .................................................................................................. 27-19
Example Problem.................................................................................................................................. 27-19
Chapter 28: WRC 297/ANNEX G 28-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 28-2
Additional Input for PD 5500, Annex G...................................................................................... 28-7
Sample Calculation ................................................................................................................................. 28-9
Chapter 29: Appendix Y 29-1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 29-2
Gasket and Gasket Factors...................................................................................................................... 29-2
Example .................................................................................................................................................. 29-2
Chapter 30: Miscellaneous Topics 30-1

Heading Edit ........................................................................................................................................... 30-2
Heading Manipulation and Material Properties ...................................................................................... 30-2
Input Data .................................................................................................................................... 30-4
Nominal Density of this Material ................................................................................................ 30-7
14 Contents
P Number Thickness.................................................................................................................... 30-7

Yield Stress, Operating................................................................................................................ 30-7
UCS-66 Chart Number ................................................................................................................ 30-8
External Pressure Chart Name..................................................................................................... 30-8
Carbon Steel Materials ................................................................................................................ 30-8
Heat Treated Materials ................................................................................................................ 30-8
Stainless Steel (High Alloy) Materials ........................................................................................ 30-8
Non Ferrous Materials ................................................................................................................. 30-9
Chapter 31: Vessel Example Problems 31-1

Vessel Example ...................................................................................................................................... 31-1
1-1
C H A P T E R 1
Chapter 1: Introduction
In This Chapter
What is PVElite? ................................................................1-2
What is the Purpose and Scope of PVElite?.......................1-2
What Distinguishes PVElite from our competitors? ..........1-3
What Applications are Available?......................................1-4
About the Documentation ..................................................1-8
Program Support / User Assistance....................................1-9
Updates...............................................................................1-9
COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers .....................1-9
1-2 PVElite User Guide 2005
What is PVElite?
PVElite is a PC-based pressure vessel design and analysis software program developed, marketed and sold
by COADE Engineering Software. PVElite is a package of nineteen applications for the design and analysis
of pressure vessels and heat exchangers, and fitness for service assessments. The purpose of the program
is to provide the mechanical engineer with easy to use, technically sound, well documented reports with
detailed calculations and supporting comments, which will speed and simplify the task of vessel design,
re-rating or fitness for service. The popularity of PVElite is a reflection of COADE's expertise in
programming and engineering, as well as COADE's dedication to service and quality.
What is the Purpose and Scope of PVElite?
Calculations in PVElite are based on the latest editions of national codes such as the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, or industry standards such as the Zick analysis method for horizontal drums.
PVElite offers exceptional ease of use, which results in dramatic improvement in efficiency for both design
and re-rating.
PVElite features include:

Introduction 1-3
Graphical User Interface, which lists model data and control with a vessel display.
Both horizontal and vertical vessels may be composed of cylinders, conical sections, body flanges as
well as elliptical, torispherical, hemispherical, conical and flat heads.
Saddle supports for horizontal vessels. Leg and skirt supports at any location for vertical vessels.
Extensive on-line help.
Deadweight calculation from vessel details such as nozzles, lugs, rings, trays, insulation, packing and
lining.
Wall thickness calculations for internal and external pressure in accordance with the rules of ASME
Section VIII Divisions 1 and Division 2, PD 5500 and EN-13445. Stiffener rings are evaluated for
external pressure.
Wind and seismic data using the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) standard, the Uniform
Building Code (UBC), and the National (Canadian) Building Code, India Standards as well as British,
Mexican, Australian and European Standards.
User defined unit system.
A complete examination of the vessel’s structural loads combining the effects of pressure, deadweight
and live loads in the empty, operating and hydrotest conditions.
Logic to automatically increase wall thickness to satisfy requirements for pressure and structural loads
and introduce stiffener rings to address external pressure rules.
Structural load evaluation in terms of both tensile and compressive stress ratios (to the allowable
limits).
Detailed analysis of nozzles, flanges, and base rings.
A complete material library for all three design standards.
A component library containing pipe diameter and wall thickness, ANSI B16.5 flange pressure vs.
temperature charts, and section properties for AISC, British, Indian, Japanese, Korean, Australian and
South African structural shapes.
Printed output from PVElite is exceptionally clear and complete, with user definable headings on each
page. User comments and additions may be inserted at any point in the output.
What Distinguishes PVElite from our

competitors?
COADE treats PVElite more as a service than a product. Our staff of experienced pressure vessel engineers
are involved in day-to-day software development, program support and training. This approach has
produced a program, which most closely fits today's requirements of the pressure vessel industry. Data
entry is simple and straightforward through annotated input screens and/or spreadsheets. PVElite provides
the widest range of modeling and analysis capabilities without becoming too complicated for simple
system analysis. Users may tailor their PVElite installation through default setting and customized
databases. Comprehensive input graphics confirms the model construction before the analysis is made.
The program's interactive output processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends
complete reports to a file, printer or Word document. PVElite is an up-to-date package that not only utilizes
standard analysis guidelines but also provides the latest recognized opinions for these analyses.
PVElite is a field-proven engineering analysis program. It is a widely recognized product with a large
customer base and an excellent support and development record. COADE is a strong and stable company
where service is a major commitment.
What Applications are Available?
The following applications are available in PVElite.
General Vessels
Wall thickness design and analysis of any vessel for realistic combinations of pressure, deadweight,
nozzle, wind and seismic loads in accordance with ASME Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2 rules,
PD 5500, and EN-13445. These calculations address minimum wall thickness for pressure and allowable
longitudinal stress (both tension and compression) in the vessel wall for the expected structural load
combinations.
Complete Vertical Vessels
Vessels supported by either skirts, legs or lugs can be defined for complete dead load and live load
analysis. Stacked vessels with liquid are also addressed. Hydrotest conditions may be specified for either
vertical or horizontal test positions. Vessel MAWP includes hydrostatic head and ANSI B16.5 flange
pressure limitations.
Complete Horizontal Vessels
Stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the method of L. P. Zick. Results include
stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel, and in the heads.
The following applications are available in PVElite:
Shells & Heads
Internal and external pressure design of vessels and exchangers using the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1 rules. Components include cylinders, conical sections, elliptical heads, torispherical heads, flat
heads, spherical shells and heads. This program calculates required thickness and maximum allowable
internal pressure for the given component. It also calculates the minimum design metal temperature per
UCS-66, and evaluates stiffening rings for external pressure design.
This module also includes the implementation of API-579 for Fitness For Service evaluations (FFS). Sec.
4, Local Thinning, Sec. 5, General Metal loss and Sec. 6 Pitting Corrosion, are available at this time.
Introduction 1-5
Nozzles
Required wall thickness and reinforcement under internal pressure for nozzles in shells and heads, using
the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules and including tables of outside diameter and wall
thickness for all nominal pipe diameters and schedules. The program checks the weld sizes, calculates the
strength of reinforcement and evaluates failure paths for the nozzle. Hillside, tangential and Y-angle
nozzles can also be evaluated.
Conical Sections
Internal and external pressure analysis of conical sections and stiffening rings using the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1 rules. Complete area of reinforcement and moment of inertia calculations for the
cone under both internal and external pressure are included.
Floating Head
Internal and external pressure analysis of bolted dished heads (floating heads) using the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1 rules. An Additional calculation technique allowed by the Code
(Soehrens calculation) is also implemented by the program.
Flanges
Stress analysis and geometry selection for all types of flanges using the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1 rules. This program both designs and analyzes the following types of flanges:
All integral flange types

Slip on flanges and all loose flange types with hubs
Ring type flanges and all loose flange types without hubs
Blind flanges, both circular and non-circular
TEMA channel covers
Reverse geometry weld neck flanges
Flat faced flanges with full face gaskets
Users can input the external forces and moments acting on the flange and alternate mating flange loads.
Tubesheets (TEMA and PD 5500)
PVElite performs an analysis of all types of tubesheets using the 8th Edition of the Standards of the
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association and PD 5500. The program takes full account of the effects
of tubesheets extended as flanges, and for fixed tubesheets also includes the effects of differential thermal
expansion and the presence of an expansion joint. Expansion joint can be designed within this module. For
a fixed tubesheet exchanger the program can analyze multiple loads cases for both the corroded and
uncorroded conditions. If an expansion joint is added, then corresponding expansion joint load cases will
also be run.
Horizontal Vessels
Stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the L.P. Zick method. Results include
stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel and in the heads. Stiffening rings used in the design of
the vessel are also evaluated. Wind and seismic loadings are also considered. Additionally, the saddle,
webs and baseplate are checked for external seismic and wind loads. Users can also specify friction and
additional longitudinal forces on the vessel.
Legs & Lugs
Analysis of vessel support legs, support lugs, trunnions and lifting lugs based on industry standard
calculation techniques, and the resulting stresses are compared to the AISC Handbook of Steel
Construction or the ASME Code. A full table of 929 AISC beams, channels and angles is included in the
program. Users can also perform WRC 107 calculation on the trunnion and the support lug, from within
this module.
Pipes & Pads
Required wall thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for two pipes, and branch
reinforcement requirements for the same two pipes considered as a branch and a header. Based on ANSI
B31.3 rules, this program includes tables of outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal pipe
diameters and schedules.
WRC 107/FEA
Stresses in cylindrical or spherical shells due to loading on an attachment, using the method of P.P.
Bijlaard as defined in Welding Research Council Bulletin 107, including a stress comparison to VIII Div.
2 allowables for 3 different loading conditions. This module also contains an interface to the Finite
Analysis Program (Nozzle Pro from The Paulin Research Group).
Baserings
Calculates stress and thickness evaluation for skirts and baserings. Results from both the neutral axis shift
and simplified method for basering required thickness is reported. Required skirt thickness due to weight
loads and bending moments are also displayed. Tailing Lugs attached to the basering can also be
analyzed.
Thin Joints
Stress and life cycle evaluation for thin walled expansion joints in accordance with ASME VIII Div. 1
appendix 26.
Thick Joints
Stress, life cycle and spring rate calculations for flanged and flued expansion joints in accordance with
ASME VIII Div. 1 appendix 5. The spring rate computation is per TEMA eighth edition.
Introduction 1-7
ASME Tubesheets
This program determines required thickness of tubesheets for fixed or U-tube exchangers per the ASME
Code Section VIII division 1 section UHX. You can use the program to analyze multiple loads cases for
both the corroded and uncorroded conditions.
Half-Pipe
This program determines required thickness and MAWP for half-pipe jacketed vessels per the ASME
Code Section VIII division 1 appendix EE.
Large Openings
This program analyzes large openings in integral flat heads per the ASME Code Section VIII division 1
appendix 2 and appendix 14. Required thickness, MAWP and weights are computed for geometries with
or without an attached nozzle.
Rectangular Vessels
This program analyzes non-circular pressure vessels using the rules of the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 13. Most of the vessel types in Appendix 13 are analyzed for internal pressure,
including reinforced or stayed rectangular vessels with a diametral staying plate. All membrane and
bending stresses are computed and compared to the appropriate allowables.
WRC 297 / PD5500 Annex G
This program calculates the stress analysis of loads and attachments according to the Welding Research
Council bulletin 297 (WRC 297) and the British Standard Annex G (PD:5500). The WRC 297 bulletin,
published in 1984, attempts to extend the existing analysis of WRC 107 for cylinder-to-cylinder
intersections. PD:5500 Annex G provides an analysis of stress in cylindrical or spherical shells due to
attachment loads. Complete material databases for ASME Sec VIII and Div-1,2 are available. In the case
of PD 5500, the complete material database found in Annex K is also included.
Appendix Y Flanges
This module performs a stress evaluation of Class1 category 1, 2, or 3 flanges that form identical flange
pairs, according to the latest version of the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix Y.
Summary
Displays a description and evaluation of all the components of a pressure vessel or heat exchanger.
Design pressure, temperature, material, actual thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure are
shown for each component.
About the Documentation
Chapter 2 gives you information on the hardware and software required to run PVElite, instructions on how
to install the program, and how to prepare your computer to run the program.
Chapter 3 tells you how to launch PVElite on your computer. Use Chapter 3 to learn the structure of the
program, and the keystrokes needed to operate the software. Each of the applications operates the same
way, so you will only need to learn these skills one time.
Chapter 4 discusses the PVElite element input data for each basic element. The details added to these
elements are explained in Chapter 5. Chapter 6 describes the general vessel input data.
Chapter 7 discusses the Analyze options of PVElite while Chapter 8 discusses how to review or generate
output for the job. This chapter also focuses on the capabilities of the review processor
Chapter 9 contains information needed to analyze shell and tube type heat exchangers. .
Chapter 10 contains a complete tutorial, which leads you through the use of one application of the PVElite
Component Analysis Module.
Chapter 11 gives a more detailed description of several features associated with the spreadsheet input
program - merging shell data, selecting materials, editing materials properties, and inserting or deleting
analyses.
Chapters 11 through 29 contain the technical descriptions for each of the PVElite module applications. The
information provided for each application includes:
The purpose and scope of the application and its technical basis
Notes on the input to the program and results of the program
A figure showing the relevant geometry
One or more example problems
Chapter 30 describes miscellaneous topics included in PVElite.
Chapter 31 provides additional information, which will be helpful as you use PVElite. These include heat
exchanger design cases, hand calculations for selected programs, a bibliography of pressure vessel texts
and standards.
Introduction 1-9
Program Support / User Assistance
COADE's staff understands that PVElite is not only a complex analysis tool but also, at times, an elaborate
process — one that may not be obvious to the casual user. While our documentation is intended to address
the questions raised regarding pressure vessel/heat exchanger/FFS analyses, system modeling, and results
interpretation, not all the answers can be quickly found in these volumes.
COADE understands the engineer's need to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs. To that
end, COADE has a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any PVElite issues raised by all users.
PVElite support is available by telephone, e-mail, fax, Website discussion forum, and by mail; literally
hundreds of support calls are answered every week. COADE provides this service at no additional charge to
the user. It is expected, however, that questions focus on the current version of the program.
For users who wish to be informed of the latest build/updates for the program, they can register their copy
of PVElite at www.coade.com/updates.htm.
Formal training in PVElite and pressure vessel analysis is also available from COADE. COADE conducts
regular training classes in Houston and provides in-house and open attendance courses around the world.
These courses focus on the expertise available at COADE — modeling, analysis, and design. For more
information about these courses visit www.coade.com.
Updates
PVElite update sets are identified by their version number. The current release of PVElite is Version 2005.
COADE schedules and distributes these updates every January. The purchase price includes unlimited
access to PVElite and one year of updates, maintenance, and support. Updates, maintenance, and support
are available on an annual basis after the first year.
COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers
Phone: 281-890-4566 Email:techsupport@coade.com
Fax: 281-890-3301 WEB: www.coade.com

2-1
C H A P T E R 2
Chapter 2: The Installation/Configuration Process
In This Chapter
Overview ............................................................................2-2
System and Hardware Requirements .................................2-2
External Software Lock......................................................2-3
Starting the Installation Procedure .....................................2-3
Installing PVElite ...............................................................2-5
Network Installation / Usage..............................................2-7
ESL Installation on a Network ...........................................2-8
Notes on Network ESLs .....................................................2-9
Overview
PVElite is installed on the system hard disk using the program setup located on the CD. The installation
program has been designed to allow total installations, diagnostic checks of the installation and ease of
updating. This section will explain the process of running the PVElite setup application.
For users upgrading to a new version of PVElite, the installation program can be instructed to place the
new files in the same directory where the current version resides. The new version files will overwrite the
old version files where appropriate.
PVElite can be run from anywhere on the system hard disk. It is recommended that job files be kept in one
or more data or project directories separate from the installation directory.
The installation process consists of the following steps:
1 Copying of files from the program CD to the hard disk.

2 Extraction of PVElite from these compressed files.
3 Verification of the extracted files.
4 Installation of the External Software Lock (ESL) drivers.
5 Configuring of PVElite.
System and Hardware Requirements
The specific system resources necessary to run PVElite are listed below:
Intel Pentium processor (or equivalent)

Microsoft Windows (2000 or higher) Operating System
128 Mbytes RAM (recommended)
80 Mbytes of disk space
CD-ROM Drive
1.5 GigaHertz CPU or better
Note: PVElite is designed for 1024x768 or higher resolution. All of the dialogs may not fit on the screen
at lower resolutions.
The Installation/Configuration Process 2-3
External Software Lock
The External Software Lock (ESL) is the security protection method employed by COADE. The program
cannot execute unless an appropriate ESL (white or USB) is attached to the PC locally, or to another
computer in the network (red ESL).
The ESL contains the PVElite licensing data, and other client-specific information. This information
includes the client company name and user ID number. Additional data may be stored on the ESL
depending on the specific program and the specific client.
The ESL can be attached to the USB or parallel port of the computer in a matter of seconds. Attach the
printer cable to the other side of the ESL. The essential requirement for the successful operation of the
ESL is that the port must be a Centronics compatible DB-25 pin parallel port. This is the IBM PC
standard read/write printer port.
Starting the Installation Procedure
Insert the program CD into the CD-ROM drive. The installation program should start up automatically. If
so, proceed to the section entitled "Installing PVElite". If not, it may be started manually using the
following procedure.
Click the Windows Desktop Start button; select SETTINGS/ CONTROL PANEL (see below).
Opening Control Panel
From Control Panel click ADD/REMOVE PROGRAMS.

Control Panel
The ADD/REMOVE PROGRAMS dialog appears. Click the Install button to start the installation process.
Add/Remove Programs
The next screen prompts for the folder where PVElite is to be installed. This folder may be entered by
clicking the Browse button. The folder may be the location of an existing PVElite installation, or a new
location.
This starts the installation process by prompting you to place the CD in the CD-ROM drive and clicking
Next. Add/Remove Programs searches for the SETUP.EXE file located on the CD and prompts the user
for verification of the file to be installed. Clicking Finish runs the setup program.
Installing PVElite
The installation routine is easily navigable by responding to on-screen prompts and then clicking Next.
After an opening screen, you must enter the serial number provided with the CD. This serial number
should be kept in a safe place for future installations.
Entering the Product Serial Number
Note: The serial number is located on the sticker that is attached to the CD. Do not discard the CD-ROM
case!
The next screen prompts you for the folder in which PVElite is to be installed. Click Browse to enter this
folder. The folder may be the current location of an existing PVElite installation or a new location.
Destination Folder
The program then prompts for the folder in which to add the program icons.
Icon Folder Selection
Select the color of the appropriate ESL. This ensures that the correct drivers get loaded during the
installation.
Select ESL Color
Note: After loading the ESL drivers, if you are using Windows 95/98 or NT, the computer will have to be
rebooted in order for them to become operative. They are loaded immediately if using Windows 2000 or
later making the restart unnecessary.
Network Installation / Usage
COADE products can be run on network file servers as easily as on stand-alone workstations. There are
two different installation configurations, which must be considered.
Network drive installation – The software is installed on a network drive and a network ESL is
installed and accessed by multiple users.
Network drive installation (each user has a ESL) – The software is installed on a network drive and
both local ESLs and network ESLs are present.
COADE software supports three ESLs. The white ESLs and USB are intended for local usage. The red
ESL is intended for network usage. Do not attempt to put a local ESL on a network server - the system
will crash.
Software Installation on a Network Drive
Setup treats a network drive no differently than a local hard drive. Simply specify the target installation
drive and directory and the software will be installed as specified.
Some networks protect installation directories from subsequent modification by users. This involves
setting the access rights in the installation directory to usually "read", "share" and "scan". Since COADE
software utilizes data files specific to the installation (i.e., accounting, files, material files, etc.), which a
user may need to modify, these files cannot be located in the "protected" installation directory. These data
files are located in a sub-directory named SYSTEM, underneath the installation directory. Users should
be given all access rights to this SYSTEM directory. While the person installing the software can specify
the actual name of the program’s installation directory, the SYSTEM sub-directory name is fixed, and is
automatically created. Renaming this sub-directory will cause the software to fail and generate an error
report.
Note: The SYSTEM sub-directory is not the primary top level SYSTEM directory containing the
network operating system.
Once the software has been installed on the network drive, the installation program invokes the
configuration program, which generates a default configuration file. Once the installation directory is
write protected this file cannot be modified. Leaving this file as read only would insure the configuration
file can then only be used as a starting template to generate other configuration files located in the various
user data directories.
ESL Installation on a Network
COADE software supports two different ESL types, local and network. Both types of ESLs are intended to
be attached to the ports of the applicable computers. Local ESLs provide the maximum flexibility in
using the software, since these devices can be moved between computers (for example, between desktops
and laptops). If your computer uses a local ESL, the remainder of this section can be skipped.
Network ESLs must be attached to the parallel port of any machine on the network (this can be a
workstation or the file server). The file server is a better location for this ESL, since it will usually be up
and running. If the network ESL is attached to a workstation, the workstation must be running and/or
logged onto the network before anyone can use the software.
In order for the network to recognize the ESL, a utility program must be loaded on the machine
controlling the ESL. The actual utility used depends on whether the ESL is on the file server or a
workstation and the type of network. The drivers for network ESL usage can be found in the sub-
directory ASSIDRV beneath the PVElite program directory. The documentation files in this sub-directory
contain instructions for a variety of networks and operating systems.
Novell File Server ESL Installation
If the network ESL is to be located on a Novell file server, the driver HASPSERV.NLM is needed. This
driver should be copied onto the file server, into the top level SYSTEM directory. Then, the system start-
up file (AUTOEXEC.NCF) should be modified to include the command:
LOAD HASPSERV
This modification can be accomplished with SYSCON (or equivalent) assuming supervisor rights.
Novell Workstation ESL Installation
If the network ESL is to be located on a workstation, the driver HASPSERV.EXE is needed. This driver
should be copied onto the workstation. The actual location (directory) on the workstation is not important,
as long as the program can be located for start-up. Place the command:
HASPSERV
in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file of the workstation, after the commands which load the network drivers. The
workstation does not need to be logged in. Note however, the workstation must always be up and running
for users to access the software.
Windows Server Installation
For Windows Server installation, please refer to the documentation files NETHASP.TXT and
ESL_RED.TXT found in the ASSIDRV subdirectory for network specific instructions.
Notes on Network ESLs
There are advantages and disadvantages in utilizing a network ESL. The prime advantage is that many
users (up to the number of licenses) have access (from a variety of computers) to the software on a single
server.
The prime disadvantage is that users cannot transfer the ESL between machines in order to take PVElite
home or to another remote location.
Since both a network and several local ESLs may be initialized on the same system (there is no network-
specific version of the software), it is suggested that only 70 to 80 percent of the desired licenses be
assigned to a network ESL. The remaining 20 to 30 percent of the licenses should be assigned to local
ESLs. This enables the local ESLs to be moved between computers, to run the software at remote
locations. Alternatively, if all of the licenses are on the ESL, a user must then be logged into the network
to access the software. A few local ESLs provide much greater operating flexibility.
Note: The number of licenses assigned to a network ESL is not a parameter that can be modified remotely
by COADE software.
Local users running the software from a network drive should run the file "Netuser.bat" one time to update
all locations.
3-1
C H A P T E R 3
Chapter 3: Tutorial/Master Menu
In This Chapter
Program Structure and Control...........................................3-2
A Road Map for PVELITE ................................................3-3
The Input Processor............................................................3-3
Other Input Processors .......................................................3-6
Error Checking ...................................................................3-9
Analysis..............................................................................3-10
Tools Menu ........................................................................3-11
Output Review and Report Generation ..............................3-13
Design and Analysis of Vessel Details...............................3-15
Input Menu .........................................................................3-18
Main Menu .........................................................................3-21
File Menu ...........................................................................3-22
Analyze Menu ....................................................................3-24
Output Menu ......................................................................3-25
Tools Menu ........................................................................3-25
Diagnostics Menu...............................................................3-34
View Menu.........................................................................3-34
Inspecting the Model in 3D................................................3-37
ESL Menu ..........................................................................3-39
Help Menu..........................................................................3-40
PVElite Quick Start............................................................3-41
Adding Details....................................................................3-43
Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image..............3-44
Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints...3-46
Performing the Analysis.....................................................3-49
Reviewing the Results........................................................3-50
Analyzing Individual Vessel Components Details.............3-50
DXF File Generation Option..............................................3-53
Setting Up the Required Parameters ..................................3-54
DXF File Generated by PVElite During Runtime..............3-55
Program Structure and Control
A typical PVElite hard disk configuration is structured as follows:
PVELITE: Root Installation PVElite directory
Project #1: Data files for Project #1

Project #2 Data files for Project #2
\SYSTEM: Program database & control files
\EXAMPLES: Sample input files
Most files in the data subdirectories are identified by a user-defined filename with a given extension. The
remaining files hold data controlling the program's operation. These files and their description follow:
jobname.PVI PVElite input file

jobname.TAB Temporary results file
jobname.T80 Results file used by the output review processor
Tutorial/Master Menu 3-3
jobname.CCI Input file for component analysis

units.FIL User units file (relating user's units and program units)
*.BIN PVElite Material Database
UMAT1.BIN Binary file holding the user-defined materials
A Road Map for PVELITE
There are many PVElite functions that are not addressed here. This section focuses on the structure and
control of the fundamental units of the program - input, analysis and output. By understanding these basic
concepts, a firm foundation for understanding PVElite is assured.
Input, analysis, output; it is as simple as that. Input - collect information required to define the vessel, its
service requirements and its design guidelines. Analysis - translates the user's input into appropriate data
for the design and analysis algorithms, correctly apply the rules of appropriate code or standard and
generate results. Output - present those results with explanation in a way that the final report is
comprehensive and meaningful.
The Input Processor
Input is broken down into basic elements—heads, shells, cones, etc. A quick look at the default PVElite
input screen (below) shows the data defining one element. Except for the From Node and To Node, the
data is common to all vessel wall thickness calculations. The From and To Nodes are necessary to
assemble the individual elements into the complete vessel and are automatically assigned by PVElite. A
complete vessel is required if all dead and live loads are to be included in the design or analysis however,
PVElite will run wall thickness calculations on elements without constructing the entire vessel.
PVElite Completed Input Screen
PVElite is a Windows package and uses the advantages of the Graphical User Interface (GUI). Looking at
the input screen above, no direct path through the processor is evident; control can jump to many other
points in the program. This style of control is called an event driven, graphic environment.
This screen has a Main Menu across the top, which controls navigation through the processor. These
items — File, Input, Analyze, Output, Tools, etc. — may be accessed directly from this menu at any
point in the processor. In a row directly below the Main Menu is a series of toolbars and buttons specific
to the current screen. In the screen above, the buttons manipulate the elements (Insert, Delete, Update),
specify unique data (Material, Share), or change the view or input method (Zoom, Layout view). The three
toolbars control the data file, add elements and add details to the current element. These toolbars and
buttons may be relocated on the screen.
The body of the screen contains either two or three areas - a table of the Element Basic Data, a table of the
Element Additional Data (when required) and the graphic area which contains an image of the current
status of the entire vessel or the current element. A status bar displays across the bottom of the screen and
displays the element count, the position and orientation of the current element, quick internal pressure
calculations for the current element.
How are the menu selections made? How are the buttons pushed? How is the data entered? Most
operations are obvious when using a mouse; simply point to the item and click the left mouse button to
open drop down menus from the menu line, activate the button commands, pick a tool or move control to
one of the screen areas. All buttons and toolbars have tool tips, which are activated when the mouse rests
on the button.
When a mouse click occurs in the data area(s), the Tab key moves the highlight (and control) through its
input cells. In most element data areas, Enter registers the data and will move the focus to the next field.
The exception is at combo boxes where clicking the arrow displays the available choices. An example of a
combo box is found on the Input screen shown on the previous page where the element is chosen from a
list of available types. Throughout the program, [F1] displays help for the highlighted data item. Once
familiar with these screen controls, a combination of mouse and keystroke commands will provide the
most efficient navigation through the program.
Some of the data input in PVElite is controlled through a data grid. To enter the data click the mouse on
the data text, such as Inside Diameter, and type the input value. The cursor will not blink over the
numeric/alphanumeric values until typing has begun. After the data is entered, press the Enter or Tab to
proceed. Arrow keys can also be used to navigate between the input fields.
Note: The right mouse button is used to select vessel details on the vessel graphic. Combo boxes have
the down arrow button at the right end of the input cell.
Input Screen Layout
When the graphics area of the Input screen is active, a few more keys are available. No special highlight
will appear but the string PgUp/PgDn/Home/End will display at the bottom graphics area. This indicates
that these keys are now active. The image in the graphics area shows the current state of the input for the
vessel model with its elements and the details on these elements. One element is highlighted. This is the
current element and the element data (Element Basic Data and Element Additional Data) shown on the
screen defines this element. By pressing PgUp or PgDn, the highlight changes from one element to the
next through the vessel. Press the Home and End keys to move the highlight to the first and last elements
in the vessel. Clicking the left mouse button while selecting the element will also highlight it. Once an
element is highlighted detail information for that element may be accessed. With the mouse, click the right
mouse button for the existing detail image to display. To add details to the current element, click the
appropriate detail on the toolbar and enter the necessary data.
Detail Pop-up Screen
Once the control of this screen is understood, all the remaining input processors will present no difficulties
as they all have the same control structure with mouse and keyboard commands.
Other Input Processors
The other menu items listed under Input indicate the other types of data that may be necessary for an
analysis.
Input Menu
Other than the Vessel Data there are four other categories of vessel input, which must be addressed -
Component Analysis Data, Report Headings, the Vessel Design or Analysis guidelines, and live (Wind
and Seismic) load definitions. These input topics are part of the tabbed input data view. Please note that
these tabs can be organized and moved as all of the toolbars can. The Design/Analysis Constraints data is
important here as this is where the overall analysis for this vessel is defined and controlled.
Finished thickness is a required input for each vessel element but users may allow the program to increase
the element thickness so that each element passes the requirements for internal pressure, external pressure,
the combined loads of pressure, dead and live loads. Remember that the status bar lists internal pressure
information about the current element including the required thickness. A switch is also available to locate
stiffener rings on the vessel to satisfy the external pressure requirements.
The Component Analysis Data option allows users to enter data and analyze without building a vessel.
These are COADE's CodeCalc analysis modules, some of which are not incorporated directly into PVElite.
CodeCalc, COADE's popular vessel component analysis package is included in PVElite through the
Component Analysis menu option.
Clicking the tab associated with the item of interest launches the input data screens shown below. Notice
the tabs at the bottom of the Design/Analysis Constraints Screen graphic shown below.
Report Headings Screen
Design/Analysis Constraints Screen

Wind Data Screen
Seismic Data Screen
Error Checking
The input processor makes many data consistency checks during the input session. For example, the
processor will create an error message if the user tries to specify a nozzle 20 feet from the bottom of a 10
foot shell element. Not all pieces of data can be confirmed on input. For that reason, a general error
processor is executed prior to the analysis. This error processor can be run in a stand-alone mode as well.
The error checker may be accessed from the pull down menu under Analyze. In addition to the notes that
are presented on the screen during error checking, these error messages appear in the output report, are
accessible through the output review processor. As with all engineering and designing, the vessel analyst
must use common sense to insure the model is basically correct. This is a great advantage of the 3D
graphics, as they will reveal obvious errors.
Analysis
PVElite can be used to confirm a safe design for a proposed or existing vessel. The program also provides
direct design capabilities with which the wall thickness of individual elements is increased to meet the
code requirements for internal and external pressure and longitudinal stress from a variety of dead and live
loads. Whether or not the program changes wall thickness during the analysis is controlled through a
DESIGN/ANALYSIS CONSTRAINT specification under Design Modification. For more information see
DESIGN/ANALYSIS CONSTRAINTS. A simple analysis run (no design) occurs when the flags for "Select t
for..." are all unchecked. If any of these boxes are checked, the program will automatically increase the
wall thickness until the constraint is satisfied. The user's input in the resulting output report is
automatically updated to reflect any changes made during the analysis. In addition to wall thickness, a
fourth flag can be set - Select Stiffener Rings for External Pressure. In this case, rather than increasing
the wall thickness, stiffener rings are located along the vessel to satisfy the external pressure requirements.
As with the wall thickness changes, these stiffener rings are added to the model input for this analysis.
PVElite will analyze each element to determine the required wall thickness for internal and external
pressure based on the Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2, PD:5500 or EN-13445 rules. The program
then calculates the longitudinal stresses in the wall due to four categories of vessel loads: pressure,
deadweight, deadweight moments from vessel attachments or applied loads, and moments due to the live
loads - wind and earthquake. These four categories are set for three different load conditions: empty,
operating, and hydrotest. The sensible combination of these various categories and conditions produce the
default set of 17 load cases that are found in the DESIGN/ANALYSIS CONSTRAINTS processor. For each
load case, PVElite will calculate the maximum longitudinal stress around the circumference of the
elements and compare these values to the allowable stress for the material, both tensile and compressive.
If stresses in the vessel wall exceed the design limits, PVElite will proceed according to the design
modification settings in the input.
Once the program finishes a pass through the analysis, a check is made for any program design
modifications. If the program changed any data, PVElite automatically re-runs the complete analysis to
review the impact of the changes.
There are several additional analysis controls that should be reviewed here. These controls, however, are
more general in nature and are not defined for the individual job. Instead, these seven computational
control directives are set for all jobs executed in the Data sub-directory. These controls are viewed and
modified through the Tools menu item on the Main Menu. Here, click Configuration to display the
Setup Parameters dialog.
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
Setup Parameters and DXF Options Screens:

Output Review and Report Generation
Output is stored in a binary file having the same name as the input file but with the extension of ".T80".
Once the output file is created, it can be examined through the Review item under the Output option from
the Main Menu. Each analysis module creates its own report in the output file. The reports of interest are
selected with the mouse and can be sent to the screen, a printer or a file. Most of the reports take the form
of tables with the rows related to the elements and the columns holding the values such as thickness,
MAWP, and stress.
PVElite Output Review Screen Internal Pressure Report
These are some reports available from PVElite. Depending on the type, position and geometry the list of
reports will vary.
Step 0 Vessel Element Error Checking

Cover Cover Sheet
Title Title Page
Step 1 Vessel Input Echo
Step 2 XY Coordinate Calculations
Step 3 Internal Pressure Calculations
Step 4 External Pressure Calculations
Step 5 Weight of Elements & Details
Step 6 ANSI Flange MAWP
Step 7 Natural Frequency Calculations
Step 8 Forces & Moments Applied to Vessel
Step 9 Wind Load Calculation

Step 10 Earthquake Load Calculation
Step 11 Wind and Earthquake Shear, Bending
Step 12 Wind Deflection
Step 13 Longitudinal Stress Constants
Step 14 Longitudinal Allowable Stresses
Step 15 Longitudinal Stresses Due to Load
Components
Step 16 Stress Due to Combined Loads
Step 17 Basering Calculations
Step 18 Center of Gravity Calculation
Cone 1-N Conical Sections
Nozl 1-N Nozzle Calculations
Step 21 Nozzle Summary
Step 22 Vessel Design Summary
Design and Analysis of Vessel Details
At this point in the analysis the vessel details have been defined only so that their weights could be
included in vessel calculations. With the structural analysis of the vessel complete and the wall thickness
set, vessel details can be evaluated.
To access the Input Processor for these vessel details, use the pull down menu under Input and select
COMPONENT ANALYSIS DATA. This will bring up the processor from which the component is selected
and defined.
Component Selection Screen from the Component Pull-down Menu

WRC 107 Input Screen

WRC 107 Results
Input Menu
Input Menu
The Input menu controls the general input processes. The following options are available:
Input File Menu Options Description
Vessel Data, Report Headings, Data items located on the tabbed dialog pallette as
Design/Analysis Constraints, Load shown below. Click the desired tab to view of change
Cases, Wind Loads, and Seismic the input for that set of data items.
Loads
Component Analysis Data This option includes those (CodeCalc) processors, which
are not integrated into the main vessel analysis. These
processors are described in Chapters 9 thorough 28.
Report Headings This option allows the user to input and edit a three line
heading, which will be placed in the first three lines of
each report page. It will also print on the title page of the
report. A 60 line heading can also be entered.
Design/Analysis Constraints This option allows the user to input and edit the global
data, which includes the general vessel description,
design control data and the structural load analyses to be
performed. This is where ASME Section VIII Division
1, Division 2, PD:5500 or EN-13445 is specified as the
design code. If the user does not select this option, the
program will set the default data. Note that the vessel
design code can be changed from the Design Code pull
down on the Units/Code toolbar.
Display the List Dialog This displays the detail data in Excel grid style format.
Design/Analysis Constraints Dialog

Live Load Data—This option switches to the wind or seismic data edit mode where the wind loads
and seismic loads are defined through the specification of the appropriate load parameters.
Live Load Wind Data Dialog
Main Menu
PVElite starts with the Vessel Data Input screen. Across the top of this screen is a line of items, which is
called the Main Menu. The Main Menu controls the major functions of the program. This chapter
reviews the functions available in each of these menu items.
File Menu
File Menu
The File options control the general operations of PVElite files. Options that are displayed in the menu
with an ellipsis (…) cause a file manage window to appear when selected. The following options are
available from the Main Menu item - File:
New - There is a choice for selecting the design code. When one is selected this will start a new file.
File New...
File Open Dialog
Save—Causes the current file to be saved in its present condition.
Save As Dialog
Option Description
Save As Allows the user to either save a file that has not been named or to
save the current file under another name.
Print Sends the current vessel graphic image directly to a printer.
Print Preview Displays the page that will be sent to the printer (see above)
Print Setup Displays the standard Windows printer setup screen.

Option Description
Exit Exits PVElite. A message window will display prompting to save

any changes to the current job.
Export Menu Option Description
Graphics to PCX Stores the vessel image in a standard PCX format file. This file can
be printed at a later date or added to other documents. The name of
the PCX file defaults to the name of the current job with the
extension of PCX.
Screen to PCX Builds a PCX file for later manipulation and printing. In this case,
the entire contents of the screen are saved in the file.
The File Menu will also list the last several vessel input files. Any of these files may be opened with a
mouse click.
Analyze Menu
Analyze Menu
The Analyze menu has the following options:
Menu Option Description
Analyze This option saves the input data and begins error checking. If no errors
are detected, the program will continue the analysis process. A
description of the PVElite analysis is found in Chapter 7 of this user
guide. The output from the analysis processor, whether error messages
or results, may be examined in the Output Processor. Once an analysis
is completed, the program will automatically switch to the Output
Review processor.
Error Check Only This option will only process the error checking, and will not
implement the analysis process. The error report may be examined in
the Review option found in the Output item from this Main Menu.
Output Menu
Output Menu
The Output menu enables users to review the analysis results and print the graphics of the vessel using
the following options:
Field Name Description
Review Reviews the analysis results of the current job, if these

results are already available.
Review the DXF file Launches any program capable of viewing this file type on
the computer system.
Review the Access Database If a database has been created, it can be reviewed directly
using Microsoft Access.
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
The Tools menu controls utility processors. Options that are displayed in the menu with '...' cause a
window to appear when selected. The configuration option allows the user to define a variety of system
variables for the program:
Configuration Menu
The Configuration Option lets some specific program computation control parameters be set. These
controls let you set some options in some programs that control the results of some computations.
Following is a description of the options:
Print Water Volume in Gallons?
Normally the volumes computed by the program are in diameter units.
If you want to use US gallons instead of cubic diameter units check this directive. The program will use
cubic units if the default value if it is not checked.
Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size?
If you would like to have your thicknesses rounded to the nearest 1/16 of an inch (if you are in English
units) or the nearest 1mm if you are in MM units, then check this directive.
The program will increase the thickness of an element if you specify for it to do so in the Design/Analysis
Constraints, and the element thickness is inadequate.
If this directive is not checked then no thickness rounding will be performed.
Print Equations and Substitutions?
By default PVElite will provide you with formulas and substitutions for internal and external pressure
calculations. If you do not want these formulas and substitutions, do not check this box.
Increase Blind Flange Thickness for Reinforcement?
For Section VIII Division 1, paragraph UG-39(d)(2) provides a consideration for bypassing reinforcement
of a single opening of a flat end connection. This effectively increases the required thickness of the blind
flange cover. Please note that this can only be used if there is only 1 nozzle located in the blind flange.
Use OD as the Basis for the shell Radius in Zick?
By default PVElite uses the ID basis on which to perform Zick analysis calculations. In general, this is
more conservative than using the OD. However if you wish to use the OD as the basis, then check this
box. Checking this box will change the "r" value used in the stress calculation equations.
Do not use the bolt correction factor.
For the design of heat exchanger flanges and tubesheets, TEMA (like Taylor-Forge) provide a correction
factor when the actual bolt spacing exceeds the allowable bolt spacing. The correction factor is then
multiplied by the moment to design a thicker flange. The use of this term is very standard in industry and
is used in other pressure vessel design Codes such as PD:5500 however, ASME Section VIII does not
specifically address this subject. Thus, for a pure flange design per Appendix 2, there is no bolt-spacing
correction factor. If you do not wish to use the factor, then check this box.
The default is to use the bolt space correction factor.
Use ASME Code Case 2260/2261.
Use of this code case calculates required thickness of elliptical and torispherical heads. The required
thickness is less than that of the equations in UG-32 or Appendix 1 for these heads.
Use EigenSolver
The natural frequency of a structure can be calculated using more than 1 method. The traditional method
is the analysis technique of Freese or Rayleigh-Ritz. For the skirt-supported freestanding structure, this
method provides acceptable results. When the support configuration is not the skirt/base type such as legs,
lugs, or intermediate skirt, this analysis may not provide accurate results.
To solve this problem generically, PVElite has a natural frequency solver that uses numerical methods to
solve the general equations motion. Namely, the program must solve the following: [ [K] - 2[M]] {a}={0}.
Which for the general case is a set of n homogeneous (right hand side equal to zero, in this case abs[ [K] -
2
[M]] {a}=0. This requires an iterative solution.
After building a stiffness [K] and mass [M] matrix of the model with appropriate boundary conditions
(anchors at skirts, bottom of legs, at support lugs etc.) the program can extract a number of modes that is
meaningful in the solution of the dynamics problem, particularly the modal response spectrum analysis.
Using this generic frequency Eigensolution method, PVElite can accurately extract modes of vibration for
models that do not fit neatly into the cantilever beam model required for the Freese integration codes. The
natural frequency of the vessel is used in several of the wind and seismic method. For PVElite files earlier
than 4.3, the default is to use the Freese method. The default version for 4.3 and later is to use the
EigenSolver. Enable or disable this box as necessary.
Use Pre-99 Addenda Division 1 only.
As of January 2000, the 1999 addenda of the ASME Code is mandatory. This mandatory revision includes
changes to the material properties of many materials used for Division 1 vessel construction found in
Section 2 Part D. Namely; the allowable stresses were increased in certain ranges. PVElite contains 2
databases of material properties. The default behavior is to use the current higher allowable stress
database. If you are re-rating an older vessel to the pre 99 addenda and would like to use the older
material allowables, then you should check this box.
Since the program uses this directive to connect to the database, it should be checked before any vessel
modeling occurs. This directive will not affect other design codes.
No MDMT / No MAWP Calculations
To disable the MAWP or MDMT check the corresponding check box as required.
Use Bolt Load instead of Bolt Area times Bolt Allowable Stress
This option may be used in the design of annular baserings. Choosing this option will instruct PVElite to
use the computed value of the bolt load instead of the bolt area times its allowable stress. Checking this
box will lead to a less conservative basering/bolting/chair cap thickness calculation.
Syntax Highlighting in Output Reports
By default PVElite will color the data reports to highlight failures and illustrate problem areas more
clearly. If this action is not desired, un-check this box.
No extended ASCII Characters in Output
Some equations that PVElite prints use extended ASCII characters such as the single character ½ and
others. For some non-English versions of Windows these characters may not be displayed correctly. If
that is the case, then un-check this box. The extended characters will be replaced multiple characters that
represent the same value.
No Corrosion on Inside Welds
By default PVElite will always corrode the inner fillet weld when computing the area available in the
inside weld. If the inside weld will not corrode or you do not wish to remove the corrosion allowance
when computing the area, and then check this box. The default method is the most conservative because
the area under the weld is corroded in accordance with figure UG-37 of the ASME Code.
This directive has no effect when using the PD:5500 or EN Codes.
Use AD-540.2 sketch b and not sketch d for normal?
This setup parameter is used for computation of the vertical thickness limit. The formulas for computing
these limits are found in paragraph AD-540.2 of the ASME Code Section VIII Division 2. Sketch (b) of
Fig. Ad-540.1 shows an integral connection with a smooth radius. Figure (d) shows a similar geometry
with an alternative pad plate and fillet. By default PVElite uses sketch (d) to compute the vertical thickness
limit. However, if you would like to use sketch (b) then check this directive.
Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness?
In many cases pressure vessels are designed and built long before the piping system is attached to them.
This means that the nozzle loadings are unknown. If this field is checked, then your minimum nozzle
thickness (trn) will be the maximum of:
trn = max (.134, trn for internal pressure ) <=Nps 18

trn = max (OD/150, trn for internal pressure) > Nps 18
By using such a requirement in addition to UG-45, the piping designers will have some additional metal to
work with to satisfy thermal bending stresses in systems these vessels are designed for.
Note carefully, that these formulae are not in the ASME Code. They are used in industry.
You can also specify the minimum wall thickness of the nozzle (Trn) in the Nozzle input. If you do so,
that will override this calculation.
Compute and Print Areas for Small Nozzles?
The Code paragraph UG-36 discusses the requirement of performing area replacement calculations when
small nozzles are involved. The Code states:
Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforcement other than
that inherent in the construction under the following conditions:
3.5" finished opening in a shell or head .375 inches thick or less

2.375" finished opening in a shell or head greater than .375 inches
If your geometry meets this criteria and this parameter is not checked, then the nozzle reinforcement areas
and MAWPs will not be computed.
Compute Chord Length in Hillside Direction
By default PVElite will use the actual length of removed material for hillside nozzle calculations. If you
wish to use the chord length to compute the included angle, check this box. Generally, the difference is
very minor.
Compute Areas per PD 5500:2003 3.5.4.9
If you wish to perform the pressure times area calculations per 3.5.4.9 then check this box. Please note
that the standard calculations per the design section 3 will always be computed.
Allowable Tower Deflection
This setup directive applies to vertical tower geometries. By default PVElite uses a criteria of 6 inches per
100 feet for the allowable tower deflection. If your design specification requires a different value of
allowable deflection then enter it here.
Wind Shape Factor
Based on the wind design specification, PVElite will compute the wind shape factor. If your design
requirement calls for a specific value for the shape factor that does not correspond to the calculated value,
then enter that number here. For cylindrical structures it is typically 0.7.
Create / Review Units
Create/Review Units Dialog
Edit / Add Materials
Enables users to create and edit a user-defined material in the PVElite material database. Clicking this
menu option displays the dialog below:
Edit/Add Materials Dialog
To use the processor, click the button. Next enter the material properties under the General and the
Stresses areas. Click the button to add another material if desired. When all of the materials have
been entered, click the button to add these materials to the end of the materials supplied in the
PVElite material database. The material list from the main database can also be imported into this
processor. A material from this list can be imported into the user material database. Use the button
on the toolbar to accomplish this task.
In addition to adding materials to the ASME Databases, it is also possible to add materials to the PD 5500
/ EN 13445 database. When the option to edit this database is selected, the following screen appears:
To use this processor, click the button. Next enter the Material Name, Yield Strength and other
fields. Next fill in the table of stress versus temperature. This processor creates a user material database
that is stored in the PVElite\System subdirectory. Once the database has been saved after the initial use,
those materials will be available for editing.
Calculator
Launches the Windows calculator and optionally pastes the results in the input at the cursor location.
Windows Calculator - Scientific View

Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
CRC Check This option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied
PVElite files.
Build Version Check This option checks the revision level of the PVElite executable files.
View Menu
View Menu
The View menu allows you to specify the toolbars to be displayed. The following options are available:
Standard Bar—PVElite allows the user to open, save, and print. Additionally, users can access PVElite
version and contact information.
Standard Bar
Element Bar—PVElite allows the user to create a vessel with the default data by simply clicking an icon
on the Element Toolbar. The following options are available:
Element Bar
Detail Bar—PVElite allows the user to add certain details i.e., stiffeners, nozzles, forces, moments, lining,
half-pipe jackets and tubesheets etc. to the current element when applicable.
Detail Bar
Utility Bar—The Utility Bar enables users to insert, delete, update, share and flip elements.
Utility Bar
Auxiliary Bar—The Auxiliary Bar allows manipulation of the model; create drawings and databases and
others.
Auxiliary Bar
Pipe Properties This option will access the database of pipe dimensions. By clicking OK,
the current diameter and thickness will be replaced with the current
selection.
List Dialog Obtain a list of the vessel's details. Items can be added or removed from the
list.
List Dialog
The List dialog allows the editing of some types of vessel details. One feature of the list is that the
location of the detail can be specified from the datum position. To use the list dialog, select the type of
detail to edit by pressing its tab. Then simply enter the data as necessary for each cell. If the list is empty,
then press the plus button (+) to add a row.
The entry of the "From Node" is optional. The program will assign that value automatically. The
description is a required mandatory input. If it is not entered, the program will treat that row as if it did not
exist and that data will be lost. All of the other data must be entered as required.
Rows of data can be duplicated from one row to the next. Click on the listing number of the item to copy.
That row should turn black (selected). Next copy the data to the clipboard by pressing [Ctrl-C]. Next
paste it to a blank line by using [Ctrl-V]. Next change any data that might be different for that detail.
Status Bar The status bar displays a variety of critical information about the current vessel
component such as MAWP and required thickness.
Status Bar
Split Allows the screen to be split for simultaneous viewing of the 2D and 3D
graphics as well as the information for the current element.
Analyze Bar Allows the user to analyze the current model, review previous results, error-
check the model, or review the previously created DXF file.
Analyze Bar
Inspecting the Model in 3D
Clicking the blue sphere icon on the PVElite Auxiliary toolbar activates the 3D view. Clicking this icon
opens and closes the 3D window. A vessel model should be open and ready for viewing after the button is
pressed. The 3D model is resident next to the 2D model.
The 3D viewer is an integrated application that can render any PVElite input file showing the actual vessel
geometry in 3 dimensions. In addition to showing the outer surfaces, the model can also be viewed in wire
frame and hidden line mode. Different shading modes such as flat shaded, Gourard and Phong are all
supported. Other operations such as panning, zooming and model rotation are also supported. You can
also double click on various details to summon that detail's dialog box.
Pressing the right mouse button anywhere on the 3D view screen will bring up a floating menu through
which a variety of commands can be executed. These same commands are also active from the 3D menu
option when the 3D view window has the focus. The toolbar for performing some basic operations should
appear in a vertical position on the right side of the applications frame.
Listed below is an explanation of the buttons (icons) on the toolbar. By default, this toolbar comes up
vertically on the right side of the 3D graphics window.
3D View Icons
Option Description
Predefined Views Clicking one of these buttons changes the current view to front, back,
top, bottom, left, or right view.
Zoom Extents Resizes the model so that it fits in the current window.
Zoom Window When this operator is selected, use the mouse to draw a window
around the portion of the model that you want to zoom in on. This is a
rubber band zoom. Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and
out.
Orbit This operator allows the model to be rotated using the mouse. Click
the right mouse button and move the mouse to rotate the model.
Pan The pan operator allows the model to be translated in the direction the
mouse is being dragged. Pressing the mouse wheel and holding it
down while moving the mouse will also pan the model.
Zoom Camera This operator zooms in or out. Click this button then press the left
mouse button and move the mouse diagonally across the screen to
zoom in or out. Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
Select by Click Allows the selection of a detail for further manipulation. This is the
cursor icon.
Insert Cutting Plane Click on this button and then click anywhere in the window. A cutting
plane will then appear. The plane can then be rotated after it has been
initiated. The rotating plane will then expose the various layers of the
vessel. The visibility of the cutting plane can then be turned off once
the view is set. To restore the model, right click in the 3D window and
choose the option to delete the cutting plane grid.
Options Many operations are supported using the Options menu; colors can
also be set here. After being set, the program will recall them in
subsequent sessions. This option is also available by right clicking on
the model window and selecting properties. The Options dialog is
shown below:
3D Options
While in 3D view a detail's dialog can be requested by double clicking on it. It may be necessary to click
on the cursor icon beforehand.
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL Menu provides access to utilities, which interact with the External Software Lock. The options
are as follows:
ESL Menu Option Description
Show Data Displays the data stored on the ESL.
Phone Update Allows the user to obtain phone update authorization information or
other ESL changes, to be made by phone, fax or email.
Generate Fax Codes Provides the user with access codes for remote ESL updating.
These access codes should be sent to COADE for generation of
authorization codes.
Enter Fax Allows users to choose this option to enter the remote authorization
Authorization Codes codes you received from COADE. Each set of four codes will make
one change to the data stored on your ESL.
Check Hasp Driver Installs the software needed check for the standalone ESL
Status
Install Hasp Device Installs the HASP device driver

Driver
Help Menu
Help Menu
The Help menu displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support for PVElite. The
options available are as follows:
Tip of the Day Provides tips for running PVElite.

PVElite Help Topics Starts the help facility.
On-Line Documentation View this manual online.
PVElite Quick Start A quick start guide for new users.
Foundation 3D Help Review the foundation 3D interface specification.

Check for Updates This option will check COADE's web site for a later build of the
current version. You must have live Internet connection for
this to work.
On-Line Registration Register this product electronically with COADE.
About PVElite Provides information on the best ways to contact COADE
personnel for technical support, and provides a link to COADE's
Web Site.
PVElite Quick Start
Entering PVElite
Before starting PVElite, most users will collect the necessary data for the vessel design or analysis. PVElite
breaks the vessel into an assemblage of individual elements—heads, shells, cones, body flanges, and/or a
skirt—and the components on these elements. Vessels are defined one element to the next - from bottom
to top for vertical vessels and from left to right for horizontal vessels. Collecting data to define these
elements before starting the program is not required but it will make the most efficient use of the
designer's time. Typical input items include actual or proposed values for vessel material, inside diameter,
operating temperatures and pressures, wind and seismic site data, nozzle and ring location to name a few.
If necessary, the input processor can be terminated at any time and restarted later if any missing data need
be collected. With the program's graphic display of the vessel input, it is easy to recall the current state of
an unfinished model or identify where data is missing or incomplete.
Start PVElite by clicking on the icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Programs.
PVElite will start with a Vessel Input Screen for the job currently called "Untitled."
Defining the Basic Vessel
PVElite displays the Element Basic Data, empty graphic areas, three tool bars (File Handling, Elements,
and Details) and a button bar. Items, which cannot be used, are grayed out. Vertical vessels are built
bottom to top and horizontal vessels are built left to right. It is not necessary to build an entire vessel if
only thickness for pressure is desired. Before the first element can be placed on the screen, the Element
Basic Data must be set. Start with the Inside Diameter, as using the element tool bar will set both the node
numbers and the Element Type. Once the Basic Data is entered, elements are quickly assembled one after
another by simply clicking on the Element tool bar and making any changes to the Basic Data. The
complete vessel is created from the following elements (in their tool bar order):
Shell
Elliptical head
Torispherical head
Spherical head
Cone
Welded Flat head
Body flange
Skirt
If the vessel begins with a skirt element it will be a vertical vessel. Both vertical vessels on legs and
horizontal vessels would start with a head element. If that first head element is improperly oriented for the
vessel in mind (horizontal or vertical), simple click the FLIP button to correct the orientation. Once the
second element is added, the vessel can no longer be flipped between horizontal and vertical. Later, if
heads, body flanges or cone elements show incorrect orientation, use the FLIP button to fix them. From
Nodes and To Nodes are automatically assigned by the program; they start with node 10 and are
incremented by 10's throughout the model. The element data set at the beginning of the session carries
forward from one element to the next. Any data changes on the last element will carry forward onto any
new elements to be added. The element data displayed belongs to the highlighted element in the vessel
image. Use the mouse to change the highlighted and displayed element by clicking on the element of
interest. The Page Up and Page Down keys can also be used to scroll through the vessel elements.
Data may be updated one element at a time but there are more efficient ways to change an item through
several elements. Say, for example, the circumferential weld joint efficiency for the skirt (from node 10 to
20) is set at 0.7. If this value was not changed to 1.0 on the bottom head as it was created, this (incorrect)
value is carried from one element to the next in the Build Mode to the top of the vessel element (say, From
Node 50 To Node 60). In this situation, it is easiest to change the data on the bottom head element (20 to
30) and then use the SHARE button to "share" this item through the elements in the list with "From
Node" 30 through "From Node" 50. Certain data is automatically "shared". Inside diameter, for example is
automatically changed for all elements (stopping at cones) attached to the element where the change
occurs. Some changes to the element data do not immediately appear on the vessel image. To refresh the
image press the [F5] function key.
There is a complete step-by-step quick start guide available from the help menu.
Adding Details
With the elements defined, enough information exists to run through the pressure calculations but the total
vessel weight is not yet set. Much of this information is specified as element details. Nozzles, insulation,
operating fluid, platforms and the like are all entered as details on the various elements. PVElite will
calculate the weight of each of these items and account for them in the various analyses. Details such as
saddles, lugs and legs are also used to locate support points on the vessel—important data for load
calculations.
Details can only be specified on the current element. To enter the first detail, highlight (make current) the
element, which will hold the detail and click on the appropriate DETAIL button. Allowing the cursor to
rest on the tool bar button will produce a fly out definition of the button. Select the detail and enter the
data in the screen that follows. Use the Help button on the detail screen or press [F1] to learn more about
the requested data. Define all details necessary to develop the proper total vessel load.
Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image
At any point during the input process a standard PCX file with the vessel image is available through the
Output item on the Menu Bar. This file can then be incorporated into reports or printed directly (on all
printers) through most Microsoft Windows™ packages with graphics capabilities (such as Microsoft's
Word for Windows™ or Paintbrush™). Examples of the graphic dump and screen dump appear below
following the illustration of the pull-down menu under File.
The vessel graphic may also be sent directly to the printer by clicking Print on the File menu.
Graphics to PCX
Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design

Constraints
Although default values allow the analysis to proceed, other data should be set before the analysis
continues. These data are the required live loads & design constraints and the optional vessel identification
and report headings. These data are accessed and entered through the Input item on the Menu Bar. The
pull down menu under Input shows the Report Headings, Design/Analysis Constraints, and Live Load
Data along with the vessel and component analysis data. The heading input allows the specification of
three lines of data, which will appear, at the top of each page in the printed output. The heading data also
includes title page entry, which will appear at the beginning of the input echo report.
Clicking the Design Constraints tab on the floating input data grid will instantiate the design data.
Design Data includes vessel identification along with items, which will affect the design and analysis of
the vessel; items such as type of hydrostatic testing and degree of radiographic examination appear here. It
is important to note that this is where the design code is set - Division 1, Division 2, PD:5500 or EN
13445.
The Design Modification area holds four flags, which control the redesign of the vessel, should the user-
entered wall thickness be insufficient for the analyzed loads. If a box is checked, the program will increase
the element's wall thickness so that it meets or exceeds the requirements for that load category. There are
four boxes for three load types - one box for internal pressure, two boxes for external pressure (either
increase the wall thickness or locate stiffener rings along the vessel to satisfy the buckling requirements),
and one box for the variety of structural loads, which develop longitudinal stresses in the vessel wall. The
program provides the option of rounding up a required thickness to a nominal value (such as the next 1/16
inch or 1 mm). (Use the Configuration item from the Utility menu on the Menu Bar.
The Load Case tab displays seventeen default structural load cases for the analysis. These twelve cases
cover the extent of structural loads on the vessel wall. Each case contains a pressure component (axial)1, a
weight component (both axial and bending), and a live load component (bending). The axial stresses are
combined with the bending stresses to produce a total stress in the vessel wall. Both tensile and
compressive stresses are compared to their allowable limits. Refer to the table and screen image below for
a definition of terms used in the Load Case input.
Note: These pressure calculations should not be confused with those used for the wall thickness
requirements defined in ASME Section VIII and PD:5500. Here, internal and hydrostatic pressures are
used to calculate a longitudinal, tensile stress in the vessel wall and the external pressure a similar
compressive stress in the wall.
The fourth area, Nozzle Design Modification, is used to set the overall pressure requirements for the
nozzles on this vessel and also to include the maximum allowable pressure - new and cold (MAP nc) case
in the nozzle checks. There is also a button on this screen - Install Option. Clicking on this button will
produce a screen, which allows the user to specify where certain vessel details will be added - either at the
fabrication shop or in the field. This data is used to properly set the detail weights for the empty and
operating conditions.
Pressure Weight Live Load
NP - No Pressure EW - Empty Weight WI - Wind

IP - Internal Pressure OW - Operating Weight EQ - Earthquake
EP - External Pressure HW - Hydrostatic Weight HI - Wind at Hydrostatic Weight conditions
HP - Hydrostatic CW - Empty Weight No HE - Earthquake at Hydrostatic Weight
Pressure CA conditions
VF - Vortex Shedding Filled
VO - Vortex Shedding Operating
VE - Vortex Shedding Empty
WE - Wind Bending Empty New and Cold
WF - Wind Bend Filled New and Cold
CW - Axial Weight Stress New and Cold
FS - Axial Stress, seismic
PW - Axial Stress Wind
Design Analysis Constraints Screen
Wind and earthquake information can be entered by clicking the Wind Data or Seismic Data tabs. PVElite
generates live loads based on the criteria established by one of many standards, including - the American
Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the (Canadian) National Building
Code (NBC), and the Indian National Standard. Wind loads may also be specified directly by the user as a
wind pressure profile. PVElite references these codes for live loads only. ASME Section VIII or PD 5500
rules apply for all other calculations. The screen below shows the data required for the default codes.
PVElite will use these criteria to set the magnitude of the live load and bending moment on each element of
the vessel.
Live Load Data Screen
Once the element, detail, and global data is entered and checked, the model is ready for error processing
and analysis.
Performing the Analysis
The pull down menu under Analyze on the Menu Bar shows two options - Error Check Only and
Analyze. Use Error Check Only immediately after any questionable data is entered.
Analyze will automatically perform an Error Check before the analysis starts. Comments from an Error
Check may be examined through the Review function under the Output item on the Menu Bar (discussed
below).
Note: Errors must be corrected before the analysis can proceed.
As the analysis proceeds, PVElite displays the step or component is being analyzed. If any Design
Modifications were set (e.g. Select Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure), PVElite will resets the thickness
to the necessary value and perfect these increased thicknesses in all output reports and in all other
calculations. For example, if the user-entered wall thickness of 1/2 inch is insufficient for the load and the
design flag is turned on, the program will calculate the required thickness (say, 5/8 inch) and replace the
user-entered input value (1/2) in the output report with the calculated required thickness (here, 5/8). The
program does not change the original model data. PVElite will check the element wall thicknesses for the
various pressure cases (internal, external, and hydrostatic) and then assemble the axial and bending loads
to construct each load case defined in the Global Design data. PVElite will calculate the longitudinal stress
on both sides of the vessel (e.g. both "windward" and "leeward" for loads with wind) and compare the
calculated stresses with the allowable stresses, both tensile and compressive. PVElite will display the
("windward" or "leeward" side) stress, which is closest by ratio to the allowable limit, again, either tension
or compression.
Once the analysis is complete, the Review processor displays on the screen.
Reviewing the Results
The PVElite output is stored in a binary data file, which requires interpretation by a processor. In PVElite
this processor is called Output. Output is invoked at the end of the analysis and may also be accessed
directly from the Output item on the Menu Bar. Review lists every report contained in the output from
input echo through stress reports. One or more reports are selected by highlighting their titles through
mouse clicks. Reports can be reviewed on the screen or sent to a printer or file by using the appropriate
tool bar button.
Analyzing Individual Vessel Components Details
PVElite provides for the analysis of a variety of vessel components that are not included in the overall
vessel analysis: Appendix Y Flange, Floating Heads, Lifting Lug, Pipe & Pad, WRC 107 and 297, Thin
Joints, Thick Joints, ASME Tubesheets, TEMA Tubesheets, Halfpipe Jackets, Large Openings, and
Rectangular Vessels. To enter the component data select Component Analysis Data from the Input Menu.
On the Component screen select a component type from the Component Menu and build the input for
the analysis. Each component, once entered, may be analyzed and reviewed by selecting Analyze from the
Tools Menu.
Component Analysis Menu

Component Analysis Shell/Head Input Screen

Shell/Head Results
DXF File Generation Option
As of Version 4.00 PVElite provides an option to write out Data Interchange Files (3 all together). This
type of file is termed a DXF file. The DXF file is a text file that contains commands for generating a 2D
CAD drawing of the vessel. This drawing is on a one to one scale and the border and text are scaled by the
diameter conversion constant and the scale factor generated by the program or typed in be the user. Many
popular drawing programs such as AutoCAD ® and MicroStation ® read and process these files. The
DXF files produced by PVElite are release 12 compatible. Any version of AutoCAD including release 12
and after should be able to read the DXF file.
Three files will be produced: the vessel drawing, the nozzle schedule, and the Bill of Material. The files
will be written in the directory where the input file for the vessel file is located. These files are written at
the end of the program's calculation execution. Please note that nearly every individual has his/her own
way of drafting. A conscious effort was made not to be too specific. This approach allows the drafter to
take the vessel drawing file and edit it as necessary.
Setting Up the Required Parameters
In order for PVElite to generate these files, you must instruct it to do so. This is accomplished by clicking
the red CAD Icon on the Auxiliary toolbar, its look like a red letter A. Optionally, you can use the menu
option FILE->EXPORT->GENERATE DXF FILE to set this option. If the scale factor is not set the DXF
Options dialog will appear prompting for the scale factor and any other necessary options. These options
should be entered after the vessel has been completely modeled. This is due to the fact that the scaling
factor is based on the overall height/length of the vessel. It is best to check the scaling factor at the
conclusion of the data input and before the model is analyzed. The DXF Options are available under the
TOOLS->CONFIGURATION menu. This is a tabbed dialog. Click the second tab and set the options as
necessary. The following options are in the dialog.
Create a Default Border—Checking this box instructs the program to put a border around the drawing.
The border style differs based on the border size. You can create your own border styles. The borders are
located in the PVElite\System subdirectory. They are named ANSI_A.txt and so fourth. These text files are
essentially the core of ACAD Release 12 DXF files. See the user border creation instructions below.
Create a Nozzle Check this to create a Nozzle Schedule. The nozzle schedule
Schedule contains information pertaining to the size and thickness of nozzles,
their mark number and the necessity of reinforcing.
Create a Bill of Material Causes the program to generate a Bill of Material for the major
components of the vessel including shells, heads, conical sections
etc.
OD Lines Shown Only Normally the DXF file will contain ID as well as OD lines for the
major shell sections. If you do not want to see the ID lines, then
check this box.
Show Dimensions If you would like tail dimensions for the major shell courses, then
check this box. The element diameters and thicknesses are shown in
the BOM.
Drawing Size Select A, B, C or D. Each size has a different style.
Scale Factor It is best to let the program select this value. We then recommend
rounding up to the nearest typical scale factor.
User Border Creation
In order to do the following, you must be able to use your Windows Explorer, AutoCAD and Notepad. If
you cannot, seek help from a seasoned support person.
Start AutoCAD and open your border. The border should be ANSI standard dimensions 8 ½ by 11 and so
fourth scaled for the non-printable area of the paper. After the border drawing is open, save it as a release
12 DXF file. After the file has been saved it will be necessary to edit it with a text editor such as Notepad.
Since the main drawing will have a DXF header, it will be necessary to delete the one in the border
drawing. The DXF header ends on about line 960 with the word Entities. Delete through this line. Next
delete the last 4 lines in the file. This is the end of file marker. Save the file with a txt extension. Next
rename the file in the PVElite\system directory that you will be replacing. We suggest putting a new
extension on it. Save/Copy your border in the PVElite\system directory and then rename it replacing our
default border. You should now have new ANSI_?.txt file in the PVElite\System subdirectory.
It may be wise to review our border drawing text files before you start. Also please note that the border
drawings must not contain any block attributes. These are not supported in our current implementation. A
typical drawing is shown below:
DXF File Generated by PVElite During Runtime
Invoking the Drawing
If you have a drawing tool on your computer that supports DXF files, PVElite can invoke it directly. On
the Analyze toolbar, there is a blue "A" button. If the button is active, the DXF file for this job was
created during the last run. Clicking the button will submit the file to Windows, which will invoke your
drawing tool. If the input is altered, the analysis must be run in order to generate a new DXF file.
4-1
C H A P T E R 4
Chapter 4: Element Data
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................4-2
Element Basic Data ............................................................4-3
Element Additional Data....................................................4-7
Torispherical Head .............................................................4-9
Spherical Head ...................................................................4-10
Welded Flat Head...............................................................4-12
Flange Analysis ..................................................................4-15
Skirt Support with Basering ...............................................4-16
Flange Input Data ...............................................................4-17
Basering Analysis...............................................................4-17
Tailing Lug Analysis..........................................................4-18
Tailing Lug Input Data.......................................................4-19
Introduction
PVElite has eight basic element types from which all vessels are constructed. PVElite terms for these
elements are as follows:
Cylindrical Cylindrical Shell

Elliptical Elliptical Head
Torispherical Torispherical Head
Spherical Spherical Head or Shell
Conical Conical or Shell Segment
Welded Welded Flat Head
Flange Body Flange
Skirt Skirt Support with Base Ring
PVElite does not require the complete construction of a vessel for the analysis. Individual elements or
groups of elements may be defined and at least partially analyzed. Only complete vessels, that is, vessels
with proper supports, can be analyzed for deadweight and live loads.
Except for the skirt element, all elements can be used to create either horizontal or vertical vessels. Models
for vertical vessels are built from bottom to top and models for horizontal vessels are built from left to
right. The vessel orientation is established with the first element. If starting with a skirt, it's a vertical
vessel. If starting with a head, the head may be "flipped" between a bottom head (vertical model) and a
left head (horizontal model) by clicking on the FLIP button. Once the second element is added to the
model, the orientation is fixed. Skirts are the only vessel supports that are modeled as elements. Other
supports such as legs and lugs for vertical vessels and saddles for horizontal vessels are modeled as
"details" on the elements. These vessel details are in the next chapter.
Element Data 4-3
Element Basic Data
All elements share a common set of parameters:
Element's From Node
Enter a number associated with the starting point and ending point of this element. For Heads, the From
and To Nodes mark the straight flange attachment to the head, not the overall extent of the head. (The
straight flange length cannot equal zero.)
Head From and To Nodes

The 'From' node number for this element will also be used to define details such as nozzles, insulation, and
packing which are associated with this element. The location of the 'To' node will be calculated by the
program by adding the length of this element to the location of the 'From' node. The From and To nodes
establish the overall organization of the vessel.
When creating a vessel model in the BUILD mode, node numbers are automatically assigned to each
element. The BUILD mode starts with node 10 and increments by 10 throughout the vessel. When
DELETEing elements, the program will "reconnect" the vessel elements by changing the From node of the
following element to the To node of the previous element. When INSERTing elements, PVElite will ask
for the new (added) To node number and again "reconnect" the elements so that the From and To nodes
match with the previous and next elements in the model.
The program defines a vertical vessel from the bottom to the top. If the vertical vessel were on a skirt, the
first element would be the skirt. If it is on legs or lugs, the first element would be a head and the legs or
lugs are defined as details on the appropriate shell element.
The program defines a horizontal vessel from the left end to the right end. The first element in a horizontal
vessel is usually a head, and the support saddles are defined as details on the appropriate shell element.
Element's To Node
This is the number associated with the starting point of this element, the 'From' node. Note that the
program will generate this value automatically.
Element's Diameter
Enter the appropriate diameter of the element. The diameter may be specified as either ID or OD. Press
the button "Swap Diameter Basis" to flip in between ID and OD.
For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, this should be the diameter of the straight flange.
For cones, this is the diameter at the From node end.
For flanges, this is the diameter of the body flange. For blind flanges this should be the OD always.
For skirts, this is the diameter at the top of the skirt.
Distance or Straight Flange Length
Enter the distance between the 'From' Node and 'To' Node.
Element Data 4-5
For a cylindrical shell, enter the length of the shell from seam to seam.
For an elliptical or torispherical head enter the length of the straight flange. The straight flange length
cannot equal zero. For a spherical head the distance can be zero.
For a conical head or shell segment, enter the length of the cone (including tori-conical sections, if
any) from seam to seam.
For a welded flat head, enter the thickness of the head.
For a body flange, enter the through thickness of the flange including the weld neck, if any.
For a skirt support, enter the distance from the bottom of the basering to the skirt/head/shell seam.
Finished Thickness
Enter the finished thickness of the element. This is typically the nominal thickness minus any mill
undertolerance, and taking into account any thinning due to forming. Note that the corrosion allowance is
automatically subtracted from this thickness by the program and should not be subtracted by the user.
For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, you may have to reduce the nominal thickness of the
plate used in order to take into account the thinning of the head due to forming.
For cylindrical shells made from pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible mill
undertolerance from nominal pipe wall thickness.
For welded flat heads, enter the through thickness of the flange portion, but do not include the hub and
weld neck.
For a skirt, this is typically the nominal thickness minus any mill undertolerance, and taking into
account any thinning due to forming. For cylindrical skirts made from pipe, you will have to subtract
the maximum possible mill undertolerance from the nominal pipe wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The analysis program will subtract this value from the entered thickness
and add this value to inside diameter.
Wind Load Diameter Multiplier
Enter the wind load diameter multiplier. The value entered here will be multiplied by the element outside
diameter in order to determine the overall element diameter to be used in wind load calculations. The
element outside diameter will include the insulation.
When a number greater than 1 is used, it should be carefully chosen to account for the tributary area of
external attachments such as nozzles, piping, or ladders. The typical multiplier used to determine wind
load diameter is 1.2. Thus if the actual element OD was 50 inches, the overall wind load diameter for this
element would be 50 * 1.2 = 60.
The range of this value is normally greater than 1 and less than 2. However in some cases it can be used to
turn the wind loads off of certain elements. You can turn the wind load off on the current element by
setting this value to 0. A vessel that is supported by an intermediate skirt whose lower elements are
protected from the wind would see no wind load on those elements.
Material Name
Enter the material specification as it appears in the material allowable tables. Alternatively, the material
can be selected from the Material Database by clicking the [Mat] button from the toolbar. Selecting one
of the material names from the list will display the significant material parameters for the analysis. If the
current element temperature is outside the valid temperature range for the material, the material may not
be specified or selected. (Likewise, a temperature may not be entered if it exceeds the limits for the
material.)
Pressing Enter while on this field will display the material properties of the current element or detail.
Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here are directly from the program's material
database; otherwise the data are from the data structure of the current element or detail. If a newly selected
material can not be found in the program's material database, the program will assume that it is a user-
defined material, in this case the user must define all material properties in this window.
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal and Circumferential Seams
Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for shell section with welded longitudinal seams. This will be the
efficiency of the longitudinal seam in a cylindrical shell or any seam in spherical shell. Elliptical and
torispherical heads are typically seamless but may require a stress reduction, which may be entered as a
joint efficiency. Please be sure to refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this
value.
The Joint Efficiency in this (and all other) ASME Code formula is a measure of the inspection quality on
the weld seam. In general, weld seams that receive full radiography have a joint efficiency of 1.0. Weld
seams that receive spot radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.85. Weld seams that receive no
radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.7. Seamless components have a joint efficiency of 1.0.
In addition to the basic rules described above, the Code requires that no two seams in the same vessel
differ in joint efficiency by more than one category of radiography. For example, if circumferential seams
receive no radiography (E=0.7) then longitudinal seams have a maximum E of 0.85, even if they receive
full radiography. The practical effect of this rule is circumferential seams, which are usually less highly
stressed may be spot radiographed (E=0.85) while longitudinal seams are fully radiographed. This results
in the same metal thickness at some savings in inspection costs.
Except for the skirt, these values should be set to 1.0 for PD:5500 and Division II. For EN-13445 they are
defined and should be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1.
Design Internal Pressure
Enter the design internal pressure for the component. This pressure need not include any pressure due to
liquid head, as the program through the liquid Detail definition calculates that value automatically.
Element Data 4-7
For skirts, this value is preset to zero and cannot be modified.
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure
Enter the metal design temperature for the internal pressure condition. This value will be used to collect
the material allowable stress in the operating condition.
PVElite will check the entered value against the valid temperature range for the current element material.
The program will not allow the entry of a temperature outside the material's range. This value will be used
to determine the material allowable stress.
Design External Pressure
Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This should be a positive value, i.e. 14.7 psia. If
you enter a zero in this field the program will not perform external pressure calculations. For skirts, this
value is preset to zero and cannot be modified. Examples of external pressure:
0 No external pressure calculation for the

element
14.7 psig External pressure of one atmosphere (full

vacuum)
Design Temperature for External Pressure
Enter the design temperature for external pressure. This value will be used as the metal design temperature
for external pressure calculations. When performing these calculations, the program will use the external
design temperature along with the external chart name (found on the material edit window) to access the
material tables and thus determine the allowable external pressure.
The maximum design temperature will be used for the allowable compressive stress on each element
unless this has been overridden on the Load Case parameters tab.
Swap Diameter Basis
Changing this selection will change the diameter basis from the inside diameter basis to the outside
diameter basis or vice versa. This function is only active for ASME VIII Division 1. Division 2 formulas
are based strictly on ID formulas.
Element Additional Data
Several elements require more information for complete definition. Once the element is set, the Element
Additional Data window appears below the Element Basic Data.
Cylindrical Shell
There is no additional data for cylinders.
Elliptical Head
Elliptical Head Additional Data
Head Factor
Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. A value of 2 is typical, that is, the major axis (vessel
diameter) is twice the minor axis (two times the head height). For example, a 60 inch diameter elliptical
head would extend 15 inches beyond the straight flange.
Inside Head Depth
Enter the inside depth of the elliptical in this field. This value is in the new condition and does not include
the corrosion allowance. PVElite will compute the outer depth H and uses this item in the calculation of the
parameters needed to compute the required thickness of the ellipse. This depth value is only required for
PD:5500.
Sump Head?
Check the box to indicate that this element is a sump head. When the pull down is active the program will
list all available nozzles. All of the nozzles on the vessel must be defined before the sump head. The best
strategy is to completely define all of the elements and details and then create the sump element last.
Element Data 4-9
Torispherical Head
Torispherical Head Additional Data
Crown Radius
Enter the crown radius of the torispherical head. For a standard ASME Flanged and Dished head, this is
equal to the outside diameter of the shell. See the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4,
figure 1-4(b). The crown radius is 'L' in this figure. For PD:5500, this is equal to the outside diameter of
crown section of torispherical end measured to tangent between crown and knuckle, as shown in Figure
3.5.2.1.
Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius for the toroidal portion of the torispherical head. For a standard ASME Flanged
and Dished head, this is equal to 6 percent of the crown radius. Allowable values range from 6 percent of
the crown radius to 100 percent of the crown radius (hemispherical head). See the ASME Code, Section
VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 1-4(b). The knuckle radius is r' in this figure.
Sump Head?
Check the box to indicate that this element is a sump head. When the pull down is active the program will
list all available nozzles. All of the nozzles on the vessel must be defined before the sump head. The best
strategy is to completely define all of the elements and details and then create the sump element last.
Spherical Head
There is no additional data for spherical heads.
Conical Head or Shell Segment
Conical Additional Data
To Node Diameter
The diameter entered in the Element Basic Data for a cone is the inside diameter of the cone at the 'From'
end of the cone. Enter the inside diameter of the cone at the 'To' end here. For a conical head, either the
'From' node or 'To' node will have a diameter equal to zero or two times the small end knuckle radius.
Note that this should not be the diameter at the point where a knuckle or flare intersects the conical
section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare intersects the cylindrical section.
Cone Length
Enter the design length of the cone along the axis of the vessel. The program will calculate the effective
length of the cone for internal and external pressure calculations.
Element Data 4-11
Note that for cones without a knuckle or flared section, you can enter either the half apex angle, or the
design length of the cone. If you enter both, the program will check the given angle against the calculated
angle. For cases where there is a knuckle or a flare, you must enter both the length and the angle.
Half Apex Angle
Enter the half apex angle of the cone. Refer to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, paragraph UG-
33, figure UG-33.1 for a sketch of the half apex angle for some typical geometries.
For internal pressure calculations the half apex angle should not be greater than 30 degrees, though the
program will give results for up to 60 degrees. For external pressure calculations it must not be greater
than 60 degrees.
Note that for cones without a knuckle or flared section, you can enter either the half apex angle, or the
design length of the cone. If you enter both, the program will check the given angle against the calculated
angle.
Toriconical
Check this field if this cone has either a flare (at the small end) or a knuckle (at the large end). See ASME
Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-33, Figure UG-33.1 for an illustration of a toriconical
section. By checking the field, the Cone Knuckle Data Edit window will appear.
Toricone Dialog
Additional Data for toriconical sections (Flare and Knuckle)
The Toricone dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the knuckles, which are parts of a cone
component. The following options are available:
DELETE Resets the input fields to values of 0.

OK Saves the data then closes the window.
CANCEL Exits the window without saving the data.
HELP Displays the button definitions.
Large End Knuckle Radius
Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the large end. Note that the Code requires this radius to be
no less than 6 percent of the outside diameter of the head, or less than three time the knuckle thickness
(ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-31(h)).
Large End Knuckle Thickness
Enter the minimum thickness after forming the toroidal knuckle at the large end.
Small End Knuckle Radius
Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the small end. Note that the Code requires this radius to be
no less than 6 percent of the outside diameter of the head, nor less than three times the knuckle thickness
(ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-31(h)).
Small End Knuckle Thickness
Enter the minimum thickness after forming of the toroidal knuckle at the small end.
Welded Flat Head
Welded Flat Head Additional Data

Element Data 4-13
Attachment Factor
Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division
1, or the British Standard PD:5500. For PD:5500, enter the factor C computed per figures 3.5.5(1-2).
Typical values are 0.35 or 0.41. For ASME Code, refer to Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical
attachment factors are as follows:
0.17 (b-1) Head welded to vessel with generous radius

0.20 (b-2) Head welded to vessel with small radius
0.20 (c) Lap welded or brazed construction
0.13 (d) Integral flat circular heads
0.20 (e f g) Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m)
0.33 (h) Plate welded to end of shell
0.20 (i) Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m)
0.30 (j k) Bolted flat heads (include bending moment)
0.30 (m n Plate held in place by screwed ring
o)
0.25 (p) Bolted flat head with full face gasket
0.75 (q) Plate screwed into small diameter vessel
0.33 (r s) Plate held in place by beveled edge
Non-Circ. Small Diameter
If the flat head is circular, you can leave this field at zero. However, if the flat head is non-circular, the
program can still calculate the required thickness, etc., using the formulas in the ASME Code, Section
VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-34. In this case the program assumes that you entered the larger
dimension of the flat head in the Diameter field, and that you will enter the smaller dimension of the head
here.
Appendix 14 Large Opening
If the selected Code is ASME VIII - 1, you can specify that you have a large centrally located opening per
Appendix 14. Check the box and a dialog will appear that will allow the specification of the opening size,
material, hub dimensions and other parameters that the program needs to perform the large opening
calculation.
Element Data 4-15
Flange Analysis
Body Flange
Body Flange Additional Data
PVElite calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of flanges designed and fabricated to the
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The program uses the Code rules found in Appendix 2 of the
ASME Code, latest addenda. Click the Perform Flange Calculation check box to describe the input of a
custom body flange or fill in the flange class and grade below.
For a discussion of Flange input, design and analysis, refer to The Flange Module (see "FLANGES" on
page 13-1).
Skirt Support with Basering
Skirt Support with Base Ring

Element Data 4-17
Inside Diameter at Base
Enter the inside diameter at the bottom of the skirt. This value must be larger than or equal to the inside
diameter at the top of the skirt.
Basering Dialog
The Basering dialog allows the input of basering data.
Note: Use the Plot button to get a detailed sketch of the geometry you entered.
Flange Input Data
For a discussion of Flange input, design and analysis, refer to The Flange Module (see "FLANGES" on
page 13-1).
Basering Analysis
The PVElite Basering module performs thickness calculations and design for annular plate baserings, top
rings, bolting, and gussets found on skirts for vertical vessels. These calculations are performed using
industry standard calculation techniques as described in, The Base Ring Module. This chapter also
describes the theory and method of analysis as well as the input values.
Brownell and Young Method of Design
The Brownell and Young Method compute the required thickness of the baseplate, the gussets and the top
plate or top ring (if there is one). This method is discussed in the book, Process Equipment Design, by
Brownell and Young. Dennis R. Moss also discusses it in the book, Pressure Vessel Design Manual. This
baseplate design method is based on the neutral axis shift method and will in general design a thinner
basering than the method discussed in the previous paragraphs.
Tailing Lug Analysis
Tailing Lug Input Data
The tailing lug calculation is included in the basering analysis for a single or dual type design as depicted
in the figure on the following page. The design is based on a lift position where no bending occurs on the
tailing lug. The main considerations for the design are the section modulus, shear and bearing stress at the
pinhole and the weld strength.
The location of the center of the pin hole will be assumed radially at the edge of the outer most of the top
ring or the basering, which ever is larger. In the absence of the top ring/plate the height of the tailing lug is
required. The tailing lug material is assumed to be the same material as the gusset or basering. Note that
all input fields pertain to one tail lug.
In order for the program to perform this analysis it must be instructed to perform the rigging analysis. To
do this select the Input menu option, then select Design/Analysis Constraints and then click the
Element Data 4-19
Installation/Misc Options button. Then enter in the lug distances and impact factor. When this is
complete, PVElite will compute the tailing lug force.
Tailing Lug Input Data
Perform Tailing Lug Analysis
Select this check box to perform the Tailing Lug analysis.
Tail Lug Type
Select the type of tailing lug (single or dual) used.
Centerline Offset
Enter the offset dimension (OS) for the dual tailing lug design only.
Lug Thickness
Enter the thickness of the tailing lug.
Pin Hole Diameter
Enter the pin hole diameter. The center of the pin hole will be placed radially in line with the larger of the
outer most edge of the top ring or the basering (OD).
Weld Size Thickness
Enter the leg weld size.
Lug Height (only if no Top Ring)
Enter the tailing lug height measured from the top of basering.
Tailing Lug Geometry
Discussion of Results
The tailing lug design consists of a three-part analysis:
The basering assembly (basering, skirt and top ring),

The strength of the weld
The tailing lug itself
It is assumed that there is no bending in the tailing lug. In the absence of the top ring only the basering and
the decay length (e) are considered for the section modulus calculation.
The table below lists the allowable stresses used to check the design strength.
Stress Type Allowable

Value
Shear at Pin Hole 0.4 Sy
Bearing Stress 0.75 Sy
Weld Stress 0.49 Sallow

5-1
C H A P T E R 5
Chapter 5: Vessel Detail Data
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................5-2
Assigning Detail.................................................................5-3
Detail Definition Buttons ...................................................5-4
Defining the Details ...........................................................5-7
Rings ..................................................................................5-8
Nozzle Dialog Data ............................................................5-11
Nozzle Analysis..................................................................5-12
Nozzle Input Data...............................................................5-14
Additional Reinforcing Pad Data .......................................5-28
Lugs....................................................................................5-29
Weights ..............................................................................5-32
Forces and Moments ..........................................................5-33
Platforms ............................................................................5-34
Saddles ...............................................................................5-36
Trays...................................................................................5-39
Legs ....................................................................................5-40
Packing...............................................................................5-42
Liquid .................................................................................5-44
Insulation............................................................................5-46
Lining .................................................................................5-48
Half Pipe Jacket..................................................................5-49
Introduction
PVElite vessel models are composed of the basic elements (heads, shells, cones, etc.) with details added to
these elements. Vessel details are included for two reasons—to develop the total vessel deadweight loads,
and to collect information for the analysis of vessel components. Not all of these details are sensible
additions to every element. The following table defines the application of these vessel details to the
different elements.
Cylinder Elliptical Tori Sph Flat Cone Body Skirt

Head Head Head Head Flange
Ring #1 #
Nozzle # # # # # #
Lugs # # # # # # # #
Weight # # # # # # # #
Forces/Mom # # # # # # # #
ents
Platform2 # # # # # #
Saddle3 #
Tray2 Y/N
Legs5 Y/N4 Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Packing Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Liquid Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Insulation Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
Lining Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N

Relationship of Elements and Details
1
# Indicates that the element type may have several details defined
2
Vertical vessels only
3
Horizontal vessels only
4
Y/N (Yes or No) indicates that this element may have this detail turned on or turned off
Vessel Detail Data 5-3
5
Vertical vessels only and only if no skirt is defined
It is also useful to note here the positioning of certain vessel "details" are applied at a point, such as over a
length of the element. A good example is insulation. For a bottom (or left) head, the insulation (element
detail) actually starts before the "From" node and covers the head to the "To" node. For a 60 inch diameter
elliptical bottom head, the start point of the insulation is 15 inches below the "From" node (enter -15 for
the "Distance from the From Node"). If the head has the standard 3-inch straight flange, then the
insulation covers 18 inches of the element (enter 18 for the "Height/Length of the Insulation"). See the
chapter on Details for more information.
Insulation Details
Assigning Detail
Details may be assigned to elements by selecting them from the Detail toolbar located at the top of the
vessel input screen. The first step in this simple process is to make the element of interest the current
element by clicking on it. Next, click the appropriate detail icon for the detail, which you need to add. You
will then be presented with a dialog box. Fill in all of the information then click the OK button and PVElite
will update the graphic image showing your new detail. Since the image is scaled you can see if you have
placed your detail in the correct location.
Detail Toolbar
Detail Definition Buttons
Details are selected by pressing the appropriate button on the detail toolbar. The stiffening ring dialog is
shown below:
The individual detail windows generally have the following buttons available:
Prev Saves the current details data and displays the previous details data. If there is no
previous detail, an error message will be displayed.
Next Saves the current details data and displays the next detail of the same type for the
element. If no additional detail of this type exists, the program will create a
default detail for the user's modification. PVElite registers details by the Detail ID.
If the current detail does not have a Detail ID defined, the program will display
an error message if this button is used.
Delete Deletes the current detail and displays the data of the next detail of this type, if it
exists. If there is not a next detail, the data of the previous detail, if it exists, will
be displayed on the window. If no previous detail exists for the element, a new
detail listing will be created.
OK Saves the data of the current detail and closes the window. Note that the program
will generate an error and not save the data if no Detail ID is specified.
Cancel Closes the window without saving the current data.
Ring Invokes the material database. Clicking on a material name from the program's
Material database will close the material selection window and bring that material name
into the detail data. As not all details require a material definition, not all detail
edit windows contain this button.
Help Displays general help for the detail window.
Other buttons not shown in the illustration above:
SECTIONI This option is available for leg details. Clicking here will bring up the database
D names for the wide variety of cross section data stored in PVElite. As with
MATERIAL... clicking on a name in the database will close the database and
copy the selected name into the Section ID field.
FULL This option appears with those details, which involve some length such as
insulation, packing and liquid. These details require a start position and end
position (entered as a distance from the From node and height/length of detail). If
the detail extends throughout the element, clicking on this button will
automatically calculate and enter these values so that the detail "covers" 'the
entire element. This feature is very useful for heads where these two terms
(distance and height/length) may not be obvious. Remember that the From node
and To node mark the ends of the straight flange portion of the head element and
the head itself starts before or extends beyond this node pair. This leads to
negative distances from the From node or a larger height/length of the detail.
ALL This option allows some detail types such as insulation to be applied over the
entire vessel at one time. Of course the detail type can be edited on an individual
basis on any element if the ALL feature has been used.
Note that only the details of the current element are accessible. To review or define details on other
elements, the element of interest must be made current by clicking on it first.
Note: The Detail Edit window may also be accessed directly from the graphic image found in the Build
and Define modes. Click the left mouse button on the element to make it current and then click the right
mouse button on the detail of interest. For details that cannot be right clicked such as liquid, click the
detail on the detail toolbar and its associated edit dialog will display.
Defining the Details
Three items appear with every element detail. The From Node of the current element, the distance from
the element's From Node (or Offset from Vessel Centerline for heads), and the label given to the detail or
Detail ID.
From Node
The From Node is an element identifier that cannot be entered or modified. The From Node (and the
highlighted element on the graphic) indicates the element, which contains the detail.
Distance from "From" Node or Offset from Vessel Centerline
Enter the axial or longitudinal distance from the "From" Node to the start of the item to be defined. Be
aware that for heads this may be a negative value; for example, insulation on a bottom head starts before
the "From" node since the "From" node marks the beginning of the straight flange. For nozzles on heads,
enter the radial distance between the vessel centerline and the centerline of the nozzle.
For the Detail... Enter axial distance between From node and the following location:
Ring Centerline of the ring
Nozzle Centerline of the nozzle
Lug Centroid of the lug attachment weld
Weight Point at which the weight acts
Force/Moment Point at which the force or moment acts
Platform Axial distance from the node to the bottom of the platform
Saddle Vertical centerline of the saddle
Trays Bottom of the lowest tray
Legs Centroid of the leg attachment weld
Packing Start of the packed section
Liquid Start of the liquid section
Insulation Start of the insulated section

For the Detail... Enter axial distance between From node and the following location:
Lining Start of the lined section
Detail ID
Enter any alphanumeric string to identify the detail. While not required, it is suggested to assign unique
names for unique items for clear reporting. For example, nozzles should be unique as their individual
identification is important while insulation on all elements, if consistent throughout, may be named
INSUL on each element. Some consistency will help your naming process. You may wish to use the From
node number with an alphabetical extension showing the detail type and the number of such details if
needed. For example, for a nozzle, insulation and ring defined on the element From node 20 To node 30
you may have Detail IDs of "NOZL A", "INSUL", and "20 RING 1 of 2", respectively. No two details
should have the same name.
Rings
The Stiffening Ring dialog lets the user input and edits the data of the rings, which are attached to the
current element. These data are used in the calculation of the weight of the ring and, for external pressure
checks, in the calculation of the ring area and inertia.
When using the ASME Code, the following data screen is displayed.
As the stiffening ring data is entered, PVElite will automatically compute the inertias required and
available provided it is not a cone to cylinder junction ring. For bar rings, the program will size a new ring
based on a default thickness of 0.375 inches or the value given in the Miscellaneous Options dialog
located on the Design/Analysis window.
The Section Calculator button allows inertia, area and centroidal distance to be computed for non-
standard or built up sections. This button is only available when the "Section Type" of ring is being
analyzed. The Check Standards Bars button helps you to select a suitable ring. As you cursor through
the rings, the program will compute the results and place them in a display area at the bottom of the
dialog. A ring that meets the Code requirements is shown in blue and a failed ring is displayed in red
along with a failed message. Ensure the entire vessel is modeled prior to placing and sizing the rings. The
Bar Selection dialog is shown below. Use the mouse, space bar, and arrow keys to navigate this tree.
Inside Diameter of Ring
Enter the inside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually equal to the outside diameter of the
shell, except for the relatively rare case of a stiffening ring inside of the vessel.
Outside Diameter of Ring
Enter the outside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually greater than the outside diameter of
the shell.
Thickness of Ring
Enter the axial thickness of the stiffening ring.
Ring Material
Enter a name of the ring material from the program's material database or select the material name by first
clicking on the Ring Material button. Individual material parameters may be viewed and modified by
pressing Enter when the cursor is in this field.
PVElite allows entry of the generic entry of any type of stiffener. To do this you must know the cross
sectional area of the stiffener as well as the moment of inertia and the distance from the shell surface to
the ring centroid. If you are using an American type structural shape simply click the Section Type button
and then click the type of geometry being used. If a non-American type section ring is being used, enter in
the properties for your section type.
Moment of Inertia
The moment of inertia is a property of the stiffener that is typically taken from a structural handbook.
Units of inertia are length to the 4th power.
Cross Sectional Area
This is the cross sectional metal area of the ring.
Distance to Ring Centroid
This is the distance from the surface of the shell to the center of the rings area. This property is typically
taken from a structural handbook.
Name of Section Type
This value is used for documentation purposes and it is used to look up the total height of the stiffener for
the horizontal vessel analysis (if a section type ring is used).
When using British Standard PD:5500 for a cylindrical section, the following screen displays:
Nozzle Dialog Data
The Nozzle Dialog allows input and editing of the nozzles, which are attached to the current element.
These nozzles will add to the total deadweight of the vessel. Even if the deadweight is not significant,
entering the nozzles may be very important as the data entered here will be used to evaluate the flange's
and vessel's maximum allowable pressure (MAWP). The nozzle flange MAWP will be set according to
the element temperature, the nozzle class and the flange grade according to ANSI B16.5.
If one of the nozzles controls the vessel's MAP and a vertical hydrotest is carried out in accordance with
ASME UG 99(c), be sure to enter the correct "Flange Distance to Top" in the Global Design Data. Flange
distance to top will be the distance from the controlling flange to the top of the vessel. See the Global Data
chapter for more information.
The user in the radial and hillside directions also controls the orientation of the nozzle. This feature gives
the user versatility in the use of this program. The Layout button can also be used to enter in hillside
nozzles whose centerline does not correspond with a global direction.
Nozzle Analysis
PVElite calculates required wall thickness and area of reinforcement for a nozzle in a pressure vessel shell
or head, and compares this area to the area available in the shell, nozzle and optional reinforcing pad. The
program also calculates the strength of failure paths for the nozzles. This calculation is based on the
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-37 through UG-45. The calculation procedure is
based on figure UG-37.1.
The program calculates the required thickness (for reinforcement conditions) based on inside diameter for
the following vessel components:
Component Paragraph Limitations
Cylinder UG-27 (c) (1) None
2:1 Elliptical Head UG-32 (d) (1) None
Torispherical Head UG-32 (e) (1) None
Spherical Head or UG-27 (d) (3) None

Shell
Note: PVElite also analyzes a large nozzle in a welded flat head, which is found in this user manual where
the flat head is discussed.
The program evaluates nozzles at any angle (less than 90 degrees) away from the perpendicular, allowing
evaluation of off angle or hillside nozzles.
NOZZLE takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and corrosion allowance,
and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the corroded condition.
NOZZLE also performs UCS-66 Minimum Design Metal Temperature (MDMT) calculations for nozzles.
As the nozzle data is entered, PVElite will automatically perform the ASME area of replacement or
PD:5500 nozzle compensation calculations. A calculation is performed every time the cursor is moved in
between input cells. If there is any error in the input that will not allow the analysis to be performed, a
status of failed will appear at the bottom of the Nozzle dialog. The calculation is initiated once the pipe
size is specified. If you are changing data, such as the pad thickness and are not moving between cells,
press F5 to force PVElite to recalculate and display the results. If the calculation has failed, the result will
appear in red. A nozzle that has passed will have blue results. The result is typically the area and minimum
nozzle overstress per 1-7. The program will display the text failed in brackets, even though the area of
replacement may be sufficient. To effectively use this feature, we suggest that the entire vessel be
modeled first, along with the liquid and nozzle pressure design options set. Also for vessels that have
ANSI flanges note that the ANSI flange rating will be shown on the main Status bar.
The figure below displays the Nozzle Module geometry.

Nozzle Input Data
Nozzle Description
Enter a 15 character or less description of this nozzle. If you type the description "MANWAY" the UG-45
check for minimum nozzle neck thickness will not be performed. The text #SN in the description will
cause PVElite to compute the areas if this is a small nozzle.
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell
Enter the angle between the centerline of the nozzle and a tangent to the vessel at the point where the
nozzle centerline intersects the vessel outside diameter. If left blank, and an offset is entered, the program
will compute the angle.
Please refer to the section below: Nozzle Orientation, where the alternative method of entering hillside and
radial nozzles is discussed in detail. Please refer to this chapter, as it gives the user greater control over
the positioning of nozzles, especially hillside nozzles that point in any direction. Much greater versatility
is available by using the alternative method of orientating nozzles in heads and cylinders.
Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline (L1)
Enter the distance from the center of the head to the nozzle centerline.
Class for Attached B16.5 Flange
From the pull down, select the class of nozzle flange you will be using. The following flange classes are
available:
CL 150, CL 300, CL 400, CL 600, CL 900, CL 1500, CL 2500
PVElite will use the class and grade to determine the MAWP of the ANSI flange.
Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange
Enter the letters "GR" followed by a space and the number corresponding to the flange material grade. The
following flange grades are available:
GR 1.1 Med Carbon Steel

GR 1.2 High Carbon Steel
GR 1.4 Low Carbon Steel
Austenitic Steels:
GR 2.1 Type 304
GR 2.2 Type 316
GR 2.3 Type 304L,316L
GR 2.4 Type 321
GR 2.5 Type 347,348
GR 2.6 Type 309
GR 2.7 Type 310
Alloy Steels:
GR 1.5 C-1/2Mo
GR 1.7 1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo
GR 1.9 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.10 2-1/4Cr-1Mo
GR 1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.14 9Cr-1Mo
High Alloy Steels

GR 3.1 NI-FE-MO-CB
GR 3.2 NI Alloy 200
GR 3.4 NI CU 400, 500
GR 3.5 NI-CR-FE 600
GR 3.6 NI CR-FE 800
GR 3.7 NI-MO B2
GR 3.8 Nickel Alloys
Modification of Reinforcing Limits
You may enter any physical limitation, which exists, on the thickness available for reinforcement or the
diameter available for reinforcement. An example of a thickness limitation would be a studding pad or
nozzle stub which would not extend normal to the vessel wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle
calculation. An example of a diameter limitation would be two or more nozzles close together, or a vessel
seam for which you did not want to take an available area reduction.
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit
Enter the maximum diameter for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An example of a diameter
limitation would be two nozzles close together, or a vessel seam for which you did not want to take an
available area reduction.
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit
Enter the maximum thickness for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An example of a
thickness limitation would be a studding pad or nozzle stub which would not extend normal to the vessel
wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation.
Do you want to set Area1 or Area 2 to 0
In some vessel design specifications it is mandated that no credit be taken for the area contributed by the
shell or nozzle. You can enter the text "A1" or "A2" in this field. If you do so, that area will be set equal to
0. You can also enter "A1 A2". This would give you no credit for Area1 - available area in the vessel wall
or Area2 - available area in the nozzle wall.
Another option is to neglect the area available in the cover weld (ACWLD).
Nozzle Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable tables.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by pressing D when the cursor is in
the material field. If a material is not contained in the database, its specification and properties can be
entered manually.
Nozzle Diameter Basis
Select the appropriate basis from the pull down menu. Nozzles can be specified on either the Inside or
Outside diameter basis.
Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle
Enter the diameter of the nozzle. If you specify nominal or minimum for the nozzle size and thickness
basis, then you must enter the nominal diameter of the nozzle in this field. Valid nominal diameters are:
0.125 0.25 0.37 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5

5
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 8
10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30
Note that if you are using Metric or non-English units, then the diameter when converted must end up as a
value in the table above. For example if the size were 10 inch nominal, this would correspond to 254 mm.
In the nozzle dialog, press the button next to the pipe size to select it from the list. In the list, both the
ANSI nominal and Metric Nominal are shown.
Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis
Select the appropriate basis for the nozzle diameter and thickness, Actual, Nominal or Minimum.
Actual Diameter and Thickness
The program will use the actual diameter entered in the field above and the actual thickness entered in the
field below.
Nominal Diameter and Thickness
The program will look up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the nozzle size and
thickness basis field, and will look up the nominal thickness based on the schedule entered in the nominal
schedule of nozzle field.
Minimum Diameter and Thickness
The program will look up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the nozzle size and
thickness basis field, and will look up the nominal thickness based on the schedule entered in the nominal
schedule of nozzle field. It will then multiply the nominal thickness by a factor of 0.875.
Actual Thickness of Nozzle
Enter the minimum actual thickness of the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if you selected
ACTUAL for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a schedule in the field below.
Nominal Schedule of Nozzle
Enter the schedule for the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if you selected NOMINAL or
MINIMUM for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a thickness in the thickness field.
Select the nozzle schedule from the pull down. Available nozzle schedules are:
SCH 10 SCH 60 SCH 140 SCH 80S

SCH 20 SCH 80 SCH 160 SCH STD
SCH 30 SCH 100 SCH 10S SCH X-STG
SCH 40 SCH 120 SCH 40S SCH XX-STG
Note that all schedules of pipe may not have a corresponding diameter associated. In this case, PVElite
will return an error stating the thickness of the nozzle was not found.
Nozzle Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the inside diameter for
the corrosion allowance you enter.
Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which Nozzle Passes
Enter the seam efficiency. The seam efficiency is used in the 'area available' calculations to reduce the
area available in the shell. Note that for shell and nozzle wall thickness calculations, the seam efficiency is
always 1.0.
Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck
Enter the seam efficiency of the nozzle. The seam efficiency is used in the UG-45 calculation to determine
the minimum required thickness of the nozzle due to internal pressure. Note that for shell and nozzle wall
internal pressure thickness calculations, the seam efficiency is always 1.0.
Insert Nozzle or Abutting Nozzle
The nozzle type and depth of groove welds are used to determine the required weld thicknesses and failure
paths for the nozzle. If the nozzle is welded to the outside of the vessel wall, it is abutting the vessel wall.
If the hole in the vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD and the nozzle is welded into the hole, it is inserted.
Figure UW-16.1 shows typical insert and abutting nozzles.
Nozzle Outside Projection
Enter the distance the nozzle projects outward from the surface of the vessel. This will usually be to the
attached flange or cover. This length will be used for weight calculations and for external pressure
calculations. Also, if this value is less than the calculated thickness limit, this value is used when
computing the area available in the nozzle wall.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the nozzle and the pad or shell.
Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel
Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the nozzle and the vessel are full
penetration welds. Thus the depth of the weld would be the same as the depth of the component, that is the
thickness of the nozzle. If the nozzle is attached with a partial penetration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter
the depth of the partial penetration or a zero, respectively, in this field.
Nozzle Inside Projection
Enter the projection of the nozzle into the vessel. The program uses the least of the inside projection and
the thickness limit with no pad to calculate the area available in the inward nozzle. Therefore, you may
safely enter a large number such as six or twelve inches if the nozzle continues into the vessel a long
distance.
Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the inward nozzle and the inside shell.
Local Shell Thickness
Some vessels have insert plates, which are thicker than the surrounding shell. If your vessel uses insert
plates, enter the thickness of the plate here. This value will be thicker than the shell course thickness this
nozzle is located on. The maximum of this value and the element thickness will be used in the nozzle
reinforcement calculations. A basic assumption here is that the diameter of the insert plate is greater than
the diameter limit of reinforcement, which is roughly twice the diameter of the finished opening.
On the other hand, if the area immediately adjacent to the opening is corroded to a greater degree or
locally thinner than the rest of the shell, the thinner value can be entered in as well.
Shell Tr Value
For some vessel designs the nozzle reinforcement is governed by bending and normal stresses in the local
shell area where the nozzle is located. Normally the value of Tr (shell required thickness) is based on
internal pressure requirements. Some specifications call out for "Full Replacement." If this is the case,
enter in the actual shell thickness less the corrosion allowance.
For another option, review the Nozzle Design Modification Section in the Design/Analysis Constraints.
The Base Nozzle tr on Max. Stress ratio check box can also satisfy external loading criteria by
computing the exact requirement for tr. If you enter the Shell Tr, this is the value the program will use. If
you do not wish to use this value, enter a 0. This directive is for vertical vessels only. This option should
not be checked if the vessel is a horizontal vessel.
Tapped Hole Area Loss
This entry is for the exclusion of area needed when holes are tapped into studding outlets and other similar
connection elements. The traditional industry standard is to increase the area required by the tapped area
loss. Values for tapped area loss are shown in the table below adapted from the Pressure Vessel Design
Manual.
Please note that PVElite will not multiply the tapped area loss by 2. It will simply use the value that has
been supplied.
Overriding Nozzle Weight
Normally the program calculates the weight of the nozzle from the information the user has already
entered and from internal tables of typical weights. If your nozzle is significantly different from a standard
weight nozzle, you can enter the weight here, and it will override the program-calculated weight.
Nozzle Orientation
The Alternative (more versatile) Method
This alternative method of orientating nozzles, especially in cylinders gives the user complete control over
the direction in which the nozzle points. By using this method, the user is not confined to only having
nozzles point in the coordinate system of the 3D model. By this, we mean that nozzles may only point in
the X, Y and Z directions like this:
In the above figure, the hillside nozzles are only pointing in four directions, aligned with the major co-
ordinates of the cylinder. The alternative method presented in this section shows how the nozzles can be
placed to point in any hillside direction with greater ease.
Using the Layout Button in the Nozzle Dialog Screen - Alternative Method
We discuss how a hillside nozzle may be made to point in any direction as indicated below:
The above figure shows that the direction of the nozzle is not controlled by the four axis directions of the
cylinder, but may be made to point in any direction within the 360 degree position around the cylinder.
Note the difference between the Reference Angle, and the Layout Angle.
Starting the Alternative Nozzle Layout Method
At the bottom of the Nozzle dialog in the Nozzle Properties frame is the Layout.... button. Clicking this
button displays the Nozzle Layout screen. Enter the nozzle description, size, schedule and other
parameters before clicking Layout.
Nozzle In a Cylinder
Radial and Hillside Nozzles in Cylinders
If the nozzle is to be installed in a cylinder, the following dialog box will open on the screen:
Three different orientations are available for the nozzle:
Radial Nozzle
Hillside Nozzle
Lateral Nozzle
These orientations are controlled by clicking the appropriate radio button:

Radial Nozzle in Cylinder

Data Entry
Reference Angle Alpha
Enter the reference angle alpha. As this is a radial nozzle, the centerline of the nozzle passes through the
centerline of the parent cylindrical shell.
Projection Dimension "Proj"
Enter the projection from the centerline of the parent cylinder to the end of the nozzle as illustrated on the
screen. Once this is entered, the projection ho is automatically calculated by PVElite, and this value
replaces the red message Please enter a valid "Proj" value to compute ho is replaced with the computed
value of ho.
Return to the main Nozzle dialog by clicking OK, the appropriate values have been filled in the layout
angle and projection.
Hillside Nozzle Cylinder

Data Entry
Reference Angle alpha:
Enter the reference angle. Note the reference angle is not the layout angle. The reference angle displays in
the figure below.
Nozzle Offset Dimension
Enter the Offset Dimension. To clarify matters, the figure below displays the offset dimension.
value of ho.
On returning to the main Nozzle dialog by clicking OK, the appropriate values have been filled in the
layout angle and projection.
To clarify matters, the figure below displays the layout angle the program calculates:
Lateral Nozzle in Cylinder

Data Entry
Reference Angle Alpha
Enter the reference angle alpha. This is the angle between the nozzle centerline and the parent cylinder
centerline. It is illustrated on the input screen.
Note: You have to return to the main Nozzle dialog to enter the projection from the surface of the
cylinder.
Nozzle In a Head
Radial and Hillside Nozzles and Heads
If the nozzle is to installed in a head, the following dialog box will display:
The available nozzle orientations are:
Radial Nozzle
Hillside Nozzle
These orientations are controlled by clicking the appropriate radio button:

Radial Nozzle in Head

Data Entry
Reference Angle Alpha - The Direct Method
Enter the reference angle alpha as indicated in the following illustration:
Data Entry - Computing the Reference Angle Alpha
Using this method to derive the reference angle, PVElite will compute the reference angle alpha from the
coordinate X-Y location chosen by the user. This method is useful, as nozzle locations on heads are often
given in the X-Y coordinate system.
Enter the appropriate values of X and Y in any of the four angle quadrants.
value of ho.
On returning to the main Nozzle dialog by clicking OK, the appropriate values have been filled in the
layout angle and projection.
Hillside Nozzle in Head

Data Entry
For more information, refer to Radial Nozzle in Head in the previous section for entry of this data.
Notes and Advantages for Hillside Nozzles
Often, hillside nozzles in heads are arranged such that the flange faces are all level in the same plane, as in
the illustration below:
Using the alternate method of entry for hillside nozzles in a head makes this arrangement very simple.
Additional Reinforcing Pad Data
Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface
Enter the outside diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is entered as the length along the vessel
shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, although these two values will be equal when the
nozzle is at 90 degrees.
Pad Width
In many cases the desired pad width is known and the diameter is not known. When the pad width is
entered, the program will compute the Pad outer diameter and update the screen accordingly. Internally
PVElite works with the pad diameter and not the width.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into account for the
pad thickness.
Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the pad OD and the shell. Note that if any part of this
weld falls outside the diameter limit, the weld will not be included in the available area.
Depth of Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck
Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the pad and the nozzle are full
thickness of the pad. If the pad is attached with a partial penetration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the
depth of the partial penetration or a zero, respectively, in this field.
Pad Material
Enter the applicable code material specification as it appears in the material allowable tables.
Alternatively, the material can be selected from the Material Database by clicking the Pad Material
button. If a material is not contained in the database, its specification and properties can be entered
manually.
ASME Code Weld Type
In many cases the Code does not require weld strength/path calculations for full penetration groove welds
for pressure loadings. If your weld detail is per UW-16.1 sketch (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f-1), (f-2), (f-3), (f-
4), (g), (x-1), (y-1) or (z-1) and you do not wish the program to perform the weld strength calculation,
enter in a designation such as A. If you wish PVElite to perform this calculation regardless of the type of
weld, leave this field blank. If it is a type I, J, K, L, X-2, Y-2, Z-2 weld, then PVElite will perform the
additional weld size calculations per UW-16(d)(1).
This field is not applicable for PD 5500 or EN-13445.
Flange Type
This is the type of nozzle flange. This value is not used by the program, but is echoed out for
documentation purposes.
Flange Material
This is the material the flange is constructed of. This value is not used by the program, but is echoed out
for documentation purposes. The flange material should correspond to the type listed for the flange grade.
Lugs
The Lug Dialog allows the entry of the sets of support lugs, which are attached to the current element. If
no skirt or legs are defined for a vertical vessel, the lowest set of lugs will be used as the vessel support
point for dead load and live load calculations.
PVElite allows the entry of one of three types of support lug geometries:
1 - simple geometry with gussets

2 - gusseted geometry with top plate
3 - gusseted geometry with continuous top ring
Depending on the type of geometry selected, additional data will need to be entered.
Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint
This is the radial distance from the wall of the vessel to the point where the lug attaches to the structural
steel.
Lug Bearing Width
This is the width of the structure that is in contact with the bottom lug support plate.
Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate
This is the distance the bottom support plate extends from the OD of the vessel. This value must be greater
than or equal to the average gusset width.
Length of Bottom Lug Support Plate
This value is typically equal to the distance between gussets plus two times the gusset plate thickness.
Thickness of Bottom Plate
This value is the thickness of the bottom support plate.
Distance between Gussets
This is the distance between the insides of the gusset plates.
Mean Width of Gussets
This value is equal to the gusset width at the top plus the gusset width at the bottom divided by two.
PVElite uses the mean gusset width in order to compute the actual stresses in the gusset plates.
Height of Gussets
Enter the height of one gusset.
Thickness of Gussets
Enter the thickness of the gusset plate.
Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring
This is the radial dimension from the OD of the shell to the edge of the top plate. This value should be less
than or equal to the mean gusset width.
Thickness of Top Plate/Ring
Enter the thickness of the top plate, which sits above the gussets.
Overall Height of Lug
Enter the distance from the bottom of the support lug to the top.
Overall Width of Lug
Enter the width of the support lug.
Weight of One Lug
The program does not gather enough information to be able to do the detailed calculation of the support
lug weight. Therefore you must enter the actual weight of one support lug.
Number of Lugs
Enter the number of support lugs around the periphery of the vessel at this location.
Perform WRC 107 Calc
If the box is checked to perform the WRC 107 local stress and analysis, you will need to fill out the pad
dimensions (if there is a pad) and the allowable stress increase factor.
Pad Width
The reinforcing pad width is measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel. The pad width
must be greater than the attachment width. The length of the attachment is measured along the axis of the
vessel. If the box is checked to perform the analysis and the pad properties are filled in, the program will
compute the stresses at the edge of the attachment and the edge of the pad.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness o of the pad. Any allowances for the external corrosion should be taken in to account
for the pad thickness.
Pad Length
Enter the outside diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is entered as the length along the vessel
shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, though these two values will be equal when the
Weights
The Weight Dialog allows the entry of miscellaneous weight that cannot be entered by using any of the
other methods. Note that this is not an applied force, but a static mass that will affect the natural
frequency of the vessel and axial stress calculations. Piping can be modeled using the weight dialog. The
area and mass of the piping will be considered in the same manner as a weight.
Miscellaneous Weight
Enter a weight value. This could be generated by an attached piece of equipment such as a motor, by
internals such as piping, or by externals such as structural elements. Note that this value will affect the
seismic analysis.
Offset from Centerline
Enter the distance of this generic weight from the centerline of the vessel. The value will be multiplied by
the weight to obtain a moment that will be a part of the stress calculations.
Is this a Welded Internal
This parameter informs PVElite in which category to add the weight.
Forces and Moments
The Force/Moment Edit window allows the user to input and edit the data of the sets of forces and
moments, which are added to the current element. In most cases these are operating loads imposed on the
vessel; usually piping loads on nozzles.
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction
Enter the force in the selected direction. Note that the Y direction is always vertically up, the X direction
is from left to right, and the Z direction is out of the page. Loads perpendicular to the vessel will be
resolved into a single vector and applied to create the worst combination with the live load. Unlike
miscellaneous weight, this force is not included in the seismic analysis.
Moment about X, Y, or Z Axis
Enter the moment about the selected axis. The rules stated for the forces apply here as well.
Acts During Wind or Seismic
If the force or moment acts during either the Wind or Seismic case, check the appropriate box. Please note
you can check both boxes but you must at least check one.
Force/Moment Combination Method
The Algebraic method gives the most accurate results. It accounts for signs on the forces that cause
bending about the skirt, lugs or legs. The SRSS method disregards the signs and will generate more
conservative results. This option is not used when the vessel is horizontal.
Platforms
The Platform Dialog allows the user to input and edit data of the platforms, which are attached to the
current vertical vessel element.
Platform Start Angle (degrees)
Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel, and the start angle of the platform.
Platform End Angle (degrees)
Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel, and the ending angle of the
platform.
Platform Wind Area
Enter the tributary wind area of the platform if you do not agree with the program's computed value.
Typically this value will be the greatest span of the platform perpendicular to the vessel multiplied by a
nominal platform height, between 12 and 36 inches on the hand rails and other equipment on the platform.
Platform Weight
Enter the weight of the platform if you wish to override the program's computed weight value.
Platform Railing Weight
Enter the weight of the railing in units of force/length in this field. The platform width, grating weight and
railing weight are used to compute the weight of the platform automatically when entering data on the
dialog.
Platform Grating Weight
The grating is the plate that one stands on while standing on a platform. The platform width, grating
weight and railing weight are used to compute the weight of the platform automatically when entering
data on the dialog.
Platform Width
Enter the radial width of the platform. The platform width, grating weight and railing weight are used to
compute the weight of the platform automatically when entering data on the dialog.
Platform Height
The platform height is the distance from the floor plate to the top hand rail. This dimension is usually 42
inches. The program uses this value to compute the wind area when one of the Wind area calculation
buttons is clicked.
Platform Clearance
The platform clearance is distance between the outer shell surface and the inner diameter of the platform.
The value is used to compute the floor area of the platform.
Platform Force Coefficient
The force coefficient is a term used to compute the wind area and consequently the wind force acting on a
platform. This value is taken from ASCE7-95 from Table 6-9 and is referred to as Cf. A typical value for
Cf is 1.2. This value should always be greater than or equal to 1.0.
Platform Wind Area Calculation [Installation \ Misc. Options]
PVElite can perform platform area wind calculations in one of four ways. The methods are
The height times the width times the force coefficient (conservative).
One half of the floor plate area times the force coefficient.
The height times the width times the force coefficient divided by 3.
The projected area of the platform times the force coefficient divided by 3. Note that this option will
yield the same results as option 3 for platforms that have a sweep angle of greater than 180 degrees.
To have the program compute the area, simply fill in the required data such as the platform height, width,
start and end angles and the force coefficient. As you enter the data the program will compute the result
and insert it into the wind area cell. If you want to use your own value, type it in and do not press one of
the area options.
Platform Length (Non- Circular)
If the platform is the non-circular top head type, enter the long dimension of the platform.
Saddles
The Saddle Dialog lets the user input and edit data of the saddles, which are attached to the current
horizontal cylinder. The size and location of the saddles are important for the Zick calculations of local
stresses on horizontal vessels with saddle supports. For proper Zick analysis, only two saddles may be
defined and they do not have to be symmetrically placed about the center of the vessel axis. If no saddles
are defined for a horizontal vessel, the deadload and live load calculations will not be performed.
Width of Saddle
Enter the width of the saddle support. This width does not include any wear pad on the vessel side.
Centerline Dimension (B)
Enter the distance from the base of the saddle to the centerline of the vessel. This is referred to as
dimension "B" in some pressure vessel texts. This value is used in determining additional saddle loads due
to wind or seismic events.
Saddle Contact Angle (degrees)
Enter the angle contained between the two 'horns' (contact points) of the saddle, measured from the axial
center of the vessel. Typically this value ranges from 120 to 150 degrees.
Height of Composite Stiffener
Enter the overall height of the composite stiffener over the saddle (if there is one).
Width of Wear Plate
Enter the width of the wear plate between the vessel and the saddle support.
Thickness of Wear Plate
Enter the thickness of the wear plate between the vessel and the saddle support.
Wear Plate Contact Angle (degrees)
Enter the angle contained from one edge of the wear plate to the other edge, measured from the axial
center of the vessel. Typically this value is approximately 130 degrees.
Saddle Dimension A
This distance is the length between the centerline of the saddle support and the tangent line of the nearest
head. This dimension is usually labeled A in most pressure vessel texts.
Perform Saddle Check
By checking this box and entering the following information PVElite will perform a structural design
check on the saddle supports.
Material Yield Stress
Enter the yield stress for the saddles at their design temperature.
E for Plates
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the material used to make the saddles.
Baseplate Length
This is the long dimension of the baseplate, which is in contact with the supporting surface. This value is
comparable with the vessel diameter.
Baseplate Width
This is the short dimension (Width) of the baseplate.
Baseplate Thickness
This is the thickness of the baseplate support.

Number of Ribs
The ribs run parallel to the long axis of the vessel. Enter the number of ribs on one saddle support.
Rib Thickness
Enter the thickness of the rib supports.
Web Thickness
The web is the part of the support structure to which the ribs are attached. Enter the thickness of the web
here.
Web Location
There are 2 possible locations for the webs, center or side. Pull down the appropriate selection.
Height of Center Web
Enter the distance from the bottom of the center rib to the top plus the thickness of the shell.
Trays
The Tray Dialog allows the user to enter and edit one set of equally spaced trays with a set liquid height
for the current element. The Distance from "From" Node will be to the bottom of the lowest tray. Trays
may only be entered for vertical vessels.
Number of Trays
Enter the number of trays for the current element.
Tray Spacing
Enter the vertical distance between trays.
Tray Weight Per Unit Area
Enter the unit weight of each tray. Do not enter the total weight, since the program will multiply the unit
weight by the cross sectional area of the element.
Height of Liquid on Tray
Enter the height of the liquid on each tray.
Density of Liquid on Tray
Enter the density of the liquid on each tray.
Legs
The Leg Dialog allows the user to input data for the legs that are attached to the current element. Legs
may be entered for vertical vessels that have no skirt element.
Distance from Outside Diameter: or Diameter at Leg Centerline
For shell elements enter the distance between the centerline of the leg to the element outside diameter.
Usually, this data is the half value of the leg's width. For heads where the legs may not necessarily attach
at the vessel OD but somewhere else along the head, enter the distance between the centerlines of two legs
that are opposite to one another. If there are an odd number of legs (therefore no two are opposite), then
enter the diameter of a circle drawn through the centerlines of the legs; this would be the outside diameter
at the head attachment elevation plus the depth of the leg.
Leg Orientation
Select the orientation of the leg to the centerline. Weak, Strong and diagonal are acceptable selections.
Number of Legs
Enter the number of legs. This value should be greater than or equal to 3.
Section Identifier
Enter the section identifier for the vessel. The program has several databases of structural shapes. The
Section ID database may be displayed by clicking the Section ID button or press [Alt-S] keystroke
combination. The section identifier can be selected directly from the database.
Length of Legs
Enter the distance from the attachment point of the leg to the base.
Vessel Translates During Occasional Load
If the Perform WRC 107 Analysis check box has been enabled, the translation check box will be active.
The state of this check box informs PVElite how the longitudinal moment is to be calculated. When the
box is checked, this will produce a more conservative longitudinal moment than when the box is left
unchecked. If you are unsure, verify the box is checked.
Packing
The Packing Dialog allows the user to input and edit the data for the packing, which is attached to the
current element.
Height of Packed Section
Enter the height of the packed section on this element. This value is used only to calculate the weight of
the packed section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the packed section will be taken at half
this height.
Note that if you have a packed horizontal vessel (rare) the value entered in this cell will be the length of
the packed section.
Density of Packing
Enter the density of the packing. The following table lists some typical densities, shown in lbs/ft3. Note
that the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
Size (in.) Density (lb/ft3) Size (in.) Density (lb/ft3)
Ceramic Raschig Ring Carbon Raschig Ring
1/4 60.0 1/4 46.0
3/8 61.0 1/2 27.0
1/2 55.0 3/4 34.0
5/8 56.0 1 27.0
3/4 50.0 1 1/4 31.0
1 42.0 1 1/2 34.0
1 1/4 46.0 2 27.0
1 1/2 46.0 3 23.0
2 41.0 Carbon Steel Pall Ring

Size (in.) Density (lb/ft3) Size (in.) Density (lb/ft3)
3 37.0 5/8 37.0
4 36.0 1 30.0
Carbon Steel Raschig Ring 1 1/2 26.0
1/4 133.0 2 24.0
3/8 94.0 Plastic Pall Ring
1/2 75.0 5/8 7.25
5/8 62.0 1 5.50
3/4 52.0 1 1/2 4.75
1 39.0 2 4.50
1 1/2 42.0 3 4.50
2 37.0
3 25.0
Liquid
The Liquid Edit Dialog allows the user to input and edit the data of the liquid, which exists in the current
element.
Height/Length of Liquid
Enter the height or length of the liquid on this element. This value is used only to calculate the weight of
the liquid section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the liquid section will be taken at half this
height. This value is also used to calculate the operating pressure at all points below the liquid.
Liquid Density
Enter the density of the liquid. Some typical specific gravities and densities are shown below in lbs/ft3.
Note that the densities should be converted if you use another units system.
Name Gravity Density (lb/ft3)
Ethane 0.3564 22.23
Propane 0.5077 31.66
N-butane 0.5844 36.44
Iso-butane 0.5631 35.11
N-Pentane 0.6247 38.96
Iso-Pentane 0.6247 38.96
N-hexane 0.6640 41.41
2-methypentane 0.6579 41.03
3-methylpentane 0.6689 41.71
2,2-dimethylbutane 0.6540 40.78

Name Gravity Density (lb/ft3)
2,3-dimethylbutane 0.6664 41.56
N-heptane 0.6882 42.92
2-methylheptane 0.6830 42.59
3-methylheptane 0.6917 43.13
2,2-dimethylpentane 0.6782 42.29
2,4-dimethylpentane 0.6773 42.24
1,1- 0.7592 47.34

dimethylcyclopentane
N-octane 0.7068 44.08
Cyclopentane 0.7504 46.79
Methylcyclopentane 0.7536 46.99
Cyclohexane 0.7834 48.85
Methylcyclohexane 0.7740 48.27
Benzene 0.8844 55.15
Toluene 0.8718 54.37
Alcohol 0.7900 49.26
Ammonia 0.8900 55.50
Benzine 0.6900 43.03
Gasoline 0.7000 43.65
Kerosene 0.8000 49.89
Mineral oil 0.9200 57.37
Petroleum oil 0.8200 51.14
Insulation
The Insulation Edit Dialog allows the user to input and edit the data of the insulation, which is attached
to the current element.
Height/Length of Insulation / Fireproofing
Enter the height or length of the insulation on this element. This value is used only to calculate the weight
of the insulation. For seismic calculations the weight center of the insulated section will be taken at half
this height.
Note that if you have insulation on a horizontal vessel the value entered in this cell will be the length of
the insulated section. Note also that the only distinction between insulation and lining, from the program's
point of view, is that insulation is on the OD of the element, while lining is on the ID of the element.
Therefore, use the insulation field to enter OD fireproofing, and the lining field to enter ID fireproofing.
Thickness of Insulation or Fireproofing
Enter the thickness of the insulation or fireproofing.
Insulation Density
Enter the insulation density. The following table lists some typical densities, shown in lbs/ft3. Note that
the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
Name Density
Calcium Silicate 22.5
Foam Glass 16.0
Mineral Wool 14.0
Glass Fiber 11.0
Asbestos 30.0
Careytemp 18.0
Kaylo 10 22.0
Perlite/Celo-temp 1500 23.0
Polyurethane 4.0
Name Density
Styrofoam 3.0
Lining
The Lining Edit Dialog allows the user to input and edit the data of the lining, which is attached to the
current element.
Height/Length of Lining
Enter the height or length of the lining on this element. This value is used only to calculate the weight of
the lined section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the lined section will be taken at half this
height.
Note that if you have lining in a horizontal vessel the value entered in this cell will be the length of the
lined section.
Thickness of Lining
Enter the thickness of the lining or fireproofing. Note that the only distinction between insulation and
lining, from the program's point of view, is that insulation is on the OD of the element, while lining is on
the ID of the element. Therefore, use the insulation field to enter OD fireproofing, and the lining field to
enter ID fireproofing.
Density of Lining
Enter the density of the insulation, lining, or packing. The following table lists some typical densities,
shown in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
Name Density (lbs/ft3)
Alumina Brick 170.0
Fire Clay 130.0

Name Density (lbs/ft3)
High Alumina 130.0
Kaolin 135.0
Magnesite 180.0
Silica 110.0
Concrete 140.0
Cement 100.0
Half Pipe Jacket
Introduction
PVElite is capable of performing the analysis of half-pipe jackets in accordance with ASME Code, Section
VIII, Division 1 rules Appendix EE. The half-pipe jacket can be installed on cylindrical shells, and the
jacket pitch, total length and half-pipe nominal diameter are taken into account.
Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis
PVElite performs required thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure calculations for
cylindrical shells with half-pipe jackets attached. The module is based on the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. Specifically, the module is based on the rules in Paragraph EE-1,
Appendix EE.
It is important to note the limitations of the HALF-PIPE module. First, the half-pipe jacket analysis
performed is only valid for the cylindrical geometries shown in Figure EE-4. These are the only two
geometries addressed by paragraph EE-1. The second limitation with the HALF-PIPE analysis is the
acceptable Nominal Pipe Sizes. Appendix EE only includes charts for Nominal Pipe Sizes 2, 3, and 4.
Therefore, Nominal Pipe Sizes greater than 4 or less than 2 will not be accepted in the input. Although
there are no charts for Nominal Pipe Sizes 2.5 and 3.5, the HALF-PIPE Module will accept these sizes and
perform iterations between the given charts. Additionally, if the half-pipe is a nonstandard pipe size or has
a formed radius, the actual radius is used in the calculations.
The HALF-PIPE module takes full account of corrosion allowance. Actual thickness values and
corrosion allowances are entered, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition.
Figure A - Acceptable Geometries for the HALF-PIPE Module
Discussion of Input Data
Before attempting to add a half-pipe, ensure the component to which the half-pipe is to be attached is a
cylindrical shell; otherwise, PVElite will not be able to work.
Click to activate the Half Pipe Jacket Input screen.
Main Input Fields

Jacket Description
Enter a description that will be used in the report generated by PVElite.

Distance from "From" Node
Use the illustration below to enter the distance in this field.
Length along Shell of Jacket section
Enter the Length along the shell as illustrated above.
Pitch Spacing
Enter the pitch between the centers of adjacent half-pipes.
Jacket Design Temperature
Enter the Design Temperature of the half-pipe jacket (this is not necessarily the design temperature of the
parent shell).
Jacket Design Pressure
Enter the Design Pressure of the fluid inside the half-pipe jacket.
Jacket Material
Clicking enables users to select the desired material from the drop down list.
Jacket Corrosion Allowance
Enter the internal corrosion allowance of the half-pipe jacket.

Pipe Dimension from the PVElite Internal Pipe Dimension Database
Click Pipe... to display the Pipe Selection dialog and select a standard pipe.
Pipe Selection Dialog
Nominal Pipe Diameter (in)
Select the nominal diameter of the pipe.
Pipe Schedule
Select the pipe schedule number
Deduct Mill Tolerance from Thickness?
If the mill undertolerance (usually 12-1/2% on pipe thickness), then check this box. PVElite will then
reduce the thickness by the mill undertolerance.
For Users Preferring to Enter the Pipe Dimensions follow these instructions:
Jacket Thickness
Enter the actual half-pipe wall thickness.
Inside Radius of Formed Jacket / or / Nominal Pipe Size
The user is given the option of choosing a nominal pipe diameter from the PVElite internal pipe database,
or users may enter the actual internal radius of the half-pipe.
Nominal Pipe Size
This is an alternative drop down list box where users can select a standard pipe from the PVElite internal
pipe database.
Contents Specific Gravity
Enter the specific gravity (SG) of the fluid inside the half-pipe jacket. This value is used when PVElite
computes the vessel weights.
Calculator
Enables users to see the half-pipe analysis computation without having to analyze the whole vessel. A
mini-screen displays containing the calculation results, thus allowing the user to see where problems with
the design may exist.
6-1
C H A P T E R 6
Chapter 6: General Vessel Data
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................6-2
Design Data........................................................................6-2
Installation Options ............................................................6-8
Design Modification...........................................................6-11
Nozzle Design Modifications.............................................6-14
Wind & Seismic Data.........................................................6-16
Wind Data ..........................................................................6-16
ASCE Wind Data ...............................................................6-17
UBC Wind Data .................................................................6-19
NBC Wind Data .................................................................6-21
ASCE 95 Wind Data ..........................................................6-22
IS 875 Wind Code ..............................................................6-24
User-Defined Wind Profile ................................................6-26
Mexican Wind Code 1993..................................................6-27
British Wind Code BS-6399 ..............................................6-33
Seismic Data.......................................................................6-37
ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data ...................................................6-39
ASCE7-93 Seismic Data ....................................................6-41
UBC Seismic Data .............................................................6-42
NBC Seismic Data .............................................................6-43
India's Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and SCM........6-46
ASCE - 95 Seismic Data ....................................................6-47
Seismic Load Input in G's ..................................................6-48
UBC 1997 Earthquake Data ...............................................6-48
IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters ......................................6-50
Response Spectrum ............................................................6-52
Introduction
The information in the Design Constraint tab allows entry of global design data that the program will use
as defaults before the model is created. Depending on the design code, the information gathered here
might be slightly different, such as the hydrotest type, construction type and degree of radiography.
Design Data
Following is a discussion of the design data parameters that are used for overall vessel analysis:
General Vessel Data 6-3
Enter the specified design internal pressure for the vessel. This value is used as general design data and
also to set the UG-99(b) footnote 35 hydrotest pressure.
If the vessel is required to be rated for vacuum conditions, enter the design external pressure here. PVElite
will use this value as a default when the model is constructed.
Design Internal Temperature
This value is simply used by the input echo to help insure the correct design data was entered. The
analysis portion of the program does not use this value.
Design External Temperature
If the vessel is required to be rated for vacuum conditions, enter the design external pressure here. PVElite
will use this value as a default when the model is constructed.
Datum Line Distance
Enter the location of the datum line from the first elements from node. After this is done you can use the
list command to enter the locations of nozzles, platforms, etc. from the datum line.
Hydrotest Type
The Internal Pressure Calculations report from PVElite will list hydrotest pressures for all three test types
described below. It is important to properly identify the information requested throughout this input group.
That is, even though "Hydrotest Test Position," "Projection from Top," "Projection from Bottom," and
"Flange Distance to Top" are not used for ASME UG-99(b) or for ASME UG-99(b) footnote 35, these
data are necessary to report the proper hydrostatic test pressure for ASME UG-99(c).
Select the hydrotest type. The analysis program provides three different ways to determine hydrotest
pressure:
1 - ASME UG-99(b)
The hydrotest pressure will be 1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure for the vessel
multiplied by the lowest ratio of the stress value Sa for the test temperature to the stress value S for the
design temperature. This type of hydrotest is normally used for non-carbon steel vessels where the
allowable stress changes with temperature starting even at a somewhat low temperature.
2 - ASME UG-99(c)
Multiplying the minimum MAP by 1.3 and reducing this value by the hydrostatic head on that element or
flange will determine the hydrotest pressure. If the vessel is tested in the horizontal position, the
hydrostatic head will be based on the maximum shell diameter plus the "Projection from Top" plus the
"Projection from Bottom" specified later in this input group. If the vessel is tested in the vertical position
and a vessel element sets the minimum MAP, then the hydrostatic head is set by the distance of that
element from the top of the vessel plus the "Projection from Top." If the vessel is tested in the vertical
position and a flange has the minimum MAP, the hydrostatic head is composed of the "Flange Distance to
Top" plus the "Projection from Top."
3 - ASME UG-99(b) footnote 35
The hydrotest pressure will be 1.3 times the "Design Internal Pressure" specified at the beginning of this
input group, multiplied by the lowest ratio of the stress value Sa for the test temperature to the stress value
S for the design temperature.
Hydrotest Position
This input is required so that the total static head can be determined and subtracted in accordance with
UG-99(c). This field is used in conjunction with the Projection from Top, Projection from Bottom, and
Flange Distance to Top fields to determine the total static head.
Select one of the following Hydrotest Positions.
Hydrotest Position Description
Vertical The vessel would be tested in the upright or vertical position. Note that
not very many vessels are tested in the vertical position.
Horizontal This is the position for the majority of vessels tested. The vessel would
normally be on its side (in the case of a vertical vessel) or in its normal
position (for a horizontal vessel).
Projection from Top
Enter the distance from the outer surface of the vessel in its test position to the face of the highest flange
in the test position. This distance is added to the height (for vertical test positions) or to the maximum
diameter of the vessel (for horizontal test positions) to determine the static head for the UG-99(c)
hydrostatic test.
Projection from Bottom
Enter this distance from the outer surface of the vessel in its test position to the face of the lowest flange
in the test position. This distance is added to the height (for vertical test positions) or to the maximum
vessel diameter (for horizontal test positions) to determine the static head for the UG-99(c) hydrostatic
test.
Min. Metal Temperature
Enter the specified minimum design metal temperature for the vessel. This value is listed in the Internal
Pressure Calculations report for comparison with the calculated UCS-66 minimum temperature.
Flange Distance to Top
If a flange controls the MAP of the vessel, the hydrostatic head associated with that flange may be
important in determining the overall MAP of the vessel. The value entered here will be used by PVElite to
calculate the hydrostatic head at this point and adjust the UG-99(c) MAP for vertically tested vessels.
Once the controlling flange is identified (usually through a previous analysis) the distance from that flange
to the top of the vessel is entered in this field. If the vessel is to be tested in the vertical position in
accordance with UG-99(c), this value and the "Projection from Top" will be used to adjust hydrostatic test
pressure should a (the) flange govern.
Construction Type
Select the type of construction to be included on the name plate. This data is for information only; it is
reported in the input echo. Available types of construction are:
Type Description
Welded Welded
Pressure Welded Pressure Welded
Brazed Brazed
Resistance Welded Resistance Welded
Special Service
Select a type of special service in which the vessel will be used. This data is for information only; it is
reported in the input echo. Available types of special service are:
None None
Lethal Lethal Service
Unfired Steam Unfired Steam Boiler
Direct Firing Direct Firing
Non-stationary Non-stationary Pressure Vessel

Degree of Radiography
Select the symbolic representation of the degree of radiography. This data is for information only; it is
reported in the input echo. Options include:
ASME VIII-1 Description
RT-1 When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-
11(a) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have not
been applied.
RT-2 When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-
11(a)(5) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have
been applied.
RT-3 When the complete vessel satisfies the spot radiography requirements of UW-
11(b).
RT-4 When only part of the vessel has met the other category requirements, or
when none of the other requirements are applied.
Miscellaneous Weight
Many designers like to include extra weight to account for vessel attachments and internals not otherwise
included in the models. The total weight of the vessel is multiplied by 1.0 plus this percent (i.e., 1.03,
1.05). The two most common choices are 3.0 or 5.0.
Use Higher Longitudinal Stresses?
Checking this selection will increase the allowable stresses for vessel loads, which include wind or
earthquake by twenty percent. The ASME Code (Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-23(d)) allows
the allowable stress for the combination of earthquake loading, or wind loading with other loadings to be
increased by a factor of 1.2.
Hydrotest Allowable Un-modified
By default PVElite uses the hydrotest stress times the stress increase factor for occasional loads (times the
joint eff. on the tensile side). If you wish to use 90 percent of the material yield stress for the hydrostatic
test allowable, check the box to do so.
Consider Vortex Shedding?
For vertical vessels, which are susceptible to wind, induced oscillations check this field. This will cause
the program to compute fatigue stresses based on loads generated by wind flutter. The program will then
go on to compute the number of hours of safe operation remaining under the wind vibration conditions.
User Defined MAWP/MAPnc
Normally PVElite computes the MAWP and the MAPnc based on pressure ratings for the elements and
ANSI flanges. In some cases it may be necessary to override the program's generated results with a pre-
defined value.
If this value is zero it will be ignored by the program. This is the default behavior.
User Defined Hydrostatic Test Pressure
Normally the program computes the hydrostatic test pressure. It is then used to determine the stresses on
the elements when subjected to this pressure. If this value is greater than 0, PVElite will use this pressure
plus the applicable hydrostatic head, which will be computed, based on the hydrotest position. If this
value is 0, the program will use the computed value based on the hydrotest type and position.
Corroded Hydrotest?
By default PVElite uses the uncorroded wall thickness when the stresses on the elements during the
hydrotest are computed. In some cases it is necessary to hydrotest the vessel after it has corroded. If you
wish to use a corroded thickness in the calculations, check this box. Please note that longitudinal stresses
due to Hydrostatic test pressure will also be computed in a similar manner.
Is This a Heat Exchanger
If the Dimensional Solutions 3D file interface button is checked, PVElite will write out an ASCII text file
that contains the geometry and loading information for this particular vessel design. If this box is checked,
the program will simply write this data out to the Jobname.ini file created in the current working directory.
Hydrotest Allowable is 90 percent of Yield
If you wish to ignore using 1.3 times Sa for the allowable, then check this box. This applies only for
Division 1 vessel designs. Checking and un-checking this box will cause PVElite to recompute the
hydrotest allowable.
ASME Steel Stack
If you are designing a cylindrical ASME Steel Stack and wish to have PVElite analyze allowables and
stress combinations per ASME STS-2003(a), then check this box. Please note the design code must be set
to ASME VIII-1. Otherwise, the program will not attempt to analyze per STS-2003(a). Note that on the
grid, next to the ASME Steel Stack heading there is a list expansion button. When pressed it will either
collapse or expand the remaining stack entries. These are the ASCE wind exposure and the importance
factor. Please note that other wind codes can be used, but the exposure is a required entry.
Installation Options
The installation options shown below allow the specification of where the equipment such as platforms,
insulation, lining, etc. will be installed. This information is used to calculate the center of gravity of the
vessel in both the shop and the field (operating) positions.
Additionally, when computing such items as the fabricated weight, operating weight, empty weight, etc.,
PVElite will consider these detail weights as appropriate for the various weight cases.
Platform Area Calculation Method
PVElite uses the area of the platforms in the computation of forces that are applied to the vessel during the
wind loading analysis. Unfortunately, there is no standard method for computing the amount of area that a
platform provides for wind load calculations. Select one of the 4 options in the pull down box: This
selection will be used to compute the wind area for all platforms specified in this job.
Stiffener Type
For ASME VIII-1 and VIII-2 the program has the ability to determine the maximum stiffener spacing and
add rings to the model. If you have selected this position to model, it can select an appropriate stiffener
from the AISC or selected database. If you have a non-AISC database selected, be sure the selected
Stiffener type exists in the database. The stiffener types are:
Equal Angle
Unequal Angle (hard way shown)
Double Angles with large or small sides back to back
Channels
Wide Flanges
Structural Tees
Bar
For the bar ring design, the program will design a ring with an aspect ratio of 10 to 1.00.
The height of the ring is 10 times its thickness. The minimum ring width the program will start out with is
0.5 inches or 12mm.
For Angle Sections Rolled the Hard Way
If the stiffener above is an angle type, they are frequently rolled to have the strong axis of the ring
perpendicular to the vessel wall. If they are rolled the hard way check this box.
Bar Thickness to Use Designing
When the bar ring option is selected the program must have a thickness to use when computing a suitable
ring. For the ring design, the program will generate a ring with a 10 to 1 aspect ratio. In other words, the
width of the ring will be 10 times bigger.
This value can be left blank. If it is blank, the program will use a default thickness of 0.375 inches or 9
mm. When computing the ring width to meet the moment of inertia requirements.
Rigging Data
The rigging analysis calculates and locates the bending and shear stresses created during erection process.
Where the vessel is lifted from the horizontal position at two lifting points up to the vertical position
where the vessel is set onto the foundation. The safety of the maximum combined stresses is also analyzed
using the unity check method. This analysis however, does not evaluate the design of any rigging
attachment such as, lugs, shackles, cables etc
Rigging analysis is performed when the vessel is in the horizontal position where the combinations of
stresses are at its maximum. The torsional effect is not considered in this analysis. The vessel is erected
using two lifting points where the tail and lifting lugs are located. The design weight of the vessel is
calculated by multiplying the erected empty weight, including internals and externals, with an impact
factor to simulate the initial lift.
The rigging analysis reports the field and design weight of the vessel, the center of gravity, the reaction
forces at the lifting points, the location for the maximum bending and shear stresses, and the unity check.
As a comparison, the allowable bending (per UG-23) and shear (0.4 Sy @ ambient) stresses are also
reported, and can be plotted with the fore-mentioned parameters.
The stresses are calculated in 1 foot increments along the vessel taking into account the varying diameter
and thickness of the shell. A circular cross sectional shape is assumed throughout the vessel sections with
no corrosion allowance included for the thicknesses. Node numbering starts at the base of the vessel and
ends at the top section of the vessel where the straight line ended. For elliptical heads, the end node is the
end of the straight-line portion. Thus the total height of the vessel is the elevation of the last node.
Impact Factor
PVElite can perform a rigging (combined shear plus bending stress) analysis granted that the vessel has a
support such as a skirt and the impact factor and lug elevations defined.
When the vessel is lifted from the ground, it may be yanked suddenly. The impact factor takes this into
account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0, although values as high as 3.0 may be entered in. The
impact factor effectively increases the overall weight of the vessel by the impact factor. If you do not wish
to perform the rigging analysis, set the impact factor to 0.
Lug Distances from Base
You will have to enter two distances (one in each field) to perform the rigging analysis. These distances
are measured from the bottom of the vertical vessel or from the left end of the horizontal vessel. It does
not matter which dimension goes in which box. The lesser distance will be the minimum of the two
values.
Select from Standard Bar Ring List
If this box is checked and the program is set to add reinforcing rings during runtime, PVElite will check all
rings from smallest to largest and determine the minimum ring that will satisfy the moment of inertia
requirements per UG-29(a) or Appendix 1-5 or 1-8 in the case of cone cylinder junction ring design. A list
of sizes is shown in the table below:
Ring Thickness (in.) Ring Width (in.)
1/4 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 ...
3/16 2.5 ... ... ... ...
3/8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
1/2 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5

Ring Thickness (in.) Ring Width (in.)
5/8 5.0 6.0 ... ... ...
3/4 5.0 5.5 6.0 8.0 ...
7/8 6.0 8.0 ... ... ...
1 6.0 8.0 10. 11.0 ...

0
1.25 8.0 10.0 12. ... ...

0
1.5 8.0 10.0 12. ... ...

0
2 12.0 18.0 ... ... ...
4 30.0 ... ... ... ...
Saddle Calculation Option
Choose the appropriate option, Zick or PD-5500. Either option will work for any code.
Design Modification
Select Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure
If the user toggles on this button and the required element thickness for internal pressure exceeds the user's
finished thickness for the element, the program will increase the user's finished thickness to meet or
exceed the thickness required for internal pressure. PVElite will exceed the required thickness only if the
round off switch is activated in the program configuration (the round off will bump the thickness up to the
next 1/8 inch in English units or to the next millimeter in metric units). The program will perform this
calculation automatically as the model data is being typed in. Check this box before any part of the vessel
has been modeled. If the given thickness is greater than the required thickness, then the program will not
alter the given value.
Note that during the input phase, the program cannot check the required thickness for flanges. That check
will be performed during the analysis phase.
Select Wall Thickness for External Pressure
If this check box is checked the program will calculate the required thickness of each element (or group of
elements) and increase the given thickness appropriately for the external pressure. Note that if the user
selects this button, the program will not calculate stiffening rings for the external pressure.
After the analysis the program may prompt stating that the input file has been modified. If any of the
elements have been thickened, simply select "yes" to the prompt and your model will be updated with the
current changes.
Select Stiffening Rings for External Pressure
If the user toggles on this button, the program will calculate the location and size stiffening rings needed
for the external pressure. Note that if the user selects this button, the program will not modify thickness
for the external pressure.
After the analysis the program may prompt stating that the input file has been modified. If any rings have
been added, simply select "yes" to the prompt and your model will be updated with the current changes.
Please note that in order to do this the program computes the allowable length between stiffeners. This
result must come out to be some reasonable value. If the maximum stiffened is too small, the program will
not be able to add rings. In that case, you must increase the thickness of the shell and try the design again.
Also note that the heads must also be properly designed for external pressure. Please verify that the
thickness for external pressure is adequate.
Select Wall Thickness for Axial Stress
If the user toggles on this button he program will calculate the required thickness of each element (or
group of elements) for longitudinal loadings (wind, earthquake, weight of vertical vessels) and increase
the given thickness appropriately for the axial stress. PVElite will exceed the required thickness only if the
round off switch is activated in the program configuration (the round off will bump the thickness up to the
next 1/8 inch in English units or to the next millimeter in metric units).
Load Case
The program performs calculations for various combinations of internal pressure, external pressure,
hydrotest pressure, wind load, and seismic load. You can define up to twelve combinations of these
loadings for the program to evaluate. Load cases are defined by a string that shows the loads to be added,
i.e. "IP+OW+WI", which would be the sum of internal pressure plus operating weight plus wind. Typical
definitions for the load cases are shown below, followed by the definition of the load case abbreviations:
Where:
Load Case Abbreviations
NP No Pressure
IP Internal Pressure
EP External Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
EW Empty Weight
OW Operating Weight
Load Case Abbreviations
HW Hydrotest Weight
WI Wind Load
EQ Earthquake Load
HE Hydrotest Earthquake
HI Hydrotest Wind
WE Wind Bending Empty New and Cold
WF Wind Bending Filled New and Cold
CW Axial Weight Stress New and Cold
FS Axial Stress due to Applied Axial Forces (Seismic Case)
FW Axial Stress due to Applied Axial Forces (Wind Case)
BW Bending Stress due to Lat. Forces for the Wind Case, Corroded
BS Bending Stress due to Lat. Forces for the Seismic Case, Corroded
BN Bending Stress due to Lat. Forces for the Wind Case, UnCorroded
BU Bending Stress due to Lat. Forces for the Seismic Case, UnCorroded
If you checked the box to perform vortex shedding calculations, the following load case descriptors may
be used:
Load Case Descriptors
VO Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Ope)
VE Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Emp)
VF Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Test No CA.)
The live loads (wind and earthquake) are calculated for two conditions - operating and hydrotest. In both
cases, the basic loads calculated are identical but the hydrotest live loads are usually a fraction of the
operating live load. These hydrostatic fractions (percents) are entered in the live load definitions.
Nozzle Design Modifications
PVElite has three mutually exclusive options for determination of the pressure where the nozzle is located.
The fourth design option allows reinforcing calculations for the geometry to be made in the new and cold
condition helping to satisfy hydrotest requirements. The last option deals with compliance with nozzle
design for wind and seismic considerations. Check the option(s) you wish the program to use.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, M.A.W.P. + Static Head
This option computes the internal pressure on the nozzle on the bottom of the element where the nozzle is
located. This pressure is the MAWP of the vessel plus the static head to the bottom of that element. Thus,
the design pressure can vary for nozzles located on different elements. This option is OK to use if you
know for certain that your nozzle locations will not vary during the design process. If you use this option
and a nozzle is lowered in the vessel and under additional pressure due to liquid head, you need to rerun
the analysis in order to determine if your nozzle geometry is satisfactory.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, Design Pressure + Static Head
This option computes the exact internal pressure at the nozzle location. Normally, this option would be
used for re-rating vessels. This would allow one to get the exact results for each nozzle, because the static
head on each nozzle is computed on an individual basis.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Design Pressure, Overall MAWP + Static Head
This option computes one single design internal pressure for all of the nozzles located on the vessel. If the
nozzle location on a vessel changes due to a client request, there would be no need to rerun nozzle
calculations since the pressure used in the calculations would not change. This design option is ideal for
designing new vessels.
Nozzle Design Modifications, Consider MAP nc in Analysis
Some design specifications require that nozzle reinforcement calculations be performed for the MAP new
and cold condition. PVElite will check to see if the nozzle is reinforced adequately using the MAPnc
generated during the internal pressure calculations. When the area of replacement calculations is made for
this case, cold allowable stresses are used and the corrosion allowance is set to 0. Designing nozzles for
this case helps the vessel to comply with UG99 or appropriate (hydrotest) requirements. Check your
design requirements to see if your client requires this case.
Modify Tr Based on the Maximum Stress Ratio
Some Nozzle designs need to comply with ASME Section VIII Division 1 paragraph UG-22 that deals
with supplemental loadings. One factor in ASME nozzle design is the required thickness of the shell (tr).
Usually internal pressure (hoop stress) governs. In some cases, such as when a nozzle is located on a shell
course at the bottom of a tall tower, longitudinal stresses will govern. In this case the shell required
thickness must be based on longitudinal stresses and not the hoop stress. If you check this option, PVElite
will look at all of the defined load cases and select the highest stress ratio. It will then use this number as a
multiplier on the shell thickness. Thus the nozzle design is based on the precise loading at the bottom of
that shell course.
Note Optionally, for full replacement options, you can type in your own value of tr for each nozzle. That
value will override this directive.
Consider Code Case 2168 for Nozzle Design
For Div. 1 nozzles of integral construction, the Code in Code Case 2168 allows a different set of rules to
be used from those in UG-37. It if is within the project specifications to use these rules check this box.
Redesign Pads to Reinforce Openings
If this box is checked and pad defined geometries are inadequately reinforced, PVElite will determine the
diameter and thickness of the pad required to reinforce the opening. If the program has changed the pad
data during the analysis, it will prompt you to reload the file so that you can view the new changes. Note
that this functionality is restricted to ASME VIII analysis at this time.
Wind & Seismic Data
The Wind data is available when the wind tab is pressed. The seismic data works in the same manner.
Wind Data
Wind Design Code
Select one wind of the design codes:
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1) The
program implements ASCE 7-93.
UBC Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition.
NBC National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edition.
User Defined Instead of supplying the wind parameters required by the above codes, the user
Wind Profile. may specify the elevation vs. wind pressure directly.
ASCE- The American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 1995/1998. This revision
1995/98 includes a new calculation for the gust factor as well as the wind pressure at
height Z. These calculations are based on a 3 second gust.
Mexico 1993 Mexico's National Wind Code
BS-6399 1997 Standard Wind Code of Britain, replaces CP3
AS/NZ Design Wind Code of Australia and New Zealand, 2002 edition
Euro Code This is the Design Wind Code for several European Countries including
France.
IS-875 This is India's National Standard Wind design code. The year of this code is
1987.
The remaining wind load data required by PVElite changes based on which Wind Design Code is selected.
These data requirements are reviewed here according to the design code specification.
ASCE Wind Data
Design Wind Speed
Enter the design value of the wind speed. These will vary according to geographical location and
according to company or vendor standards. Typical wind speeds range from 85 to 120 miles per hour.
Enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following, since the wind design
pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE-7 Exposure Factor:
Entry Definition
1 Exposure A, Large city centers
2 Exposure B, Urban and suburban

areas
3 Exposure C, Open terrain
4 Exposure D, Flat unobstructed coastal

areas
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height of each point in
the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a pedestal foundation, or on top of
another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pressures than if it were mounted at grade.
Percent Wind for Hydrotest
Enter the fraction of the wind load (not wind speed) that will be applied during the hydrotest. This is
typically as low as one-third the design wind load, since it can be assumed that the vessel will not be
hydrotested during a hurricane or severe storm.
ASCE 7-93 Importance Factor
Enter the value of the importance factor that you wish the program to use. Please note the program will
use this value directly without modification.
In general this value ranges from .95 to 1.11. It is taken from Table 5 of the ASCE standard.
100 mi. from < 100 mi. from

Category Hurricane Hurricane Oceanline
Oceanline
I 1.00 1.05
II 1.07 1.11
III 1.07 1.11
IV 0.95 1.00
Category Classification
I Buildings and structures not listed below
II Buildings and structures where more than 300 people congregate in

one area.
III Buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals etc.
IV Buildings and structures that represent a low hazard in the event of a

failure.
Note that most petrochemical structures are Importance Category I.

ASCE Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE-7 Roughness Factor (from ASCE 7-93, Table 12 Force Coefficients
for Chimneys, Tanks, and Similar Structures, Cf)
Entry Definition
1 Round, moderately smooth
2 Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02)
3 Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)
Where: D' is the depth of protruding elements such as ribs and spoilers and D is the diameter or least
horizontal dimension.
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some designers use a
value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc. instead of either entering them
explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind diameter. The value Cf will vary
between 0.5 and 1.2 depending on the type of surface and height to diameter ratio.
UBC Wind Data
Design Wind Speed
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the UBC Exposure Factor as defined in Section 2312:
Entry Definition
2 Exposure B, Terrain with buildings, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet

or more in height covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one
mile or more from the site.
3 Exposure C, Terrain that is flat and generally open, extending one-half

mile or more from the site in any full quadrant.
Entry Definition
4 Exposure D, The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80

m.p.h. or more. Terrain, which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies
of, water over one mile or more in width relative to any quadrant of the
building site. This exposure extends inland from the shoreline 1/4 mile or
10 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set the Gust Factor
Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
Base Elevation
UBC Wind Importance Factor
Enter the value of the UBC Importance Factor. Please note the program will use this value directly
without modification.
This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard:
Entry Definition
1.15 Category I: Essential facilities
1.15 Category II: Hazardous facilities
1.0 Category III: Special occupancy structures
1.0 Category IV: Standard occupancy structures
Most petrochemical structures have an Importance Factor of 1.0. The four Occupancy Categories (I-IV)
are defined in Table 23-K of the code.
NBC Wind Data
Design Wind Speed
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the NBC Exposure Factor:
Entry Definition
1 Exposure A, open or standard exposure
2 Exposure B, urban and suburban areas
3 Exposure C, centers of large cities
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure factors are
reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Base Elevation
Critical Damping Ratio
The dynamic gust evaluation in NBC requires that the user assign a critical damping ratio for the tower.
NBC recommends the use of the value 0.0016 (dimensionless) for tall metal unlined stacks, but says that
these values will go up for shorter towers. We recommend the following:
Entry Definition
0.0016 For tall towers ( L/D > 7 )

0.0032 For moderately tall towers
0.0064 For short towers ( L/D < 1) or horizontal
Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the NBC Roughness Factor as found in Figure B-15.
Entry Definition
1 Round, moderately smooth surface
2 Round, rough surface (rounded ribs, h = 2%d)
3 Round, very rough surface (sharp ribs, h = 8%d)
explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind diameter.
ASCE 95 Wind Data
Design Wind Speed
Base Elevation
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE Exposure Factor:

Entry Definition
1 Exposure A, large city centers
2 Exposure B, urban and suburban areas
3 Exposure C, open terrain
4 Exposure D, flat unobstructed coastal areas
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure factors are
reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Importance Factor
This value varies between .087 and 1.15 and is found in Table 6-2 of ASCE 95.
Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the Roughness Factor as found in Table 6-7:
Entry Definition
1 Round, moderately smooth surface
2 Round, rough surface
3 Round, very rough surface
explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an increased wind diameter.
Height of Hill (H)
Height of Hill or Escarpment relative to the upwind terrain.
Distance to Site (x)
Enter the distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest to the building site
Height above Ground
ASCE defines this value as height above local ground level.

Crest Distance
This is the distance upwind of the crest where the difference in ground elevation is half the hill or
escarpment height.
Type of Hill
0 - none
1 - 2-D ridge
2 - 2-D escarpment
3 - 3-D axisymmetric hill
Damping Factor
Enter the structural damping coefficient (percentage of critical damping). The damping factor is used in
the calculation of the gust response factor. Additionally, if you wish to run another case empty or filled (or
both), specify the values of the damping factor (beta) for these cases. By entering these values PVElite will
compute the gust response factor for each case and the subsequent wind loads. The results will be
displayed in the Wind Load Calculation and Wind Shear and Bending reports.
Technical Note: Computation of h/d from table 6-7.
For vessels that have a constant diameter the value of h/d is straightforward. The ratio is merely the total
height of the vessel divided by the insulated outside diameter. This computation is more difficult for
vessels of more than 1 diameter (i.e.: vessels that have cones). The first step is to compute the total height
h. Next the total cross sectional area of the vessel is computed. To get a properly weighted value for h/d
we square the maximum height and divide by the total area. Finally to get Cf we index into the table as
needed and interpolate for the final value. If you have a shape factor specified and do not wish to use the
computed value, specify your own shape factor in the Tools, Configuration option from the Main Menu.
IS 875 Wind Code
Base Elevation
Wind Zone Number
India is divided into 6 wind zones. Refer to figure 1 in the IS-875 code to determine which wind zone the
vessel will operate in. The program will gather the basic wind speed based on the zone. However, this
value can be overridden by typing in a basic wind speed in the Design Wind Speed field.
Risk Factor
This is the value of K1 and it varies between 1.05 and 1.08 depending on which zone has been entered
above.
Terrain Category
The terrain category varies between 1 and 4.
Category 1
Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions including open sea coasts and treeless plains.
Category 2
Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights between 1.5 to 10 meters. This category is
generally used for design purposes.
Category 3
This is terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions, which have buildings up to 10 M in height. This
includes well-wooded areas, towns and industrial areas fully or partially developed.
Category 4
Terrain consisting of large closely spaced obstructions. This category includes large urban centers and
well developed industrial centers.
Equipment Class
This field accepts a value of 1, 2, or 3.
Class A - 1
Class B - 2
Class C - 3
Consider Gust Response Factor
If you wish to include the gust response factor per IS-875, check this box. However, since this factor
increases the wind load 3 to 6 times, it may lead to a very conservative wind design.
User-Defined Wind Profile
Wind Profile Data
With this selection, PVElite will forego all code calculations and simply use the user's profile of height
versus wind pressure. Enter the profile in the area below the standard wind design code data. Enter the
height above grade (in length units) in the left cell, and the wind pressure at that height in the right cell. If
you have more cells available than you need to describe the profile, simply enter zeros in all the remaining
cells. Zero elevation corresponds to the bottom of the skirt or leg supports for a vertical vessel and to the
bottom of the saddle, which supports a horizontal vessel.
Note When entering this data, you need to multiply the wind pressure at each elevation by the shape
factor you wish to use. If you do not do this, your wind loads will be higher (conservative) than they really
are.
The first Elevation field should not be zero. If it is zero the program will not compute the wind loads on
the following elements. The input should follow the convention below.
Mexican Wind Code 1993
Design Wind Speed
Base Elevation
Párrafo 4.6.1
Tabla 1.1 CATEGORIA DEL TERRENO SECUN SU RUGOSOIDAD
Cat. Descripción Ejemplos Limitaciones
Terreno abierto, Franjas costeras planas, La longitud mínima de este

prácticamente piano zonas de pentanos, Campos tipo de terreno en la dirección
y sin obstrucciones aéreos, pastizales y tierras de del viento debe ser de 2000 m
1
cultivo sin setos o bardas 0 10 veces la altura de las
alrededor. Superficies construcción por diseñar, la
nevadas planas que sea mayor.
Terreno plano u Campos de cultivo o gran jas Las obstrucciones tienen

ondulado con pocas con pocas obstrucciones Alturas de 1.5 a 10 m, en una
2 obstrucciones tales como setos o bardas longitud mínima d 1500 m.
alrededor, árboles y
construcciones dispersas
Terreno cubierto por Áreas urbanas, suburbanas y Las obstrucciones presentan

numerosas de bosques, o cualquier Alturas de 3 a 5 m. La
obstrucciones terreno con numerosas longitud mínima de este tipo
estrechamente obstrucciones estrechamente de terreno en la dirección del
3
espaciadas espaciadas. El tamaño de las viento debe ser de 500 m o 10
construcciones corresponde veces la altura de la
al de las casas y viviendas. construcción, la que sea
mayor.
Terreno con Centros de grandes ciudades Por lo menos el 50% de los

numerosas y complejos industriales bien edificios tiene una altura
obstrucciones largas, desarrollados. mayor que 20 m. Las
allas y obstrucciones miden de 10 a
estrechamente 30 m de altura. La longitud
4
espaciadas mínima de este tipo de
terreno en la dirección del
viento debe se la mayor entre
400 m y 10 veces la altura de
la construcción.
Párrafo 4.6.2 MAPAS DE ISOTACAS VELOCIDAD REGIONAL, VR
La velocidad regional del viento, VR, es la máxima velocidad media probable de presentarse con un cierto
periodo de recurrencia en una zona o región determinada del país.
En los mapas de isotacas que se incluyen en este inciso con diferentes periodos de retorno, dicha
velocidad se refiere a condiciones homogéneas que corresponden a una altura de 10 metros sobre la
superficie del suelo en terreno piano (Categoría 2 según la tabla I.1); es decir, no considera alas
características de rugosidad locales del terreno ni la topografía especifica del sitio. Asimismo, dicha
velocidad se asocial con ráfagas de 3 segundos y toma en cuenta lo posibilidad de que se presenten vientos
debidos a huracanes en las zonas coteras.
La velocidad regional, VR, se determina tomando en consideración tanto la localización geográfica del
sitio de desplante de la estructura como su destino.
En las figures I.1 a I.4 se muestran los mapas de isotacas regionales correspondientes a periodos de
recurrencia de 200, 50 y 10 anos, respectivamente.
La importancia de las estructuras (vease el inciso 4.3) dictamina los periodos de recurrencia que deberán
considerarse para el diseño por viento; de esta manera, los Grupos A, B y C se asocian con los periodos de
retorno de 200, 50 y 10 anos, respectivamente. El sitio de desplante se localizara en el mapa con el
periodo de recurrencia que corresponde al grupo al que pertenece la estructura a fin de obtener la
velocidad regional. En el Tomo III de Ayudas de diseño se presenta un tabla con las principales ciudades
del país y sus correspondientes velocidades regionales para diferentes periodos de retorno.
Párrafo 4.6.3 FACTOR DE EXPOSICION, FL
El coeficiente Fg refleja la variación de la velocidad del viento con respecto a la altura Z. Asismo,
considera el tamaño de la construcción o de los elementos de recubrimiento y las características de
exposición o de los elementos de recubrimiento y las característica de exposición.
El factor de exposición se calcula con siguiente expresión:
F" = FC FRZ
en donde:
FC= se el factor que determina la influencia del tamaño de la construcción,

adimensional, y
FRZ= el factor que establece la variación de la velocidad del viento con la altura
Z en función de la rugosidad del terreno de los alrededores,
adimensional.
Los coeficientes FC y FRZ se definen en los incisos 4.6.3.1 y 4.6.3.2, respectivamente.
Párrafo 4.6.3.1 to 3 Factor de tamaño, FC L N O
El factor de tamaño, FC, es el que toma en cuenta el tiempo el que la ráfaga del viento actúa de manera
efectiva sobre una construcción de dimensiones dadas. Considerando la clasificación de las estructuras
según su tamaño (vease la tabla I.2), este factor puede determinarse de acuerdo con la tabla I.3.
Clase de estructura FC
A 1.0
B 0.95
C 0.90
Tabla I.4 VALORES DE L N O
Clase de estructura
Categoría de
terreno
A B C L
1 0.099 0.101 0.105 245
2 0.128 0.131 0.138 315
3 0.156 0.160 0.171 390

4 0.170 0.177 0.193 455
hi - es la altura, media a partir del nivel del terreno de desplante, por encima de la cual la variación de la
velocidad del viento no es importante y se puede suponer constante; a esta altura se le conoce como altura
gradiente; h y Z están dadas en metros, y giel exponente que determina la forma del la variación de la
velocidad del viento con la altura y es adimensional.
g - Los coeficientes g j h están en función de la rugosidad terreno (tabla I.1) [see above please]. En la
tabla I.4 se consignan los valores que se aconsejan para estos coeficientes. En la figura III.1 del tomo de
Ayudas de diseño se muestra la variación del factor Fg con la altura, con la categoría del terreno y con la
clase de estructura.
Párrafo 4.5.4 FACTOR DE TOPGRAFIA, FT
Este factor toma en cuenta el efecto topográfico local del sitio en donde se desplantara la estructura. Así,
por ejemplo, si la construcción se localiza en las laderas o cima de colina o montanas de altura importante
con respecto al nivel general del terreno de los alrededores, es muy probable que se generen aceleraciones
del flujo del viento y, por consiguiente, deberá incrementarse la velocidad regional.
Tabla I.5 FACTOR DE TOPOGRAFIA LOCAL FT
Sitios Topografía FT
Base de promontorios y faldas de serranías del lado de sotavento. 0.8

Protegidos
Valles cerrados. 0.9
Terreno prácticamente plano, campo abierto, ausencia de cambios
Normales 1.0
topográficos importantes, con pendientes menores que 5%.
Terrenos inclinados con pendientes entre 5 y 10%, valles abiertos y

1.1
litorales planos.
Expuestos Cimas de promontorios, Colinas o montanas, terrenos con pendientes
mayores que 10%, cañadas cerradas y valles que formen un embudo o 1.2
canon, islas.
Expertos en la material deberán justificar y validar ampliamente los resultados de cualquiera de estos
procedimientos.
Párrafo 4.6.5 P LA RELACION ENTRE LOS VALORES DE LA ALTITUD hm
Altitud (msnm) Presión barométrica (mm de Hg)
0 760
500 720
1000 675
1500 635
2000 600
2500 565
3000 530
3500 495
Nota: Puede Interpolarse para valores intermedios de la altitud, hm.

Párrafo 4.8.2.12 COEFICIENTE DE ARRASTRE Ca PARA CHIMENEAS Y TORRES
COEFICIENTE DE ARRASTRE Ca
Relación H/b
Sección transversal Tipo de superficie
1 7 25 N40
Lisa o poco rugosa (d’/b k

0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7
0.0)
Rugosa (d’/b k
Circular (bVd l 6 m2/s) 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.2
0.02)
Muy rugosa (d’/b k

0.8 1.0 1.2 1.2
0.08)
Circular (bVd < 6 m2/s) Cualquiera 0.7 0.8 1.2 1.2
Hexagonal u octagonal Cualquiera 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.4
Cuadrada (viento normal a

Cualquiera 1.3 1.4 2.0 2.2
una cara)
Cuadrada (viento sobre una

Cualquiera 1.0 1.1 1.5 1.6
esquina)
1 b es el diámetro o la dimensión horizontal de la estructura, incluyendo la rugosidad de lo pared; para

determinar el producto bVD, este diámetro será el que se localiza a dos tercios de la altura total, a
partir del nivel del terreno, en m.
2 d’ es la dimensión que sobresale de las rugosidades, tales como costillas o “spoilers”, en m.
3 VD es la velocidad del viento de diseño (inciso 4.8), convertida a m/s, y valuada para los dos tercios
de la altura total.
4 Para valores intermedios de H/b y d’/b se permite la interpolación lineal.
Párrafo 4.9.3.2 LAS VARIABLES o’ p h:
Tabla I.29 FACTORES Q’ S
Categoría 1 2 3 4
o’ 1.224 1.288 1.369 1.457
p -.032 -.054 -.096 -0.151

h 245 315 390 455
Las variables o’ p h, adimensionales, dependen de la rugosidad del sitio de desplante, y h es la altura

gradiente en m. Estas variables se definen en la tabla I.29.
Las variables kr q
kr es un factor relacionado con la rugosidad del terreno:

Para terrenos con gatería 1 = 0.06,
Para terrenos con gatería 2 = 0.10,
Para terrenos con gatería 3 = 0.06, y
Para terrenos con gatería 4 = 0.06
5 6es el coeficiente de amortiguamiento critico:
Para construcciones formadas por marcos de acero = 0.01, y para aquellas formadas por
marcos de concreto = 0.02.
VALORES DE L’ kR
Categoría de terreno a' kR
1 0.13 0.06
2 0.18 0.08
3 0.245 0.10
4 0.31 0.14
VALORES DE T
Nota: Q
Para construcciones formadas por marcos de acero 0.01
Para aquellas formadas por marcos de concreto 0.02
British Wind Code BS-6399
British Wind Code BS-6399-97
BS 6399-97 - The British Wind Code - Loadings for buildings - Part 2: Code of practice for wind loads.
The year of issuance of this code is 1997 and it replaces CP3.
Design Wind Speed - Vb
Design wind speeds vary according to geographical location and to company or vendor standards. Wind
speed units are calculated in miles per hour and/or meters per seconds and are only relevant to the United
Kingdom. Typical wind speeds display in Figure 6 of BS 6399. The wind speeds vary from 20 m/sec to
31 m/sec (44.7 mph to 69.3 mph). Users should enter the lowest value reasonably allowed by the
standards you are following, since the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the
speed.
Site Elevation - Delta s
If the site altitude is above mean sea level (paragraph 2.2.2.2 of the code), then this value plus the Base
Elevation is used to calculate the height of each point in the vessel above mean seal level. For example, if
the vessel is installed on a site that is 100 m (328 ft) above seal level, it is exposed to a higher wind
pressure (P) than if installed on the beach (at mean sea level).
Upwind Building Height (Obstruction Height) - Ho
For buildings in town terrain, enter the average height of the building upwind of the vessel (as they tend to
shield the vessel from the wind). To be conservative, this value can be zero, so the vessel takes the full
force of the wind. Ho is used to modify the effective vessel wind height (He) for any vessel element. For
more information see paragraph 1.7.3.3 of BS-6399.
Upwind Building Spacing - X
For buildings in town terrain, enter the average spacing of the buildings upwind of the vessel (as they tend
to shield the vessel from the wind). If the buildings are closer together, they provide greater protection
from the wind. For more information see paragraph 1.7.3.3 of BS-6399.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value plus the Site Elevation is used to calculate the
height of each point in the vessel above mean sea level.
Vessel Location
Enter the location where the vessel is installed. Table 4 of BS-6399 factors modify the wind velocity. The
final wind pressure acting on any element of the vessel is determined by the distance from the coast,
whether located in the country or a town, and the effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is
calculated by PVElite internally.
Distance to Coast Line
Enter the distance the vessel is located from the coast in kilometers. This distance affects the corrected
wind speed (Ve). Table 4 of BS-6399 factors modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on
any element of the vessel is determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the country or a
town, and the effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by PVElite internally.
External Wind Coefficient - cpe
Enter the external wind coefficient. This value is taken from Table 7 of BS-6399. Typical values usually
range from 0.60 to 0.80 depending on the H / D ratio of the vessel. Because of the complexity of the
vessel configurations, (platforms, piping added equipment etc.), users must use discernment or consult an
authority on this subject.
Factor Kb from Table 1 - Kb
This is the 'Building-type factor Kb' taken from Table 1 of BS-6399. PVElite automatically defaults to 2,
but other values may be selected. Please note the following limitations of Kb based on the vessel height:
Kb Maximum Vessel Total Height
8 23 m (75.4 ft)
4 75m (246 ft)
2 240m (787 ft)
1 300m (984 ft)
0.5 300m (984 ft)
Of course designing towers over 75 meters in height is not likely, and even so many other things would
need to be considered.
BS 6399 Table 1. Building-Type Factor Kb
Kb Building Type
8 Welded Steel unclad frames
4 Bolted steel and reinforced concrete unclad frames
2 Portal sheds and similar light structures with few internal walls
Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs only (e.g.
1
office buildings of open plan or with partitioning)
Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs with
0.5 additional masonry subdivision walls (e.g. apartment buildings), building
of masonry construction and timber-framed housing
Annual Probability Factor - Q
The default value is Q = 0.02. This value is used to calculate the final probability factor (Sp) associated
with the likelihood of high velocity gusts occurring over a designated time period. The code sets 0.02 as a
'standard value' for a mean recurrence value of 50 years. For more information refer to Annex D of
BS6399.
Q Explanation
NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual

0.632
maximum value. (Sp = 0.749)
NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for
0.227 loads for the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is f
= 1.0, giving Sp = Sqrt(1 / 1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845)
NOTE 3: The standard design value, corresponding to a mean

0.02
recurrence interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.000)
NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean

0.0083
recurrence interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048)
NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor

for loads, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1754 years.
0.00574 Back-calculated assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is
f = 1.4 and all risk is ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp =
Sqrt(1.4))
NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a

0.001 mean recurrence interval of 10000 (yes that is ten thousand) years. (Sp
= 1.263)
Seasonal Factor - Ss
BS6399 in paragraph 2.2.2.4 states: ' ..For permanent buildings and buildings exposed for continuous
periods of more than 6 months a value of 1.0 should be used for Ss..' PVElite uses 1.0 as the default value
for this reason. Using a value of less than 1.0 is not recommended, or should only be used with a solid
researched.
Directional Factor - Sd
This value is taken from Table 3 of BS-6399. Because a tower is symmetrical about its central axis, the
default value has been taken as 1.0. It is recommended that this value not be reduced other than for
exceptional circumstances. For more information consult Table 3. The values in that table range between
0.73 and 1.00.
Seismic Data
Seismic Design Code
Select the design code to use for seismic calculations:

ASCE-88 American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1) released
in 1988.
ASCE-93 American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1) released
in 1993. The new ASCE 7 earthquake standards released in 1993 are significantly
more involved than the previous standards, and are also more strictly limited to
buildings, and thus not as easily applied to vessels. Temporarily the program does
not implement the complete dynamic analysis according to this standard.
However the program does address the computation of the element mass
multiplier as outlined on page 62 of the standard. In effect, the factors Av, Cc, P,
and ac are multiplied together and then by the weight of the element to obtain the
lateral force on the element. The program then computes the moments on the
tower based on these results. One should have a good understanding of this code
before using it.
UBC Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition.
NBC National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edition.
IS-1893 RSM India's seismic design code based on the response spectrum method.
IS-1893 SCM India's seismic design code based on the seismic coefficient method.
ASCE-95 American Society of Civil Engineers 1995 edition. The methodology of this
calculation is very similar to other earthquake codes. Essentially the base shear is
computed based on paragraph 9.2.3.4 and the paragraphs, which proceed it. The
base shear is then distributed to the elements according to the equation 9.2.3.4-2
on page 70 of the standard.
UBC97 Uniform Building Code. The 1997 version of this code is implemented.
G Loading Acceleration of the vessel based on a fraction of gravity.
ASCE 7-98/02 American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1) released
in 1998.
IBC-2000 International Building Code released in 2000.
Mexico Sismo Seismic Design per Mexico's Manual De Diseno Por Sismo
Response The response spectrum analysis allows the use of modal time history analysis. The
Spectrum general design guidelines for this analysis are taken from the ASCE 7-98 or IBC
2000 Codes. Other predefined spectra are built into the program, such as the 1940
Earthquake El Centro and various spectra from the United States National
Regulatory Commission Guide 1.60. If the spectrum analysis type is user-
defined, the table of points that define the response spectra must be entered in the
table, in the appropriate units. For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more
accurate calculation than the typical static equivalent method. Usually the
computed loads are lower in magnitude than those computed using the
conventional Building Code techniques.
ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data
Importance Factor
Enter the value of ASCE 7-88 Importance Factor. Please note the program will use this value directly
This value is taken from Table 22, Occupancy Importance Factor, I (Earthquake Loads) of the ASCE
standard. Building categories are defined in Table1 of the standard.
Entry Definition
1.00 Category I: Buildings not listed

below
1.25 Category II: High occupancy

buildings
1.50 Category III: Essential facilities
0.00 Category IV: Low hazard buildings
Note that most petrochemical structures are Importance I.
Soil Type
Enter an integer indicating the Soil Profile Coefficient, S found in Table 24 of the standard. Soil Profiles
are identified in Section 9.4.2 of the standard. Note that where soil properties are not known, soil profiles
S2 or S3 shall be used, whichever produces the larger value of CS. (C is defined in Eq. 8 of the standard.)
Entry Definition
1 Soil Profile S1: Rock or stiff soil conditions (S Factor = 1.0)
2 Soil Profile S2: Deep cohesion less deposits or stiff clay

conditions (S Factor = 1.2)
3 Soil Profile S3: Soft- to medium-stiff clays and sands (S Factor

= 1.5)
Horizontal Force Factor
Enter the seismic force factor per ANSI A58.1 Table 24. Typical values for this factor are as follows:
Entry Definition
1.33 Buildings with bearing walls
1.00 Buildings with frame systems
2.50 Elevated tanks
2.00 Other structures
Note that the value most often used is 2.0, though 2.5 is sometimes chosen for tanks supported by
structural steel or legs.
Percent Seismic for Hydrotest
Enter the percent of the total seismic horizontal force, which is to be applied during hydrotest. Although
you can not predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some designers use a reduced seismic load for
hydrotest on the theory that the odds of an earthquake during the test are very low, and the hazards of a
water release small.
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See ASCE 7-88 Figures 14 & 15 to select the appropriate zone.
Values for Seismic Coefficient, Z are found in Table 21 of the standard.
Zone Definition
0 Zone 0: Gulf coast and prairies. (Z = 1/8)
1 Zone 1: Rockies and Appalachian areas. (Z = 3/16)
2 Zone 2: New England, Carolinas, Ozarks, valley

area west of the Rockies and the Pacific
Northwest. (Z = 3/8)
3 Zone 3: Sierras. (Z = 3/4)
4 Zone 4:California fault areas. (Z = 1)
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 4 indicates the greatest chance of an
earthquake.
ASCE7-93 Seismic Data
Seismic Coefficient Av
Enter Av, the seismic coefficient representing the effective peak velocity-related acceleration from Section
9.1.4.1 of the code. This value may be obtained from the map on pages 36 and 37 of the standard. In
general this value ranges from 0.05 (low incidence of earthquake) to 0.4 (high incidence of earthquake).
Seismic Coefficient Cc
Enter Cc, the system seismic coefficient for mechanical and electrical components from Table 9.8-2 on
page 63 of the code. For tanks, vessels and heat exchangers this value is normally taken as 2.0.
Performance Criteria Factor P
Enter P, the performance criteria factor from Table 9.8-2 on page 63 of the code. This factor depends on
the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group, which is defined in Section 9.1.4.2 of the standard.
Entry Definition
1.5 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group III: Essential facilities required

for post-earthquake recovery
1.0 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group II: Buildings that have a

substantial public hazard due to occupancy or use
0.5 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group I: All other buildings
Amplification Factor ac
Enter ac, the attachment amplification factor determined in accordance with ASCE 7-93 Table 9.8-3.
Values for this entry may be 1.0 or 2.0 depending on the relationship between the fundamental period of
the vessel and the fundamental period of its supporting structure.
UBC Seismic Data
Importance Factor
This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard:
Entry Definition
1.25 Category I: Essential facilities
1.25 Category II: Hazardous facilities
1.00 Category III: Special occupancy

structures
1.00 Category IV: Standard occupancy

structures
Note that most petrochemical structures have an Importance Factor of 1.0.
Soil Type
Select the soil type (S1 to S4) defined in Table 23-J of the code. Note that where soil properties are not
known, soil profile S3 shall be used.
Soil Definition
1 Soil Profile S1:Rock (S Factor = 1.0)
2 Soil Profile S2:Dense or stiff soil (S Factor = 1.2)
3 Soil Profile S3:Not more than 40 ft. of soft clay (S Factor = 1.5)
4 Soil Profile S4:More than 40 ft. of soft clay (S Factor = 12.0)
Horizontal Force Factor
Enter an integer corresponding to the factor RW found in UBC Table 23-Q. RW is used in determining the
seismic force factor for nonbuilding structures. As per UBC: tanks, vessels or pressurized spheres on
braced or unbraced legs have RW = 3 and distributed mass cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys,
silos, and skirt-supported vertical vessels have RW = 4.
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See UBC-91 Figure No. 23-2 to select the appropriate zone. The
zone establishes the Seismic Zone Factor, Z, found in Table No. 23-I.
Zone Definition
0 Zone 0:Gulf coast and prairies. (Z = 0.00)
1 Zone 1:Rockies and Appalachian areas. (Z = 0.075)
2 Zone 2a:New England, Carolinas, and Ozarks. (Z =

0.15)
3 Zone 2b:Valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific

Northwest (Z = 0.20)
4 Zone 3:Sierras. (Z = 0.30)
5 Zone 4:California fault areas. (Z = 0.40)
earthquake.
NBC Seismic Data
Importance Factor
Enter the value of the NBC Importance Factor found in Sentence 4.1.9.1 (10). Please note the program
will use this value directly without modification.
Entry Definition
1.5 Post-disaster buildings
1.3 Schools
1.0 All other buildings
Note that most petrochemical structures have an Importance Factor of 1.0.

Soil Type
Select the soil factor (From Table 4.1.9C) for the site:
Soil Definition
1 Category 1:From rock to stiff fine-grained soils up to 15 m deep
2 Category 2:From compact coarse-grained soils to soft fine-grained soils up to 15 m

deep
3 Category 3:Very loose and loose coarse-grained soils with depth greater than 15 m
4 Category 4:Very soft and soft fine-grained soils with depth greater than 15 m
Force Modification Factor
Enter an integer to indicate the type of lateral load resisting system. This value will be used to set the
Force Modification Factor (R) per Table 4.1.9.B and sentences 4.1.9.1 (8) and 4.1.9.3 (3)
Entry Definition
1 Case 18 - Elevated tanks (such as equipment on legs). (R =

1.0)
2 Case 6 - Ductile structures (such as towers on skirts). (R =

1.5)
Note Elevated tank analysis also includes the special provisions of sentence 4.1.9.3 (3).
Acceleration Zone
Select the acceleration-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the velocity and acceleration seismic
zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supplement to NBC. Here are some examples of each
zone:
Entry Acceleration-Related Zone
0 Calgary, Alberta
Entry Acceleration-Related Zone
1 Toronto, Ontario
2 Saint John, New Brunswick
3 Varennes, Quebec
4 Vancouver, British Columbia
5 Duncan, British Columbia
6 Port Hardy, British Columbia
earthquake.
Velocity Zone
Select the zone indicating the velocity-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the velocity and
acceleration seismic zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supplement to NBC. Here are some
examples of each zone:
Zone Velocity-Related Zone
0 Steinbach, Manitoba
1 Calgary, Alberta
2 Montreal, Quebec
3 Quebec City, Quebec
4 Dawson, Yukon
5 Victoria, British
Columbia
6 Destruction Bay, Yukon
earthquake.
India's Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and

SCM
Importance Factor
The importance factor is taken from table 4 in the IS-1893 standard. This value ranges from a maximum
of 6.0 to 1.0.
Factor Description
6.0 A value typically used in nuclear applications.
2.0 Dams of all types and lethal service applications
1.5 Used in the design of important structures such as hospitals,

tanks, water towers, and large assembly structures.
1.0 All others
Soil Factor
The soil factor (Beta) is taken from Table 3 of the IS-1893 seismic design code. This value ranges
between 1 and 1.5.
Type I soils and hard rock should have a value of 1.

Type II soils should also use a value of 1 except for well foundations or isolated RCC footings without
tiebeams or un-reinforced strip foundations, which receive a value of 2.0.
Type III soils can receive a value between 1.0 and 1.5.
Zone Number
The zone number ranges between 1 and 5 and depends on where the vessel will operate in India. You can
determine the zone from a colored map of which is Figure 1 in IS 1893.
Period of Vibration
This field is optional. PVElite computes the natural frequency of the vessel and can thus compute the
period of vibration. If this field is not 0 the program will use the entered value. This value is used in
conjunction with Beta in order to determine Sa/g.
Damping Factor
This value which is used with the period of vibration to determine Sa/g. Values of damping in the IS 1893
standard are 2, 5, 10 and 20 percent. The program will interpolate for intermediate values in between 2, 5,
10 and 20 percent. Extreme values will be used if a damping factor is entered which is outside the range
above.
ASCE - 95 Seismic Data
Importance Factor
ASCE-95 does not address an importance factor. However, this value is multiplied times the other values
to compute the base shear. Thusly, this entry can be used as a scale factor for the base shear. If you do not
wish to use this value simply enter a value of 1.0.
Force Factor ( R )
This value is taken from table 9.2.7.5. For vertical vessels, towers, stacks etc. this value is 2.0.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4A on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a function of the soil
profile type and the value of Aa. Typically this will be a given value. However, if given the soil type and
the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4B on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a function of the soil
profile type and the value of Aa. Typically, this will be a given value. However, if given the soil type and
the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table.
The help facility in PVElite contains the above referenced tables.

Seismic Load Input in G's
Enter the value of G's that your vessel will be subjected to in the specified direction. For vertical vessels,
the horizontal component used will be the maximum of the Gx and Gz values. The horizontal force
computed will be equal to the element's weight times this maximum G factor. This force times its distance
to the support will be computed and summed with all of the others. The Y component is also considered.
This value is usually 2/3 of the Gx or Gz value, but note however any of these values can be zero.
For horizontal vessels, the lateral (Gz) and longitudinal (Gx) directions are considered independently. The
vertical load component (Gy) acting on the saddle supports is also computed.
Typical values of G loads are from 0 to 0.4.
UBC 1997 Earthquake Data
UBC Earthquake Importance Factor
This value is taken from Table 16-K of the UBC 1997 standard. The following is the context of Table 16-
K.
Category Value
1 Essential facilities 1.25
2 Hazardous facilities 1.25
3 Special occupancy structures 1.0
4 Standard occupancy structures

1.0
UBC Seismic Coefficient CA
Enter the value of CA per the project specifications and table 16-Q of UBC 1997 edition. This value is a
function of the seismic zone Z, and the soil profile type. This coefficient ranges from 0.44 to 0.06. In zone
4 this value is also a function of Na.
UBC Seismic Coefficient CV
Enter the value of CV per the project specifications and table 16-R of UBC 1997 edition. This value is a
function of the seismic zone Z, and the soil profile type. This coefficient ranges from 0.96 to 0.06. In zone
4 this value is also a function of Nv.
UBC Near Source Factor
This factor is only used in UBC Seismic Zone 4. This value ranges from 1 to 2 and is a function of the
distance relative to the seismic source.
UBC Seismic Zone
See UBC-91 Figure No. 23-2 to select the appropriate zone. The zone establishes the Seismic Zone Factor,
Z, found in Table No. 23-I.
Zone 0 Gulf and prairies (Z=0.00)

Zone 1 Rockies and Appalachian areas (Z=0.075)
Zone 2a New England, Carolinas, and Ozarks (Z=0.15)
Zone 2b Valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific Northwest (Z=0.20)
Zone 3 Sierras (Z=0.30)
Zone 4 California fault areas (Z=0.40)
Note that Zone 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while Zone 4 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.
UBC Horizontal Force Factor
Enter the seismic force factor R per UBC Table 16-P 1997 edition:
2.2 Tanks on braced or unbraced legs

2.9 Distributed mass cantilever structures such as stacks, chimneys, silos, and skirt supported
vertical vessels.
R is defined as the numerical coefficient representative of the inherent overstrength and global ductility of
lateral force resisting systems.
IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters
Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the International
Building Code 2000 (which happens to mirror those of ASCE 7).
EarthQuake Parameters Ss and Sl
The values for Ss and Sl are taken from the ASCE 7-98 / IBC 2000 publication. These factors are for short
and long periods (0.2 and 1.0). These tables are found on pages. 100 - 117 (ASCE 98), page 351 (IBC)
publication.
Response Modification Factor R
Enter the value from table 9.5.2.2 (ASCE) 1617.6 (IBC) as required. R is usually equal to 2.5 for inverted
pendulum systems and cantilevered column systems. For elevated tanks use a value of 4. For horizontal
vessels, leg supported vessels and others use a value of 3.0.
Importance Factor
This is the occupancy importance factor as given in 9.1.4 (ASCE) 1604.5 (IBC). The importance factor
accounts for loss of life and property. This value typically ranges between 1.0 and 1.5.
Moment Reduction Factor Tau
This value is used to reduce the moment at each level. A value greater than one will scale the moments up,
while a value that is less than one will lower the moments. We suggest a value of 1.0. This value should
not be less than 0.8.
Seismic Design Category
Select an appropriate category from the pull down. The choices are A through F. The program uses these
values only to check the minimum value of Cs per equation 9.5.3.2.1-4 (ASCE), 1615.1.1 (IBC). This
additional check is only performed if the Seismic Design Category is E or F.
EarthQuake Parameters Fa and Fv
Enter the coefficient from table 9.4.1.2.4A or 9.4.1.2.4B (ASCE), 1615.1.2(1) or 1615.1.2(2) (IBC) as
required.
Table—9.4.1.2.4.A Values of Fa as a Function of Site Class and Mapped Short-Period Maximum

Considered Earthquake Spectral Acceleration
Site Class Ss<+0.25 Ss=0.5 Ss=0.75 Ss=1.0 Ss>1.25b
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
E 2.5 1.7 1.2 0.9 a
F a a a a
Table—9.4.1.2.B (ASCE) 1615.2(2) (IBC), Values of Fv as a function of Site Class and Mapped 1-
Second Period Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Acceleration
Site Class Sl<+0.1 Sl=0.2 Sl=0.3 Sl=0.4 Sl>0.5b
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
C 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3
D 2.4 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5
E 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.4 a
F a a a a a
Note: For intermediate values, the higher value of the straight-line interpolation shall be used to
determine the value of Ss or Sl.
a Site-specific geo-technical information and dynamic site response analyses shall be performed.
bSite specific studies required per Section 9.4.1.2.4 may result in higher values of than included on hazard maps, as may the
provisions of Section 9.13.
Response Spectrum
Selecting this method performs a dynamic analysis of the vessel, applying loading based upon the selected
seismic Response Spectrum.
Initially, the vessel is modeled as a 2- dimensional structure (note that for asymmetric leg arrangements,
the horizontal direction of interest is taken as that corresponding to the weakest axis of the arrangement).
Next an Eigensolution is performed on the vessel, which determines system mode shapes and modal
natural frequencies (all modes with natural frequencies up through 100 Hz are calculated). The seismic
response of each mode is then extracted from the Response Spectrum according to the natural frequency
of each mode, and then adjusted according to the mode's "participation factor". The system response is
then determined by combining all of the modal responses.
For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more accurate calculation than the typical static equivalent
method. Usually, the computed loads are lower in magnitude than those computed using conventional
building Code techniques.
you cannot predict an earthquake, as you can high winds, some designers use a reduced seismic load for
Response Spectrum Name
The following seismic response spectra are available:
User Defined
This option allows the user to enter a custom seismic response spectrum of type Frequency or Period vs.
Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration (see instructions below). The same spectrum will be applied in
both the horizontal and vertical directions.
El Centro
This response spectrum is based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro, California earthquake, North-South
component, 5-10% damping as described in Introduction to Structural Dynamics by John Biggs. This
spectrum will be applied in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
ASCE
Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the modal analysis
procedure of ASCE Standard 7-98. The horizontal spectrum is a built according to the ASCE-7 Section
9.4.1.2.6, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat acceleration of 0.2S
IBC
Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the modal analysis
procedure of the International Building Code 2000 (which happen to mirror those of ASCE-7). The
horizontal spectrum is built according to IBC-2000 Section 1615.1, while the vertical spectrum provides a
flat acceleration of 0.2 (as per IBC-2000 Section 1617. 1).
1.60D.5
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and vertical spectra
specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 1.60, for systems with
0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period
Acceleration (see below).
1.60D2
2 % of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period
1.60D5
0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period
1.60D7
7% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period
1.60D10
10% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is normalized, so it must be scaled the site's Zero Period
Importance Factor
This is used for the ASCE and IBC options. For ASCE, this is the I, the occupancy importance factor
determined from ASCE-7 Section 9.14. For IBC, this is the Ie, the occupancy importance factor in
accordance with IBC 1616.2.
Shock Scale X|Y dir
This is used for User defined, El Centro, and the 1.60Dxx spectra; and is used to scale the horizontal and
vertical spectra respectively. For example, many seismic specifications require that the vertical spectrum
be identical to, but with 2/3 of the magnitude, of the horizontal spectrum. This corresponds to an X scale
of 1.0 and a Y scale of 0.6667.
Traditionally in the analysis of vertical vessels, the component in the vertical direction is typically
ignored. If you wish to do so, enter a value of 0 in the Y direction field.
Zero Period Acceleration
This is used to scale the normalized 1.60 Dxx spectra. The Zero Period Acceleration corresponds to the
acceleration of the rigid (high frequency) portion of the spectrum, which usually corresponds to the
maximum ground acceleration expected at the site.
Combination Method
Modal responses must be combined in a way that most accurately captures the statistical correlation of the
responses to each other. The available options are:
SRSS: This method performs a Square Root of the Sum of the Squares combination of the modal
results. This simulates a response where all modal results are assumed to be uncorrelated with, or
totally unrelated to, each other. If the ASCE or IBC method has been chosen, modal combinations will
automatically be performed using this method.
This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very close frequencies, since those
modes will probably experience their maximum DLF at approximately the same time during the load
profile.
Group: This method performs a group combination method as described in the United States National
Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 1.92 - responses of modes with natural frequencies within
10% of each other are combined using the Absolute Value method, while those sums are combined
with each other and with m0ore far-flung modes, using the SRSS method. This simulates a response
where the results of similar modes are assumed to be correlated, while those of all dissimilar modes
are assumed to be uncorrelated.
Absolute: This method performs an Absolute Value combination of the modal results. This simulates
a response where all modal results are assumed to be correlated with each other.
This method gives the most conservative result, since it assumes that the all maximum modal responses
occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load. This is usually overly-conservative,
since modes with different natural frequencies will probably experience their maximum DLF at different
times during the load profile.
Acc. Based Factor Fa:
This factor is required for ASCE-7 and IBC, and is used to construct the horizontal response spectrum. For
ASCE-7 it is determine from Table 9.4.1.2.4a, while for IBC- 2000 it is determined from Table
1615.1.2(1). Typical values are 0.8 through 2.5 and above. For more information on the values of Fa refer
to IBC 2000 Earthquake Parameters in this chapter.
Acc. Based Factor Fv:
This factor is required for ASCE - 7 and IBC, and is used to construct the horizontal response spectrum.
For ASCE-7 it is determine from Table 9.4.1.2.4a, while for IBC- 2000 it is determined from Table
1615.1.2(2). Typical values are 0.8 through 3.5 and above. For more information on the values of Fv refer
to IBC 2000 Earthquake Parameters in this chapter.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss:
This factor, the "mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at short periods"
is required for ASCE-7 and IBC, is used to construct the horizontal response spectrum. For ASCE-7 it is
determined in accordance with Section 9.4.1, while for IBC-2000 it is determined from Section 1615.1.
Typical values are 0.0 through 2.0g.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Sl:
This factor, the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at a period of 1
second", is required for ASCE-7 and IBC, is used to construct the horizontal response spectrum. For
ASCE-7 it is determined in accordance with Section 9.4.1, while for IBC-2000 it is determined from
Section 1615.1. Typical values are 0.0 through 1.5g.
Response Modification R:
This factor is required for ASDCE-7 and IBC, and is used to reduce the spectrum response. For ASCE-7 it
is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is determined from Table 1617.6 Typical values
are 1.25 through 8.0.
For elevated tanks use a value of 4. For horizontal vessels, leg supported vessels and others use a value of
3.0.
Coefficient Cd:
This factor, the "deflection amplification factor", is used to scale up the calculated seismic displacements.
For ASCE-7 it is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is determined from Table 1617.6.
Typical values are 1.25 through 6.5.
Range Type:
User Defined spectra may be entered with a range X axis representing either Frequency or Period. In
either case, the data points should be entered with ascending range values.
Note: A zero entry for either Frequency or Period is invalid. Interpolation will be made linearly for
intermediate range values. Data points defining the spectrum can be entered by clicking Edit/Review
Spectrum Points.
Ordinate Type:
User Defined spectra may be entered with an ordinate Y axis representing Displacement, Velocity, or
Acceleration entered in units of Diameter, Diameter /second, of G's respectively. Interpolation will be
made linearly for intermediate Ordinate values. Data points defining the spectrum can be entered by
clicking Edit/Review Spectrum Points.
Include Missing Mass Components:
Since only a limited number of modes of vibration i.e., only those with natural frequencies up to 100 Hz
or so are used in the analysis, the entire mass of the structure doesn't get considered in the seismic
analysis. Clicking this box causes PVElite to estimate the contribution of the neglected modes of vibration
and add that to the dynamically calculated response.
Note: Selecting this option should always lead to a more conservative result.
7-1
C H A P T E R 7
Chapter 7: PVElite Analysis
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................7-2
Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Results.........7-3
Optional Steps ....................................................................7-9
Component Analysis ..........................................................7-10
Introduction
Once all the data for the vessel model and analysis have been entered and corrected, the model is ready for
analysis. The pull-down menu under Analyze shows two options:
Analyze
Error Check Only
Analyze Menu
Error Check Only will review all the data and produce an output report listing any errors that are found.
These messages can be examined through the Output - Review option. If Analyze is selected, PVElite will
also run through the error checker but then continue on (if no errors are found) through the complete
analysis.
The analysis program is the heart of the PVElite system. All the data entered into the model is used by the
analysis program to evaluate or design the pressure vessel. In any given analysis there will be between 16
and 20 analysis steps. As the program completes each calculation, important information from the step is
displayed on the screen. The screen display at the completion of the internal pressure calculations, for
example, lists both the given element thickness and the required thickness for each element in the vessel.
The program waits for a user response before clearing the screen and moving on to the next analysis step.
The user may respond by continuing on to the next step, continue non-stop through the remainder of all
analysis steps, or quit the analysis. The results of the analysis are stored in two separate files on the hard
disk. The text results of the job are held in a file with the extension .TAB (e.g. the jobname VES01 will
have an input file named VES01.PVI and a text results file of VES01.TAB) The output processor replaces
this .TAB file with a .T80 file (VES01.T80). The .T80 file contains a complete report for each analysis
step for inspection and printing through the Review processor. The analysis also creates a .PVR file (e.g..
VES01.PVR); this file is used by the output Review processor for component analysis. The program
transfers to the Review processor at the completion of the analysis.
PVElite not only analyzes vessels, it also designs vessel walls for pressures and loads. In addition to
increasing the vessel wall thickness, the program can instead introduce stiffener rings to accommodate
external pressures. The program directives for these design modifications are set in each job in the Design
Data section of Global Data. In increasing the wall thickness to meet the required values, PVElite can
either set the thickness to the exact requirement, or, round up to the next nominal value (1/16 inch in
English units or 1 mm in metric units). This switch, too, is a setting in the Configuration option under
Utility.
PVElite Analysis 7-3
If PVElite's design process changes any of the original input, the program will automatically erase the
current output report and return to the beginning of the analysis and restart the run. All results will reflect
the design changes, from the input echo to the added deadweight. The user's original input, however, will
not be changed. If a design flag is turned on and the required thickness is less than the entered thickness,
PVElite will increase the thickness as needed and continue.
Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis

Results
Each of these steps calculates and displays specific results of a vessel analysis. A brief description of the
key analysis steps are defined below:
Step 0: Error Checking
Most of the errors that are easily made will have already been caught by the input program. However,
there are some errors, which can only be discovered after the analysis begins. There are also some
warnings that may be of help to the user. This first routine check creates a report in the output. If any of
the input errors would prevent the program from running, execution stops here. Check the output to
determine the exact error discovered by the program.
Step 1: Input Echo
PVElite provides a complete listing of your input. This includes the geometry and materials for each
element (head, shell, cone, flange, skirt, etc.) and the information for any details attached to that element.
Step 2: XY Coordinate Calculations
The program calculates the X and Y locations of the first end of every element.
Step 3: Internal Pressure Calculations
The geometry, material, and loading data from your model are used to calculate the required thickness and
maximum allowable working pressure for each element (except skirts and flanges). The calculations are
done using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules, or the British Standard PD:5500 rules. The
internal design pressure at any point is taken to be the given design pressure for that element, plus the
pressure due to liquid head, if any.
If you checked the design flag 'increase thickness for internal pressure' and any element is too thin for the
given pressure, the program will automatically (or under interactive control) increase the thickness of the
element. There is a computation control (under Utilities on the Main Menu) that allows you to increase the
element thickness to exactly that required, or to round the thickness up to the next nominal size.
If the program has increased the thickness, it will recalculate all the required thicknesses and maximum
allowable working pressures for the vessel, and create a new table showing these results.
After the internal pressure calculation is complete, PVElite prints the formulas and substitutions, as well
the minimum design metal temperatures for the elements.
Step 4: Hydrotest Calculations
The user specifies what kind of hydrotest (and/or the hydrotest pressure) on the global input screens. The
program uses this information to calculate the maximum allowed hydrotest pressure and required
thickness at the given pressure for each element.
Step 5: External Pressure Calculations
Two of the three key variables for external pressure calculations are explicitly defined by the user:
diameter and thickness. The third variable, length of section, is calculated by the program for the given
geometry. Thus if the vessel has two heads and some number of cylindrical elements with no stiffening
rings, the program will calculate the design length for each cylinder using the full length of the vessel plus
1/3 the depth of the heads. If there are stiffening rings, the program will calculate an appropriately shorter
value.
The program displays the formulas and substitutions for the external pressure calculations on each
element. Then the same results are displayed in tabular form.
If the element is not thick enough for the external pressure (and you checked the design boxes in the input)
the program will allow you to increase the thickness and/or add stiffening rings (which are created
automatically and added to your model). If the thickness is increased the program has to go back to step 3.
For rings it repeats this step with the new lengths.
British Standard PD:5500
When performing the PD:5500 external pressure calculations, the program first computes the length of
section for the given geometry. The length of section is either the distance between stiffeners, or, if there
are no stiffeners, it is the full length of the vessel plus 0.4 times the depth of the heads.
Using the length of section computed, the program first tests to see whether the thickness of the
unsupported cylinder (or distance between supports) is satisfactory for the given pressure. A value of
Pmax is determined.
If there are stiffeners, then the program performs the calculations described in section 3.6.2.3. The
program first performs the computations described in Method A, and then performs the more rigorous
calculations described in Method B. For each of these methods (and each value of n), a value of Pn and Fn
are obtained.
Pn is the elastic instability pressure of the stiffened cylinder or cone. The value of Pn must not be less than
1.8*Pext in the case of fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and 2.0*Pext in the case of cold formed
stiffeners.
Fn is the maximum stress in the stiffener flange divided by the yield stress of the stiffener. A value for Fn
is computed for both fabricated or hot formed stiffeners and cold formed stiffeners. These values must be
between 0.0 and 1.0.
Step 6: Weight of Elements
Element weights are calculated in both the corroded and uncorroded conditions. Note that for heads the
distance given in the input program is taken as the length of the straight flange on the head. This step also
calculates the volume of the element.
Step 7: Weight of Details
Each detail has a separate weight calculation. Of note is the fact that partial volumes of liquid in both the
heads and the cylinders and in both the horizontal and vertical directions are correctly calculated.
Step 8: ANSI Flange MAWP
If you entered nozzles, you specified the material and class of the attached flanges. PVElite has the full
ANSI flange tables built in, and tells you the rating of the flanges at the operating temperature.
Steps 9 and 10: Total Weight And Detail Moment
Several weight cases are calculated including: empty, operating, and hydrotest. The various detail
weights/loads are included in the following cases:
Detail Empty Operating Hydrotest
Saddle # # #
Platform # # #
Packing #
Liquid #
Insulation # # #
Lining # # #
Rings # # #
Nozzles # # #
Saddles # # #
Trays #
Legs # # #
Detail Empty Operating Hydrotest
Lugs # # #
Weights # # #
Forces/Momen #
ts
This step also calculates the moment due to individual details, which may not be on the centerline of the
vessel. These are usually small. Finally, this step calculates the forces at the support. The vertical force
and bending moment (due to detail weights only) are calculated for the 'one support' cases (skirts, legs,
lugs) and the vertical force at each support is calculated when there are two saddle supports.
Note: In addition to computing the above weights PVElite also computes the fabricated weight, shop test
weight, shipping weight, erected weight, empty weight and field test weight. The computed weights may
or may not include removable or field installed items such as packing and other details. You can specify
where these details are to be installed (either shop or field) in the Global Input. Switch to the global input
screen and click the Installation Miscellaneous Options button located at the top of the screen. By
default the program assumes that all details will be installed in the shop and calculate these various
weights based on that assumption.
The cumulative weight on the vessel will look drastically different for horizontal vessels on saddle
supports than for vertical vessels on skirts, legs, and lugs:
Horizontal cases: Expect the highest weight forces near the saddles, with almost no weight force at the
ends or in the middle.
Vertical cases: Expect the weight forces to increase from zero at the top to a maximum at the support. If
there are elements below the support, expect the weight force to be negative.
The cumulative moment includes only the moment due to eccentric details, and is usually quite small
(except in the case of a large applied moment).
Step 11: Natural Frequency Calculation
PVElite uses two classical solution methods to determine the first order natural frequencies of vessels. For
vertical vessels, the program uses the Freese method, which is commonly used in industry. For horizontal
vessels a similar method attributed to Rayleigh and Ritz is used. Each method works by calculating the
static deflection of the vessel (for vertical, the vessel as a horizontal cantilever beam). The natural
frequency is proportional to the square root of the deflection. As of version 4.3 PVElite uses the matrix
solution methods (Eigen Solution) to determine the modes of vibration. Horizontal vessels are assumed to
be rigid and as such are assigned a frequency of 33 hertz, which is coincident of a ZPA for a rigid
structure.
Step 12: Wind Load Calculation
PVElite uses the rules of ASCE-7, NBC, UBC, and IS-875 to calculate wind loads. Each of these codes
uses a basic wind pressure, a function of the velocity squared, along with several surface and site factors
to determine the final wind pressure.
Step 13: Earthquake Load Calculation
The five codes used by PVElite - ASCE-7, UBC, NBC, IS-1893 RSM and IS-1893 SCM each use a static
equivalent load to model the earthquake load. Simple site data and loading data are used to determine an
expected static equivalent horizontal load on the vessel.
Step 14: Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earthquake
These loadings generate horizontal loads, which are usually fine on a horizontal vessel, but can cause high
overturning moments on a vertical vessel. The program calculates the cumulative shear and bending
moment on the vessel, for use in later stress calculations.
Step 15: Wind Deflection
PVElite calculates the deflection at every point in either horizontal or vertical vessels.
Step 16: Longitudinal Stress Constants
As the program prepares to do structural calculations on the vessel, it first calculates the cross sectional
area and section modulus of each element in both the corroded and uncorroded condition.
Step 17: Longitudinal Allowable Stresses
There are four allowable stresses in the longitudinal direction for each element: (1) Longitudinal tension
based on the basic allowable stress, often multiplied times 1.2 (as specified on the global input), (2)
Hydrotest longitudinal tension - 1.5 times the allowable stress new & cold. (3) Longitudinal compression -
based on paragraph UG-23 of the Code, and the material's external pressure chart. (4) Hydrotest allowable
compression - the basic allowable compression new & cold, multiplied by 1.5.
Step 18: Longitudinal Stresses Due to . . .
Each load (wind, earthquake, weight, pressure) generates a stress. These are calculated individually and
displayed by this routine. Note that bending stresses, though only displayed once, are actually positive on
one side of the vessel and negative on the other.
Step 19: Stress Due to Combined Loads
In this step the various load cases combinations defined by the user are evaluated. If there are applied
forces and moments in the model, then other identifiers such as BS, BN and so forth may appear in the
load case definition.
There can be as many as twenty cases, combining pressure loads, weight loads, and moments in various
ways. A fairly complete set of load cases is included as a default:
Load Case Definition
1 NP+EW+WI+FW No pressure + empty weight + wind
2 NP+EW+EQ+FS No pressure + empty weight + earthquake
3 NP+OW+WI+FW No pressure + operating weight + wind
4 NP+OW+EQ+FS No pressure + operating weight + earthquake
5 NP+HW+HI No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind
6 NP+HW+HE No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro earthquake
7 IP+OW+WI+FW Internal pressure + operating weight + wind
8 IP+OW+EQ+FS Internal pressure + operating weight + earthquake
9 EP+OW+WI+FW External pressure + operating weight + wind
10 EP+OW+EQ+FS External pressure + operating weight + earthquake
11 HP+HW+HI Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind
12 HP+HW+HE Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest wind + hydro earthquake
13 IP+WE+EW Internal pressure + wind empty + empty weight
14 IP+WF+CW Internal pressure + wind filled + empty weight no ca
15 IP+VO+OW Internal pressure + vortex shedding (OPE) + operating weight
16 IP+VE+OW Internal pressure + vortex shedding (EMP) + operating weight
17 IP+VF+CW Internal pressure+ vortex shedding (Filled) + empty weight no ca
The difference between wind loads and hydrotest wind loads is simply a ratio (percentage) defined by the
user. This percentage is specified in the Wind Data definition of Global Data - usually about 33% (thus
setting the hydrotest wind load at 33% of the operating wind load). Likewise, the hydrotest earthquake
load is a percentage of the earthquake load; this percentage is defined in the Seismic Data definition of
Global Data.
Some steps that are not applicable for horizontal vessels, such as natural frequency, will not be printed.
Also, if a vessel has no supports, steps greater than 10 will not be computed.
Optional Steps
PVElite includes the following analyses that are performed under specific circumstances:
1 Cone Evaluation - cones are evaluated for internal and external pressure at the large and small ends,
and any stiffening rings near the cones are included and evaluated.
2 Zick Stresses - stresses due to saddle supports are evaluated and compared to allowable stresses using
the method of L.P. Zick. Note that the stresses are calculated for each saddle, since in PVElite each
saddle can have different loading. Note also that the stresses are not evaluated at the mid span, since
the program automatically does that for all the various load case combinations.
3 AISC Leg Check: After the program has computed all of the weights, forces and moments, it can then
determine the overall state of stress by using the AISC unity check method. The program typically
looks at the worst loads on the legs due to wind or seismic in the operating condition and then applies
the AISC method of checking the legs. The unity check must be less than or equal to 1.0. Most typical
designs fall in the 0.7 - 0.8 range, which is a good check both in terms of economy and safety.
4 Lug Support Check : In a similar manner to the leg check the program gathers the worst loads on the
support lugs and then evaluates them according to a set of acceptable standards. In this case, gussets
are checked by the AISC method and the lug plates are checked by common industry standard
methods. These methods are outlined in common pressure design handbooks.
5 Baserings: With known forces and moments at the base and the geometry of the basering, PVElite will
analyze or design the basering and gusset geometry.
6 Flanges: For main body flanges, the program will compute the required thickness of the flange, all
relevant stresses, and MAWP for the given geometry. The results seen in the output are based on the
input thickness. The program additionally computes the required thickness of the flange. Please note
that the program does not include the forces and moments to determine an equivalent design pressure.
There are separate fields in the input that can be entered in if these effects are to be considered. In
order to do this two runs would have to made. After run 1 was made the forces and moments on the
flange could be entered in as needed.
7 Nozzle Analysis : Complete nozzle evaluation is incorporated into the program based on the rules in the
ASME code. Design cases are made for Internal Pressure, External Pressure and MAPnc. The internal
pressure can be based on the MAWP of the entire vessel or the exact pressure at the nozzle location.
These options are located in the Global Input section of the input. In addition to perpendicular nozzles,
hillside geometries are also considered. Nozzles at any angle can be entered in by using the
ANG=xx.x command in the nozzle description field. The nozzle analysis also computes MDMT, weld
size and strength calculations along with provisions for large nozzles as outlined in appendix 1-7 of
the ASME Code. Another description option is for small nozzles. If there is a small nozzle that must
have area calculations performed, enter the text "#SN" as part of the nozzle description. By default
PVElite will not calculate small openings for Division 1 vessels per UG-36. If local loads have been
defined on the nozzle, the nozzle report will display the results from WRC 107 or PD 5500 Annex G,
whichever one was selected.
8 Fatigue Analysis: The fatigue analysis is activated when the number of pressure cycles is specified on
the Design/Analysis Constraints screen. Click the Perform Fatigue Analysis button to bring up the
dialog. Change the number of pressure cycles. This value must be between 1 and 20. This
cumulative damage analysis is in accordance with PD:5500 2000 Annex C. In order for this analysis
to activate, at least one nozzle must be specified. In the nozzle dialog, there is a check box and a pull
down selection menu describing the class of the weld attachment per Annex C. Once all of the data is
specified, PVElite will produce the Fatigue Analysis Report.
9 Tubesheet Analysis: When the vessel design Code is ASME VIII or PD 5500, tubesheets are allowed
to be defined. They can be attached to flange or cylinder parent elements. PVElite will compute
tubesheet required thickness, shell and tube stresses per the rules of TEMA, ASME Part UHX or PD
5500.
10 Skirt Hole Opening Analysis: For vertical skirt supported vessels, PVElite can compute bending and
axial stresses due to missing material in skirt openings typically for pipe openings, vents and access
openings.
11 ASME App. EE Analysis: If you have specified a helical half pipe jacket, this analysis will be performed
per ASME Appendix EE.
12 ASME App. 14 large Central Opening Analysis: For Welded flat heads, the analysis of large central
opening can be performed per Appendix 14.
Component Analysis
Once the program has completed the above calculations, the results may be reviewed in the output
processor. These results (such as required wall thickness vs. finished wall thickness) may also be used for
the evaluation of other components of the vessel. Rather than automatically analyzing all the possible
vessel element details, the output processor provides component analysis for only those details selected by
the user. Other details that are not part of the current vessel may also be analyzed here. This processor is
described in the next chapter.
8-1
C H A P T E R 8
Chapter 8: Output/Review
In This Chapter
Generating Output ..............................................................8-2
The Review Screen.............................................................8-2
Using Review .....................................................................8-3
Component Analysis ..........................................................8-3
Generating Output
Output may be reviewed or generated for any job that has some input. Results of any previous analysis, of
course, are only available if the analysis has been run. To access the output, first bring up the proper job
through the File item on the Main Menu. Then, clicking on Output on the Main Menu will produce a
pull-down menu that controls the program's output. The pull-down menu provides three options:
Output Menu
Enters the Review processor where results of the analysis

Review Report may be inspected on the screen, printed, or copied to a file.
Invokes a compatible DXF processor on the machine if one
Review the DXF File exists.
If a database has been created, it can be reviewed directly
Review the Access Database using Microsoft Access.
The remainder of this chapter will focus on the many capabilities of the Review processor.
The Review Screen
The body of the Review screen shows all the reports available for the current job or file. These reports
follow the analysis steps described in the previous chapter. To select one or more reports, simply use the
mouse and (CTRL) key to select one or more reports.
Output/Review 8-3
The first report selected will immediately be displayed in the main window. Use the mouse to view other
reports or if multiple reports are selected, press the blue right and left arrow buttons on the toolbar to cycle
through the viewing of the reports.
Using Review
To use the Review or Output processor, simply click on the report of interest that is in right hand column
of the screen. That report will then show up in the main panel. Multiple reports can be selected by
holding the control (CTRL) key down while clicking the reports with the mouse. You can then use the
blue arrows on the toolbar to navigate backwards and forwards through the selected reports. You can then
print the reports or create a Microsoft Word document by pressing on the appropriate toolbar button at the
top of the window.
Component Analysis
Analysis of vessel details is initiated from the Input Menu.

Output/Review 8-5
The units for the component analysis are extracted from the current vessel input. In the example here, Half
Pipes Jacket was selected. The initial screen is shown below.
To produce a report, click the Analyze Current Item icon.

9-1
C H A P T E R 9
Chapter 9: HEAT EXCHANGERS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................9-2
Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis ..................................9-2
Analyzing Heat Exchangers ...............................................9-3
Introduction
The HEAT EXCHANGER program performs the analysis of heat exchangers in accordance with the
following Codes:
ASME Section VIII Division 1

TEMA 1998
PD 5500: 2003
The ASME tubesheet (heat exchanger) analysis rules were formerly found in Appendix AA, but in 2003,
were re-written and moved to the main body of the code, Part UHX. At the time of this writing, the heat
exchanger committee is refining some details, which will be included in the program as time progresses.
The TEMA and PD 5500 methods of analysis have undergone little change since the last edition of
PVElite.
Formerly, tubesheets could only be analyzed in the Component Analysis module of PVElite, although this
facility is still available for more information see The Tubesheet Program (see "TUBESHEETS" on page
17-1), the new feature has a number of advantages not formerly available. Among these advantages are:
1 Tubesheet can be integrated into a model, including cylindrical shells (main shell and channels),
heads, and nozzles in the same model.
2 The total weight of the heat exchanger can be computed including all of its component parts
3 Supports, such as saddles, can be analyzed directly from the integrated model, ensuring that all the
weights and applied loads are catered for.
4 The tubesheet reports are part of the overall analysis.
5 The tubesheet design code can be changed between TEMA and ASME with little modification to the
input.
The HEAT EXCHANGER program performs the analysis of shell and tube type heat exchangers. The
program computes the stresses generated in the shell, channel, tubesheets, and tubes for the heat
exchanger configuration entered by the user. The program allows the user to enter multiple pressure /
temperature combinations to provide a complete analysis.
The user has the choice of the following Codes (Reference Documents):
HEAT EXCHANGERS 9-3
ASME Section VIII Division 1 - 2001 A 2003

PD 5500: 2003
TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association: 1998
Because the heat exchanger is built by the user as a complete model, including the support structure,
nozzles, and external loads etc., the exchanger will be analyzed to include all of these conditions.
The program considers the following types of construction:
Fixed and Floating Tubesheets with various packing seals

Plain Shells, and Shell with Expansion joints or Bellows
U-Tube exchangers
Tubesheets that are subject to bolting moments from mating flanges
Tubesheets that are closed by floating heads
Analyzing Heat Exchangers
Heat Exchanger analysis is initiated from the Heat Exchanger button, which is located near the top
of the Data Input Screen. When you first load PVElite, it is not active.
Note: We use English (Imperial) units throughout this exercise. We strongly recommend you use these
units for this sample exercise.
To Analyze a Heat Exchanger:

1 Launch PVElite and ensure the Input Screen is showing. Select an ellipsoidal head by clicking the
ellipse head icon. To build the heat exchanger in the horizontal orientation, click .
2 Enter the information exactly as shown below for the head. Your screen should then look exactly like
this. Check your input before you move on. Remember, click on the text in the left column and then
start typing. The cursor will automatically move to the right column when you are finished, press
Enter twice.
HEAT EXCHANGERS 9-5
3 Click the Cylinder Icon to add a cylinder to the head. Ensure the input for the new cylinder has
exactly this appearance:
4 To add a body flange to the right hand end of the channel shell, click the Body Flange icon. After
adding the flange enter all the values exactly as shown below.
5 Click the Perform Flange Calculation box, and the Flange dialog will display.
We need to get the flange correctly dimensioned. To do this we are going to change the flange as it
appears to a 24 inch Class 150 flange, which will fit nicely into our heat exchanger.
HEAT EXCHANGERS 9-7
6 Click the Perform Flange Calculations. box and the Flange dialog will automatically display. At
the bottom of the new flange dialog screen you will see a section that looks like this:
7 Select 150 as the Class, 24 for the Nom then click ANSI Dim Lookup. The flange screen is now be
set up for the 24 inch Class 150 dimensions and bolting. Verify your screen looks like this:
At this point, you have only been using the normal vessel building techniques that PVElite uses for
building a non heat exchanger pressure vessel. We are now ready to start the construction (build the
model) of the heat exchanger main elements, namely, the tubesheets, tubes and main shell that encloses
the tube bundle.
Look at the Heat Exchanger button you will see that it is no longer disabled, as there is now a component
to which to attach the first tubesheet.
8 Click the Heat Exchanger button the Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input dialog displays. We are
going to construct an ASME Section UHX exchanger, which will require a lot of input. First, verify
you get a screen that looks like this:
9 From the Exchanger Type drop down box, click the down arrow, and select Fixed. Your screen
should now look like this:
10 Click the Tubesheet Properties tab and enter the following information exactly as it displays below.
Note the type of tubesheet we have chosen: 'b Fixed Tubesheet, shell integral, extended as flange'.
Note also that we have checked the Tubesheet Extended as Flange? box.
HEAT EXCHANGERS 9-9
11 Click the Tube Data tab and enter the information exactly as shown below.
All we need now is to enter the pressures and temperatures for our heat exchanger to complete the
tubesheet and tubes data.
12 Click the Load Cases tab and enter the information shown below..
PVElite enables users to enter multiple combinations of pressures and temperatures and pressures for heat
exchangers.
13 From the bottom of the dialog screen, click OK and the Data Input screen will display.
Now, look at the 3D model on your screen, and it should resemble this figure.
Notice that there is no cylindrical shell between the two tubesheets. PVElite cannot perform the tubesheet
analysis unless the shell is present, because the thermal load from the shell is needed to complete this
analysis. So, we must add the shell between the tubesheets. Before you do this, recall that we stated in
the heat exchanger dialog screens that the tubes were 60 inches long. This is the distance between the
tubesheets. So for a good match, the outer shell must also be 60 inches long. Also note that there are only
two rows of tubes displayed. Because of the intensive nature of 3D graphics it is impractical to show
hundreds of tubes. Doing so renders the 3D model nearly useless.
14 Click the Cylindrical Shell icon, to add a cylindrical shell to our model. This shell is 60 inches or 5
feet long as discussed above. Verify your entries match those below:
All that remains is for us to add the body flange at the right hand end of our heat exchanger, then another
channel shell and the final right hand channel head. You should be able to do this now for yourself. Do
so, and we can then proceed to the final step. Before doing so, your model should look like this.
HEAT EXCHANGERS 9-11
You are now free to add saddle supports, nozzles, and any other loads that apply.
Building Heat Exchangers

Tubesheet Type and Design Code
We are going to discuss the meanings and requirement relating to all the fields or the various screens
presented to the user.
Once you have built the left hand side of your heat exchanger up to the point where you have a place to
attach your first tubesheet, click the Heat Exchanger button. The Heat Exchanger Tubesheet
Input screen appears.
Across the top of this dialog six tabs display:

Each tab displays a different data area which where users can enter information for the heat exchanger.
We are going to discuss each tab and its data area in turn.
This section of the manual is concerned with the tab: Tubesheet Type and Design Code.
The Tubesheet Analysis Method
From the drop down list box, choose the code you wish to use for the analysis. The choices are:
ASME UHX - which is ASME Section VIII Division 1, Section UHX

PD 5500 - The British Pressure Vessel Code, Section 3.9 - Flat Heat Exchanger Tubesheets
TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
Note: In the case of PD 5500. If you have set the code to PD 5500 on the Constraints Screen, then PD
5500 is the only choice available in this drop down box.
Exchanger Type
From the drop down list box, choose the type of tubesheet configuration you wish to analyze. The choices
are
U-Tube - This is where there is only one tubesheet, and each tube is in the form of a 'U' shape so that
both ends of the tube are in the same single tubesheet.
Fixed - Fixed tubesheets are fixed to either end of the exchanger and are subject to thermal loads
imposed by expansion.
Floating - The right hand tubesheet is free and as the tubes expand or contract from thermal effects,
the tubesheet is free to move with the tube bundle.
These sketches illustrate the three types of exchanger:

ASME Specific Information
The frames look like this:
Depending on the code and type of exchanger you have chosen, the relevant fields will be come available
for you to enter the respective information. Let us consider first the ASME frame:
Floating Exchanger Type (ASME Specific)
If you have chosen the ASME Floating Head Type Exchanger, the following frame becomes active. From
the drop down list box, select the type of floating head as illustrated just below:
The various types of exchanger as shown in the ASME code have the following floating head
configurations.
The U-Tube Tubesheet Stress Reduction Option
If your design is a 'U-Tube' type exchanger, the following frame is active. From the drop down list box
choose stress reduction option:
Tell PVElite what it must do in the event the model must be changed because of over stress. The choices
are:
Increase the Tubesheet Thickness

Increase the Integral Cylinder Thickness
Increase Both the Cylinder and Tubesheet
Perform Elastic-Plastic Calculation
Enter the method you wish PVElite to use to reduce any over stress condition.
TEMA Specific Information
If you had chosen TEMA as the design code, the TEMA frame would have become active like this:
Before discussing the three drop down list boxes labeled: TEMA Exchanger Notation, consider the
nomenclature used by the TEMA code. TEMA divides a typical heat exchanger into three sections,
namely: the Front Channel, the Shell and the Rear Channel respectively. The different types are assigned
letters. The following table which has been taken from the TEMA code gives shows the letters, and the
corresponding designs for these three sections of the heat exchanger: For more details, please refer to the
TEMA code.
From the drop down list boxes, enter your chosen configuration. The following example shows a
common heat exchanger configuration:
From the TEMA Exchanger Class drop down list box select the appropriate class. The choices are:
Class R
Class C
Class B
Each Class has certain design constraints imposed the TEMA Code, such as tube pitch, baffle spacing,
number of tie rods etc. The computation for each Class is identical, but the limitations are different.
Tubesheet Properties
This section is concerned with the Tubesheet Properties as shown on the second tab of the main exchanger
input screen.
By clicking on the Tubesheet Properties tab, you will get the following dialog screen:
Description
Enter the description you wish to included on your report for the tubesheet analysis section. In the above
example, we have set the Description to: 'MY EXCHANGER'.
Element From Node
This is the element to which the tubesheet is attached. Suppose for example, you want to attach the
tubesheet to Node 50 (as illustrated below), and the wrong Node Number is shown in the text box (shown
as 30 above), you must enable this field. To do this press 'F8' key. You will now be able to enter the
number 50 in this field.
Distance from Node
Be careful here. The distance from node is the distance from the left hand end of the component to which
the first tubesheet is attached. We illustrate this distance as follows:
Tubesheet Type
Enter the type of tubesheet you are to design or analyze. From the drop down list box choose the
tubesheet type from this list:
If you had earlier (see above) chosen to compute a Fixed Tubesheet type exchanger, you would be
presented with these choices:
Fixed Tubesheets, integral both sides

Fixed Tubesheets, shell integral, extended as flange
Fixed Tubesheets, shell integral, not extended as flange
Fixed Tubesheets, gasketed both sides
If you had earlier (see above) chosen to compute a U-Tube type exchanger, you would be presented with
these choices:
U-tubesheet, integral both sides

U-tubesheet, integral with shell
U-tubesheet, gasketed on both sides
U-tubesheet, integral with channel
If you had earlier (see above) chosen to compute a Floating Head type exchanger, you would be presented
with these choices:
Stationary tubesheets, integral with both sides

Stationary tubesheets, integral with shell
Stationary tubesheets, gasketed on both sides
Stationary tubesheets, integral with channel
From the list above, the following illustrations explain the meanings of the some of the terms used above:
In the top left picture above, the tubesheet is shown integral with the shell. However if the tubes were to
point to the left instead of the right, then the tubesheet would be integral with the channel.
Outside Diameter, Tubesheet Thickness and Corrosion Allowance Shell side / Channel side
Enter the outside diameter of the tubesheet. If the tubesheet extends beyond the shell (or channel) then
enter that diameter. However, if the shell is integral with either the shell, or the channel, then enter the
inside diameter of the shell or channel as applies. Enter the balance of the information for the tubesheet
new thickness, and the corrosion on the shell and channel sides. When PVElite calculates the stresses, it
will deduct both of these corrosion allowances. These entries are straight forward.
Depth of Groove in Tubesheet (in any)

If there is a groove across the tubesheet for a pass partition, then enter the depth of this groove. The depth
of this groove is deducted from the thickness of the tubesheet during the calculation process. This is an
illustration of a pass partition located into the tubesheet. At the bottom of the groove, there is usually a
gasket, which PVElite refers to as the Pass Partition Gasket (see elsewhere in this manual where flanges
are discussed):
Weld Leg at Back of Tubesheet (if any)
Enter the fillet leg size of the weld between the shell and the tubesheet, or the channel and the tubesheet as
the case may be if there is such a weld. This is the type of weld meant here:
Tubesheet Extended as Flange? / Thickness of Extended Portion / Bolt Load Transferred to

Tubesheet?
If the tubesheet extends beyond the outside shell / channel diameter, and this extension is attached to a
body flange, then check the Tubesheet Extended as Flange box. The thickness of the part of the
tubesheet that is extended as a flange may be the same or a different thickness from the rest of the flange.
Enter the thickness of the tubesheet extension.
If the tubesheet is bolted to a flange (either on the channel side or shell side), and the bolts produce a
moment on the edge of the tubesheet, then check the Bolt Load Transferred to Tubesheet box labeled.
Here we illustrate a tubesheet extended as a flange. In this illustration the tubesheet is subject to the bolt
force, and is therefore experiences the bolt load, which is transferred from the flange.
Backing Ring
If there is a backing ring at the back of the tubesheet, we need the details. Here is an illustration of a
tubesheet with a backing ring:
Enter the thickness of the backing ring, Enter the Outside and Inside Diameters of the Backing Ring, and
the effective diameter of the gasket(s) - G. To accurately determine the effective diameter of the gasket
'G', you are referred to ASME VIII Division 1 - Appendix 2 Table 2-5.2. For a flat gasket, a typical
procedure for finding the value of G is as follows:
N = (O/Dia of gasket - I/Dia of gasket) / 2

bo = N / 2
If bo > 1/4 in. then b = Sqrt( bo ) / 2 and G = O/Dia of Gasket - 2.b
If bo <= 1/4 in. then b = (O/Dia of gasket + I/Dia of gasket) / 2
However, the user is urged to check the formula that applies to the type of gasket chosen.
Shell Bands - ASME Part UHX Specific
If you have selected the analysis to be performed in accordance with ASME Section UHX, and you have a
fixed tubesheet heat exchanger, you will then be asked if there are shell bands. Here is what shell bands
look like:
If there is a shell band (see above illustration), then check the Is there a Shell Band box. Then, enter the
shell dimensions in the appropriate fields as indicated in the above illustration. Thicker shell bands are
used in areas where the shell would be too highly stressed, and the thicker sections will reduce the stresses
in the region of the tubesheets.
PD 5500 Specific
If you have chosen PD 5500 as your selected code on the Constraint Screen, the frame shown above
becomes active. From the drop down list box, choose the combination of the way the tubesheet is
restrained in the heat exchanger. The following choices are available:
Stationary Simply / Floating Simply

Stationary Simply / Floating Clamped
Stationary Clamped / Floating Simply
Stationary Clamped / Floating Clamped
The PD 5500 Code sets out the following diagram to explain the meaning of Tubesheets that are Simply
Supported, and Tubesheets that are Clamped. PVElite needs this information to determine which PD 5500
graphs to use to obtain certain values required in the computation of the tubesheet analysis. This is the
diagram from PD 5500:
Tube Input Data

Information Specific to the Tubes
Click the tab: Tube Data (shown below):
We need information about the tubes that comprise the tube bundle. This is the third tab in the heat
exchanger input screen.
Basic Tube Data
Number of Holes
Enter the number of tubes in the tube bundle (the number of holes in one tubesheet).
Pattern
From the drop down list box, choose the arrangement of the tubes in the tube bundle. Here are the two
arrangements:
Wall Thickness
Enter the wall thickness of the tube. If you have finned tubes, it is usual to enter the thickness of the tubes
ignoring the fins (usually referred to as the root thickness of the tube).
Corrosion Allowance
If the tubes are subject to a corrosion allowance, then enter the corrosion allowance of the tubes. PVElite
will as one of its load cases check the stresses in the corroded conditions (see Load Cases below).
Outside Diameter
Enter the Outside Diameter of the tubes.
Tube Pitch
Enter the center to center distance between the tubes. See the diagram just above.
Length of Expanded Portion of Tube
Enter the distance the tube is expanded into the tubesheet. This is illustrated below:
Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center
Enter the Distance from the Center of the Tubesheet to the Centerline of the furthest tube. This is the
distance from the center of the tubesheet to the center of the furthest tube.
Distance Between Innermost Tube Centers
Between passes there are often open lanes to provide space for partitions in the channels that control the
flow of the fluid in the tubes. This distance is often greater than the pitch in the main areas of the tube
bundle. Enter this distance, even if it is the same as the general tube pitch (see above). This distance is
illustrated thus:
PD 5500 or TEMA / ASME Fixed Tubesheet Input
If you have chosen a fixed tubesheet type design, then following frame will be activated for entry of
required information. We cover the fields in order:
Max Distance from Tubesheet to 1st Tube Support and Max Distance Between 2 Tube Supports
Tube supports are often referred to 'baffles'. Not only do these tube supports or baffles support the tubes,
but they also control the path taken by the shell side fluid. If the tubes are subjected to axial compression,
then act as struts or slender columns, and are subject to buckling. Tube supports or baffles help to shorten
the effective lengths of the tubes, thus providing support from sagging and compression.
The distances are illustrated here:

End Condition k / Max. Unsupported Len SL
The end condition controls the effective length of the tube against buckling. The TEMA and PD 5500
Codes specify appropriate values for 'k' as follows:
From the above table, enter the appropriate value of 'k'.
Length SL
Enter the distance between the points of support as indicated in the left most column of the above table
associated with the chosen value 'k'.
Tube-Tubesheet Weld (TEMA / ASME)
This section of the input screen is concerned with the strength of the joint between the tubesheet and the
tube. Tubes can be installed in the tubesheet by being expanded to grip the hole in the tubesheet, or can be
fixed by welding. It is also possible to use a combination of expanding and welding, where the weld is
merely a seal weld, not a strength weld. PVElite determines the effectiveness (strength) of this joint to
investigate if the joint is strong enough to withstand the axial forces to which the tube is subjected during
service.
Fillet Weld Leg Size (If Any)
If there is a weld between the tube and the tubesheet, then enter the fillet leg size.
Groove Weld Leg Size (If Any)
If the tubesheet is chamfered in order that the attachment weld partially penetrates the tubesheet, then
enter the fillet weld size. This is the type to tube to tubesheet weld being considered:
Tube Weld Joint Type
PVElite needs to know the degree of support the weld contributes to the tube to tubesheet joint. From the
drop down list box choose from the following:
Type Description
Full where the weld alone provides the strength to the joint
Strength
Partial where the weld provides support in combination with the fact that the tube is
expanded to grip the tube hole
Seal where the weld only serves to prevent leakage, and does not contribute to the
strength of the joint.
Design Strength (Only for U-Tubes)
In the case of U-Tube exchangers, where the tubes are welded to the tubesheet with a full strength weld,
PVElite will calculate the required weld size to withstand the load entered by the user. In this field, enter a
suitable axial load on the tubes from the loadings they expected to experience in service.
Allowable Joint Load Method
This drop down list box is only active if you are designing an exchanger in accordance with the ASME
code. PVElite will compute the Allowable Joint Load either using Appendix A, or according to Section
UHX-15 of the code. Select from the drop down list box one of the following:
ASME Appendix A
ASME UHX-15
Is the Tube Tubesheet Joint Tested
ASME in its Appendix A provides a procedure for testing the strength of the tube to tubesheet joint. If
this test is performed, then the actual strength is known, and this provides for a higher degree of
confidence in the integrity of the joint. If the joint configuration has been tested in accordance with the
stated procedure, then check this box. In the case of PD 5500 there is also a procedure for testing the tube
tubesheet joint. This procedure is to be found in the publication BS 4870-3 obtained from the British
Standards Institution.
Tube Joint Reliability Factor (table 3-9-2)
The Joint Reliability Factor is determined by the type of tube to tubesheet joint, and the code. The ASME
and PD 5500 codes have different reliability factors. Here are the reliability factors for the two codes (for
TEMA exchangers, choose the ASME values):
Interface Pressure (Pressure on Outside of Tube)

Here, two values are called for, namely: Po and Pt. Po is the pressure that exists between the outside of
the tube after the tube is expanded into the tubesheet, and Pt is the pressure that will exist on the outside of
the tube once the exchanger is in service. These values are difficult to obtain presently as the ASME code
gives little guidance.
This is a representation of the pressure on the outside of the tube once it is expanded into the tubesheet:
Tube Product Specification
Exchanger tubes are available as either seamless or welded products. If the tubes are of welded
construction then check this box.
Expansion Joint Data
If there is an expansion joint in the main shell between the tubesheets (which only applies to tubesheets
fixed to each end of the shell), then PVElite needs to know all the details of the expansion joint to compute
its flexibility (or spring rate), as the expansion joint plays a role in the axial forces that exist between the
shell and the tubes as a result mainly of the thermal growth of the shell and tubes relative to each other.
Type of Expansion Joint (If any)
From the above drop down list box choose the type of expansion joint employed in your design. The
choices are:
Joint Type Description
No Joint If there is no expansion joint present
Thin Bellows If the expansion joint is a many convolution thin metal bellows per ASME Appendix 26
Thick Joint if the expansion joint is made up of pressed elements - either per TEMA or ASME Appendix 5
We here illustrate the type of expansion joints. Note the dimension of each type, as you will be required
to enter the relevant dimensional details for the type you have chosen:
This the Thick Joint as prescribed by the TEMA Code:
Note: TEMA refers to each of the elements shown below as a 'Shell Element'. One convolution comprises
2 shell elements. Please take a note of this. It follows that shell elements exist in pairs and that the
number of shell elements required is twice the number of convolutions.
This is a Thick Joint as prescribed by the ASME Code Appendix 5:
This is a Thin Joint as prescribed by the ASME Code Appendix 26:

If you choose the thin joint as shown above, then the axial stiffness will be set to zero by PVElite unless a
value is entered (see below), as this type of joint is very flexible.
Make a note of the nomenclature and dimensions in the above figures, as you will need them for the type
of expansion joint you intend to install in your model.
You need to gather the all the information before you start entering the data that follows.
Number of Flexible Shell Elements (1 Convolution = 2 Fsa)
This field only applies to Thick Joints, which comprise shell elements (described just above). An
alternative way of looking at this information is to ask yourself how many PAIRS of elements do I need to
make up the number of convolutions needed. Remember, the greater the number of convolutions, the
greater the flexibility. This flexibility is affected by the dimensions, thickness of the vertical legs of the
elements, and the number of elements employed in the expansion joint. Enter the number of shell
elements in the expansion joint.
Distance From Node
The start of the expansion joint must be located somewhere in the shell to which in which it is installed.
The Distance From the Node is shown below:
Design Option
From the drop down box choose from the list:
Existing
Analyze
If you are wishing to enter the details of an Existing expansion component, then you will be required to
enter the spring rate and other information. However, if you required PVElite to compute the flexibility of
the expansion joint, then select Analyze from this drop down list box.
The command button labeled Set Defaults enable you to toggle between using the actual dimensions of
the expansion joint elements (which you will have to enter). In this way, once you have entered the
geometric data, you will be able to quickly change from a full analysis to using the flexibility values for an
existing joint.
Dimensions for the Shell Elements:
In the case of thick joints, and you want PVElite to compute the axial stiffness (or flexibility) enter the
dimensions for one shell element (defined above). You will be able to see the nomenclature related to the
shell element from the thumbnail picture on the input screen.
Desired Cycle Life

During service, the expansion joint will experience a number (cycles) of expansions and contractions from
the changing temperatures and pressures during its lifetime. PVElite computes the maximum number of
cycles the expansion joint is able to withstand. A number must be typed into this field. PVElite will
compare the computed number of cycles with the user entered value.
User Input Spring Rate
These fields only apply if the user has entered 'Existing' in the Design Option field above. Enter the
spring rate for both the Corroded and Uncorroded states.
The Outer Cylinder
If there is an Outer Cylinder between two shell element pairs like this:
From the figure showing the TEMA Thick Joint dimensions above, enter the Material, and outer cylinder
dimensions for the diameters and any corrosion allowances.
Load Cases
Click the tab: Load Cases.
During operation, and during in its service life a heat exchanger is subject to different combinations of
pressure and temperature. PVElite enables the user to set up to 8 different such combinations know as
'Load Cases'. Some of these load case might include the initial and periodic hydrostatic pressure tests,
normal predicted service, and upset or emergency conditions where unusual conditions might apply such
as sudden plant shut down, cold start up etc. Performing these calculations could be extremely tedious
and time consuming. PVElite not only considers up to 8 load cases, but also considers each of these load
cases for both corroded and un-corroded conditions as well as the possibility of a vacuum being
encountered for any one of these load cases. This could in an extreme case mean that up to 128 different
conditions being computed.
Let us now consider firstly how the individual load cases are entered by the user:
How Many Load Cases?
Firstly, the user must determine how many load cases must be considered:
From the drop down list box labeled: Number of cases to process, select a number between 1 and 8. This
sets the total number of load cases PVElite will include in its analysis. Underneath the drop down list box
is a spin box labeled: Active Load Case. By clicking on the up and down arrows the user is able to
navigate through the load cases, as only one load case at a time will appear on the screen. In the example
above, 2 load cases have been specified, but the input screen will only accept information for load case
number 1. Let now consider all the information in turn thus ensuring that sufficient information is entered
for each load case. Remember, if for example 8 load cases are chosen, then PVElite expects that the user
has entered all the information for each and every load case.
In the above field, enter a meaningful description of this code case. This will be included in the final
report generated by PVElite.
Just to the right of the Description field is a command button that looks like this:
If you click on this button, a new screen: Report Print Options opens up that looks like this:
It is important to realize that the load cases shown in the left hand column in the illustration above are
NOT the load cases entered on the parent screen.
Let us now explain the meanings of the symbols used in the above figure:
Descriptor Description
Fvs This is the user defined shell side pressure set to a full vacuum
Fvt This is the user defined tube side pressure set to a full vacuum
Ps The user defined shell side design pressure
Pt The user defined tube side design pressure
Th Thermal Expansion: +Th means with thermal expansion and -Th means without thermal
expansion
For example:
Ps + Fvt + Th would tell PVElite to use the design pressure in the shell, a vacuum in the tubes, and also
to include thermal expansion from temperature differentials.
Fvs + Fvt - Th would tell PVElite to use a vacuum in the shell, a vacuum in th tubes, but to ignore
thermal expansion.
ASME: In the case of the ASME analysis, PVElite will only run cases 1, 2, 3 and 8
TEMA / PD 5500: In the case of these codes, PVElite will run all cases.
Once you have set up the load cases, click on the Ok button to close this screen. Remember, this
combination of load cases is available for each major load case entered on the parent screen. As can be
seen, it is possible to have a very large number of total combinations, so only enter cases that are
absolutely necessary, because the computation time can be long, and the report can generate a lot of
output. So only enter those cases that are relevant.
Let us now return to the parent screen:
Load Case - Pressures, Temperatures and Materials
Across the top of the figure the following headings are located: Shell, Channel, Tubes, Tubesheet and
Shell Band.
Running down the left hand side are the following labels: Design Pressure, Design Temperature,
Material, Metal Temperature along length, Metal Temperature at Tubesheet Rim and Database
lookup and Properties.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure for the shell and the channel (tube side).
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for the Shell, Channel, Tubes, Tubesheet and Shell Band. This is the
maximum design temperature. PVElite will use this temperature to determine the allowable stresses,
coefficient of expansion and Young's Modulus. These temperatures are typically higher than the actual
metal temperatures.
Material
Underneath each component are two command buttons that look like this: Tubes, and the Right Arrow
Button.
If the left button is clicked, a list of materials is presented from which an appropriate material may be
selected. If the right button is clicked, then the details of the current material for that component is shown.
At this point, ensure that the information in the detail screen is complete, including the yield stresses, and
any other information. PVElite needs this information to determine the mechanical properties of the
component.
The material definitions are only available for load case 1. So if it is desired to change the material for
any component, then select load case 1 from the spin box discussed above.
Metal Temperature Along the Length
This refers to the Actual Metal temperatures - often called: 'Mean Metal Temperature' for the specific
component. These temperatures are the ones used to compute the thermal expansion of the shell and
tubes. Try to be as accurate as possible in assigning these values, because the thermal expansions can be
the major contributor to the axial stresses. Not much guidance is available for determining these
temperatures, but a suggestion is available in the TEMA code at section T-4. However, the determination
of these temperatures is complex, and much information is required to attempt their derivation.
Modulus of Elasticity
If the User-defined values box is checked, then the user may enter his/her own values for the Young's
Modulus as indicated by the descriptions for each row. The user is cautioned that if user-defined values
are used, ensure they are realistic. Typically this check box would not be checked, and PVElite would use
its internal database to find these values. This is usually considered the safer route to take.
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
If the box labeled: 'User-defined values' is checked, then the user may enter his/her own values for the
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion as indicated by the descriptions for each row. The user is cautioned
that if user-defined values are used, ensure they are realistic. Typically this check box would not be
checked, and PVElite would use its internal database to find these values. This is usually considered the
safer route to take.
Differential Design Pressure

In the case of TEMA and PD 5500 only, the codes allow the user to have PVElite compute the stresses
using only the Differential Design Pressures (difference between Shell and Tube sides as defined)
combination only. If this field is left as a zero input, the PVElite will ignore this field, and will carry out
the computation for all the combinations of pressure. The differential pressure selection assumes that
these are the ONLY pressure that will be encountered for this load case. The user is cautioned that
typically, this field would be left as zero unless the user is absolutely certain that this case only need be
considered.
Expansion Joint Material and Differential Pressure Design
If an expansion joint is present, then the material for that joint is required. By clicking on the button
labeled: Matl.., a list of materials is made available from which a material may be selected. The right
hand button with the arrow is used to view the actual material characteristics. Click this button, and
ensure all the information is available including the yield stress values. This information is required by
PVElite during the computation of the thermal stress, and all relevant information must be available to the
program.
PD 5500 Specific Information
If you had selected the PD 5500 design code for the exchanger, then other information is required
concerning the materials of construction. From each of the drop down list boxes, the user must designate
the material class. Select for each item one of the following material classes:
Plain Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel

C-Si, C-1/2 Mo and Cr-1/2 Mo Steel
C-Mn-Si, 1-1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo and 3Cr - 1Mo Steel
Mn - Mo Steel
2-1/2 and 3-1/2 Ni Steel
Sea-Cure Steel
C-Si, C-1/2 Mo and Cr -1/2 Mo and 3Cr-1Mo Steel
C-Mn-Si, 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo and 3Cr-1Mo
33Cr-31Ni-32Fe-1.5Mo-6Cu-N Steel
Please refer for the PD 5500 code for further details.
Floating Tubesheets
Click on the Floating Tubesheets tab.

If you have chosen to analyze a Floating Tubesheet, you will be presented with the following input screen:
Let us consider each field in turn:
Description
Enter a meaningful description for the floating head that will be included in the final report generated by
PVElite.
Floating Tubesheet Type
From the list box select one of the following:
In the case of TEMA / PD 5500 Exchangers, the list is as follows
(P) Floating tubesheet, outside packed

(T) Floating Tubesheet, pull through floating head
(S) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, not extended, with backing device
(W) Floating tubesheet, externally sealed.
In the case of ASME Exchangers, the list is as follows:

(a) Floating tubesheet, integral

(b) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, extended as a flange
(c) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, not extended with backing device
(d) Floating tubesheet, internally sealed.
The floating heads for the TEMA / PD 5500 codes is illustrated below:
The floating heads for the ASME code is illustrated as follows:
Floating Tubesheet Geometry
Outside Diameter
Enter the outside diameter of the floating tubesheet.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the Actual Thickness of the Tubesheet.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the Corrosion Allowances for both the Shell and Channel sides. This corrosion allowance will be
deducted when computing the tubesheet stresses for the corroded condition calculation.
Depth of Groove in Tubesheet (if any)
If there is a groove across the tubesheet for a pass partition, then enter the depth of this groove. The depth
of this groove is deducted from the thickness of the tubesheet during the calculation process. Below is an
illustration of a pass partition located into the tubesheet. At the bottom of the groove, there is usually a
gasket, which PVElite refers to as the Pass Partition Gasket (see elsewhere in this manual where flanges
are discussed):
Is The Floating Tubesheet Extended as a Flange
If the floating tubesheet is extended as a flange to be bolted to a body flange, then check the box:
Tubesheet Extended as Flange. The thickness of the part of the tubesheet that is extended as a flange
may be the same or a different thickness from the rest of the flange. Enter the Thickness of Extended
Portion.
Integral Channel Properties for ASME Floating Configuration A
If you selected the ASME Floating Tubesheet for Configuration A analysis, then enter the New
Channel Thickness tc and the Design Temperature.
Use the command buttons to choose the appropriate material, and ensure that all the data fields (click the
right command button) are entered including the yield strength.
PD 5500 Specific
If you selected PD 5500 from the Constraint dialog, the PD 5500 frame becomes active. From the list
box, choose the combination of the way the tubesheet is restrained in the heat exchanger. The choices
available:
Stationary Simply / Floating Simply

Stationary Simply / Floating Clamped
Stationary Clamped / Floating Simply
Stationary Clamped / Floating Clamped
PD 5500 Code uses the following diagram to explain the meaning of Tubesheets that are Simply
Supported, and Tubesheets that are Clamped. PVElite also uses this information to determine which PD
5500 graphs to use to obtain certain values required in the computation of the tubesheet analysis.
Spherical Cover / Backing Device
This section covers the data required to analyze the Spherical Cover and Backing Device (if there is one).
Description
Enter an appropriate description that describes the type of bolted cover for reference in the final report
generated by PVElite.
Type of Floating Head
PVElite will analyze four different type of Floating Heat (Bolted Cover). They are illustrated here:
Dimensions of the Bolted Cover
From the illustration just above, enter the following information which is specific to the bolted cover (not
the mating flange or backing device):
Design Temperature of the Bolted Cover

The Inside Crown Radius of the spherical cap, or formed dome (see the illustration above)
The Head Thickness. This is the thickness of the spherical or domed portion of the cover.
Head Internal Corrosion Allowance (this is the tube side). Enter the corrosion allowance.
Head External Corrosion Allowance (this is the shell side). Enter the corrosion allowance.
Flange Thickness. In the above illustration, this is the thickness of the actual flange part of the bolted
cover, not the spherical cap.
Once you have selected the type of cover (a, b, c or d), a new screen opens up. This screen is for the
flange, gasket and bolting details. A partial view of this input screen is shown thus:
For details in completing the data in this screen, please refer to the section titled Bolted Cover Mating
Flange.
Continuing with the input:
The remainder of the required data is thus:
Slotted Flange
If the flange is slotted, check this box. This is an illustration of a slotted flange:
Have a care, because slotted flanges are very much weaker than conventional flanges.
Perform Soehrens Calculation
A more detailed analysis of bolted dished heads is included, based on Soehrens analysis, "The Design of
Floating heads for Heat-Exchangers", ASME 57-A-7-47. The more detailed analysis may be used for the
design of floating heads, as specifically mentioned in the ASME Code, Paragraph 1-6 (h).
Dimension Q
If you have checked the box to perform the Soehrens Calculation, then enter the 'Q' dimension as shown
below:
Head and Flange Materials
Use the left hand command button in each case to select the material from the drop down list box, and use
the right hand command button to view the properties. Make sure all the properties are included,
including the yield value, which you may have to enter yourself for a non ASME material.
Compute 'F' Even if the Pressure is Zero
In ASME Division 1, Appendix 1 for the type 'd' head, the thickness of the head is computed using a
derived 'F' value. 'F' is a function of the pressure, therefore, for the initial bolt-up condition 'F' would
become zero. Some are of the opinion that the 'F' value should never be zero, but that the value of 'F'
computed for the operating condition should be used. If you wish to have PVElite use a non zero value of
'F', then check this box.
Dimension hr
In the illustration of a type 'd' head (see illustration above), the distance 'hr' can be entered in two different
ways. If the distance 'hr' is known, then enter this value in the upper box. However, if you know the
distance from the top of the flange to where the top of the spherical cap (Head) intersects the inside
diameter of the flange, then enter this dimension, and when the Compute button is clicked, PVElite will
compute the value of 'hr'.
Backing Ring Data
If there is a backing ring (or backing device) behind the tubesheet, then check the box labeled: 'Is There a
Backing Ring'.
Backing Ring Material
Select the backing ring material and check all the data is complete as discussed above for other
components.
Backing Ring Inside Diameter / Outside Diameter
Enter the Inside Diameter and the Outside Diameter of the Backing Ring.
Backing Ring Thickness
Enter the thickness of the backing ring.
Number of Splits in Backing Ring
Sometimes backing rings are split diametrically to facilitate assembly. More than one split ring may be
employed in the construction of the backing ring for added strength. Illustrated below are two rings each
of which is split diametrically, the splits being located at 90 degrees to each other. Enter the number of
rings that are split. For the diagram below the number of splits would be two. If the backing ring is not
split then enter zero from the drop down list.
In the above illustration, there are two backing rings, each of which is split. In this case, The number of
splits in Backing Ring would be entered as '2'.
Bolted Cover Mating Flange

Flange and Gasket Information
The bolted cover attached to the floating tubesheet produces a moment on the this tubesheet. In order that
this moment can be computed by PVElite, we need all the flange and bolting information. The following
input screen Flange and Gasket Information will now be discussed:
A typical tubesheet extended as a flange subject to the bolting moment has the following appearance and
dimensions:
Flanged Portion ID / OD
Enter the Inside Diameter of the Cover Flange, and the Outside Diameter of the Cover Flange
Flange Face ID / OD
Enter the Inside Diameter of the Flange Raised Face, and the Outside Diameter of the Flange Raised Face.
Gasket ID / OD
Enter the Inside Diameter of the Gasket, and the Outside Diameter of the Gasket.
Gasket m / y
From ASME VIII Division 1 - Appendix 2, Table 2-5.1, enter the gasket seating factor 'm' factor, and the
gasket seating stress 'y'. In the case of a PD 5500 exchanger, refer to Table 3-8.4
Flange Face Sketch / Column
From ASME Table 2-5.1 or PD 5500 Table 3-8.4, select facing sketch and column number from the drop
down list boxes.
Gasket Thickness
Enter the thickness of the gasket. This value is not used in the tubesheet computation, but is included in
the final report.
Nubbin Width
Referring to the above illustration, the Nubbin Width is the a tongue defined by the inside and outside
diameters of the raised face.
Partition Gasket Details
If the channel has a partition plate (see the manual section 'Tubesheet Properties' for a sketch of this
arrangement), or gasket then enter the length and width of the partition plate or gasket. In this way,
PVElite with include the extra forces to compress the gasket at the location of the partition plate.
Partition Gasket m / y
As in the case of the main gasket, enter the values of m and y specific to the partition gasket. Typically,
these vales would be the same as the m and y values for the main gasket as discussed above.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts that connect the cover to the tubesheet.
Bolt Circle Diameter / Nominal Bolt Diameter
Enter the diameter of the circle where the bolts are located around the flange, and the nominal diameter of
each bolt.
Thread Series
From the drop down list box select:
TEMA
UNC
User Specified Root Area of a Single Bolt
British Standard
South African Standard
The purpose of this box is to determine the root area of the thread in the determination of the bolt load
applied to the flanged joint.
Bolt Design Temperature
Enter the Design Temperature of the bolts. This temperature should not be less than the Design
Temperature of the flange or tubesheet, whichever is the larger.
Bolt Material
As discussed in other areas of this manual, select the Bolt Material from the drop down list box ensuring
that all fields contain correct information, especially the value of the yield value in the case of non ASME
materials.
Alternate Bolt Loads (used if greater than calculated values)
If you wish to enter the Wm1, Wm2 and W to over-ride the values computed by PVElite, then enter these
values. They will only be used if they exceed the valued computed by PVElite.
Precautionary Note
Tubesheets Integral with Shell Only
When a tubesheet is defined by the user as being Integral with the Shell and Channel, PVElite expects the
design to look like this:
Notice this important point: PVElite expects the tubesheet to be welded to both the Channel, and the Shell.
The reason for this as follows:
The program computes the pressure and loads on the channel side using the dimensions of the channel
The program computes the pressure and loads on the shell side using the dimensions of the shell.
The shell and channel sides can have different thicknesses and different corrosion allowances.
If for example, the Channel side were of thin Austenitic steel with no corrosion allowance, and the Shell
side were of thick Carbon steel with a large corrosion allowance, then the corroded diameters of the shell
and channel sides would be different when PVElite computes the stresses in the corroded condition.
Provided the user constructs the heat exchanger as shown above, this will not create a problem, because
PVElite knows the dimensions of both the shell and channel sides.
However: Suppose the user constructed the exchanger like this:
there would be a problem. Looking carefully at this type of construction, the tubesheet is inserted fully
into the main shell, and does NOT connect to the channel.
With this type of construction, PVElite will use the dimension of the Channel for the channel side, and the
dimension of the Shell for the shell side. This would give incorrect results, because both the shell and
channel sides should be computed using only the shell dimensions.
How can we solve this problem?
The best way of solving the problem is for the user to include a dummy piece of channel as an extra
component into the design (both ends of the exchanger in the case of a fixed tubesheet exchanger).
This is how the dummy channel can be introduced by the user to correct the problem:
By introducing this Dummy Channel, which has the identical dimensions, corrosion allowance and
material specification as the main shell between the two tubesheets, PVElite will now correctly compute
the stresses based upon the correct components.
10-1
C H A P T E R 1 0
Chapter 10: Component Analysis Tutorial
In This Chapter
Purpose of this Chapter ......................................................10-2
Starting CodeCalc from PVElite ........................................10-2
Main Menu .........................................................................10-3
Performing an Analysis......................................................10-19
Reviewing the Results - The Output Option ......................10-26
Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel..................10-27
Tutorial Problem Printout...................................................10-29
Purpose of this Chapter
This purpose of this chapter is to explain the basics of the PVElite component analysis operation by
guiding you through one application of it. Each of the main menu choices used to control the program is
described and illustrated. In addition, certain comments on how things are made in this chapter and not
elsewhere.
Use of the PVElite program assumes that the software has been installed per the instructions detailed in
Chapter 2.
Starting CodeCalc from PVElite
The COMPONENT ANALYSIS DATA processor (CodeCalc) may be started by selecting COMPONENT
ANALYSIS DATA ... from the Input option on the Main Menu. At this point the COMPONENT ANALYSIS
DATA processor is loaded.
Component Analysis Tutorial 10-3
Main Menu
CodeCalc starts with the Data Input screen. Across the top of this screen is a line of items, which
comprise the Main Menu. The Main Menu controls the major functions of the program. This chapter
will review the functions available in each of these menu items.
The items in the MAIN MENU - File, Edit, Analyze, Output, Tools, Diagnostics, View, ESL and Help -
may be selected with a mouse click or by pressing the underlined character while pressing the Alt key.
For example, the Output processor may be selected by pressing the Alt and O keys simultaneously.
First, we will begin by going over each of the Main Menu options.
File Menu
The FILE MENU controls the general operations of CodeCalc files. Options that are displayed in the menu
with an ellipsis (…) cause a file manage window to appear when selected.
File Menu
The FILE MENU may be used to:

New - Starts or opens a new or existing file.
A blank screen appears.
Open - Opens a previously created file.
This gives you access to files that have previously been created by CodeCalc. Simply double click on the
file name, or enter the file name into the File Name field, and the file will be loaded, and you will be able
to make any changes to the components it contains.
When OPEN is selected the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of type *.cci will be
displayed for selection.
Save - Saves the current file in its present condition. However, if the file is being saved for the first
time, you will need to give the file a name. For saving the first time, you will get the Save As menu.
Save As - Saves a file that has not been previously named or saves the current file under another
name.
Print - Sends the current vessel graphic image directly to a postscript or laser jet printer.
Print Preview - Displays the page that will be sent to the printer (see above).
Print Setup - Displays the standard Windows printer setup screen.
Exit - Exits CodeCalc. A message window will appear to give the user a last opportunity to save any
modifications to the current job.
The File Menu also lists the last four vessel input files. Any of these files may be opened with a mouse
click.
Edit Menu
Once a file is selected, the EDIT MENU indicates the options available for editing.
Edit Menu
Title Page - Allows the user to enter report titles for this group of reports.
Project Data - Allows the user to enter up to 3 title lines, which appear at the top of each page of the
printed reports.
Add New Item - Allows the user to enter a new item
Insert New Item - Inserts a new element after the current element.
Delete Current Item - Deletes the current element.
Select All - Selects all of the items in the browse window.
Deselect All - clears all of the items in the browse window.
Analysis Menu
The ANALYSIS options cause the program to quit the input process and enter the analysis process.
CodeCalc will first save the current job to the input file with the same filename, then process the analysis.
Analysis Menu
The following options are available:
Analyze Current Item - Performs the analysis of the current component.

Analyze Selected Items - This option will perform calculations for selected analysis types. The
calculations will be saved in a binary file and will be ready for display or printing.
Summary - This option will look through all the data in the current analysis file and prepare a brief
summary of each analysis.
Choose Analysis Type - Use this option to select the type of component you wish to work on.
The various analysis types are shown in the figure above. The analysis types chosen from this menu can
also be selected from the Analysis tool bar by clicking the icon.
Output Menu
Output Menu
Review - Allows the user to review the analysis results of the current job, if those results are available.
Tools Menu
The TOOLS MENU controls the utility processors and drawing options.
Tools Menu
Configuration - Enables users to set some specific program computation control parameters.
Computation Control Tab

Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness?
In many cases pressure vessels are designed and built long before the piping system is attached to them.
This means that the nozzle loadings are unknown. If this field is checked, then your minimum nozzle
thickness (trn) will be the maximum of:
trn = (.134, trn for internal pressure) less than or equal NPS 18
trn = (OD/150, trn for internal pressure) greater than NPS 18
By using such a requirement in addition to UG-45, the piping designers will have some additional metal to
work with to satisfy thermal bending stresses in systems these vessels are designed for. Note carefully,
that these formulae are not in the ASME Code. They are used in industry.
You can also specify the minimum wall thickness of the nozzle (Trn) in the Nozzle input. If you do so,
that will override this calculation.
Calculate F in Flohead if the Pressure is Zero?
In the design of the Floating head, a factor F is computed. The factor F is a direct function of the internal
pressure. If the internal pressure is 0, then F is equal to 0. However, some interpret the Code to mean that
F should always be computed regardless of which case we are analyzing. Typically, the case in question
is the flange bolt up case. When bolting up the unit there is no internal pressure. That is why the default
is not checked.
If you wish F to always be considered in the thickness calculations, then check this box. This is
conservative.
Use P instead of MAWP for UG-99B?
The Code paragraph UG-99(b) discusses the subject of hydrostatic test pressure on vessels. The equation
that would normally be used is as follows:
Test Pressure = 1.5 * MAWP * Stest/Sdesign (for A-98 Addenda)
or
Test Pressure = 1.3 * MAWP * Stest/Sdesign (for post 2001 edition of ASME VIII Division 1)
The code in note 32 states that the MAWP may be assumed to be the same as the design pressure when
calculations are not made to determine the MAWP.
This will allow for lower test pressures. This directive should be used with caution.
Print Water Volume in Gallons/Liters?
Normally the volumes computed by the program are in diameter units. If for example the diameter were
entered in feet, then the volume will be output as cubic feet, however, if the diameter is entered in mm,
then the output will be output as cubic mm.
If you want to use US Gallons instead of cubic diameter units check this directive. The program will use
cubic units if the default value is not checked. For all other units, the volume prints in liters if this box is
checked. A note of caution: A US gallon is smaller than an Imperial gallon as defined in Europe. The
difference is that a US gallon is 3.7854 liters, and an Imperial gallon is 4.5461 liters. This is mentioned as
the program considers only the US gallon.
Use Calculated Value of M for Torispherical Heads in UG-45 b1?
The Code in paragraph UG-45 requires a calculation of the required head thickness at the location of the
nozzle. This may lead one to believe that the thickness may be computed per paragraph UG-37. However
the code interpretation, VIII-1-95-133 states that the thickness should be computed by the rules of
paragraph UG-32 or by the rules in Appendix 1.
Thusly, this directive should always be checked. Here is the interpretation VIII-1-95-133 issued December
1996
Question: does the definition of the required thickness tr for a formed head given in the nomenclature of
UG-37(a) in section VIII, Division 1 apply when determining the minimum nozzle neck thickness in UG-
45(b)(1)?
Reply: No, see UG-32
Use Pre-99 Addenda
In the 1999 addendum to ASME Section VIII, Division 1, the allowable design stresses (S) were
increased. However, it is recognized that it may be necessary to re-rate vessels constructed before this
directive came into effect.
Check this box to use the material database that precedes the 1999 Addendum. This is only relevant to
Division 1 of ASME VIII.
Material Year
The user has a choice of which material database is to be used. Each database contains a complete lilting
of materials and their allowable design stresses and other relevant properties. Click on the year required.
If a different material database is selected from the one used for the current set of component, the stress
values will be updated before the computations are sent to the output processor.
Miscellaneous Tab
The MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS of the CONFIGURATION MENU lets the user select some miscellaneous
directives. These directives control some printout style options and others. Following is a description of
the options:
Report Content
This directive allows the user to change the length of the printed reports. When the summary option is
checked, the formulas and substitutions will not be printed out. Thus, this option will generate less paper
and more compact reports.
When the detailed option is checked, the reports will be the normal length.
External Printout in Rows?
There are 2 choices for the style of printing external pressure results rows and columns. Printing the
values row wise tend to reduce the length of the printouts. This is the default.
If you wish to use the column wise printout, do not check this directive.
Reload Last File at Startup?
If this box is checked, CodeCalc will load the last file worked on by the user the next time the program is
started.
Syntax Highlighting In Output Reports
When CodeCalc sends the results to the output processor, the style of the reports is affected by this check
box. If the box is checked, warnings will be printed in blue or red type, and errors or fatal problems will
be printed in red type. This feature can be switched on by checking this box, or turning it off by un-
checking this box. When this box is checked, output might be generated a little slower, and will also
affect the time it takes to send the output to MS-Word©.
Do not Print Extended ASCII Characters in Output Reports
The extended ASCII characters such as superscript 2, are not displayed properly on some versions of
Windows such as the Chinese, Korean or Japanese. If you are encountering difficulty with extended
ASCII characters, then check this box. When this box is checked the program will use the basic ASCII
characters.
Default Units File
From the list box click the units you wish to use when entering your data and for the computed results.
However for technical reasons, this selection is redundant, as it will not change the units. Use the Set
Units option discussed below.
HOOPS' Display Driver
Hoops is the third party software used by CodeCalc and PVElite for generating the images on the screen of
either the individual components or the 3D model generated in PVElite for the vessel as it is constructed.
If your computer does not generate the image correctly on the screen, then switch the choice from the
currently set driver.
NozPro Path
If you have purchased Nozzle Pro from the Paulin Research Group www.paulin.com http://www., this
feature enables you to access Nozzle Pro to perform finite element analysis (FEA) of nozzles. This feature
can also be used to perform more accurate and detailed analysis than can be performed using the other
local load procedures (WRC107, WRC297 and PD 5500 Annex G).
Set Unit
Clicking Set Unit ... displays the Open dialog.
Double clicking on the unit system of your choice, updates the current file and the output processor to
reflect the new units selected.
Make Unit
Clicking this menu item enables the user to create any set of units. (See illustration below).
CodeCalc (and indeed all of COADE's products) internally use conventional American units. To use a
different unit type that is not a CodeCalc standard.
The conversion factor from the CodeCalc to the chose unit must be known in order that CodeCalc can
provide the conversion for the output and on screen units for the various entry fields.
Calculator
You can use the calculator to compute a number and transfer that number into CodeCalc by using
EDIT/COPY. From the desired field, right click and choose the PASTE option. Before pasting, ensure the
fields' content is selected.
Units Conversion View
This utility allows the user to quickly convert a value in one set of units to a value in another set of units.
Edit / Add Materials
Enables users to create and edit a user-defined material in the CodeCalc material database. Clicking this
menu option displays the dialog below:
Edit/Add Materials Dialog
To use the processor, click the button. Next enter the material properties under the General and the
Stresses areas. Click the button to add another material if desired. When all of the materials have
been entered, click the button to add these materials to the end of the materials supplied in the
CodeCalc material database. The material list from the main database can also be imported into this
processor. A material from this list can be imported into the user material database. Use the button
on the toolbar to accomplish this task.
In addition to adding materials to the ASME Databases, it is also possible to add materials to the PD 5500
database. When the option to edit this database is selected, the following screen appears:
To use this processor, click the button. Next enter the Material Name, Yield Strength and other
fields. Next fill in the table of stress versus temperature. This processor creates a user material database
that is stored in the CodeCalc\System subdirectory. Once the database has been saved after the initial use,
those materials will be available for editing.
Diagnostic Menu
The DIAGNOSTICS MENU helps to troubleshoot problem installations.
Diagnostics Menu
CRC Check - This option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied PVElite files.
Build Version Check - This option checks the revision level of the PVElite executable files.
DLL Version Check - This option checks to make sure the PVElite.dll files are current. Please note
that if the dll's are not current the program may behave in an unusual manner or may not run at all.
Error Review - This option allows the user to review errors that may have been generated at startup
or during program execution.
Register Servers - Register the dynamic link libraries that PVElite uses during its operation.
View Menu
The VIEW MENU allows the user to display the input, drawing and quick analysis and browse views.
View Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL MENU gives access to utilities, which interact with the external software lock.
ESL Menu
The options are as follows:
Phone Update - Allows you to obtain phone update authorization information or other ESL changes,
to be made over the phone.
Generate Fax Codes - Allows you access codes for remote ESL updating. These access codes should
be sent to COADE for authorization codes.
Receive and Enter Fax Codes - Allows you to enter the remote authorization codes received from
COADE. Each set of four codes will make one change to the data stored on your ESL.
View ESL Information - Displays the data stored on the ESL.

Check HASP Driver Status - Checks the version of the installed ESL drivers.
Install HASP Device Driver - Installs the HASP device drivers.
Help Menu
The HELP MENU displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support for CodeCalc.
Help Menu
The options available are as follows:
Help Topics - Starts the help facility.

Online Documentation - Displays the online documentation.
CodeCalc Quick Start - Displays the CodeCalc Quick Start documentation. This section is primarily
for first time users to enable them to get up and running quickly.
Desktop (On-line Help) - Displays the on-line help.
Tip of the Day - Provides tips for running CodeCalc.
Info - Provides information on the ways to contact COADE personnel for technical support, and
provides a link to COADE's Web Site.
About This Program - Provides the user with the latest build information and operating system
information.
On-Line registration - Allows the user to electronically register this program with COADE.
Performing an Analysis
The remainder of this chapter aids you in performing an analysis using the Shell program.
Start CodeCalc by clicking the icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Programs. If you are
running the program through PVElite use the Input option and select COMPONENT ANALYSIS DATA.
From the Main Menu click FILE, NEW or click the New icon. This will allow you to specify the current
analysis type. From the Analysis Toolbar, select Shells and Heads and then click the icon. A blank
input screen displays.
Shell analysis can be defined on the Design tab of this screen. You can use the Tab or Enter keys to
move the cursor up and down the column of data. Notice also that many of the fields display default
values.
The first field on the input screen is the Item Number. A value must be entered in this field or the
program cannot perform the analysis. We suggest that you number the different calculations sequentially.
Type 1 in this field and press Tab.
The next field to analyze is the Description. The information entered can be the part number or a short
description of the part. This field is an optional input. For this tutorial, type Spherical Head.
The next four fields govern the pressure and temperature. Move to the Design Internal Pressure field
and type 100 (assuming you are using English units). Now tab to the Design Temperature for Internal
Pressure and type 700. When you press Tab, the program pauses momentarily to check whether the
material specified has an allowable stress greater than zero at the temperature entered. Click the button
to view the allowable stress. Note that the allowable stress for SA516-70 material is 18,100 psi at this
temperature. This is precisely the value that PVElite extracted from the material database.
The Design External pressure for this problem is 15. The Design Temperature for External pressure
should be 650.
Now you are ready to enter the material. Let's say this vessel is constructed of SA-516-70. As you might
expect, one way to enter that material is just to type it in the field. When you do so, the program will
check the database, and then update the allowable stresses. This material happens to be the program
default, but type the name anyway just to see what the program does.
Another way to select a material is from the list of materials in the database. To see this list, click the
button. A screen will display showing the materials list.
Material Selection Screen
You can move the scroll bar up and down the screen to view the properties for all of the materials in the
database. Note that each major material classification is divided into columns. You can view the
parameters for a specific material by clicking the material name.
Material Parameters Screen

These parameters may be viewed and modified through the Material Edit window. To see this window,
click Material Edit button and the Material Properties Dialog displays.
Material Properties Dialog
Click Yield Stress to display the Yield Stress Record dialog. The Yield Stress Record dialog enables
PVElite to scan the yield stress database for an exact material match and fill in the appropriate yield stress
at operating temperature. For many applications, this value is not needed.
Yield Stress Record Dialog
On the Joint Efficiency Longitudinal Seams dialog, enter the value of E, the longitudinal joint
efficiencies to be used in the calculator. For full radiography, enter a value of 1.
The next question asks if you would like to include Hydrostatic Head Components to our vessel design.
Click the box to activate the Hydrostatic Head dialog.
Hydrostatic Head Dialog
This dialog will prompt you for the operating liquid density enter a value of 38 lb/cu.ft. The next two
fields request the height of liquid column in the operating and hydrotest position of the vessel. This
particular vessel is a horizontal drum that will be operating in a partially filled position. When the shop
hydrotests the vessel it will be filled and in the horizontal position. Enter values of 54 and 72 in. for these
two fields. Click OK to return to the Data Input screen.
Now click the Geometry tab of the input screen. The first field is the shell or head type. Six options are
shown on the pull-down, for more details on this field press [F1] for help.
We will analyze a hemispherical head, a cylinder and an elliptical head. These are all components of the
horizontal vessel we are analyzing. First enter the Diameter Basis (OD) for an Outside Diameter
measurement (and calculation). Next, tab to the Diameter of Shell/Head field and enter the diameter, 72
inches.
Now, enter the Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate, .5 inches, and the Nominal or Average Thickness of
Pipe or Plate, .5 inches.
Enter 0.0625 inches for the Corrosion Allowance. Since the input fields have calculator capability, you
can also enter the Corrosion Allowance as '1/16'.
For this example there is no reinforcing ring required for internal pressure, so select None for the ring type
You have now completed the hemispherical head input. Your screen should look like this:
Completed Hemispherical Head Input Screen
Note: You may view the drawing of the current item at any time by clicking the Cactus Picture icon.
This horizontal tank has two additional sections, the shell and the elliptical head on the other end. To add
the new section, click the button. Clicking this button returns you to the Design tab of the input
screen and prompts you to enter the second item. Type 2 in the Item Number field and Cylind in the
Description field. Click the Geometry tab to enter the shell type. Since this is a cylinder type, from the
pull down, select CYLINDRICAL SHELL. A window will display prompting for the Design Length of
Section and the Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations; enter 180 inches for both. Click OK
to resume.
Next, we will enter elliptical head data. Click the Add New Item icon. Type 3 in the Item Number field
and Elliptical Head in the Description field.
The data from the previous element is carried forward, so you will only have to modify the shell/head
type. Click the Geometry tab of the Input screen. From the TYPE OF SHELL pull-down, select Elliptical
Head. The Elliptical Head dialog appears and prompts for the head ratio. Enter 2 for a 2:1 elliptical
head. Click OK to continue.
Tip: When entering new components be sure to type in appropriate descriptions in the description
field. This will help make your finished reports more clear and easier to follow.
You are now ready to analyze these three components for internal pressure and hydrostatic head
considerations. Save the file and click the button on the Analysis toolbar. Your screen will
resemble this:
Analysis Output
Click to review the results.
Reviewing the Results - The Output Option
You can quickly review the results of this analysis using the OUTPUT option. From the Main Menu
select OUTPUT/REVIEW. If you have analyzed the components from the input, PVElite will automatically
display the output for you. You will see the following screen:
Output Reports Screen
At the moment there are 3 analyses in the output file. However, if you were to do additional runs of the
Shell program, or analyze nozzles, flanges, tubesheets, or anything else those analyses would also appear
on this list. Thus you can review (and print) all of the calculations you have done for a given vessel or job
at one time. The individual report can be viewed by selecting one of the items in the report area.
You can scroll up and down in the text to see all of the input and results. Note especially the Summary of
Internal Pressure Results, where you can clearly see that the required thickness is less than the actual
thickness for this job, while the Maximum allowable working pressure is greater than the design pressure.
Therefore, the shell thickness you selected is acceptable.
You may also select more than one analysis at a time by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting the
items to view. You can also select all reports by selecting EDIT/SELECT ALL from the menu. When
viewing the reports, click the Next Report button to move the next component.
Printing or Saving Reports to a File

Printing the Graphics
To print the graphics created by your input, click and then click . To view the graphic on the
screen, click File/Print Preview.
Printing the Reports
The PVElite output results can be sent directly to a printer. To print a hard copy of the reports, first select
the report font by clicking the Select Font icon from the Available Reports Menu toolbar. You may then
select a new font for your reports by clicking the Select Font icon. You can also enter a new starting page
number by clicking the Page Number icon on the toolbar. Now, click .
Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel
This section of the tutorial discusses the summary program in PVElite. . Selected portions of the output
generated by PVElite are stored in the input file. The summary program will pull selected information
from within the input file and summarize it. The summary is automatically generated when all of the
items in the file are executed.
Output Screen Tutorial

Tutorial Problem Printout

PVElite Licensee: Coade Local White Lock
FileName : Tutorial -------------------------------------- Page 2
Shell Analysis : Spherical Head Item: 1 4:39p Dec 12,2002
Input Echo, Component 1, Description: Spherical Head
Design Internal Pressure P 100.00 psig

Temperature for Internal Pressure 700.00 F
User Entered Minimum Design Metal Temperature -20.00 F
Design External Pressure PEXT 15.00 psig
Temperature for External Pressure 650.00 F
External Pressure Chart Name CS-2
Include Hydrostatic Head Components YES

Operating Liquid Density 38.000 lb./ft³
Height of Liquid Column ( Operating ) 54.00 in.
Height of Liquid Column ( Hydrotest ) 72.00 in.
Material Specification (Not Normalized) SA-516 70

Material UNS Number K02700
Allowable Stress At Temperature S 18100.00 psi
Allowable Stress At Ambient SA 20000.00 psi
Curve Name for Chart UCS 66 B
Joint efficiency for Head Joint E 1.00
Outside Diameter of Hemispherical Head D 72.0000 in.
Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate T 0.5000 in.

Nominal Thickness of Pipe or Plate T 0.5000 in.
Corrosion Allowance CA 0.0625 in.
Skip UG-16(b) Min. thickness calculation NO
Type of Element: Spherical Head or Shell
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Desc.: Spherical Head

ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Ed-2001, A-02
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure (TR):

= (P*D/2)/(2*S*E+0.8*P) per Appendix 1-1(a)(2)
= (101.19*72.0000/2)/(2*18100.00*1.00+0.8*101.19)
= 0.1004 in.
Max. All. Working Pressure at Given Thickness (MAWP):

Less Operating Hydrostatic Head Pressure of 1.19 psig
= (2*S*E*(T-CA))/((D/2-0.8*(T-CA)) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(2)
= (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.4375))/(72.0000/2-0.8*(0.4375))
= 444.25 - 1.19 = 443.06 psig
Maximum Allowable Pressure, New and Cold (MAPNC):

= (2*SA*E*T)/((D/2-0.8*T) Appendix 1-1 (a)(2)
= (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(72.0000/2-0.8*0.5000)
= 561.80 psig
Actual stress at given pressure and thickness (Sact):

= (P*(D/2-0.8*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA))
= (101.19*(72.0000/2-0.8*(0.4375)))/(2*1.00*(0.4375))
= 4122.67 psi
SUMMARY OF INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS:

Required Thickness plus Corrosion Allowance, Trca 0.1629 in.
Actual Thickness as Given in Input 0.5000 in.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP 443.062 psig
Design Pressure as Given in Input P 100.000 psig
HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURES ( Measured at High Point ):

Hydrotest per UG-99(b); 1.3 * MAWP * Sa/S 636.44 psig
Hydrotest per UG-99(c); 1.3 * MAPNC - Head (Hydro) 727.74 psig
Pneumatic per UG-100 ; 1.1 * MAWP * Sa/S 539.97 psig
Percent Elongation per UCS-79 ( 75t/Rf * (1-Rf/Ro) ) 1.049 %

Min. Metal Temp. w/o impact per Fig. UCS-66 -6 F
Min. Metal Temp. at Req'd thk. (per UCS 66.1) -146 F
WEIGHT and VOLUME RESULTS, ORIGINAL THICKNESS:

Volume of Shell Component VOLMET 4015.2 in.**3
Weight of Shell Component WMET 1136.3 lb.
Inside Volume of Component VOLID 93700.9 in.**3
Weight of Water in Component WWAT 3383.6 lb.
WEIGHT AND VOLUME RESULTS, CORRODED THICKNESS:

Volume of Shell Component, Corroded VOLMETCA 3519.4 in.**3
Weight of Shell Component, Corroded WMETCA 996.0 lb.
Inside Volume of Component, Corroded VOLIDCA 94196.7 in.**3
Weight of Water in Component, Corroded WWATCA 3401.5 lb.
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 1, Desc.: Spherical Head

External Pressure Chart CS-2 at 650.00 F

Elastic Modulus for Material 25125000.00 psi
Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure (Emawp):

Corroded Thickness of Shell TCA 0.4375 in.
Outside Diameter of Shell OD 72.0000 in.
Diameter / Thickness Ratio (D/T) 164.5714
Geometry Factor, A f(DT,LD) A 0.0015191
Materials Factor, B, f(A, Chart) B 9327.4229 psi
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 113.35 psig
EMAWP = B/((D/T)/2) = 9327.4229/( 164.5714 / 2 ) = 113.3541
Results for Reqd Thickness for Ext. Pressure (Tca):


EMAWP = B/((D/T)/2) = 4853.4580/( 647.0902 / 2 ) = 15.0009
SUMMARY of EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS:

Allowable Pressure at Corroded thickness 113.35 psig
Required Pressure as entered by User 15.00 psig
Required Thickness including Corrosion all. 0.1738 in.
Actual Thickness as entered by User 0.5000 in.
PVElite by COADE Engineering Software


Shell Analysis : Cylinder Item: 2 4:39p Dec 12,2002
Input Echo, Component 2, Description: Cylinder



Joint efficiency for Shell Joint E 1.00
Design Length of Section L 180.0000 in.

Length of Cylinder for Volume Calcs. CYLLEN 180.0000 in.
Outside Diameter of Cylindrical Shell D 72.0000 in.

Type of Element: Cylindrical Shell
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: Cylinder


= (P*D/2)/(S*E+0.4*P) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(1)
= (101.19*72.0000/2)/(18100.00*1.00+0.4*101.19)
= 0.2008 in.

= (S*E*(T-CA))/(D/2-0.4*(T-CA)) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(1)
= (18100.00*1.00*(0.4375))/(72.0000/2-0.4*0.4375)
= 221.04 - 1.19 = 219.85 psig

= (SA*E*T)/(D/2-0.4*T) per Appendix 1-1 (a)(1)
= (20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(72.0000/2-0.4*0.5000)
= 279.33 psig

= (P*(D/2-0.4*(T-CA)))/(E*(T-CA))
= (101.19*((72.0000/2-0.4*(0.4375)))/(1.00*(0.4375))
= 8285.81 psi





EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 2, Desc.: Cylinder



Design Length of Cylinder or Cone SLEN 180.0000 in.
Length / Diameter Ratio LD 2.5000
EMAWP = (4*B)/(3*(D/T)) = ( 4 * 3138.2285 )/( 3 * 164.5714 ) = 25.4255


EMAWP = (4*B)/(3*(D/T)) = ( 4 * 2285.3257 )/( 3 * 203.1269 ) = 15.0010
Results for Maximum Length Between Stiffeners (Slen):

EMAWP = (4*B)/(3*(D/T)) = ( 4 * 1851.5686 )/( 3 * 164.5714 ) = 15.0011

Maximum Length for Thickness and Pressure 303.327 in.
Actual Length as entered by User 180.00 in.


Shell Analysis : Ellipse Item: 3 4:39p Dec 12,2002
Input Echo, Component 3, Description: Ellipse



Joint efficiency for Head Joint E 1.00
Outside Diameter of Elliptical Head D 72.0000 in.

Aspect Ratio AR 2.0000

Length of Straight Flange STRTFLG 2.0000 in.
Type of Element: Elliptical Head
INTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 3, Desc.: Ellipse


= (P*D*K)/(2*S*E+2*P*(K-0.1)) per Appendix 1-4 (c)
= (101.19*72.0000*1.00)/(2*18100.00*1.00+2*101.19*(1.00-0.1))
= 0.2002 in.

= (2*S*E*(T-CA))/(K*D-2*(T-CA)*(K-0.1)) per Appendix 1-4 (c)
= (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.4375))/(1.00*72.0000-2*(0.4375)*(1.00-0.1))
= 222.40 - 1.19 = 221.21 psig

= (2*SA*E*T)/(K*D-2*T*(K-0.1)) per Appendix 1-4 (c)

= (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(1.00*72.0000-2*0.5000*(1.00-0.1))
= 281.29 psig

= (P*(K*D-2*(T-CA)*(K-0.1)))/(2*E*(T-CA))
= (101.19*(1.00*72.0000-2*(0.4375)*(1.00-0.1)))/(2*1.00*(0.4375))
= 8235.22 psi




Inside Vol. of 2.00 in. Straight VOLSCA 7918.4 in.**3
Total Volume for Head + Straight VOLTOT 54768.8 in.**3

Inside Vol. of 2.00 in. Straight, Corr. VOLSCA 7946.3 in.**3
Total Volume for Head + Straight Corroded VOLTCA 55044.6 in.**3
EXTERNAL PRESSURE RESULTS, SHELL NUMBER 3, Desc.: Ellipse



EMAWP = B/(K0*(D/T)) = 8167.3354/( 0.9000 * 164.5714 ) = 55.1421

EMAWP = B/(K0*(D/T)) = 4853.5474/( 0.9000 * 359.4879 ) = 15.0014


11-1
C H A P T E R 1 1
Chapter 11: SHELLS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................11-2
Discussion of Input Data ....................................................11-4
Results ................................................................................11-12
API 579 Introduction..........................................................11-14
Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis .................................11-14
Discussion of Results .........................................................11-27
Example..............................................................................11-28
Jacket..................................................................................11-28
Introduction
SHELLS performs internal and external pressure design of vessel and exchanger components using the
rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Edition 2004. This program considers static liquid
head in the pressure design, performs stiffening ring calculations, sizes stiffening rings, and computes
weld shear flows on stiffening ring welds. Jackets can be attached to the vessel and are analyzed per
Appendix 9 of ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 code. This module also contains the option of performing fitness
for service evaluation per API-579.
The SHELL program calculates the required thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure for
cylindrical shells and heads under internal or external pressure. The program is based on the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2001 Edition 2004. Under internal pressure,
the program analyzes six types of heads or shells, using applicable code formulae as follows:
Shell or Head Type ID Basis OD Basis
Cylinder UG-27 (c) (1) App 1-1 (a) (1)
Elliptical App 1-4 (c) (1), App 1-4 App 1-4 (c) (2), App 1-4
(f) (f)
Torispherical App 1-4 (d) (3), App 1-4 App 1-4 (d) (4), App 1-4
(f) (f)
Spherical Head or Shell UG-27 (d) (3) App 1-1 (a) (2)
Conical Head or Shell UG-32 (g) App 1-4 (e) (1)
Flat Head UG-34 (1)and (3)
Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 (typically 2.0) may be analyzed. Torispherical
heads with knuckle radii between 6% and 100% of the crown radius may be analyzed. The thin, large
diameter elliptical or torispherical head is also checked using App. 1-4 (f) in the SHELL program.
Conical heads and sections with half apex angles up to 30 degrees may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the
large and small ends of the cone should be analyzed in the CONICAL program. Welded flat heads,
circular or non-circular, are analyzed in this program. Bolted flat heads are analyzed in the FLANGE
program. Bolted dished heads under internal or external pressure are analyzed in the FLOHEAD
program. Under external pressure program analyzes five types of heads or shells, using applicable code
formulae as follows:
SHELLS 11-3
Shell or Head Type Code Paragraph
Cylinder UG-28 (c)
Elliptical UG-33 (d)
Torispherical UG-33 (e)
Spherical Head or Shell UG-33 (c) and UG-28 (d)
Conical Shell or Head UG-33 (f)
All of these shell or head types are analyzed for diameter to thickness ratios greater than 10. Elliptical
heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 may be analyzed Torispherical heads with any crown radius
may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small end of conical heads or sections is analyzed in the
CONICAL program.
The SHELL program takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and corrosion
allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the corroded
condition. Figure A shows the geometry for the SHELL program. In addition, the SHELL program also
accounts for static liquid head for shell components. For carbon steel vessels, normalized material can be
used for UCS-66 calculations.
Figure A - SHELL Program Geometry

Figure B - Head Geometry
Main Input Fields

Analysis Type
Please select the following analysis type:
ASME Sec VII Div. 1

API 579 - Fitness for Service
Enter the internal design pressure. You must define either the design pressure or the minimum metal
thickness, preferably both. Design pressure is used to determine the required thickness and minimum
metal thickness is used to determine the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure.
Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. PVElite will automatically update
materials properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the
allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible to update them for the given temperature.
Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This should be a positive value, i.e. 14.7 psig. If
you enter a zero in this field the program will not perform external pressure calculations.
SHELLS 11-5
Design Temperature for External Pressure
Enter the temperature associated with the external design pressure. The design external pressure at this
temperature is a completely different design case than the internal pressure case. Therefore this
temperature may be different than the temperature for internal pressure. Many external pressure charts
have both lower and upper limits on temperature. If your design temperature is below the lower limit, use
the lower limit as your entry to the program. If your temperature is above the upper limit the component
may not be designed for vacuum conditions.
Include Hydrostatic Head Component
If your shell or head design needs to account for hydrostatic liquid head, click this box. PVElite will add
the hydrostatic pressure head to the internal design pressure for the required thickness calculation.
Shell Section Material Name
Click the Material Database button to search for a material in the material database. Also, you can type
the material name in this cell, and the system will retrieve the first material it finds with a matching name.
Click the Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected material. You can also
create new materials by selecting the TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS option on the MAIN MENU.
Shell Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
This entry is automatically filled in by the program by entering a material specification. When you
change the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the shell, the program will automatically update
this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to verify
your entry to ensure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII
Division 1 at the ambient temperature.
Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
This entry is automatically filled in by the program by entering a material specification. If you enter the
allowable stress by hand, be sure to verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the
ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Division 1 at the ambient temperature.
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal Seams
Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for shell sections with welded seams. This will be the efficiency
of the longitudinal seam in a cylindrical shell or any seam in a spherical shell. Elliptical and torispherical
heads are typically seamless but may require a stress reduction, which may be entered as a joint efficiency.
Please be sure to refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
The Joint Efficiency in this (and all other) ASME Code formulas is a measure of the inspection quality on
the weld seam. In general, weld seams that receive full radiography have a joint efficiency of 1.0. Weld
seams that receive spot radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.85. Weld seams that receive no
radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.7. Seamless components have a joint efficiency of 1.0.
In addition to the basic rules described above, the Code requires that no two seams in the same vessel
differ in joint efficiency by more than one category of radiography. For example, if circumferential seams
receive no radiography (E=0.7) then longitudinal seams have a maximum E of 0.85, even if they receive
full radiography. The practical outworking of this is that circumferential seams, which are usually less
highly stressed, may be spot radiographed (E=0.85) while longitudinal seams are fully radiographed. This
provides the same metal thickness at some savings in inspection costs.
Is the Shell/Head Material Normalized
If your vessel material has been produced to a fine grain structure, click this box. PVElite will use the
normalized material curve for the UCS 66 calculations.
Type of Shell or Head
Enter the type of shell for this shell section. Choose one of the following shell types:
Shell or Head Type

Cylindrical Shell
Elliptical Head
Torispherical Head
Hemispherical Head or Spherical Shell
Conical Shell
Welded Flat Head
Diameter Basis
If the vessel dimensions are specified on inside basis, pull down the ID selection. If the dimensions are
based on the vessels outside diameter select the OD selection. For flat heads, this value is ignored.
Always enter the outside diameter of the flat head.
Diameter of Shell or Head
Enter the diameter of the shell or head. For torispherical heads, enter the crown radius. For flat heads,
enter the outside diameter of the head. For cones, enter the largest diameter of the cone. The program
allows you to use either an inside diameter or an outside diameter.
Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate
Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness
measured for an existing vessel. Many pipe materials have a minimum specified wall thickness, which is
87.5% of the nominal wall thickness. You should enter the minimum thickness.
Nominal or Average Thickness of Pipe or Plate (OPTIONAL)
Enter the NOMINAL or AVERAGE thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to construct the vessel.
SHELLS 11-7
This thickness is used to calculate the volume and weight of the metal ONLY if it is between 1 and 1.5
times the minimum thickness. If this value is left blank or 0 the program will use the minimum thickness
to compute the weight and volume of this shell element.
Corrosion Allowance
Type of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the index for the type of reinforcing ring on the cylindrical or conical section. Three options are
available:
Reinforcing Ring Type

No Reinforcing Ring
Simple Bar Reinforcing Ring (You must enter the width and thickness of the bar.)
General Beam Section (You must enter the moment of inertia, cross sectional area,
and the distance from the shell to the centroid of the beam). In all cases PVElite
includes the shell in the calculation of the moment of inertia for the stiffening ring.
You can only perform this calculation for external pressure calculations. Also, the
detailed analysis for the required moment of inertia and cross section area for cones is
contained in the separate CONICAL program.
Minimum Design Metal Temperature
If this component is a carbon or low alloy steel shell or head, the program will compute its Minimum
Design Metal Temperature (MDMT). The value to be entered in this field is the user defined MDMT. This
value is for reference only and will not be used by the program.
If this material is not a carbon steel then enter a 0 in this field. If a value of zero is entered, the program
will not echo this value out during runtime.
Skip UG-16(b) Minimum Thickness Calculation
Click this box to skip the UG-16(b) calculation. Section UG-16(b) states the minimum thickness for
pressure retaining components as 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm). There are certain exemptions from this
requirement such as in the case of heat exchanger tubes. Refer to the ASME Section VIII, Division -1,
UG-16(b) for more details.
Is Jacket Present
Check this box if a jacket is present. The program will analyze jackets per Appendix-9 of the ASME Sec.
VIII Div. 1. For more information refer to the discussion about the jackets (see "Jacket" on page 11-28).
Pop-up Input Fields

Operating Liquid Density
Enter the density of the operating fluid here. This value will be multiplied by the height of the liquid
column in order to compute the static head pressure.
Height of Liquid Column Operating
Enter the distance from the bottom of this shell or head element to the surface of the liquid. The head
pressure is determined by multiplying the liquid density by the height of the fluid to the point of interest.
Height of Liquid Column Hydrotest
Enter the distance from the bottom of this shell or head element to the surface of the liquid when the
vessel is being hydrotested. If this is shop hydrotest, and the vessel is laying on its side, then the height of
the liquid column should be equal to the inside diameter of the vessel. In the case of a vertical hydrotest
this liquid height can be greater than the vessel diameter.
Design Length of Section
Enter the design length of the section, typically the length of the vessel plus one-third the depth of the
heads or, alternately, the distance between stiffening rings. For a vessel with 2 elliptical heads and no
intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus the diameter/6. For a vessel with 2
spherical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length plus the diameter/3.
For a vessel with 2 flanged and dished heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the
tangent length plus the diameter/9. When analyzing a head, enter zero for the length.
Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations
Enter the distance that you want PVElite to use for the liquid volume computation.
Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads
Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor
axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical head the aspect ratio is 2.0.
Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads
Enter the crown radius for torispherical heads. The crown radius for a torispherical head is referred to as
the dimension "L", in the ASME VIII Div. 1 Code.
Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads
Enter the knuckle radius for torispherical heads. This dimension is "r", in the ASME VIII Div. 1 Code.
SHELLS 11-9
Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections
Enter the half-apex angle for cones or conical sections. The maximum value of the half apex angle for
cones under internal pressure and without toriconical transitions or discontinuity stress check is 30
degrees. The largest angle for cones under internal pressure and with toriconical sections or discontinuity
stress check is 60 degrees. Typically the largest angle for cones under external pressure is 60 degrees. If
you exceed these values the program will run, but with a warning. In that case the user is encouraged to
use the CONICAL module for a more detailed analysis.
Large Diameter for Non-circular Welded Flat Heads
If you have a non-circular welded flat head, enter the large dimension in this field, and enter the small
dimension as the component diameter on the GEOMETRY tab.
Attachment Factor for Flat Head
Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors display below, however consult
Paragraph UG-34 before using these values:
0.17 (b-1) Head welded to vessel with generous radius
0.20 (b-2) Head welded to vessel with small radius
0.20 (c) Lap welded or brazed construction
0.13 (d) Integral flat circular heads
0.20 (e f g) Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m)
0.33 (h) Plate welded to end of shell
0.20 (I) Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m)
0.30 (j k) Bolted flat heads (include bending moment)
0.30 (m n o) Plate held in place by screwed ring
0.25 (p) Bolted flat head with full face gasket
0.75 (q) Plate screwed into small diameter vessel
0.33 (r s) Plate held in place by beveled edge
Width of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the width of the reinforcing ring. For a reinforcing ring that is a simple bar, this is the dimension
that is perpendicular to the surface of the shell. See the figure below.
Thickness of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing ring. For a reinforcing ring that is a simple bar, this is the dimension
that is parallel to the surface of the shell. See the figure below.
Figure C - Reinforcing Ring
Size of Fillet Weld Leg Connecting Ring to Shell
Enter the dimension of the weld leg, which connects the stiffening ring to the shell section. This value will
be used in the weld shear flow calculations if a simple bar stiffener has been selected as the type of
reinforcing ring.
Ring Type to Satisfy Inertia and Area Requirements
Entering a structural ring type here will cause PVElite to search the structural database for a suitable
member that will meet the inertia requirements for the ring. The valid types of structural shapes to enter
here are:
EQUAL ANGLE Equal Leg Angles
UNEQUAL ANGLE Unequal Angle
DBL LARGE ANGLE Double Angles Large Legs back to

back
DBL SMALL ANGLE Double Angles Small Legs back to
back
CHANNEL Channel Sections
I-BEAM Wide Flange Sections
WT SECTION Wide Flange Sections ( T type )
MT SECTION Miscellaneous Tee
ST SECTION Structural Tee
MC SECTION Miscellaneous Channel

SHELLS 11-11
Ring Weld Attachment Style (Intermittent, Continuous, Both)
Enter the style of the weld that attaches the stiffening ring to the shell section. Per UG-29 of the Code
there are 3 "styles":
INTERMITTENT
CONTINUOUS
BOTH
This input in conjunction with the shell thickness and corrosion allowance will allow for the computation
of the maximum spacing between weld segments.
Location of Ring (Internal or External)
There are two possibilities for the location of the stiffening ring.
INTERNAL Attached to the inside of the

Shell
EXTERNAL On the outer surface of the Shell
Moment of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the moment of inertia for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcing ring, in the direction
parallel to the surface of the shell.
Cross Sectional Area of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the cross sectional area for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcing ring.
Distance from Ring Centroid to Shell Surface
Enter the distance from the surface of the shell to the centroid of the reinforcing ring. This distance
should be measured normal to the shell surface.
Is the Ring Angle Rolled the Hard Way
If you have selected an angle type ring to satisfy the inertia requirements above, this box is meaningful,
otherwise it is ignored. When this option is used PVElite computes the distance from the shell surface to
the ring centroid based on information in the AISC Steel handbook.
Results
Thickness Due to Internal Pressure
The appropriate formula from ASME Section VIII is referenced, and the formula and substitutions are
shown. The diameter or crown radius is adjusted to take into account the corrosion allowance. If your
shell design includes hydrostatic head components, the additional pressure due to the height of the liquid
column and the operating liquid density will be included with the basic design pressure. The hydrostatic
head will be subtracted in order to properly determine the MAWP for the vessel part that is being
analyzed. Remember, when pressures are being read from the pressure gauge, the gauge is usually at the
high point of the vessel. The pressure registered by the gauge would be different if were at the bottom of
the liquid filled vessel.
For elliptical heads, the K factor is (2 + Ar * Ar) / 6, per App. 1-4 (c).
For torispherical heads the factor M is (1/4) * (3 + SQRT (L / R)), where "L" (the crown radius) and "R"
(the knuckle radius) were entered by the user.
PVElite does not replace the given thickness with this calculated minimum. If you are choosing the
thickness for a component, compare the values shown under "Summary of Internal Pressure Results"
(required vs. actual) and adjust the actual thickness up or down accordingly.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure at Given Thickness
This value is calculated as described above, using the given thickness minus corrosion allowance and the
operating allowable stress. The hydrostatic head component is subtracted from this value. The pressure
gauge is assumed to be at the top of the vessel.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure, New & Cold
This value is calculated as described above, using the uncorroded thickness and the ambient allowable
stress.
Actual Stress at Given Pressure and Thickness
Note that the joint efficiency is included in this value, so this can be considered as the stress at the welded
joint rather than in the base metal.
Summary of Internal Pressure Results
Either of two conditions can indicate a problem in your design. First, if the required thickness plus
corrosion allowance is greater than the given thickness, then you must increase the given thickness.
Second, if the MAWP is less than the design pressure then you must either decrease the design pressure or
increase the given thickness to achieve an acceptable design.
SHELLS 11-13
The hydrotest pressure is calculated as the maximum allowable working pressure times 1.5 or 1.3
(depending the material database selection) times the ratio of the allowable stress at ambient temperature
to the allowable stress at design temperature.
The hydrotest pressure may not be appropriate for the entire vessel for three reasons. First, some other
component may have a lower maximum allowable working pressure, which may govern the hydrotest
pressure. Second, you may choose to base hydrotest pressure on design pressure rather than maximum
allowable working pressure. Third, if the vessel is tested in the vertical position you may have to adjust
the hydrotest pressure for the head of water in the vessel.
For the UG99-C hydrotest, the liquid head is subtracted from the basic result.
Minimum Metal Temperatures
For carbon steels, these temperatures represent the minimum design metal temperature for the given
thickness and, in the second case, the given pressure. The first temperature is interpolated directly from
chart UCS-66. The second temperature is reduced if the actual stress is lower than the allowable stress,
using figure UCS-66.1. The program also checks for materials, which qualify for the -20 minimum design
temperature per UG-20 and prints it in the output. See the input notes above to enter normalized or non-
normalized materials.
Weight & Volume Results, No Corrosion Allowance
PVElite computes the volume and weight of the shell component. Additionally, the inside volume for a
2.00 inch straight flange is computed and used in the computation of the total volume for the head and the
flange. The dimensions used in the volume and weight calculations are non-corroded dimensions.
Results for Max. Allowable External Pressure
For the given diameter, thickness, and length, the maximum allowable external pressure is computed per
UG--28.
Results for Required Thickness for External Pressure
The required thickness is computed using the rules of UG-28 iteratively. Such items as the length and
outside diameter are held constant, and the program calculates the required thickness based on the user
entered external pressure.
Summary of External Pressure Results
Summary listing displaying external pressure results for both the user entered thickness and the computed
required thickness.
API 579 Introduction
Fitness For Service (FFS) assessments using API Recommended Practice 579 (API RP 579) are
performed to assess the operation safety and reliability of process plant equipment, such as pressure
vessels, piping, and/or tanks - for some desired future period. The assessment procedure will provide an
estimate of the remaining strength of the equipment in its current state, which may become degraded while
in-use from its original condition.
Typical FFS assessments entail:
Identifying the flaw type and damage mechanism.

Considering the applicability and limitations of the specific flaw type procedure.
Reviewing data requirement and gathering the data.
Applying the assessment techniques and comparing the result to the acceptance criteria.
Estimating the remaining life for the inspection interval.
Applying remediation as appropriate.
Applying in-service monitoring as appropriate.
Documenting the results.
Common degradation mechanisms include general corrosion, localized corrosion, pitting corrosion,
blister, mechanical distortion, etc. The procedures on how to assess these common degradations or flaws
are discussed in the sections described in the Table of Contents for API RP 579 and listed below:
Section 1 – Introduction
Section 2 – Fitness-For-Service Engineering Assessment Procedure
Section 3 – Assessment of Equipment for Brittle Fracture
Section 4 – Assessment of General Metal Loss
Section 5 – Assessment of Local Metal Loss
Section 6 – Assessment of Pitting Corrosion
Section 7 – Assessment of Blisters and Laminations
Section 8 – Assessment of Weld Misalignment and Shell Distortions
Section 9 – Assessment of Crack-Like Flaws
Section 10 – Assessment of Component Operating in the Creep Regimes
Section 11 – Assessment of Fire Damage
Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis
CodeCalc supports the following flaw assessments for cylindrical shells, simple cones, and formed heads:
SHELLS 11-15
Section 4, General Metal Loss.

Section 5, Local Metal Loss.
Section 6, Pitting Corrosion.
Note: Future software releases will include flaw assessments of other types.
There are three levels of assessments available for each flaw type.
Level 1 - Typically involves a simplified method using charts, simple formulae, and conservative
assumptions.
Level 2 - Generally requires a more detailed evaluation and produce more accurate results
Level 3 - Allows flaw assessments using a more sophisticated method such as FEA.
CodeCalc provides only Level 1 and Level 2 assessments. In each assessment level, the respective
remaining life or the de-rate value of MAWP is calculated depending on passing or failing acceptance
criteria.
Section 4 covers flaw assessment procedures for components subject to general metal loss resulting from
corrosion and/or erosion. Meanwhile Section 5 covers the analysis of local metal loss or Local Thin Areas
(LTAs), which include groove-like flaws or gouges. In general, flaw assessments using Section 4 criteria
produce more conservative results.
The differences between Section 4 and 5 when applied to LTAs are as follows:
Section 4 - Rules for all Level 1 and 2 assessments are based on the Average Thickness Averaging
approach, which is combined with the ASME code rules to determine the acceptability for continued
operation.
Section 5 - Rules for all Level 1 and Level 2 assessments are based on establishing a Remaining
Strength Factor (RSF), which is used to determine the acceptability for continued operation.
The Assessment of General Metal Loss described in Section 4 can be performed using either point
thickness (random type readings) or profile thickness (grid type readings) measurement data. API RP 579
requires a minimum of 15 data measurement points be used for the analysis.
The localized metal loss assessment (described in Section 5), can only be performed using profile
thickness data according to a grid setup as shown in Figure 10.3. Two data entry types are provided in the
Profile Type selection list; Grid and Critical Thickness Profile (CTP). Entering the number of points in
both the circumferential and longitudinal directions sets the number of rows and columns.
The total number of data inputs provided are 256 for both point and profile thickness data measurements.
Figure D - Profile Thickness Inspection Planes
For most evaluations, it is recommended to first perform the assessment using Section 4, then perform
Section 5 if necessary. The rules in Section 4 have been structured to provide consistent results with
Section 5. However, it is the responsibility of the user to review the Assessment Applicability and
Limitation whenever the assessment changes.
API 579 Section 4 limitations for Level 1 and Level 2 assessments are as follows:
The original design is in accordance with a recognized code or standard.

The component is not operating in the creep range.
The region of metal loss has relatively smooth contours without notches.
The component is not in cyclic service (less than 150 total cycles).
The component under evaluation does not contain crack-like flaws.
The component under evaluation has a design equation which specifically relates pressure and/or
other loads, as applicable, to a required wall thickness.
With some exception, the following specific components do not have equations relating pressure
and/or other loads to a required wall thickness may be evaluated using Level 2 assessments:
Pressure vessel nozzles and piping branch connections.
Cylinder to flat head junctions.
Integral tubesheet connections
Flanges
Piping systems.
Note: Currently CodeCalc does not support API 579 analysis on nozzle, flange, tubesheet, flathead, and
piping system components.
The following limitations on applied loads are satisfied

SHELLS 11-17
Level 1 assessment - Components are subject to internal and/or external pressure (negligible
supplemental loads).
Level 2 assessment - Components are subject to internal and/or external pressure and/or supplemental
loads such as weight, wind and earthquake.
Limitations for API 579 Section 5 Level 1 and Level 2 assessments are similar to the limitations for
Section 4 with the following additions:
The components cannot be subjected to external pressure, or if the flaw is located in the knuckle
region of elliptical head (outside of the 0.8D region), torispherical/toriconical head, or conical
transition.
The material component is considered to have sufficient material toughness.
Special provisions are provided for groove-like flaws such as:
Groove (no mechanical cold work).
Gouge (mechanical cold work).
Please refer to Section 4 and Section 5 in the API Recommended Practice 579 for more details.
Section 6 covers flaw assessment procedures for components that are subjected to pitting damages as
described below:
Widespread Pitting.
Localized Pitting.
Region of Local Metal Loss Located in an Area of Widespread Pitting.
Pitting Confined within a Region of Localized Metal Loss.
Pitting damage can occur on the inside, outside, or both sides of the component surfaces. For components
with pittings on both surfaces, please be sure to indicate the location of each pit-couple in the data entry
table.
Pitting damage is described using pit-couples, each is composed of two pits that are separated by a solid
ligament. The procedure for determining pit-couples is described in the API 579 paragraph 6.3.3.3. A
representative number of pit couples measurements in the damage area should be used. If the pit flaw is
uniform then a minimum of 10 pit-couple measurements should be used. For non-uniform pit flaw,
additional pit-couple measurements are required. CodeCalc can analyze up to 36 pit-couples
measurements.
The limitations for API 579 Section 6 Level 1 and Level 2 assessments are similar to the limitations for
Section 5 Level 1 and Level 2 assessments. Please refer to API RP 579 Section 6 for more details.
In addition to the variable inputs describe in the Main and Pop-up Input Fields, the following inputs are
required for the API 579 FFS analysis.
Flaw Type
Assessment of General Metal Loss Option to assess the flaw using API 579 Section 4
analysis
Assessment of Local Metal Loss Option to assess the flaw using API 579 Section 5
analysis
Assessment of Pitting Corrosion Option to assess the flaw using API 579 Section 6
analysis
Note: It is the responsibility of the user to review the Assessment Applicability and Limitations whenever
the assessment is changed.
Flaw Location
Select the location of the flaw:
Inside Located on the ID surface
Outside Located on the OD surface
Inside and Outside Located on both ID and OD surfaces (used in Section 6 for Multiple Layer
Analysis)
Near Axisymmetric Structural Discontinuity
Select the available option if the flaw is near an axisymmetric structural discontinuity such as a seam
weld, a stiffening ring, or the knuckle area of the head. The available options are listed below for each
element type:
Cylinder None
User specified
Near a stiffening ring
Skirt weld seam
Cone weld seam
Formed Heads None
User specified
Beyond the spherical portion
Cone None
User specified
Near the large end or the small end junction
SHELLS 11-19
For more details refer to Figure E.
Figure E - Zone for Thickness Averaging - Axisymmetric Discontinuity
Distance of Head Tangent from Skirt Weld Seam
Enter the distance of head tangent from the skirt weld seam. For more details refer to dimension b in
Figure E.
Distance of the First Data Point to the Discontinuity
Enter the nearest distance of the first data point along the longitudinal or meridional direction to the
axisymmetric structural discontinuity. This value will be used to determine the location of each thickness
profile data in reference to the axisymmetric structural discontinuity location. For more details refer to
dimension a in Figure E.
User Specified, Lv
Enter the user specified zone thickness averaging length, Lv. The entered value will override the
calculated value described in API 579. A blank in the input box is interpreted as a zero value. For more
details refer to Figure E.
Pitting Type
Select the type of pitting damage:

Widespread Pitting - Pitting occurs over a significant region of the component

Localized Pitting - Pitting occurs over a localized region of the component
LTA Region Located in Widespread Pitting Area - A region of LTA is located in an area of
widespread pitting
Pitting Confined in Region of Localized Metal Loss - Pitting which confined within LTA
LTA Dimensions
Enter the s and c dimensions. These dimensions are required for the following pitting damage types:
Localized pitting
Region of LTA located in an area of widespread pitting
Pitting confined within a region of localized metal loss
For more details refer to Figure F.
Figure F - LTA Dimensions in Pitting Damage
Uniform Metal Loss
Enter the metal loss prior to the assessment.
LMSD
Enter the shortest distance from the edge of the local metal loss region under investigation to the nearest
major structural discontinuity such as a weld seam and/or a stiffening ring. This parameter will be used to
check the limiting flaw size in the Section 5 analysis.
Point
Check this box if the Point Thickness measurement method is used.

SHELLS 11-21
Profile
Check this box if the Profile Thickness measurement method is used.
Groove
Check this box if a groove is present.
Pitting
Check this box for analyzing pitting flaw.
Groove Radius (gr)
Groove radius. For more details refer to Figure G for more information on the Groove Description.
Figure G - Groove Description
Groove Length (gl)
Enter the groove length. For more details refer to Figure G - Groove Description.
Groove Depth (gd)
Enter the groove depth. For more details refer to Figure G - Groove Description.
Groove Width (gw)
Enter the groove width. For more details refer to Figure G - Groove Description.
Beta
Enter the groove orientation in degrees. For more details refer to Figure G - Groove Description.
Critical Exposure Temperature (CET)
The lowest metal temperature derived from either the operating or atmospheric conditions.
P_k
Enter the pit-couple spacing in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
Theta_k
Enter the pit-couple orientation in degree. For more details refer to Figure H.
d_i,k
Enter the diameter of the pit i in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
d_j,k
Enter the diameter of the pit j in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
w_i,k
Enter the depth of the pit i in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
w_j,k
Enter the depth of the pit j in pit-couple k. For more details refer to Figure H.
Pitting Location
Enter the pit-couple location on the element. This pit-couple location is required when the pit damage
located on both sides of the component.
Enter 1 for pit-couple is located on the ID surface

Enter 2 for pit-couple is located on the OD surface
SHELLS 11-23
Figure H - Pitting Description
Profile Type
Select the profile thickness measurement data type, CTP (Critical Thickness Profile) or Grid type (raw
data). The selection will set the data entry table accordingly.
Number of Points (Data Size Inputs)
Enter the total number of measurement points for Point Thickness measurement method.
Circumferential Direction (Data Size Inputs)
Enter the total number of measurement points along the Circumferential Direction for Profile Thickness
measurement method.
Longitudinal/Meridional Direction (Data Size Inputs)
Enter the total number of measurement points along the Longitudinal/Meridional Direction for Profile
Thickness measurement method.
Number of Pit-Couples (Data Size Inputs)
Enter the total number of pit couples for pitting flaw.
Circumferential Direction (Grid Size Inputs)
Enter the grid size of the thickness profile in the circumferential direction.
Longitudinal/Meridional Direction (Grid Size Inputs)
Enter the grid size of the thickness profile in the longitudinal or meridional direction.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP)
Enter the design MAWP. If this value is provided, the calculated MAWP based on the input nominal
thickness will be overridden and used to compute the de-rated MAWP in Section 5 and 6 analysis.
The de-rating of the vessel element will be computed automatically when the results indicate failure for
continuing operation. However when the results meet the passing criteria, a remaining life of the
equipment will be presented.
Remaining Strength Factor Allowable (RSFA)
It is defined as RSF = LDC / LUC
Where
LDC = Limit or plastic collapse load of the damaged component

LUC = Limit of plastic collapse load of the undamaged component.
The default value currently set in API Recommended Practice 579 is 0.9.
Supplemental Loads
Enable this check box for supplemental loads inputs
Axial Force, F
Enter the net-section axial force from supplemental loads excluding the pressure trust for the Sustained
and Expansion Cases if any. For more details refer to Figure I below for the directional convention.
Figure I - Supplemental Load
Shear Force, V
Enter the net-section shear force from the supplemental loads for the Sustained and Expansion Cases. For
more details refer to Figure I.
SHELLS 11-25
Bending Moment, Mx
Enter the component of the net-section bending moment from the supplemental loads in the X direction
for the Sustained and Expansion Cases. For more details refer to Figure I.
Bending Moment, My
Enter the component of net-section bending moment from the supplemental loads in the Y direction for
the Sustained and Expansion Cases. For more details refer to Figure I.
Bending Moment, Mz
Enter the net-section bending moment from the supplemental loads in the Z direction for the Sustained
and Expansion Cases. For more details refer to Figure I.
Joint Efficiency, Circumferential Seam
Enter the joint efficiency in the circumferential direction.
Shell Orientation
Select the orientation of the installed vessel. This input will be used to get the horizontal input data for the
thickness calculation due to supplemental loads.
Depth of Head
Enter the head depth of the horizontal vessel. For more details refer to Figure J.
Figure J - Horizontal Vessel Parameters
Saddle Contact Angle
Enter the contact angle of the saddle with the shell. For more details refer to Figure J.
Distance from Saddle to Vessel
Enter the length from the tangent line of the horizontal vessel to the centerline of a saddle support. For
more details refer to Figure J.
Maximum Saddle Reaction Force
Enter the saddle reaction force resulting from the weight of the vessel and vessel content. For more details
refer to Figure J.
Flaw Location Along Vessel
Select from the option the nearest point where the flaw located. For more details refer to Figure J.
Compute Remaining Life
Check this check box to enable the remaining life calculation when the assessments have met the passing
the criteria.
Corrosion Rate per Year (Section 4 and 5 inputs)
Enter the corrosion rate per year in both directions, circumferential and longitudinal directions. These
corrosion rates are also required for the Localized Pitting in which is analyzed using Section 5.
Pit Size (Section 6 inputs)
Enable this check box to activate the pit grow in "Increasing In Pit Size" mode. This mode will simulate
the increase of the pit size, diameter and depth. This check box will enable the Diameter and Depth Pit
Propagation Rate (PPR) input boxes
Region Size (Section 6 inputs)
Enable this check box to activate the pit grow in "Increasing In Pit Region Size" mode. This mode will
simulate the increase of the LTA size. This check box will enable the C dim and S dim PPR input boxes
Density (Section 6 inputs)
Enable this check box to activate the pit grow in "Increasing In Pit Density" mode. This mode will
simulate the increase the pit density by decreasing the pit spacing. This check box will enable the Couple
Spacing PPR input boxes
Diameter (Section 6 inputs)
Enter the Diameter PPR.

SHELLS 11-27
Depth (Section 6 inputs)
Enter the Depth PPR.
S dim (Section 6 inputs)
Enter the S dimension (longitudinal direction) PPR. For more details refer to Figure F.
C dim (Section 6 inputs)
Enter the C dimension (circumferential direction) PPR. For more details refer to Figure F.
Couple Spacing Input (Section 6 inputs)
Enter the Pit Couple Spacing PPR.
RLife Computation Approach
Select the method for calculating the RLife:
Thickness approach.
MAWP approach.
An effort has been made to use the same variable names and reporting formats as are used in the API
Recommended Practice 579 book.
A summary at the end of the analysis of each level will be written. Depending on the pass or fail criteria,
either the remaining life using the thickness (or MAWP) approach will be computed or a de-rating MAWP
will be printed.
As suggested in the API Recommended Practice 579 book, the following, or combinations thereof can be
considered when the component does not meet the Level 2 Assessment requirements:
Re-rate, repair and retire the component.

Adjust the FCA by applying remediation techniques
Adjust the weld joint efficiency factor, E, by conducting additional examinations and repeat the
assessment
Conduct a Level 3 assessment.
Example
The example problems illustrating these principles are located in the program installation
directory/Examples directory.
Jacket
PVElite will compute the required thickness of the jacket, closure bar and the internal chamber (cylindrical
/ conical shell, or head covered by the jacket). The code gives weld sizes, which must be adhered to, as
they are designed to ensure full integrity of the jacket attachment to the vessel. ASME VIII Div 1
Appendix 9 sets out 5 basic jacket configurations. Refer in the code to Figure 9-2. Here they are:
Figure K - Various Types of Jackets Available in the Program.
In a type 3 jacket arrangement, there is no closure bar, however the welding is critical, and the notes set
out in the code must be adhered to.
Typically, the jacket is attached by means of a closure bar as shown here:

SHELLS 11-29
Figure L - Inner Vessel with a Jacket and a Closure Bar
The closure bar can be a simple rectangular section ring as shown in the sketch above, or it can be more
elaborate as shown in the code appendix 9.
Note: Verify the inner shell/head for external pressure using (any) vacuum plus the Jacket Pressure and
consider the Design length of the Jacket section L.
Jacket Type
From the drop down box, select the type of Jacket you are analyzing. Please see the types above.
If you cannot decide what type most suits your model, then enter Type 2. If this is not appropriate, then
the program will give you a warning message.
Closure Bar Type
From the drop down box, select the type of closure most resembling your design. Here are the closure bar
types as shown in Figure 9-5 of the code:
SHELLS 11-31
SHELLS 11-33
Figure M - Various Types of Jacket Closure Bars

SHELLS 11-35
Jacket Welded Joint Efficiency E
Enter the jacket and jacket head welded joint efficiencies. This is obtained from table UW-12 in ASME
Section VIII Division 1.
In the case of a type 1 weld (Welded from both sides, or with removable backing strip), the joint
efficiencies are as follows:
Value Result
1.00 Full Radiography
0.85 Spot Radiography
0.70 No Radiography
Jacket Head Type
From the drop down box, select the jacket head type:
Ellipsoidal Head
Torispherical Head
Hemispherical Head
Corrosion Allowances
Enter the following corrosion allowances. The program will perform all the calculations in the corroded
condition.
1 Inner shell corrosion allowance outside cso

2 Jacket corrosion allowance inside cji
3 Jacket head corrosion allowance inside ci
Note that the input for the inner shell corrosion allowance inside is available on the 'Geometry' tab of the
main input screen.
Jacket Design Temperature
Enter the Design Temperature of the Jacket.
Jacket Material
Select the jacket material.

Jacket Pressure Pj
Enter the pressure in the jacket space. This is the pressure shown in the figure L.
Inside Diameter of the Jacket Dj
Enter the inside diameter of the jacket as shown in figure L.
Jacket Thickness tj
Enter the thickness of the jacket as shown in figure L.
Jacket Half Apex Angle
Enter the half apex angle for the (c), (b-2), (k) and (l) closure bar types as shown in the following figure.
Jacket Length Ltot
Enter the total length of the jacket, which can be used for computing the volume and weight of the jacket.
The following fields refer to the dimensions required for the jacket head:
Jacket Head Thickness New th
Enter the new thickness of the jacket head.

SHELLS 11-37
Jacket Head Aspect ratio
The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a standard 2:1 elliptical
head the aspect ratio is 2.0.
Jacket Head Crown Radius L
Enter the crown radius in the case of a torispherical jacket head.
Jacket - Jacket Knuckle Radius r
Enter the knuckle radius in the case of a torispherical jacket head.
Closure Bar Material
Select the closure bar material from the button on the screen.
Closure Bar Thickness tc
Enter the thickness of the closure bar.
Closure Bar Corrosion Allowance cc
Enter the corrosion allowance of the closure bar. if the closure is subject to corrosion both outside and
inside, then enter the combined corrosion allowance.
12-1
C H A P T E R 1 2
Chapter 12: NOZZLES
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................12-2
Example..............................................................................12-17
Introduction
NOZZLES calculates required reinforcement under internal pressure and performs failure path
calculations for nozzles in shells and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. The
program also enables the user to orientate the nozzle in various directions such as hillside, lateral and
radial.
NOZZLE calculates the required wall thickness and area of reinforcement for a nozzle in a pressure
vessel shell or head, and compares this area to the area available in the shell, nozzle and optional
reinforcing pad. The program also calculates the strength of failure paths for a nozzle. NOZZLE is based
on the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-37 through UG-45, Edition 2004. The
calculation procedure is based on figure UG-37.1. The program calculates the required thickness (for
reinforcement conditions) based on inside or outside diameter for the following vessel components:
Component Paragraph Limitations Per UW-37
Cylinder UG-27 (c) (1) None
Elliptical Head UG-32 (d) (1) Nozzle concentric within 0.8D
Torispherical Head UG-32 (e) (1) Nozzle in spherical portion
Spherical Head or Shell UG-27 (d) (3) None
Conical UG-27 (g) None
The program evaluates nozzles at any reasonable angle from the perpendicular, allowing evaluation of off
angle, hillside or tangential nozzles.
NOZZLE takes full account of the internal corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and corrosion
allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the corroded
condition. NOZZLE also performs UCS-66 MDMT calculations for nozzles.
NOZZLES 12-3
Figure A - Nozzle Program Geometry
Main Input Fields

Description
Enter a maximum 15 character alphanumeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Enter the internal design pressure. This is a non-zero positive value and is usually obtained from the
design drawings or vessel design specification. Required information such as the required thickness of the
shell (TR) and the nozzle (trn) are determined from the design internal pressure.
Enter the external design pressure. PVElite will automatically compute the required thickness of the given
geometry for the external pressure entered. If you are designing for a full vacuum you would enter a value
of 15.00 psig. If you are entering an external pressure there are some prompts such as shell design length,
which will appear. PVElite will automatically compute the required thickness for both external and
internal pressure. It will then choose the greatest tr and proceed with the calculations.
Maximum Allowable Pressure New & Cold
The normal entry in this field will be the hydrostatic test pressure on the nozzle. When the program
computes the areas for this case it will automatically use ambient allowable stresses and 0 corrosion
allowance. If this is the case that governs the area analysis, the corrosion allowance used in the remainder
of the calculations will be set to 0.0
Shell, Nozzle or Pad Material Name
Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II
Part D at the design temperature.
If using a module where PD:5500 is selected as design code, then the program will use the PD:5500
Material Database.
Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
change the internal design temperature, the program will automatically update this field, but only for
BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to verify your entry to assure
conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Material Database.
Include Hydrostatic Head Component
If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest
edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at ambient temperature.
Operating Liquid Density
Enter the density of the operating fluid here. This value will be multiplied by the height of the liquid
column in order to compute the static head pressure. You can enter a number of specific gravity units and
PVElite will convert the number entered to the current set of units. To do this, enter a number followed by
the letters "sg".
Height of Liquid Column, Operating
Enter the distance from this nozzle to the surface of the liquid. The head pressure is determined by
multiplying the liquid density by the height of the fluid to the point of interest.
NOZZLES 12-5
Shell or Head Type
Enter the type of shell for this shell section. Choose one of the following shell types:
Cylindrical Shell
Elliptical Head
Torispherical Head
Hemispherical Head or Spherical Shell
Conical Head or Shell
Welded Flat Head
Shell Diameter Basis (ID or OD)
Select ID for shell sections based on the inside diameter. Select OD for shell sections based on the outside
diameter. Normally, for a flanged & dished torispherical head, the inside crown or radius is equal to the
vessel outside diameter. For flat heads, this value is ignored. Always enter the diameter of the flat head
that is exposed to the pressure.
Shell Diameter
Enter the diameter of the shell or head. For flat heads, enter the outside diameter of the head. For cones,
enter the diameter of the cone at the point where the nozzle intersects the shell.
Actual Thickness of Shell
Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate or pipe used to build the shell, or the minimum thickness
Enter Required Thickness
The only time the required thickness must be entered is if the component being analyzed is a bolted flat
head. Otherwise, the program will compute the required thickness of the shell/head.
For hillside nozzles, as of Version 4.50, several changes have been made relating to the use of the required
thickness. They are as follows:
If you wish to enter an offset and allow PVElite to compute the nozzle angle, then leave the required
thickness blank.
If you wish to enter an angle less than 90, or enter a computed value via the entered offset values, and
you would like to take credit for the Code 0.5 F-correction factor, then enter the value obtained by
multiplying the required thickness times the F-correction factor.
If you wish to enter an angle less than 90 and you do not which to take credit for the Code 0.5 F-
correction factor, then enter the required thickness.
Shell Corrosion Allowance
Is The Nozzle Outside the 80% Diameter Limit
If the nozzle is outside of the spherical portion of the elliptical or torispherical head, check this field.
Doing so will cause PVElite to use the standard internal pressure equation from UG-27 instead of the
equation from UG-37.
In the case where a nozzle is within the 80 % diameter limit then, the required thickness of the head is
equal to that of a seamless sphere of radius K1*D, where D is the shell diameter and K1 is given by Table
UG-37.
Modification of Reinforcement Limit
Check this box as necessary. You may enter any physical limitation, which exists, on the thickness
available for reinforcement or the diameter available for reinforcement. An example of a thickness
limitation would be a studding pad or nozzle stub, which would not extend normal to the vessel wall as far
as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation. An example of a diameter limitation would be two nozzles
close together, or a vessel seam for which you did not want to take an available area reduction.
Is This a Manway or Access/Inspection Opening
UG 45 states that if the opening is a Manway or access opening the minimum thickness requirement per
UG-45 is not required. Checking this box will cause the program to bypass the UG-45 minimum nozzle
neck thickness requirement.
Perform Area Calculations for Small Nozzles
he Code paragraph UG-36 discusses the requirement of performing area replacement calculations when
small nozzles are involved. The Code states :
Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforcement other than
that inherent in the construction under the following conditions :
3.5" finished opening in a shell or head with minimum required thk. of .375 inches or less
2.375" finished opening in a shell or head greater than minimum required thk. of .375 inches
If your geometry meets this criteria and this check box is NOT checked, then no area of reinforcement
calculations will be performed on this nozzle item.
NOZZLES 12-7
Set Area 1 or Area 2 Equal To 0
In some vessel design specifications it is mandated that no credit be taken for the area contributed by the
shell or nozzle. You can click this box and select one of the following options:
"A1" To set area1 (the shell) to zero

"A2" To set area2 (the nozzle) to zero
"A1 A2" To set both area1 and area2 to zero.
Rating of attached flange
If you check this prompt the program will ask you the class and grade of the attached flange. The program
will use these two items along with the temperature to rate the flange using the tables in ANSI B16.5.
Nozzle Diameter Basis
Select inside diameter or outside diameter basis as necessary.
Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle
Enter the diameter of the nozzle. If you specify nominal or minimum for the nozzle size and thickness
basis, then you must enter the nominal diameter of the nozzle in this field. Valid nominal diameters are:
0.125 0.25 0.37 0.5 0.75 1 1.25 1.5

5
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 8
10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30
Note that if you are using Metric or non-English units, then the diameter when converted must end up as a
value in the table above. For example if the size is 10 inch nominal, this would correspond to 254 mm.
In the nozzle dialog, press the button next to the pipe size to select it from the list. In the list, both the
ANSI nominal and Metric Nominal are shown.
Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis
Enter Actual, Nominal, or Minimum, representing the basis for nozzle diameter and thickness.
Actual: The program uses the actual diameter entered in the field above and the actual thickness
entered in the field below.
Nominal: The program looks-up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the
field above, and look ups the nominal thickness based on the schedule entered in the second field
below.
Minimum: The program looks-up the actual diameter based on the nominal diameter entered in the
field above, and looks ups the nominal thickness based on the schedule entered in the second field
below. It then multiplies the nominal thickness by a factor of 0.875.
Actual Schedule of Nozzle
Enter the minimum actual thickness of the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if you selected
ACTUAL for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a schedule in the field below.
Nominal Thickness of Nozzle
Select the schedule for the nozzle wall. Enter a value in this field only if you selected NOMINAL or
MINIMUM for the nozzle diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a thickness in the field above.
Type the schedule for the nozzle, i.e. SCH 40. Available nozzle schedules are:
SCH 10 SCH 60 SCH 160

SCH 10S SCH 80 SCH STD
SCH 20 SCH 80S SCH X-STG
SCH 30 SCH 100 SCH XX-STG
SCH 40 SCH 120
SCH 40S SCH 140
Required Thickness of Nozzle
The program normally calculates the required thickness of the nozzle but under the following
circumstances you must enter the required thickness when:
Your job specification requires you to exclude the area from the nozzle. Enter the actual thickness
minus the corrosion allowance.
The nozzle is non-circular.
Efficiency of Shell Seam Through Which Nozzle Passes
Enter the seam efficiency. The seam efficiency is used in the 'area available' calculations to reduce the
area available in the shell. Note that for shell and nozzle wall thickness calculations, the seam efficiency
is always 1.0.
Insert Nozzle or Abutting Nozzle
The nozzle type and depth of groove welds are used to determine the required weld thicknesses and failure
paths for the nozzle. If the nozzle is welded to the outside of the vessel wall, it is abutting the vessel wall.
If the hole in the vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD and the nozzle is welded into the hole, it is inserted.
Figure UW-16.1 shows typical insert and abutting nozzles.
NOZZLES 12-9
Reinforcing Pad
If there is a reinforcing pad on the nozzle, or if you wish to specify the geometry for a reinforcing pad,
check this field. NOTE CAREFULLY that though PVElite will design and recommend a reinforcing pad
if one is needed, the analysis of areas is based only on what you have entered. If PVElite recommends a
pad or a larger pad than the one you enter, you must go back into input and enter a pad of the correct size
in order for the final configuration to be reflected in the final analysis.
Nozzle Angle Geometry
Non-radial nozzles can be specified by entering the angle between the vessel and nozzle centerlines, and
the offset from vessel centerline. This vessel-nozzle centerline angle can vary from 0 to a limiting value
depending upon specific geometry. Figure B below illustrates these dimensions.
To specify a radial nozzle on a head or shell just click the Is Lateral .. check box. In this case the input
for the offset dimension and vessel-nozzle centerline angle are optional, only required for the graphic and
not for the analysis.
Figure B - Nozzle Angle Description
Hillside nozzles and some angular nozzles are subject to calculations to meet area requirements in both
planes of reinforcement. In these cases PVElite automatically checks the area requirements in both the
planes, using the corresponding lengths of the nozzle opening. For integral construction, the Code F
correction factor of 0.5 will automatically be applied in the hillside direction. If the connection is pad
reinforced, a value of 1.0 will be used. The F factor is used to account for the fact that the longitudinal
stress is one half of the hoop stress. The use of the F factor is limited to nozzles located on cylindrical and
conical sections. One hillside nozzle example based on ASME VIII Div 1 Appendix L-7.7 is illustrated in
the file checks under the PVElite examples directory – Nozzles item #10 and 11.
Some examples are shown below in Figure C.

Figure C - Hillside Nozzle Configuration Example
Y-angle or lateral nozzles can be specified in case of conical and cylindrical sections, by clicking on the Is
Lateral .. check box. In this case only the vessel-nozzle centerline angle needs to be specified. The
following Figure D and Figure E show examples of typical Y-angle nozzles.
Figure D - Y-Angle Nozzle on a Cylinder Figure E - Y-Angle Nozzle on a Cone
Pop-Up Input Fields

Enter the Shell Design Length for External Pressure
Enter the design length of the section, typically the length of the vessel plus one-third the depth of the
heads or, alternatively, the distance between stiffening rings.
For a vessel with 2 elliptical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent-to-
tangent length plus the shell diameter /6.
For a vessel with 2 spherical heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the tangent length
plus the diameter /3.
NOZZLES 12-11
For a vessel with 2 flanged and dished heads and no intermediate stiffeners, the design length is the
tangent length plus the diameter /9.
When analyzing a conical head enter the axial length of the cone. If you are analyzing any other head
types, enter a 0 here. You must also enter the required thickness of the component in the appropriate field.
Print Intermediate Calcs for External Pressure
If you check this field PVElite prints the parameters used for external pressure design. If you do not check
this field PVElite will not print the intermediate computations.
Enter the Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads
Inside Crown Radius (L) of the Torispherical Head
Enter the inside crown radius of torispherical head.
Inside Knuckle Radius of Torispherical Head
Enter the inside knuckle radius of the torispherical head. This value is typically 0.17 * the head inside
diameter.
Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections
Enter the half-apex angle for cones or conical sections. The maximum value of the half apex angle for
cones under the internal pressure and without toriconical transitions is 30 degrees. The largest angle for
cones under internal pressure and with toriconical sections is 60 degrees. The largest angle for cones
under external pressure is 60 degrees. If you exceed these values the program will run, but with a
warning.
Enter The Attachment Factor For Welded Flat Heads
Enter the attachment factors for the welded flat head. You can find these factors in Section VIII, Division
1, Figure UG-34. The typical value for an attachment factor is 0.3.
Enter the Large Diameter for Non-circular Flat Heads
If you have a non-circular welded flat head, enter the large dimension in this field, and enter the small
dimension as the component diameter.
Class for Attached B16.5 Flange
Select the class of the attached flange from the following list:
CL 150
CL 300
CL 400
CL 600
CL 900
CL 1500
CL 2500
Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange
Select the grade of the attached flange from the following list:
GR 1.1 Med C Steel GR 1.14 9Cr-1Mo

GR 1.2 Med C Steel GR 2.1 Type 304
GR 1.4 Low C Steel GR 2.2 Type 316
GR 1.5 C-1/2Mo GR 2.3 Type 304L, 316L
GR 1.7 1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo GR 2.4 Type 321
GR 1.9 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo GR 2.5 Type 347, 348
GR 1.10 2-1/4Cr-1Mo GR 2.6 Type 309
GR 1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo GR 2.7 Type 310
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit
Enter the maximum diameter for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An example of a diameter
limitation would be two nozzles close together, or a vessel seam for which you do not want to take an
available area reduction.
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit
Enter the maximum thickness for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. An example of a
thickness limitation would be a studding pad or nozzle stub which would not extend normal to the vessel
wall as far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation.
NOZZLES 12-13
Enter the distance the nozzle projects outward from the surface of the vessel. This distance is usually to
the attached flange or cover. Use this length for weight calculations and for external pressure calculations.
Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the inward nozzle and the inside shell.
Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel
Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the nozzle and the vessel are full
thickness of the nozzle. If the nozzle is attached with a partial penetration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter
Enter the projection of the nozzle into the vessel. The program uses the least of the inside projection and
the thickness limit with no pad to calculate the area available in the inward nozzle. Therefore, you may
safely enter a large number such as six or twelve inches if the nozzle continues into the vessel a long
distance.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the nozzle and the pad or shell.
Pad Outside Diameter Along Vessel Surface
Enter the outside diameter of the pad. You must enter the diameter of the pad as the length along the
vessel shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, although these two values are equal when the
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into account for the
pad thickness.
Pad Weld Leg Size at Outside Diameter
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the pad OD and the shell. Note that if any part of this
weld falls outside the diameter limit, the weld will not be included in the available area.
Depth of Groove Weld Between Pad and Nozzle Neck
Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the pad and the nozzle are full
penetration welds. Thus the depth of the weld would be the same as the depth of the component, that is
the thickness of the pad. If the pad is attached with a partial penetration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter
Actual Nozzle Diameter Thickness
If you specified an 'actual' basis for nozzle diameter and thickness, the diameter and thickness shown will
be the same as those which you entered. If you specified 'Nominal', these values will be the nominal
diameter and thickness found in the programs pipe size tables. If you entered minimum the program will
have looked up the diameter and thickness in the pipe size tables and then multiplied the thickness by
0.875.
Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle
The program calculates the required thickness for the shell and nozzle as follows:
Cylindrical (and the nozzle wall) - Calculated per UG-27 or as given by the user.
Hemisphere - Calculated per UG-27 or as given by the user.
Torispherical - Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user.
Elliptical - Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user.
Conical - Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user.
Flat - Calculated per UG-37 or as given by the user.
The joint efficiency used in this calculation is always 1.0. In 1989 we submitted a request for
interpretation to the ASME Code in order to show that the use of 1.0 under all circumstances was justified.
The reply was published in the A-90 addenda as Interpretation VIII-1-89-171. The question and reply
were as follows:
Question: In reinforcement calculations, is the joint efficiency used in calculating the required thickness
of the vessel wall tr and the required thickness of the wall trn 1.0 regardless of the joint efficiency
determined for the vessel wall and nozzle wall from the rules in UW-12, provided the nozzle does not pass
through a weld?
Reply: Yes. Note also that the program takes into account the case where the nozzle passes through a weld
by asking the joint efficiency of the weld, if any.
NOZZLES 12-15
UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness
The program uses the design rules from paragraph UG-45 for minimum nozzle neck thickness. If the
thickness used by PVElite for your nozzle calculation is less than required by UG-45, your Code Vessel is
in violation of this paragraph.
Required and Available Areas
The area required is calculated per UG-37(c). For external pressure and flat heads, this value is multiplied
by 0.5. The required areas are calculated per Fig. UG-37.1. Note that the program uses dl-d, (Diameter
limit minus inside hole radius) in the calculations for the area available in the shell. This is because the
Code incorrectly assumes that the dl-d is always equal to d, which is only true when the natural diameter
limit is used. Since we allow you to enter a reduced diameter limit, we could not use the pure Code
equation.
Selection of Reinforcing Pad
The program gives up to three possible reinforcing pad selections. The first is a pad thickness based on
the given pad diameter. The second is a pad diameter based on the given pad thickness. Finally, the
program selects a thickness based on the thinner of the shell and nozzle walls, and calculates a required
diameter. If this exceeds the diameter limit, it selects a thickness based on a pad at the diameter limit. All
thickness results are rounded up to the nearest sixteenth, while all diameter results are rounded up to the
nearest eighth.
Large Diameter Nozzle Calculations
For large diameter nozzles, the rules of Appendix 1-7 require that two-thirds of the reinforcement be
within 0.75 of the natural diameter limit for the nozzle. If the calculated value of the percent within this
limit is greater than 66%, the nozzle is adequately reinforced for the large diameter rules. For a large
nozzle geometry to meet Code requirements both sets of area calculations must meet their respective area
requirements.
Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits
The diameter limit is the maximum distance from the centerline of the nozzle along the vessel wall, which
can be taken credit for when calculating available areas in the shell or a pad. If your pad has a greater
diameter than the diameter limit, only the area inside the limit is credited. If you entered a DMAX value
for the analysis, that value is used only if it is the least of all the diameter limit candidates.
The thickness limit is the distance from the vessel surface along the nozzle axis, which can be taken credit
for when calculating the areas available in the nozzle wall and the pad. If your inward nozzle projection
or outward pad projection are greater than the diameter limit, only the area inside the limit is credited. If
you entered a TMAX value for the analysis, that value is used only if it the least of all the thickness limit
candidates.
Effective Material Diameter and Thickness Limits
The MAWP for reinforcement is an estimate, usually accurate to within 1 or 2 psi. Enter the given
MAWP as the design pressure to check its accuracy. The MAP for the flange is based on ANSI B16.5
tables for the given grade and class of flange.
Minimum Design Metal Temperature
The minimum design metal temperature is computed for the nozzle. The program considers UG-20(f),
UCS-66 and UCS-66.1 when performing these calculations.
Weld Size Calculations
Nozzle weld thicknesses are based on Figure UW-16.1. The outward nozzle weld is compared to the
cover weld required by the Code. Note that the minimum dimension of a weld is 0.7 times its leg
dimension. Note also that for cover welds the maximum weld the Code requires is 0.25 inches. The pad
weld requirement is typically at least one half of the element thickness. In addition to the cover welds, the
total groove weld plus cover weld for inserted nozzles must be at least 1.25 times the minimum element
thickness.
Weld Strength Calculations
The strength of connection elements is their cross sectional area times the allowable unit stress for the
element. The last two terms in the equations shown give the stress factor and basic allowable stress for
the element in the direction considered.
Failure Path Calculations
The failure paths differ based on whether there is a reinforcing pad, whether the nozzle is inserted or
abutting, and whether there is an inward projection. Note that the strength of each path must exceed either
the W value or the W#-# associated with that path. Note also that UW-15(b) indicates that no strength
calculations for nozzle attachment welds are required for figure UW-16.1, sketches (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f-
1), (f-2), (f-3), (f-4), (g), (x-1), (y-1), and (z-1).
But, for types I, J, K, L, X-2, Y-2, Z-2 weld, PVElite will perform the additional weld size calculations per
UW-16(d)(1).
Iterative Results Per Pressure, Area, And UG-45
Assuming the same corrosion allowance for the shell and nozzle, the maximum (failure) corrosion
allowance, the minimum (discard) nozzle thickness and the minimum (failure) shell thickness are
computed. The user can project the nozzle service lifetime based on the rate of corrosion and the above
results.
NOZZLES 12-17
Example
13-1
C H A P T E R 1 3
Chapter 13: FLANGES
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................13-2
Example..............................................................................13-22
Introduction
FLANGE calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of flanges designed and fabricated to the
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The program uses the Code rules found in Appendix 2 of the
Edition 2004.
The flange design rules incorporated in the Code were based on a paper written in 1937 by Waters,
Westrom, Rossheim, and Williams. These rules were subsequently published by Taylor Forge in 1937,
and were incorporated into the Code in 1942. For all practical purposes they have been unchanged since
that time. The Taylor Forge bulletin, frequently republished, is also still available, and is one of the most
useful tools for flange analysis. The input and results for the FLANGE program are roughly modeled on
the Taylor Forge flange design sheets.
The flange analysis model assumes that the flange can be modeled as stiff elements (the flange and hub)
and springs (the bolts and gaskets). The initial bolt loads compresses the gasket. This load needs to be
high enough to seat (deform) the gasket, and needs to be high enough to seal even when pressure is
applied. The pressure load adds to the bolt load and unloads the gasket.
Analysis of a typical flange includes the following steps:
1 Identify operating conditions and materials. Determine the allowable stresses for the flange material
and the bolting at both ambient and operating temperatures, from the Code tables of allowable stress.
2 Identify the gasket material and the flange facing type. Determine the effective width, the effective
diameter of the gasket and the gasket factors from the Code charts (Tables 2-5.1 and 2-5.2).
3 Calculate the required area of the bolts, from the design pressure and the gasket information.
Calculate the actual area of the bolts, and make sure it is greater than the required area. Based on the
bolt areas and the allowable stresses, calculate the flange design bolt loads.
4 Calculate the bending moments on the flange. In each case the bending moment is the product of a
load (pressure, gasket load, etc.) and the distance from the bolt circle to the point of application of the
load. The final result is one bending moment for operating conditions and a second for gasket seating
conditions.
The stresses on a given flange are determined entirely by the bending moment on the flange. All the loads
on the flange produce bending in the same direction (i.e., counterclockwise) and this bending is resisted by
the ring behavior of the flange, and in integral flanges by the reaction of the pipe.
5 Calculate the hub factors and other geometry factors for the flange based on the flange type (Code
Figure 2-4). The factors are found in Code figures 2-7.1, 2-7.2, 2-7.3, 2-7.4, 2-7.5, and 2-7.6.
Formulae are also given in the Code so that computer programs can consistently arrive at the answers
FLANGES 13-3
that are normally selected from charts in the appendix. These formulae are implemented in the flange
program.
6 Calculate the stress formula factors based on the geometry factors and the flange thickness.
7 Calculate the flange stresses using the stress formula factors and the bending moments. Compare these
stresses to the allowable stresses for the flange material.
The form of the stress equations is:
S = k(geometry) * M / t2
That is, a constant dependant on the flange geometry times the bending moment, divided by some
thickness squared, either the thickness of the flange or the thickness of the hub.
The calculation procedures and format of results in this program are similar to those given in "Modern
Flange Design", Bulletin 503, Edition VII, published by Taylor Forge.
The FLANGE program includes the capability to analyze a given flange under the bolting loads imposed
by a mating flange. The program also takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter uncorroded
thicknesses and diameters, which the program adjusts before performing the calculations. The program
can treat corrosion in a special manner based on the input of a Yes/No question in the input.
The program can also be used for two levels of flange design. The PARTIAL option forces the program
to calculate the minimum flange thickness for a given geometry. The DESIGN option forces the program
to select all of the relevant flange geometry including bolt circle, number of bolts, outside diameter,
thickness, and hub geometry.
Figure A - Flange Program Geometry

Main Input Fields

Flange Number
Enter the flange ID number. It is recommended that the flange numbers start at 1 and increase
sequentially. If this field is left blank PVElite will assume there is no data here to be analyzed. The only
exception to this is the first element, if an analysis is attempted and the item number is blank, PVElite will
assign a value of 1 to the item number.
Flange Designation
Enter an alphanumeric tag for this flange. This entry is optional.
When performing a partial analysis, PVElite iterates for the required thickness of the flange. The final set
of results you see is made using the final required thickness.
If you would like to see the results using the input thickness, then enter a colon ":" as any character in the
description. In both cases, PVElite will determine the required thickness.
Flange Type
Enter the flange type number for this flange. Flange types are:
TYPE
Integral Weld
Neck
Integral Slip On
Integral Ring
Loose Slip On
Loose Ring
Lap Joint
Blind
Reverse
There are essentially only two categories of flanges for the purposes of analysis. These are integral type
flanges, where the flange and the vessel to which it is attached behave as a unit, and loose types, where the
flange and the vessel do not behave as a unit. Within these categories, however, there are several
additional subdivisions.
FLANGES 13-5
Weld Neck Flanges - These have a hub that is butt welded to the vessel.
Slip-on Flanges - These have hubs, and are normally analyzed as loose type flanges. To qualify as
integral type flanges they require a penetration weld between the flange and the vessel.
Ring Flanges - These do no have a hub, though they frequently have a weld at the back of the flange.
They are normally analyzed as loose, but may be analyzed as integral if a penetration weld is used
between the flange and the vessel.
Lap Joint Flanges - These flanges may or may not have a hub, but they are completely disconnected
from the vessel, bearing only on a vessel 'lap'. They are always analyzed as loose.
Reverse Geometry Flange - Here the gasket seat is on the inside of the shell diameter. These use
integral flange rules, which are suitably modified for the reversal of the bending moments. See
Appendix 2-13.
Loose Type Flanges - Especially lap joints, may be split. A split is used when it is required to have
the flange completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split into two pieces by a single split,
the design moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0. If the flange consists of two separate split rings,
each ring shall be designed as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75 times the design
moment. The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 deg. from the
splits in the other.
Flat Face Flanges with Full Face Gaskets - A special type of gasket geometry, which is not included
in the Code sketches, or in the Code design rules, is the flange with a flat face and a gasket that
extends from the ID of the flange to the OD, beyond the bolt circle. The gaskets used with this type of
flange are usually quite soft. These flanges can be analyzed using the Taylor Forge calculation sheets.
Analysis Type
Enter the analysis type for the computations to be performed on this flange.
Analyze - For this analysis type, the user must give the complete flange definition. The program will
compute the resulting stresses.
Partial - For this analysis type, all information except for the flange thickness must be specified. The
program will select a flange thickness such that the resulting flange stress equals the allowable stress.
Design - For this analysis type, only the flange diameter and thickness, gasket and flange face
geometry, and gasket properties are specified. The program computes all other flange dimensions and
stresses.
Print Final Results for the Given Thickness
If the partial design option is chosen and this box is checked, the program will display the results using the
given thickness. If this box is unchecked the results will be displayed using the calculated required
thickness.
Design Pressure
Enter the internal design pressure. If the value entered in this field is negative, it will be treated as
external pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for the flange. This temperature will be used to interpolate the material
allowable tables and external pressure curves.
Flange/Bolt Material Specification
This entry is automatically filled in by the program by entering a material specification.
CAUTION: You should verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME
Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
CAUTION: You should verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME
Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Flange Thickness
Enter the flange thickness. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance for this flange. The value entered here will be subtracted from the flange
and hub thicknesses to obtain the thicknesses actually used in the computations.
Include Corrosion in Flange Thickness Calculations
The flange thickness is used in several places throughout Appendix 2. The Code states that every
dimension used should be corroded. In the flange stress calculations the flange thickness is used.
However, some feel that the corrosion should not be taken off of the thickness for the stress calculations.
Flange ID
Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the inner pipe
diameter. This value is refereed to as "B" in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be used to
FLANGES 13-7
adjust this value - two times the corrosion allowance will be added to the uncorroded ID given by the
user. For a blind flange this entry should be 0.
Flange OD
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is refereed to as "A" in the ASME code.
Enter Shell Material
Select the shell material name. This is used for computing the longitudinal hub allowable stress for
optional type flanges, which are analyzed as integral.
Flange Face Outer Diameter
Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The program uses the minimum of the flange face outer
diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum
in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The
program uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of
the gasket.
Flange Face Inner Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The program uses the maximum of the Flange Face ID and the
Gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
Gasket Outer Diameter
Enter the outer diameter of the gasket. The program uses the minimum of the flange face outer diameter
and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but uses the maximum in
design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The
the gasket.
Gasket Inner Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the Flange Face ID and the
Hub Thickness, Small End
Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as "g0" in the ASME code. The
corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. For weld neck flange types, this is the thickness of
the shell at the end of the flange. For slip on flange geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small
end. For flange geometries without hubs, such as a blind flange, this thickness may be entered as zero.
Hub Thickness, Large End
Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as "g1" in the ASME code. The
corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value. It is permissible for the hub thickness at the large
end to equal the hub thickness at the small end. For flange geometries without hubs, such as a blind
flange, this thickness may be entered as zero.
Hub Length
Enter the hub length. This value is refereed to as "h" in the ASME code. For flange geometries without
hubs, this length may be entered as zero. When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub
end, the hub length should be the leg of the weld, and the thickness at the large end should include the
thickness of the weld. When you analyze a flange with no hub, i.e. a ring flange, a lap joint flange, etc.,
you should enter zero for the hub length, the small end of the hub, and the large end of the hub. However,
when you design as a loose flange a ring flange which has a fillet weld at the back, enter the size of a leg
of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub. This will insure that the program designs the bolt circle far
enough away from the back of the flange to get a wrench around the nuts.
Diameter of Bolt Circle
Enter the diameter of the bolt circle of the flange.
Nominal Bolt Diameter
Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the program range from 0.5 to
4.0 inches. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the nominal size in this field,
and also enter the root area of one bolt in the Thread Series cell.
Thread Series
The following bolt thread series tables are available:
TEMA Bolt Table

UNC Bolt Table
User specified root area of a single bolt
TEMA Metric Bolt Table
British, BS 3643 Metric Bolt Table
Irrespective of the table used, the values will be converted back to the user selected units.
TEMA threads are National Coarse series below 1 inch and 8 pitch thread series for 1 inch and above bolt
nominal diameter. The UNC threads available are the standard threads.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis.

FLANGES 13-9
Compute Full Flange Design Bolt Load (S*Ab) ?
If this box is un-checked then flange design bolt load for the gasket seating condition is computed as:
W = Sa * ( Am + Ab ) / 2
otherwise it is computed as follows per note 2 of App. 2-5 of the ASME code:
W = Sa * Ab
this equation can be used when additional safety against abuse is desired.
Where,
Sa = bolt ambient allowable stress

Am = total required bolt area
Ab = total available bolt area
Table 2-5.1 - Gasket Materials and Contact Facings
Gasket Material Gasket Factor m Seating Stress y Facing Column
Self energizing Types, including metallic 0.00 0 II

and elastomer O ring
Flat Elastomers
Below 75A Shore Durometer 0.50 0 II
75A Shore Durometer or higher 1.00 200 II
Flat asbestos with suitable binder
1/8 inch thick 2.00 1600 II
1/16 inch thick 2.75 3700 II
1/32 inch thick 3.50 6500 II
Elastomer with cotton fabric insert 1.25 400 II
Elastomer with asbestos fabric insert
3 ply 2.25 2200 II

2 ply 2.50 2900 II
1 ply 2.75 3700 II
Vegetable Fiber 1.75 1100 II
Spiral-wound metal, asbestos filled
Carbon Steel 2.50 10000 II
Stainless Steel or Monel 3.00 10000 II
Corrugated metal, asbestos filled or

Corrugated metal jacketed, asbestos filled
Soft aluminum 2.50 2900 II
Soft copper or brass 2.75 3700 II
Iron or soft steel 3.00 4500 II
Monel or 4-6% Chrome 3.25 5500 II
Stainless Steel 3.50 6500 II
Corrugated metal, not filled
Flat metal jacketed, asbestos filled

FLANGES 13-11
Monel 3.50 8000 II
4-6% Chrome 3.75 9000 II
Grooved metal
Solid flat metal
Soft aluminum 4.00 8800 I
Soft copper or brass 4.75 13000 I
Iron or soft steel 5.50 18000 I
Monel or 4-6% Chrome 6.00 21800 I
Stainless Steel 6.50 26000 I
Ring Joint
Flange Face Facing Sketch
Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number according to the following
correlations:
Table 2-5.2 Facing Sketch Descriptions
FACING SKETCH DESCRIPTION
1a flat finish faces
1b serrated finish faces
1c raised nubbin-flat finish
1d raised nubbin-serrated finish
2 1/64 inch nubbin
3 1/64 inch nubbin both sides
4 large serrations, one side
5 large serrations, both sides
6 metallic O-ring type gasket
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d (PVElite equivalents
3 and 4).
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6
(PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin width, but the contact width
of the metallic ring.
Full Face Gasket Options
ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 does not cover the design of flanges for which the gasket is extends beyond the
bolt circle diameter. But, a typically used method for the design of these types of flanges is from the
Taylor Forge Flange design bulletin. This method is implemented in the program.
Gaskets for the Full face flanges are usually of soft materials such as rubber or an elastomer, so that the
bolt stresses do not go too high during gasket seating. The program adjusts the flange analysis and the
design formulae to account for the full face gasket.
There are 3 options for the full face gasket flanges:
Program selects: This instructs the program to automatically make the determination if this is a full face
gasket flange, depending upon the input. If the gasket ID and OD matches with Flange ID and OD
dimensions respectively (except for a blind flange) then it is determined to be a full face flange. See the
figure below.
FLANGES 13-13
Full Face Gasket: This indicates the program that this is a full face gasket flange. This option should be
used when the gasket ID or OD does not match the flange ID/OD dimensions, but the gasket extends
beyond the bolt circle diameter. See the figure below:
Not a Full Face: This indicates to the program that this is not a full face gasket flange.
Is There a Partition Gasket?
If your exchanger geometry has a pass partition gasket, check this entry. PVElite will then prompt for the
overall length and width of the gasket.
Specify External Loads
In order for leakage computations to be performed, the external loads acting on the flange must be
specified. By checking this field, an input form displays that allows entry of the loading data. Loading
data of this nature would typically come from a pipe stress analysis program, such as CAESAR II.
Flanges are frequently subject to external forces and moments, in addition to internal pressure. The
program calculates a roughly equivalent pressure for flanges loaded axially and/or in bending using the
following formula:
Peq = Pdes + 4 * F / 3.14 G2 + 16 * M / 3.14 * G3
Where:
Peq = Equivalent pressure, psi

Pdes = Design pressure, psi
F = Axial force, lbs
M = Bending moment, in-lbs
G = Diameter of gasket load reaction, in.
The program then uses the equivalent pressure as the design pressure.
Mating Flange Loads
If loads from the mating flange are to be considered, check this field. A pop-up spreadsheet will appear
for additional data entry. This auxiliary bolt loading will only be used if it is greater then the standard bolt
loads computed using the ASME formulas.
WARNING: The use of mating flange values for bolt design calculations will result in incorrect
MAWP calculations. You probably don't want to calculate MAWP based on the mating flange values,
but rather based on the values developed by this flange at a given pressure.
Also you definitely don't want to do "design" when you have a mating flange, since the program selects a
different bolt circle, etc. than the one chosen for the other flange. You can however, do a partial thickness
design.
Compute Thickness Based on Flange Rigidity?
Appendix S contains some equations that attempt to determine whether a given flange geometry will leak.
If the computed rigidity index is greater than 1.0, then leakage is predicted.
By selecting this box, you can instruct the program to compute thickness, such that the corresponding
rigidity index is 1.0.
Note that Appendix S is not a mandatory appendix and that these calculations are also not mandatory.
FLANGES 13-15
Pop-Up Input Fields

Number of Splits in the Ring
Enter the number of splits in the ring, if any, for loose type flanges. This value must be either 0, 1, or 2.
Typically split flanges are ring-type flanges. A split is used when it is required to have the flange
completely removable from the vessel. If the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the design
moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0. If the flange consists of two separate split rings, each ring
shall be designed as if it were a solid flange - without splits) using 0.75 times the design moment. The
pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90º deg. from the splits in the other.
Weld Leg at Back of Ring
Enter the length of the weld leg at the back of the ring. This value is added to the inside diameter during
the design of ring type flanges to determine the minimum bolt circle when the design option is turned on.
If you are performing a partial or regular analysis, PVElite will check to see if there is interference between
the wrench and the weld. PVElite will print a brief message letting you know there is a potential problem.
Lap Joint Contact ID
Enter the inner diameter of the flange/joint contact surface. For more information see Figure B.
Lap Joint Contact OD
Enter the outer diameter of the flange/joint contact surface. For more information see Figure B.
Figure B - Lap Joint Flange Geometry

TEMA Channel Cover
This cell indicates whether or not the current flange is a TEMA channel cover. A separate thickness and
MAWP are computed for channel covers, as well as the deflection.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (Long Span)
Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the long side of the flange. This diameter is used to
calculate the non- circular flange correction factor for ASME blind flanges. This factor is discussed in
paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (Short Span)
Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the short side of the flange. This diameter is used to
calculate the non- circular flange correction factor for ASME blind flanges. This factor is discussed in
paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Allowed Channel Cover Deflection
For TEMA channel covers, enter the magnitude of the allowed deflection at the center of the cover. This
value will be used in computing the channel cover thickness and MAWP, even if it is larger than the
allowed deflection. However, a warning message will be printed stating this problem exists.
Perimeter Along the Center of the Bolt Holes (L)
Enter the perimeter of the bolted head measured along the centerline of the bolts. This value (L) is needed
for both non-circular and circular geometries. For a circular head, enter the value of (3.14159 * bolt
circular diameter). For non-circular heads this value will have to be computed and entered in.
Length of Partition Gasket
This is the cumulative length of all the heat exchanger pass partition gaskets associated with this flange.
Width of the Pass Partition Gasket
Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. Using the partition gasket properties entered, and the known
width, PVElite will compute the effective seating width and compute the gasket loads contributed by the
partition gasket.
Partition Gasket Factor M
Enter the partition gasket factor M.
Partition Gasket Design Seating Stress Y:
Enter the partition gasket design seating stress Y.

FLANGES 13-17
Partition Gasket Flange Facing Sketch:
Enter the partition gasket flange face facing sketch.
Partition Gasket Column for Gasket Seating
Enter the partition gasket column for gasket seating.
Partition Gasket Thickness
Enter the thickness of the partition gasket. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d.
Partition Gasket Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width for the pass partition gasket. This value is only required for facing
sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6. Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin width, but the contact width of the
metallic ring.
Node Number (Optional)
Enter the node number of this flange. This entry represents the node point in a stress analysis model from
which the loads are obtained.
Axial Force
Enter the magnitude of the external axial force, which acts, on this flange.
Bending Moment
Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment, which acts, on this flange.
Mating Flange Bolt Load, Operating
Enter the bolt load from the mating flange in the operating case.
Mating Flange Bolt Load, Seating
Enter the bolt load from the mating flange for seating conditions.
Mating Flange Design Bolt Load
Enter the design bolt load for the mating flange.

Flanges with Different Bending Moments:
The flange design moments differ from the norm for external pressure, reverse flanges, and flat flanges.
Under external pressure only the end load and flange pressure are included in the design, and their sense is
reversed.
For reverse flanges all the moments are present, but the moment arm hd is negative, making MD negative.
The load HT is negative, and the moment arm ht may be either positive or negative. The absolute value of
the moment is used in the calculations.
For flat faced flanges an alternate value of hg (h''g) is used to calculate a reverse moment at the bolt circle.
No calculations for seating conditions for full faced flanges are required.
Blind Flanges and Channel Covers:
The ASME Code formula for a circular blind flange is:
t = d * SQRT( C * P / S * E + 1.9 * W * Hg / S * E * d3 )
The first term in this formula is the bending of a flat plate under pressure. The second term is the bending
of the plate due to an edge moment. The stress is limited to 1.5 times the allowable stress, but the 1.5
factor is already built into the equation. For seating conditions the first term is zero - the thickness of the
flange depends only on the edge bending.
For non-circular blind flanges the term Z is added to the first term in the square root. Once again, Z is a
simple function of the ratio of the large dimension to the small dimension of the flange. It is interesting to
note that the Code covers non-circular blind flanges, but no other type of non-circular flange (not even in
the rectangular vessel appendix).
Channel covers designed to TEMA must meet at least the minimum thickness requirements of the Code.
In addition, if there is a pass partition groove, the cover deflection is limited.
The formula for flange deflection limitation is found in paragraph 9.21 of TEMA. The deflection is, of
course, a function of t3 and G3. Thus, a very small increase in flange thickness will decrease the deflection
significantly. The Seventh Edition of TEMA also gives recommended deflections as a function of flange
size. The previous editions hid the actual deflection you were working toward in a thickness equation.
Allowable Flange Stresses:
Allowable flange stresses are based on the ASME Code Allowable Stress for the flange material at the
Ambient and Operating design temperatures. In the case of bending stresses, these allowable are
FLANGES 13-19
multiplied by 1.5. This takes into account the higher maximum strain required to yield a section in
bending versus pure tension.
The stresses calculated and the allowable stresses are as follows:
Operating Ambient
Longitudinal Hub Stress (bending) 1.5 x Sfo 1.5 x Sfa
Radial Flange Stress 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa
Tangential Flange Stress 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa
Maximum Average Stress 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa
Stress in Bolts 1.0 x Sbo 1.0 x Sba
Stress in Reverse Flanges 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa
Stress in Full Faced Gasket 1.0 x Sfo 1.0 x Sfa

Flanges
Where: Sfo = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at operating temperature.
Sfa = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at ambient temperature.
Sbo = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at ambient temperature.
Sba = ASME Code Allowable Stress for bolt material at ambient temperature.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure:
The following graph shows conceptually how the program extrapolates for the Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure:
1. For Operating Pressure MAWP

The program calculates the stresses at the pressure given by the user.
The program calculates the slope between the stress at zero pressure and the stress at the given
pressure
The program extrapolates the slope out to the point where the stress is equal to the allowable stress.
The pressure at this point is the maximum allowable working pressure.
2. For Gasket Seating MAWP
Note that at low pressures the stress due to gasket seating is not a function of the design pressure. At
higher pressures the stress is a function of pressure, and the MAWP can be calculated as described
above, except that the extrapolation is from the point where pressure comes into the calculation of the
seating stress.
The program calculates the Gasket Seating MAWP and Operating MAWP based on the input
geometry and pressure. In theory both MAWPs should be independent of the input pressure.
However, because of the extrapolation algorithm, the estimate of the MAWP may depend on the
pressure slightly (when the pressure is very small). Please note that in Partial or Design mode, the
program will calculate MAWP based on the required flange thickness.
Flange Rigidity Calculations
Appendix S has some equations that attempt to determine whether or not a given flange geometry will
leak. Two cases are considered, ambient and operating. If the computed rigidity factor is greater than 1.0,
then leakage is predicted. Please note that Appendix S is a non-mandatory appendix and that these
calculations are also non-mandatory.
FLANGES 13-21
Flange Design
The geometry defined by the user is the basis for the design performed by the program. Specifically, the
inside diameter, materials, pressure, gasket geometry and gasket properties remain fixed throughout the
design. Beginning from this point, the program uses the following approach to design the rest of the
flange:
1 For slip-on type flanges, calculate the small end of the hub equal to roughly the thickness required for
the design pressure
2 For weld neck, slip-on, and reverse flanges, calculate the large end of the hub as the small end of the
hub plus 1/16th (for small end thicknesses less than one inch) or 1/8th (for small end thicknesses
greater than one inch). Then calculate a hub length equal to the small end thickness plus the
minimum slope (3:1) for the hub. The effect of these choices is to design a small hub when compared
with standardized flanges. This has the additional effect of keeping the moment arms and diameters
(of the bolt circle and flange OD) small, and keeping the flange light. Finally, the selection of a small
hub keeps the amount of machining required for the flange to a minimum.
3 Select a preliminary number of bolts. This is a multiple of four based on the diameter of the flange.
The algorithm chosen tends to select more and smaller bolts than would be found on standard flanges.
This also has the effect of minimizing the flange outside diameter and the weight of the flange.
4 Select a bolt size that will give the required bolt area for this number of bolts.
5 Using this bolt size, calculate a final number of bolts based on:
The area required divided by the area available per bolt -OR-
The maximum allowed spacing between bolts of this size.
6 Using this number of bolts, calculate the bolt circle based on:
The OD of the hub plus the minimum ID spacing of the bolt -OR-
The OD of the gasket face plus the actual size of the bolt -OR-
The minimum spacing distance between the bolts -OR-
For reverse flanges, the vessel OD plus the bolt ID spacing.
7 Calculate the outside diameter of the flange based on the bolt circle plus the minimum edge spacing
for the bolt size chosen.
8 For flanges with full face gaskets, adjust the gasket and face outside diameter for the values chosen,
and recalculate the moment arms for the flange.
9 Finally (and this step also applies to partial design of the flange), select a thickness for the flange and
calculate the stresses. If the stress is not equal to the allowable, adjust the thickness based on the
difference between the actual and allowable stresses, and then repeat the stress calculation. This
process continues until the actual stress for one of the stress components is equal to the allowable
stress.
Example
14-1
C H A P T E R 1 4
Chapter 14: CONICAL SECTIONS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................14-2
Example..............................................................................14-11
Introduction
CONICAL SECTIONS performs internal and external pressure design of conical sections and stiffening
rings using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules, Edition 2004.
CONICAL SECTIONS calculates the required thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure for
conical shells and sections under either internal or external pressure. The program is based on the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2001, A-2003. Specifically, the program is
based on the rules in paragraphs UG-32, UG-33, and Appendix 1, Sections 1-5, and 1-7.
The program calculates required thickness for the cone under both internal and external pressure. Also
calculated is the required thickness of the attached cylinders under either internal or external pressure.
Calculations for the required thickness of a transition knuckle are included.
The required area of reinforcement and actual reinforcement available are calculated for both internal and
external pressures. Reinforcement is limited to the area available in the shell sections plus simple
stiffening rings.
CONICAL SECTIONS takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness and
corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making calculations for the
corroded condition.
Figure A - Conical Section Geometry

CONICAL SECTIONS 14-3
Main Input Fields

Cone Number
Enter an ID number for the cone. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1
and increase sequentially.
Cone Description
Enter an alphanumeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Internal Design Pressure
You may analyze both internal and external pressure at the same time, since the two cases are analyzed
and reported separately. Enter zero for internal pressure if you only wish to analyze the external pressure
case.
Internal Design Temperature
Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. PVElite will automatically update
External Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This should be a positive value, i.e. 14.7 psia. If
you enter a zero in this field the program will not perform external pressure calculations.
External Design Temperature
Enter the temperature associated with the external design pressure. PVElite will automatically update
materials properties for external pressure calculations when you change the design temperature. The
design external pressure at this temperature is a completely different design case than the internal pressure
case. Therefore this temperature may be different than the temperature for internal pressure. Many
external pressure charts have both lower and upper limits on temperature. If your design temperature is
below the lower limit, use the lower limit as your entry to the program. If your temperature is above the
upper limit the component may not be designed for vacuum conditions.
Cone\Cylinder\Ring\Knuckle Material Name
Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by pressing the Database button
while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the database, you can select its
specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from
the Main Menu.
Material Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
This entry is automatically filled in by the program by entering a material specification. When you change
the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the shell, the program will automatically update this
field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check
Material Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature
field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check
Part D at the ambient temperature.
Cone Joint Efficiency
Cone Actual Thickness
Cone Corrosion Allowance
Cone Diameter Basis (ID, OD)
Select the diameter basis, ID for the inside diameter and OD for the outside diameter. Note that this
diameter basis is also used for the cylinder at the small end of the cone, and the cylinder at the large end of
the cone.
Cone Diameter at Small End
Enter the diameter of the cone at the small end. This diameter is also used for the cylinder at the small
end of the cone. Note that this should not be the diameter at the point where a knuckle or flare intersects
the conical section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare intersects the cylindrical section. The
program will calculate the other diameter.
Cone Diameter at Large End
Enter the diameter of the cone at the large end. This diameter is also used for the cylinder at the large end
of the cone. Note that this should not be the diameter at the point where a knuckle or flare intersects the
conical section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare intersects the cylindrical section. The program
will calculate the other diameter.
Cone Half Apex Angle
For internal pressure calculations the half apex angle should not be greater than 30 degrees, though the
program will give results for up to 60 degrees. For external pressure calculations it must not be greater
than 60 degrees. If you enter a zero for the angle, PVElite will calculate an angle based on the cone
diameters and length.
Cone Axial Length
Enter the length of the cone along the axis of the vessel. The program will calculate the effective length of
the cone for internal and external pressure calculations.
Are There Axial Forces on the Cone?
If there are axial forces on the cone, check this field. Examples of axial forces would include weight
loads, from external attachments, and possibly thermal loads. The axial force due to internal or external
pressure are already taken into account by the program. Note that in general loads causing compression
are significant for the external pressure case, while loads causing tension are significant for the internal
pressure case.
Small Cylinder Joint Efficiency
Small Cylinder Actual Thickness
Small Cylinder Corrosion Allowance
Small Cylinder Axial Length
Enter the length of the cylinder along the axis of the vessel. This value is not used in internal pressure
calculations, but is required for external pressure calculations.
Small End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section, Knuckle, Knuckle-Bar, Knuckle-Section)
Select the type of reinforcing bar for the small end:
NONE = No reinforcement at the small end and no knuckle.

BAR = Reinforcing bar at small end (width and thickness).
SECTION = Reinforcing beam section at small end (inertia, area, and depth of beam).
KNUCKLE = Toroidal knuckle at small end ( radius and thickness ).
KNUCKLE and BAR = Toroidal knuckle and a reinforcing bar at small end.
RING
KNUCKLE and = Toroidal knuckle and a reinforcing beam section at small end.
SECTION
Note that whichever option is chosen you will be prompted to enter a reinforcing material. If there is no
reinforcing material, enter the small end shell material. The values for the elasticity and allowable stress
values will be needed for the area and inertia calculations depending on the value of Delta.
Large Cylinder Joint Efficiency
Large Cylinder Actual Thickness
Large Cylinder Corrosion Allowance
Large Cylinder Axial Length
Enter the length of the cylinder along the axis of the vessel. This value is not used in internal pressure
calculations, but is required for external pressure calculations.
Large End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section, Knuckle, Knuckle-Bar, Knuckle-Section)
Select the type of reinforcing bar for the large end:
NONE = No reinforcement at the large end and no knuckle.

BAR = Reinforcing bar at large end (width and thickness).
SECTION = Reinforcing beam section at large end (inertia, area, and depth of beam).
KNUCKLE = Toroidal knuckle at large end ( radius and thickness ).
KNUCKLE and BAR = Toroidal knuckle and a reinforcing bar at large end.
RING
KNUCKLE and = Toroidal knuckle and a reinforcing beam section at large end.
SECTION
Note that whichever option is chosen you will be prompted to enter a reinforcing material. If there is no
reinforcing material, enter the large end shell material. The values for the elasticity and allowable stress
values will be needed for the area and inertia calculations depending on the value of Delta.
Pop-Up Input Fields

Take Cone as Lines of Support for External Pressure?
The ASME Code allows you to take the intersections of the cone and the two cylinders as lines of support
for external pressure, provided that the moment of inertia and area of reinforcement requirements of
Appendix 1-8 are satisfied. Normally it is preferable to take the cone as lines of support, since the
equivalent length of the large cylinder/ cone/small cylinder combination may easily result in low
allowable external pressures. However, the moment of inertia is very easy to be less than the required for
knuckle-to-cylinder junction — because the shell/knuckle/cone is usually so close to the resulting neutral
axis. Starting from CODECALC version 5.6, the moment of inertia with the knuckle is calculated, following
the procedure of code example L-3.3.
Total Axial Force on Large End for Internal Pressure Case
Enter the axial force, not the force per unit circumferences as used by the Code (f1, f2). The program
calculates the force per unit circumference before performing the calculation. Note that we have
formulated the calculations so that a positive (tensile) axial force adds to the tension due to internal
pressure, while a negative (compressive) axial force subtracts from the tension due to internal pressure.
Total Axial Force on Large End for External Pressure Case
formulated the calculations so that a negative (compressive) axial force adds to the compression due to
external pressure, while a positive (tensile) axial force subtracts from the compression due to external
pressure.
Total Axial Force on Small End for Internal Pressure Case
formulated the calculations so that a positive (tensile) axial force adds to the tension due to internal
pressure, while a negative (compressive) axial force subtracts from the tension due to internal pressure.
Total Axial Force on Small End for External Pressure Case
formulated the calculations so that a negative (compressive) axial force adds to the compression due to
external pressure, while a positive (tensile) axial force subtracts from the compression due to external
pressure.
Location of Reinforcing Ring (Shell, Cone)
Enter the location of the reinforcing bar:
SHELL = welded to the shell (cylinder).

CONE = welded to the cone
Radial Width of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the width of the reinforcing bar. You can also think of this as the projection of the bar out from the
vessel OD. For example, a donut shaped plate 10 inches by 1 inch has a radial width of 10.
Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Ring
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing bar. For example, a donut shaped plate 10 inches by 1 inch has an
axial thickness of 1.
Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Section
Enter the moment of inertia of the beam section (I, T, etc.) used to reinforce the cone/cylinder junction.
This can usually be found in the 'Manual of Steel Construction' for common beam sections.
Cross Sectional Area of Reinforcing Section
Enter the cross sectional area of the beam section (I, T, etc.) used to reinforce the cone/cylinder junction.
This can usually be found in the 'Manual of Steel Construction' for common beam sections.
Distance to Centroid of Reinforcing Section
Enter the distance to the centroid of the beam section (I, T, etc) used to reinforce the cone/cylinder
junction. This can usually be found in the 'Manual of Steel Construction' for common beam sections.
Knuckle Bend Radius, Large End
Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the large end. Note that the Code requires this radius to be
no less than 6% of the outside diameter of the head, or less than three times the knuckle thickness (UG-31,
(h)).
Knuckle Thickness, Large End
Enter the minimum thickness after forming of the toroidal knuckle at the large end.
Knuckle Bend Radius, Small End
Enter the bend radius of the toroidal knuckle at the large end. Note that the Code requires this radius to
be no less than 6% of the outside diameter of the head, or less than three times the knuckle thickness (UG-
31, (h)).
Knuckle Thickness, Small End
Enter the minimum thickness after forming of the toroidal knuckle at the large end.
Internal Pressure Results
The first section of results shows the required thicknesses and Maximum Allowable Working Pressures
for the cone and for the upper and lower cylinders under internal pressure. Note that this section is shown
even when the internal design pressure is zero: the required thicknesses will be zero, but the Maximum
Allowable Working Pressures will be meaningful.
Next the program summarizes these internal pressure results, adding the corrosion allowances as
necessary.
External Pressure Results
The External Pressure module calculates materials properties and required thicknesses under external
pressure. Because the program uses Young's modulus values in both the internal and external
reinforcement calculation, this module is called even when the external design pressure is zero. However,
in this case the required thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure calculations for external
pressure are skipped.
The required thickness under external pressure is calculated using the interactive method outlined in
Paragraph UG-33 of the ASME Code. The effective length for toriconical sections is adjusted to include
a fraction of the knuckle in the design length.
Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal Pressure
The program calculates the required reinforcement for the cone/cylinder junctions at both the large and the
small ends. This calculation is performed whenever the internal pressure is greater than zero, and the
reinforcing material is defined. If a knuckle is specified instead of a reinforcing ring, the knuckle
calculation will be performed and the required area calculation will not.
When a knuckle calculation is performed, the program calculates both the required thickness and the
maximum allowable working pressure for the toroidal portion of the knuckle, using the rules in Appendix
1-4(d).
When there is no knuckle, the program calculates the required area of reinforcement at the intersection of
the cylinder and the two cones. Cones are required to have reinforcement at the large and small ends
under internal pressure (Appendix 1-5) because of the tendency of the cone/cylinder junction to buckle
under the radial load developed in the cone.
The Code calculates the maximum angle below which buckling will not occur as a function of the design
pressure and allowable stress. This ratio is used because it is a pretty good indication of the diameter
thickness ratio for the cylinder, and takes into account the strength of the material. This approach has the
odd effect that when you increase the allowable stress you decrease the allowable cone angle. However,
you will normally find that for a given thickness this effect is offset by the increase of area available in the
cone for reinforcement.
Given that reinforcement is required, the area required is a function of the pressure and the square of the
radius. Area available in the shell within one decay length may be included in the area available for
stiffening.
PVElite will set the area required in the reinforcing ring to zero if either the allowed apex angle is higher
than the actual apex angle or the area available in the shell is greater than the area required.
Reinforcement Calculations Under External Pressure
The program calculates the required reinforcement and moment of inertia for the cone/cylinder junctions
at both the large and the small ends. This calculation is performed whenever the external pressure is
greater than zero, the cone is taken as a line of support and the reinforcing material is defined. If a
knuckle is specified instead of a reinforcing ring, the knuckle calculation will be performed and the area of
reinforcement calculation will not. If the user specifies that the cone/cylinder junctions are not to be taken
as a line of support, then the area of reinforcement and moment of inertia calculations will not be
performed.
Cones are required to have reinforcement at the large and small ends under external pressure (Appendix 1-
7) because of the tendency to buckle under axial external loads.
At both the large and small ends there are requirements for the area of reinforcement and moment of
inertia of the reinforcement. The area of reinforcement is based on considerations similar to those
described for internal pressure. The required moment of inertia of the reinforcement is a function of the
strain in the ring at the cone/shell junction, which is in turn calculated using the Code materials chart from
the stress in the ring. See the comments on stiffening rings in the external pressure section for further
insight.
The maximum apex angle is taken from Tables 1-8.1 in Appendix 1 of the ASME Code. The program
calculates the ratio P/SE. Note that this angle applies only to the large end of the cone - the small end
always requires at least a little reinforcement.
The area required in the reinforcing ring will be set to zero if either the cone angle is less than the
maximum angle (large end only), or the area of reinforcement available in the shell is greater than the area
required.
Example
15-1
C H A P T E R 1 5
Chapter 15: FLOATING HEADS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................15-2
Example..............................................................................15-15
Introduction
FLOATING HEADS performs internal and external pressure design of spherically dished covers (bolted
heads) using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules Edition 2004.
The FLOATING HEAD program calculates the required thickness of spherically dished covers (bolted
heads) according to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 analysis rules found in Appendix 1,
Paragraph 1-6. A more detailed analysis of bolted dished heads is included, based on Soehrens analysis,
"The Design of Floating heads for Heat-Exchangers", ASME 57-A-7-47. The more detailed analysis may
be used for the design of floating heads, as specifically mentioned in the ASME Code, Paragraph 1-6 (h).
The program calculates required thickness for the dished part of the head under both internal and external
pressure. Also calculated are the required thickness of the flange and the backing ring. Three types of
heads as defined in the Code and shown in Figure A are included. Soehrens analysis applies only to the
most common type of head, type d.
Figure A - Floating Head Program Geometry

FLOATING HEADS 15-3
Main Input Fields

Floating Head Identification Number
Enter the floating head ID number. It is recommended that the floating head numbers start at 1 and
increase sequentially, but you may also enter some other meaningful number. This field is required, since
the program uses this field to determine if a floating head has been defined.
Floating Head Description
Enter an alphanumeric tag for this floating head. This entry is optional.
Floating Head Type (b, c, d)
Enter the type of floating head or spherically dished cover, which you are analyzing. Refer to Figure A.
b = solid thick head, spherically dished.

c = thin dished head, continuous across flange face.
d = spherical cap welded to flange ID.
Type d is the most common type of head used for heat exchanger floating heads.
Tube Side (Internal) Design Pressure
Enter the internal pressure, which is the pressure on the concave side of the head, and is also the tubeside
pressure for heat exchanger floating heads. Normally you may enter both the shellside and the tubeside
pressures and evaluate the entire head in a single analysis. However, when analyzing a type 'd' head, the
interaction between shellside and tubeside pressure may result in a lower thickness than if each pressure is
entered separately. Therefore you may want to run the program twice, with first the internal and then the
external pressures set to zero.
Shell Side (External) Design Pressure
Enter the external pressure, which is the pressure on the convex side of the head, and is also the shellside
pressure for heat exchanger floating heads. Normally you may enter both the shellside and the tubeside
pressures and evaluate the entire head in a single analysis. However, when analyzing a type 'd' head, the
interaction between shellside and tubeside pressure may result in a lower thickness than if each pressure is
entered separately. Therefore you may want to run the program twice, with first internal and then external
pressures set to zero.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for each head. This temperature will be used to interpolate the material
allowable tables and external pressure curves.
Material Specification
Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by clicking the Database button. If
a material is not contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by
selecting TOOLS,/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
Material Database.
Material Database.
Inside Crown Radius of Head
Enter the inside crown radius of the head. This value may be any dimension greater than the inside radius
of the flange. However, values roughly equal to the flange ID are more typical.
Actual Thickness of Head
Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate used to build the floating head or spherical cap, or the
minimum thickness measured for an existing floating head or spherical cap.
FLOATING HEADS 15-5
Tube Side (Internal) Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance on the concave side of the head. The shellside and tubeside corrosion
allowances are fully implemented in this version of FLOHEAD. Thicknesses and diameters are adjusted
by the program for the evaluation of allowable pressure. They are also added to the required thicknesses.
Shell Side (External) Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance on the convex side of the head. The shellside and tubeside corrosion
allowances are fully implemented in this version of FLOHEAD. Thicknesses and diameters are adjusted
by the program for the evaluation of allowable pressure. They are also added to the required thicknesses.
Outside Diameter of Flanged Portion
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as "A" in the ASME code.
Inside Diameter of Flange
Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the inner pipe
diameter. This value is referred to as "B" in the ASME code. The corrosion allowance will be used to
adjust this value (two times the corrosion allowance will be added to the uncorroded ID given by the user).
Actual Thickness of Flange
Enter the through thickness of the flange. For type c spherical caps this includes the thickness of the head.
Thread Series
TEMA Bolt Table

UNC Bolt Table
Irrespective of the table used, the values will be converted back to the user-selected units.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. Note that the number of bolts is almost always
a multiple of 4.
Figure B below.
Figure B - Full Face Gasket Flange
beyond the bolt circle diameter. For more information refer to Figure C.
FLOATING HEADS 15-7
Figure C - Other Full-Face Gasket Flanges That Require Users Indicate Full-Face Flange.
in design when selecting the bolt circle. The program uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the
gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The program uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the
gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
the gasket.
Table 10.1 - Gasket Materials and Contact Facings

Flat Elastomers
1/16 inch thick 2.75 3700 II
1/32 inch thick 3.50 6500 II

3 ply 2.25 2200 II
2 ply 2.50 2900 II
1 ply 2.75 3700 II



FLOATING HEADS 15-9
Monel 3.50 8000 II
4-6% Chrome 3.75 9000 II
Grooved metal

Solid flat metal
Ring Joint
correlations:
Table 2-5.2 Facing Sketch and Description
2 1/64 inch nubbin

FLOATING HEADS 15-11
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d.
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2 and 6. Note
that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
Width of Partition Gasket
Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. Using the properties such as such as the facing sketch,
column, M and Y and the known width, PVElite will compute the effective seating width and the gasket
loads contributed by the partition gasket.
Enter the partition gasket factor m.
Partition Gasket Design Seating Stress Y:
Partition Gasket Column for Gasket Seating:
metallic ring.
Distance From the Flange Centroid to Head Centerline
HR is the distance from the flange centroid to the intersection of the head centerline and the flange. HR is
positive if it is above the flange centroid, and negative if it is below the flange centroid. HR is used in the
Code calculation, but not in Soehrens calculation.
Is the Flange Slotted
Check this box if the flange has slotted bolt holes for quick opening. A slotted flange has bolt holes,
which extend radially to the outer edge of the flange. The program automatically adjusts for this condition
- you do not have to change the flange outside diameter.
Also Perform Soehrens Calculation?
Check this box if you wish to perform Soehrens Calculation. Soehrens calculation is a more detailed
analysis of the interaction between the spherical cap and the flange. Frequently the stresses calculated
using this method will be acceptable for heads or flanges that are slightly less thick than required by the
normal code rules. Note that this analysis can only be done for type d heads. Note also that the Code (Par.
1-6(h)) allows this type of analysis.
Is There A Backing Ring?
Check this box if there is a backing ring. A backing ring is a second flange used to sandwich the tubesheet
of a floating head heat exchanger. The backing ring may be a split ring. If the ring has one split, then it
has been split along a diameter, into two pieces. The bending moment on the ring is multiplied by 2.0 for
this case. A ring with two splits has been sliced in half like a bagel, and then each half has been split along
a diameter. The ring is assembled with the diametral splits offset by 90 degrees. For this case, enter the
thickness of one half of the original ring, since each half is required to support 75 percent of the original
design moment.
Mating Flange Loads?
If loads from the mating flange are to be considered, check this field. A pop-up spreadsheet will appear
for additional data entry. This auxiliary bolt loading will only be used if it is greater then the standard bolt
loads computed using the ASME formulas.
Pop-Up Input Fields

Bolt Root Area
For nonstandard bolts, enter the root cross sectional area of the bolt.
Inside Depth of Flange From Flange Face to Attached Head
Q is the distance from the bolting face of the flange to the intersection of the head inside diameter and the
flange. Q is used in Soehrens calculation, while HR is used in the Code calculation.
Backing Ring Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter of the backing ring. This value is usually a little larger than the inside diameter
of the flange.
Back Ring Actual Thickness
Enter the actual through thickness of the backing ring. Note that for doubly split rings, this is the thickness
of each piece.
Number of Splits in Backing Ring (0, 1, OR 2)
The backing ring may be a split ring. If the ring has one split, then it has been split along a diameter, into
two pieces. The bending moment on the ring is multiplied by 2.0 for this case. A ring with two splits has
been sliced in half like a bagel, and then each half has been split along a diameter. The ring is assembled
with the diametral splits offset by 90 degrees. For this case, enter the thickness of one half of the original
ring, since each half is required to support 75 percent of the original design moment.
Mating Flange Operating Load (WM1)
Specify the alternate operating bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it is
greater than the operating bolt load computed by the program.
Mating Flange Seating Load (WM2)
Specify the alternate seating flange bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it
is greater than the seating bolt load computed by the program.
Mating Flange Design Bolt Load (W)
Specify the alternate flange design bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it is
greater than the flange design bolt load computed by the program.
Internal Pressure Results for the Head:
The ASME Code provides a simple formula for calculating the required thickness of the head under
internal pressure. This formula is the same for type b, c, and d heads:
t=5PL/6S
The program solves this formula for required thickness, maximum allowable working pressure, and actual
stress, and displays the results. Note that these results are also displayed in the thickness summary at the
end of the printout.
External Pressure Results for Heads:
The required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure for each head type is based on the
external pressure requirements for an equivalent sphere.
Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of Head:
Three separate bending moments are calculated for each head. These are the bolt up moment, the moment
due to external pressure, and the moment due to internal pressure. In each case the moment is calculated
per the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2. However, in the case of the type d head the
moment is further modified to take into account the force imposed on the flange by the pressure on the
head. This force is shown in the printout as MH. The sign of this force will be negative if the head is
attached above the centroid of the flange, and positive if the head is attached below the centroid.
Required Thickness Calculations:
The required thickness formulae for each flange type and loading condition are printed by the program.
These formulae are taken from Appendix 1-6, paragraphs (e)(2) and (3), (f)(2) through (5) and (g)(2).
The required thickness calculations for the backing ring are also shown. The backing ring is taken as a
ring flange and calculated per Appendix 2. The analysis is corrected for the number of splits in the
backing ring, and shows the required thickness for each piece of the split ring.
The thickness calculations for the main flange and backing ring involve the factor F that is directly
proportional to the design pressure. Thus when the pressure is 0, for the bolt-up condition, the factor F is
theoretically equal to 0. Some however interpret the Code to mean that F should be computed using the
design pressure even for the bolt-up cases. There is a setup file directive that allows you to toggle this to
work one way or the other. To keep the program results consistent with older versions, this setup file
parameter is set to compute F with 0 pressure for the bolt-up conditions.
After the required thicknesses are calculated, a summary table is printed.
Soehrens Calculations:
The ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-6, paragraph (h) states:
These formulas are approximate in that they do not take into account continuity between the flange ring
and the dished head. A more exact method of analysis, which takes this into account, may be used if it
meets the requirements of U-2.
The analysis referred to in this paragraph is Soehrens calculation, based on the paper "The Design of
Floating heads for Heat-Exchangers", ASME 57-A-7-47. Intermediate results and calculated stresses are
shown in the printout. Equation numbers are included from the original paper. Allowable stresses are not
shown in the printout, but bending stresses should be limited to 1.5 times the basic Code allowable stress,
while membrane stresses should be limited to 1.0 times the basic Code allowable.
Example
16-1
C H A P T E R 1 6
Chapter 16: HORIZONTAL VESSELS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................16-2
Discussion of Input.............................................................16-2
Saddle Wear Plate Design ..................................................16-14
Example..............................................................................16-16
Introduction
This chapter discusses the HORIZONTAL VESSEL module of the PVElite program. To use
HORIZONTAL VESSEL from the Main Menu click ANALYSIS/CHOOSE ANALYSIS
TYPE/HORIZONTAL VESSELS. This module computes stresses in horizontal pressure vessels created by
the combination of internal pressure and the weight of the vessel, its contained liquid and stiffener rings.
If included in the analysis, additional loads due to wind per ASCE-95 or 93 and earthquake will be
included. The program is based on "Stresses in Large Horizontal Cylindrical Pressure Vessels on Two
Saddle Supports", The Welding Research Supplement, 1951 and subsequent interpretations of that work.
This is also termed Zick's Analysis.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields

Item Number
Enter the vessel number for this analysis. This number can be up to 15 digits in length.
Vessel Description
Any combination up to 15 letters and numbers can be used to briefly identify the vessel that is being
analyzed. This description is reflected in the output reports and is used in error checking.
Vessel Design Pressure
Enter the pressure under which the horizontal vessel is operating. A positive entry here indicates internal
pressure while a negative number indicates external pressure. Please note that no external pressure check
for adequate wall thickness will be performed. Use the Shell program and analyze the geometry before
using the HORIZONTAL VESSEL module.
Vessel Design Temperature
Enter the maximum temperature the horizontal vessel will be operating at. The temperature will be used
in determining the allowable stress of the material chosen. If the temperature is changed, note that the
allowable stress of the material at operating temperature will be updated accordingly.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the allowance given for corrosion in this field. The corrosion allowance cannot be greater than the
vessel wall thickness. In addition, it must not be less than 0.
HORIZONTAL VESSELS 16-3
Material Specification
Enter the material specification for the shell section of the horizontal vessel. An example of a material
type is SA-516 70. Define the material by typing in the name. Alternatively, you can select the material
from the Material Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in the
database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting TOOLS, EDIT/ADD
MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
Allowable Stress At Operating Temperature
this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to double
check your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section
VIII Division 1 at the ambient temperature.
Allowable Stress At Ambient Temperature
allowable stress by hand, be sure to verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the
ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Division 1 at the ambient temperature.
Density Of Stored Liquid
Enter the density of the fluid in the horizontal vessel. If you have more than 1 fluid consideration ( i.e. test
(water) and or (operating) you may have to have more than 1 item with the appropriate fluid densities
defined.
You can enter a number of specific gravity units and PVElite will convert the number entered to the current
set of units. To do this, enter a number followed by the letters "sg".
Liquid Height From Bottom Of Tank
Enter the height of the liquid in the tank. Normally, a Zick analysis is run with the vessel full of water,
however, it may be necessary to run a partially filled tank for wind or seismic analysis for an operating
type load case.
Extra Weight
Enter any additional weight present on the vessel. Additional weight may come from insulation, steel
structures or piping loads. There is no on screen range checking for this entry since it may be positive or
negative. However, if negative, this entry should not be greater than the total weight of the vessel.
Distance From Vessel Centerline To Saddle Base
Enter the distance from the center of the vessel to the bottom of the saddle support. This distance must be
greater than the vessel outside radius.
Saddle Reaction Force Factor
Enter the factor for computing the saddle reaction force due to the Wind (or Earthquake) transverse load.
The recommended value is 3,
The value of 6, is conservative in that it assumes that the maximum edge load is uniform across the entire
base. When in reality it occurs only at the edge. A more accurate method may be to convert this triangular
loading into a more realistic uniform load, this leads to a value of 3. The following figure illustrates the
loading.
Figure A - Saddle Force Factor
End view of a horizontal vessel with a transverse load, simulating Wind/Seismic loading. The saddle
reaction load Fst (or Fwt for wind) due to the transverse load Ft is:
Fst (or Fwt) = ftr * Ft * B / E
Check Saddle Webs, & Base Plate
If you wish PVElite to perform computations on the structure, which supports the vessel check this field.
PVElite will compute the inertia's, moments and forces on the members necessary to perform an AISC
unity check.
Apply Wind Loads to Vessel
If wind loads are to be considered, check this field. If checked, other information such as basic wind
speed and input prompts will have to be answered.
Apply Seismic Loads to Vessel
If seismic loads are a design consideration check this field. Both seismic and wind loads will increase the
saddle load reaction forces, and thus higher vessel stresses will result.
Apply Longitudinal Loads to Vessel
Check this box to enter longitudinal forces such as due to saddle friction or tube-bundle pull out force (for
a heat-exchanger) acting on the vessel.
Stiffening Ring Present
If the vessel is equipped with stiffening rings check this field. Stiffening rings are used to reduce stresses
in the vicinity of the saddle supports and are also used to meet external pressure requirements. When
equipped with rings the assumption is that there are either 1 or 2 rings located directly over the saddle.
The rings are assumed to span (360 - saddle bearing angle) degrees around the vessel. This is mainly used
for the calculation of the ring weight.
Shell and Head Diameter Basis
Select the diameter basis for the shell and Head, following options are available.
ID Inside Diameter basis

OD Outside Diameter basis
Merge Shell
Click on this button to import the Shell information from this CodeCalc file.
Shell Diameter
Enter the shell diameter with respect to the shell and head diameter basis. The diameter must be greater
than 0 and greater than 2.0 times the wall thickness.
Shell Length Tangent to Tangent
Enter the length of the cylindrical shell from tangent to tangent.
Shell Thickness
Enter the uncorroded thickness of the shell in this cell. PVElite will automatically corrode the wall
thickness as necessary.
Shell Joint Efficiency
Enter the seam efficiency of the shell. This value is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1.0. This
entry is used to compute the required thickness of the shell.
Head Type
Select the type of head that is used on the vessel ends. If a flat head is selected then it is assumed to be
round and the same diameter as the shell. Following types are available.
Elliptical
Torispherical
Hemispherical
Flat
Head Thickness
Enter the uncorroded thickness of the head. The value must be greater than 0.0. Effects of corrosion are
handled automatically.
Head Joint Efficiency
Enter the seam efficiency of the head. This value is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1.0. This
entry is used to compute the required thickness of the head.
Distance From Saddle to Vessel Tangent
Enter the length from the vessel tangent to the saddle support. This distance must be positive and less
than 1/2 of the vessel tangent-to-tangent length.
Saddle Width
Enter the width of the surface on the saddle support that will contact the vessel.
Saddle Bearing Angle
Enter the number of degrees that the saddle bears on the shell surface. Valid entries range from 120 to 180
degrees.
Wear Pad Thickness
If there is a wear pad on the vessel, enter that thickness here. If the distance from the vessel tangent to the
saddle location is less than or equal to 0.5 times the shell radius and the wear pad extension above the horn
of the saddle is greater than the shell radius divided by 10.0 then the thickness of the wear pad will be
included. If this is not the case then the shell thickness - CA will be used.
Wear Pad Extension Above Horn of Saddle
If the vessel has a wear pad and it extends above the horn of the saddle enter that extension distance here.
For more information on wear pads, see the help text for wear pad thickness.
Wear Pad Width
If the vessel has a wear pad enter the width here. The width of the wear pad is measured along the long
axis of the vessel.
Pop-Up Input Fields

Base Plate Length
Enter the length of the base plate. This is typically referred to as dimension "A". This value is usually
close to the diameter of the vessel.
Base Plate Thickness
Enter the thickness of the base plate. If you wish to consider any external corrosion or erosion enter the
corroded thickness value, not the uncorroded value. The baseplate thickness will be computed using a
beam bending type equation found in pressure vessel texts. The baseplate thickness is not a function of
the number of ribs.
Base Plate Width
Enter the width of the base plate. This is the short dimension.
Number of Ribs
Enter the number of ribs in your design. This number should include the outside ribs.
Thickness of Ribs
Enter the thickness of the ribs. The ribs run in a direction that is parallel to the long axis of the vessel.
Any external corrosion allowance should be taken into account when this value is entered.
Thickness of Web
Enter the thickness of the Webs. The webs run in a direction perpendicular to the long axis of the vessel.
Any external corrosion should be taken into account when this value is entered.
Web Location Center or Side
Select the web location. Center webs run through the middle of the middle of the base plate. Side webs
will run along the edge of the base plate.
Height of Center Web
The height of the center web extends from the bottom of the base to the shell ID.
Force Coefficient
Enter the force coefficient for vessel here. The acceptable range of input is between 0.5 and 1.2. This can
be seen as Table 12 in ANSI A58.1. For ASCE 7-95, refer to p32-33.
Additional Area
The user may wish to consider the additional area exposed to the wind from piping, platforms, insulation
etc. PVElite will automatically compute an effective diameter with the input diameter known.
User Defined Wind Pressure On Vessel
If your vessel specification calls out for a constant wind pressure design, and you know what that pressure
is, enter it here. Most Wind Design codes have minimum wind pressure requirements, so check those
carefully. The wind pressure will be multiplied by the area calculated by the program to get a shear load
and a bending moment.
If you enter a positive number in here, CodeCalc will use this number regardless of the information in the
following cells.
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value for the importance factor here. The importance factor accounts for the degree of hazard to
life and property. If the vessel is 100 miles ( 160 kilometers ) from the hurricane oceanline enter a 1.00.
If the vessel is at the hurricane oceanline enter 1.05. Values up to 1.11 are acceptable here. Refer to
ASCE #7 and ANSI 58.1 for more information on the importance factor (Table 1 and Table 5 in ANSI
A58.1). For ASCE 7-95, refer to Table 6-2).
Basic Wind Speed
Enter the basic wind speed, which the vessel will be subject to. Positive values will be accepted. A
minimum value of 70 miles per hour is recommended.
Wind Exposure
Enter an integer here for the ASCE 7 wind exposure factor.
Exposure (A) - "Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in excess of 70 ft."
Exposure (B) - "Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous closely spaced
obstructions having the size of single family dwellings."
Exposure (C) - "Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less than 30 feet. This
category includes flat, open country and grasslands."
Exposure (D) - "Flat, unobstructed coastal areas directly exposed to wind flowing over large bodies of
water."
Note that most petrochemical sites use Exposure C.
Height of Vessel Above Grade
Enter the height of the vessel above the surface of the earth (grade).
Use ASCE 7-95 Code
If you choose to use ASCE 7-95 code, check this field. Then enter the following cells.
Types of Hill
Enter the type of hill. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details.
None
2-D Ridge
2-D Escarpment
3-D Axisymmetric Hill
Height of Hill or Escarpment (H)
Enter height of hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details.
Enter distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest to the building site. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for
details.
Distance to Crest (Lh)
Enter distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the height of hill or
escarpment. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details.
Seismic Zone
Select the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in ASCE #7 and
reproduced below. A value of 0 will not increase the saddle reaction force. An Identifier of 5(zone 4) will
produce the highest saddle load reactions. These values are derived from UBC. The basic equation for
lateral G force is :
Cs = Z I C / Rw : Rw = 3, C = 2.75, I = 1.0
Seismic Zone Cs
0 0.0
1 0.069
2a 0.138
2b 0.184
3 0.275
4 0.367
Figure B - Seismic risk map of United States from the ASCE code
Friction Coefficient Between the Saddle and the Foundation, mu
Enter the friction coefficient between the saddle and the foundation. The frictional force is caused by
expansion and contraction of the vessel shell if the operating system varies from the atmospheric
temperature.
The table below displays some coefficient of friction values, taken from the Pressure Vessel Design
Manual by Dennis R. Moss 2nd edition, page 156.
Surfaces Friction Factor mu
Lubricated Steel-to-Concrete 0.45
Steel-to-Steel 0.40
Lubrite-to-Steel
Temperature over 500º F 0.15
Temperature 500º F or less 0.10
Bearing pressure less than 500 psi 0.15
Teflon-to-Teflon
Bearing pressure 800 psi or more 0.06
Bearing pressure 300 psi or less 0.1
User Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS
When you enter a valid seismic zone and leave this field blank or 0, CodeCalc will look the seismic zone
factor up from the table shown below. This number is then used in conjunction with the operating weight
of the vessel to compute the forces, which act on the saddle supports. If for any reason the table value of
Cs is unacceptable, entry of a non-zero value will cause this to be used in lieu of the table value. This
might occur if the building code in your project specifications is different from the one used by CodeCalc.
Zone Cs
0 0.0
1 0.069
2a 0.138
Zone Cs
2b 0.184
3 0.275
4 0.367
User Defined Longitudinal Force
Enter any additional longitudinal force acting on the horizontal vessel. The largest of the longitudinal
forces: user-defined, Wind/Seismic and due to friction, is used for designing the horizontal vessel.
Examples could be pier deflection or tube bundle pullout load for a heat exchanger.
Stiffening Ring Location
If the stiffening rings are located on the outside of the vessel select OD. If the rings are located inside the
vessel select ID.
Stiffening Ring Material Properties
Enter the material specification for the stiffening ring. An example of a material type is SA-516 70.
Define the material by typing in the name. Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material
Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in the database, its specification
and properties can be entered manually by selecting TOOLS, EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main
Menu.
The program will use the shell design temperature to obtain the stiffening ring material properties at
design condition.
Stiffening Ring Properties
Figure C - Stiffening Ring Geometry

Moment of Inertia of Stiffening Ring
If the stiffening ring properties cannot be defined in the fields above then use these fields. The entry in
this cell is for the moment of inertia of the ring about its neutral axis. For typical cross-sections this
property can be calculated or "looked up" in a handbook that lists properties of steel shapes. An example
of such a book would be the AISC steels handbook.
Cross Sectional Area of Stiffening Ring
For the user defined ring enter the cross-sectional area of the ring in this field. This number can be
calculated or "looked up" in a steels handbook.
Distance to Centroid of Reinforcing Section
Enter the distance to the centroid of the beam section ( I, T, etc) used to reinforce the cone/cylinder
junction. This can usually be found in the 'Manual of Steel Construction' for common beam sections.
Height of Stiffener from Shell Surface
If the stiffening ring is on the outside of the vessel then enter the distance from the outside shell surface to
the top most part of the ring. If the ring is on the inside of the vessel then enter the distance from the inner
surface of the shell to the top of the ring.
Aspect Ratio (D/2H) for Elliptical Heads
Enter the aspect ratio for elliptical heads here. A very typical aspect ratio for an elliptical head is 2:1.
This would mean entering a 2 in this field.
Knuckle Ratio for Torispherical Heads
The knuckle ratio for a torispherical head is defined as the crown radius of the head divided by the
knuckle radius. This ratio is typically 16.6667:1 which means that a value of 16.667 would be entered
here. Note since this is a ratio, this value is unitless.
Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads
Enter the crown radius of the torispherical head in this cell.
PVElite will determine the volume of the vessel as well as the empty and full weights. These weights are
computed with the vessel in the corroded condition. Knowing the weights may be useful for cost
estimating and for design of supporting attachments, such as lifting lugs.
The longitudinal stresses displayed in the output include the stresses due to internal pressure. Since these
are normal stresses they are added together. The tension allowable is the basic operating allowable times
the joint efficiency. The compressive allowable is the factor B taken from UG-23 using the materials
chart for the given material.
The tangential shear in the shell varies depending on whether the shell is stiffened or the head acts as a
stiffener, or neither of these cases. Tangential stress in the head only exists if the head is close enough to
the saddle to be used as a stiffener. The allowable stress in shear is 80% of the allowable tensile stress for
the head or shell.
The stress at the horn of the saddle depends on the location of the saddle and the equivalent thickness of
the saddle and wear pad. It is zero if rings stiffen the shell. This stress is always compressive and the
allowable stress is a negative of the minimum of 1.5 times the allowable tensile stress and 0.9 times the
yield stress.
Use of the head as a stiffener creates additional tension stress in the head. The allowable additional stress
in the vessel head is limited to 0.25 times the allowable tension stress in the head. If pressure is added, the
resulting stress must be less than 1.25 times the allowable tensile stress.
If the tip of the stiffening ring is in compression its allowable will be -0.5 times the yield stress. If a
tensile condition exists the basic material allowable will be used.
Saddle Wear Plate Design
The horizontal vessels considered by CodeCalc are assumed to have saddle supports. One of the problems
with this type of support is the high-localized stress, which exists in the vessel in the region of saddles.
Typically, the highest stress is the outside circumferential stress at the saddle horn.
The ASME code does not address the details of saddle support design, nor does it offer guidance in the
computation of the resulting vessel stresses. Instead, the code directs designers to other references for
these methods. To date, the design of saddle supports and their associated stresses are based on past
practice and experience, without theoretical analysis.
A recent paper published in the Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology addresses the issue of local vessel
stresses due to saddle supports. This paper (Effectiveness of Wear Plate at the Saddle Support, Ong Lin
Seng, Transactions of the ASME, Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology, Vol 114, February 1992)
provides a method for the estimation of the wear plate thickness, extension above the saddle horn, and the
amount of stress reduction. (It is interesting to note that this paper suggests some of Zick's
recommendations are non-conservative.)
This optimum thickness of the wear plate is a function of the mean radius of vessel, the thickness of
vessel, and the width of wear plate. The optimum wear plate thickness is determined for both welded and
non-welded conditions, with wear plate angular extensions of 5, 10, and 15 degrees.
Restrictions of this method:
a) The saddle angle must be greater than 120 degrees. Saddle angles of 120 degrees with an
appropriate wear plate can result in a 15 to 40 percent stress reduction at horn of the saddle.
Larger saddle angles cause a greater stress reduction for the same wear plate ratios.
b) The value of ( (r/b) * sqrt(r/t) ) must be between 10 and 60, when this term is not within this range,
no thickness will be selected. (r = mean radius of the vessel, b = width of the wear plate, t =
thickness of the vessel)
The conclusions drawn in this paper are:
a) The peak stress in the vessel at the saddle horn can be reduce from 15 to 40 percent when a wear
plate is used if the wear plate has the same thickness as the vessel and extends at least 5 degrees
above the saddle horn.
b) The peak stress in the vessel remains at the saddle horn when using a thin wear plate.
c) The stress reduction does not vary greatly with a variation in saddle support angle.
d) A welded wear plate reduces stresses better than a non-welded wear plate.
Figure D - Horizontal Vessel Program Geometry

Figure E - Wear Plate and Saddle Detail for a Typical Horizontal Tank
Example
17-1
C H A P T E R 1 7
Chapter 17: TUBESHEETS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................17-2
Example..............................................................................17-36
Introduction
TUBESHEETS performs tubesheet thickness analysis for all tubesheet types, including fixed tubesheet
exchangers, based on the Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association, 8th Edition,
1999 or PD 5500, 2004 (British standard). Flanged and flued (thick) expansion joint for a fixed tubesheet
is also analyzed per TEMA and ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 Appendix 5.
TUBESHEET calculates required thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure of tubesheets for
all of the exchanger types described in the 8th Edition of the Standards of the Tubular Exchanger
Manufacturers Association (TEMA) and PD 5500. It also calculates thermal stresses and forces in the
shell and tubes of fixed tubesheet exchangers. Load on the Tube-Tubesheet joint is also checked per the
method provided in the ASME and PD 5500 codes respectively.
This program will analyze the following tubesheet types:
Stationary tubesheets, gasketed between the shell and the channel.

Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell and the channel.
Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell only.
Stationary tubesheets, integral with the channel only.
U-tube exchangers, tubesheet gasketed between shell and channel
U-tube exchangers, tubesheet integral with channel only.
U-tube exchangers, tubesheet integral with shell only.
U-tube exchangers, tubesheet integral with both shell and channel.
Floating tubesheets, outside packed floating head (P).
Floating tubesheets, floating head with backing device (S).
Floating tubesheets, pull through floating head (T).
Floating tubesheets, externally sealed floating head (W).
Floating tubesheets, divided floating head.
Fixed tubesheets, stationary tubesheet at both ends.
The program does the required calculations for the thickness of a tubesheet that has been extended as a
flange. It also calculates the required thickness of the extension. You must enter the geometry of the
flange extension, including the gasket and bolting for the flange.
TUBESHEET takes into account the following additional loadings for fixed tubesheet exchangers:
TUBESHEETS 17-3
Expansion joints - thin walled, thick walled, or none.

Tubesheets - integral, gasketed, or extended as flanges.
Pressure and thermal loads - on shell, tubesheet, tubes and tube-to-tubesheet joints.
Differential pressure designs.
It is possible to analyze multiple load cases (startup, shut-down etc) for fixed tubesheets, in both the
corroded and uncorroded condition.
Program can also analyze a thick expansion joint attached to a fixed tubesheet. The expansion joint spring
rate and stresses are computed per TEMA standard. The actual stresses are then compared with the
allowables provided in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1, Appendix 5 to check the joint's adequacy.
Figure A - TEMA Tubesheet Module Geometry

Figure B - Fixed Tubesheet Exchanger With Expansion Joint
Figure C - Tubesheet Extended as a Flange Geometry

TUBESHEETS 17-5
Main Input Fields

Item Number
Enter the item ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1 and
increase sequentially.
Description
Tubesheet Design Code
Select the design code to be used for designing the tubesheets.
There are two options available:
TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.

PD:5500 - British Standard (formerly known as BS 5500)
Note: ASME tubesheet can also be designed in the ASME Tubesheet module.
Shell Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure for the shell side of the exchanger. If the shell side has external pressure, enter a
negative pressure. The program will correctly combine this pressure with the positive pressure on the
other side.
Note that if you specify a differential pressure in the differential pressure input field, the values on the
shellside and tubeside will usually be ignored. The exception to this is fixed tubesheet exchangers, where
the differential pressure field only serves as a flag to indicate to the program that the appropriate
calculations for differential pressure should be performed.
Shell\Channel Tube\Tubesheet\ Bolt Material Specification
Type the ASME or PD:5500 code material specification. The program will display all the materials
matching the name and occurrence number. Alternatively, click the Material Database button to search a
material name from the Material Database. Click the Material Edit Properties button to change the
properties of the selected material. If a material is not contained in the database, you can enter its
specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS, EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main
Menu. The Material Database, for both TEMA and PD:5500, is available based on the design code
selected.
Material Database.
Material Database.
Shell Metal Design Temperature
Enter the design metal temperature for the shell side components. This is the design temperature for
determining the allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for
thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Shell Wall Thickness
Enter the minimum wall thickness for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the program to
calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets, and especially in calculating longitudinal shell
stresses for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Enter the shell side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate the corroded
thickness of the shell.
Shell Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the program to calculate the
characteristic diameter for all tubesheets, and especially in calculating longitudinal shell stresses for fixed
tubesheet exchangers.
TUBESHEETS 17-7
Shell Mean Metal Temperature
Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell under realistic operating condition. It is important,
especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that you enter accurate values for
the metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have to run the analysis more than once to
check several metal temperature cases. Frequently the metal temperatures will be less severe than the
design temperatures, due to thermal resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat
transfer coefficient and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube
temperature will be quite close to the shell temperature. Don't forget to evaluate the condition of shellside
or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condition may govern the
exchanger design.
Refer to TEMA standard, section T-4 (8th Ed.) for guidance to compute the Mean Metal Temperatures.
Channel Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure for the tube side of the exchanger. If the tube side has a vacuum design
condition, enter a negative pressure. The program will correctly combine this pressure with the positive
pressure on the other side. Note that if you specify a differential pressure in the Differential Pressure
Input field, the values on the shellside and tubeside will usually be ignored. The exception to this is for
fixed tubesheet exchangers, where the Differential Pressure Input field only serves as a flag to indicate
to the program that the appropriate calculations for differential pressure should be performed.
Channel Metal Design Temperature
Enter the design metal temperature for the tube side components. This is the design temperature for
determining allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for
thermal expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Channel Wall Thickness
Enter the minimum wall thickness for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by the program to
calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheet types.
Channel Corrosion Allowance
Enter the tube side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate the corroded
thickness of the channel.
Channel Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by the program to calculate
the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets.
Tube Mean Metal Temperature
Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubes under realistic operating condition. This value is only
required for British tubesheets or TEMA fixed tubesheets.
It is important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that you enter
accurate values for the metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may have to run the analysis
more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently the metal temperatures will be less
severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a
good heat transfer coefficient and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the
tube temperature will be quite close to the shell temperature.
Don't forget to evaluate the condition of shell side or tube side loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of
fluid, this design condition may govern the exchanger design. For a fixed tubesheet, you can instruct the
program, to evaluate multiple load cases.
Tube Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the tubes. This value will be used to look up the allowable stress values
for the tube material from the material tables.
Tube Wall Thickness
Enter the wall thickness of the tubes. This value is used to determine the total tube area and stiffness. The
following table displays thickness for some common tube gauges.
B.W.G. Gauge Thickness (Inches) B.W.G. Gauge Thickness (Inches)
7 .180 17 .058
8 .165 18 .049
10 .143 19 .042
11 .120 20 .035
12 .109 22 .028
13 .095 24 .022
14 .083 26 .018
15 .072 27 .016
16 .065
TUBESHEETS 17-9
Tube Corrosion Allowance
Enter the tube corrosion allowance.
Number of Tube Holes
Enter the number of tube holes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube area and
stiffness
Tube Pattern (Triangular, Square)
Enter the pattern of the tube layout. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term
'eta' in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are the same for triangular, square, rotated triangular
and rotated square layouts.
Tube Outside Diameter
Enter the outside diameter of the tubes. This is usually an exact fraction, such as .5, .75, .875, 1.0, or 1.25
(inches). The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term 'eta' in the tubesheet
thickness equation. These rules are the same for triangular, square, rotated triangular and rotated square
layouts.
Tube Pitch
Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used
to calculate the term 'eta' in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are the same for triangular,
square, rotated triangular and rotated square layouts.
Enter Tube-Tubesheet Joint Information
Check this box to enter information about the Tube-Tubesheet joint (weld, classification).
Differential Design Pressure (Used if > 0.0)
Enter the differential design pressure if you want the program to use the differential design rules. The
differential pressure is used as the design pressure on both the tube side and the shell side, except for fixed
tubesheet exchangers. In this case any number greater than zero serves as a flag to tell the program to turn
on the special differential design pressure rules for fixed tubesheets. You must enter the shell side and
tube side design pressures for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Straight Length of Tubes
Enter the length of the tubes. For U-tubesheet exchangers this is the straight length of the tube. For fixed
tubesheet exchanger this is the overall length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the inside face of the
other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of the tubes.
This input is only needed for British tubesheets and TEMA fixed tubesheets.
Enter Unsupported Tube Span SL For Max (k*SL)
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required. Where,
SL = Unsupported Span of the tube

k = Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below lists the values of k.
Unsupported Spans k for TEMA k for PD:5500
Between two tubesheets 0.60 0.50
Between tubesheet and baffle 0.80 0.707
Between two baffles 1.00 1.00
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that give the maximum combination of k * SL.
SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first baffle or the tube span between
two support baffles.
The expanded portion of a tube is that part which is radially expanded outward. When the tube is
expanded it is also pressed into the tubesheet. Simply enter this expanded length. Some tubes are welded
into place and this value may be 0. The maximum this value can be is the thickness of the tubesheet. This
input is only needed for British tubesheets and TEMA fixed tubesheets.
Perimeter Of Tube Layout (if Needed)
Enter the length of a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. This can be calculated by counting
the number of tubes on the outside of the layout and multiplying that number by the tube pitch. When a
tubesheet may be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area of the tubesheet
for the shear calculation. An error message displays when these values are required but not given. The
result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the perimeter. This input is only
needed for TEMA tubesheets.
Area Of Tube Layout
Enter the area enclosed by a path around the outside edge of the tube layout. When a tubesheet may be
controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area of the tubesheet for the shear
calculation. An error message displays when these values are required but not given. The result will be
conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the perimeter. This input is only needed for
TEMA tubesheets.
TUBESHEETS 17-11
Diameter of Outer Tube Limit Circle
Enter the diameter of outer tube limit circle, denoted as Do in PD:5500. This input is only needed for
British tubesheets (PD:5500).
Tube Hole Diameter
Enter the diameter of the tube hole, denoted as dh in PD:5500 code. This input is only needed for British
tubesheets (PD 5500).
Number of Grooves
Enter number of grooves in the tube hole.
Tube Sheet Type
The program analyzes the following tubesheet types. When one tubesheet is stationary and the other
tubesheet is a floating type, then analyze the stationary tubesheet as one of the stationary types (listed
below) and analyze the floating tubesheet as one of the tubesheet types (listed below). Examples include:
AEP, AKT, AJW, NET, etc. If both tubesheets (front and rear) are stationary, then select the fixed
tubesheet type. This can include any of the stationary tubesheet types as the front or rear tubesheet type.
Choosing this geometry assures the differential thermal expansion (between the shell and the tubes) is
properly accounted. Examples of some fixed configurations are BEM, NGN, AEL, etc. Use the table
below to determine the correct tubesheet type.
Stationary tubesheet, gasketed on both sides

(A)
Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell (B)
Stationary tubesheets, integral with the channel

(C)
Stationary tubesheets, integral on both sides (N)
U-tube tubesheets gasketed on both sides (U)
U-tube tubesheets integral with the channel (V)
U-tube tubesheets integral with the shell
Floating tubesheets, outside packed floating See TEMA figure N-1.2

head (P)
Floating tubesheets, head with backing device See TEMA figure N-1.2
(S)
Floating tubesheets, pull through floating head See TEMA figure N-1.2
(T)
Floating head, externally sealed floating See TEMA figure N-1.2

tubesheet (W)
Divided floating tubesheet (D) See TEMA 7.132 type k
Fixed tubesheet exchanger - two stationary The figure below displays a NEN fixed tubesheet
tubesheets (F) exchanger. A fixed tubesheet configuration can be
comprised of any combination of stationary
tubesheets.
TUBESHEETS 17-13
Note: Each end can be any type of fixation i.e. integral, gasketed, etc.
Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature
Enter the design metal temperature for the tubesheet. This is the design temperature for determining
allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal
expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Flange Merge
Use this option to bring in data from the Flange module. Select the flange mating to the tubesheet flange,
and press enter, all the appropriate data for that flange will be copied in automatically. You will have to
specify the thickness of the flanged extension.
Tubesheet Extended as Flange?
Check this field if the tubesheet is extended and used as a bolted flange. If the tubesheet is extended but
does not experience the bending moments of the bolts, then checking the box Is Bolt Load Transferred
to Tubesheet allows input echo of the tubesheet extension information and does not transfer the bolt load
to the tubesheet. For example when the tubesheet is bolted between a pair of identical flanges, it will not
experience a bending moment. It is only when the tubesheet replaces one of the flanges that a moment
develops.
Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both)
Enter the kind of gasketing associated with this tubesheet. If the tubesheet has a circular gasket, even if
the gasket is not extended as a flange, you must enter the details of the gasket, so that the program can
correctly evaluate the mean diameter of the gasket load reaction (G).
Depth of Groove in Tubesheet
If the tubesheet has a groove such as for pass-partition, enter its depth here. This value is used as a
candidate when finalizing the required thickness of the tubesheet. The maximum of this value or the
channel corrosion allowance plus the shellside corrosion allowance will be added to the computed
required tubesheet thickness. If your tubesheet is not grooved, enter a 0 in this field.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the thickness of the tubesheet, or a reasonable guess at the thickness if the actual thickness is
unknown. This thickness should include any allowances for corrosion on the shell side or the tube side.
The tubesheet thickness for fixed tubesheet exchangers is also used in the equivalent thermal pressure
calculation. When you have finished your design you should come back and put the actual thickness into
this field and make sure the required thickness doesn't change.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Shell Side
Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the shell side. This value is combined with the tubesheet
corrosion allowance channel side to calculate the corroded thickness of the tubesheet.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Channel Side
Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the channel side. This value is combined with the tubesheet
corrosion allowance shell side to calculate the corroded thickness of the tubesheet.
User Defined G for Floating Tubesheet
Enter the G dimension of Stationary Tubesheet to be used for the some floating tubesheet types. If this
input is left blank, then the program will compute the G from the specified gasket input.
TEMA standard states that for all the floating tubesheet (except divided), the G shall be the G used for the
stationary tubesheet.
The T type floating tubesheet should also be checked with actual gasket G of the floating tubesheet.
TEMA Classification
Enter the TEMA classification of the Heat-Exchanger from the following categories:
B- Chemical process service. This information is used in computing the minimum required tubesheet thickness.
C- Moderate requirements of Commercial and general processes.
R- Severe requirements of Petrochemical and related processing applications.
This information is used in computing the minimum required tubesheet thickness.
Tubesheet Clamped
Select the tubesheet edge condition. This determines how the tubesheet is supported at the edge by the
shell or channel. This option is used for the PD:5500 code. Fig. 3.9-6 in PD:5500 2003, illustrates the edge
support conditions.
TUBESHEETS 17-15
The available options are listed in the table below:
Stationary Simply/ Floating Simply Select this option if both the stationary and the
floating tubesheet are simply supported.
Stationary Simply/ Floating Select this option if the stationary tubesheet is

Clamped simply supported and the floating tubesheet is
clamped.
Stationary Clamped/ Floating Select this option if the stationary tubesheet is

Simply clamped and the floating tubesheet is simply
supported.
Stationary Clamped/ Floating Select this option if both the stationary and the
Clamped floating tubesheet are clamped.
Expansion Joint Type
The following options are available.
None Select this option when there is no expansion joint in the heat exchanger.
Thin Expansion Select this option if the expansion joint is a bellows type expansion joint.
Joint The figure below shows a unreinforced bellows type expansion joint. In
this case you should use the Thin Joint module to design the bellows type
expansion joints (both reinforced and unreinforced). Then specify the
computed spring rate.
Figure D - Thin Expansion Joint

Thick Expansion Joint Select this option if the expansion joint is:
flanged and flue
flanged only
no flanged or no flue.
You can specify 2 of the design options:
Existing - specify the spring rate for the expansion joint
Analyze - specify the expansion joint. geometry and let
the program compute spring rate and stresses.
For more information see Figure E - Thick Expansion Joint.
Expansion Joint Design Option
Existing Select this option if you already know the spring rate of the
flanged/flued expansion joint.
Analyze Select this option if you want the program to compute the
spring rate of the expansion joint and stresses induced in the
expansion joint
Corroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate
If there is no expansion joint, enter a zero (0.0). If there is a thin walled expansion joint, then either enter
a one (1.0) or enter the actual spring rate. If there is a thick walled expansion joint, either enter the actual
spring constant for the joint or let the Tubesheet module compute it using the rules per the TEMA
standard RCB-8.
Uncorroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate
standard RCB-8.
Different inputs for the uncorroded and corroded spring rates are required for running the multiple load
cases in both the conditions.
TUBESHEETS 17-17
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter
Figure E - Thick Expansion Joint
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter (ID)
Enter the inside diameter of the expansion joint, shown as "ID" in the figure above. This value is used by
the program to calculate the force on the cylinder, and the equivalent pressure of thermal expansion.
Expansion Joint Outside Diameter (OD)
Enter the outside diameter of the expansion joint, shown as "OD" in the figure above.
Expansion Joint Flange (minimum) Wall Thickness (te)
Enter the minimum thickness of the flange or web of the expansion joint, after forming. This is usually
thinner than the unformed metal. This value is shown as te, in the above figure.
Expansion Joint Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance for the expansion joint. This value will be subtracted from the minimum
thickness of the flange or web for the joint. Some common corrosion allowances are listed below:
0.0625 inches (2 mm) 1/16"

0.125 inches (3 mm) 1/8"
0.25 inches (6 mm) 1/4"
Expansion Joint Knuckle
Enter the distance from the shell cylinder to the beginning of the knuckle for an expansion joint with an
inside knuckle.
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Offset (fb)
Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the beginning of the knuckle for an expansion joint with an
outside knuckle. Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web
and the outer diameter for joints with a square outside corner. Note that in both cases this distance is
frequently zero, and that for an expansion joint with a outside radius but no outside cylinder, this distance
is the distance from the end of the knuckle to the symmetrical centerline of the joint.
Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Radius (ra)
Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an inside knuckle. Enter zero for an expansion joint
with a sharp inside corner.
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Radius (rb)
Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an outside knuckle. Enter zero for an expansion joint
with a sharp outside corner. (Flanged Only)
Number of Flexible Shell Elements
Enter the number of flexible shell elements in the flanged/flued expansion joint. Two flexible shell
elements constitute 1 convolution of the Expansion Joint.
Shell Cylinder Length ( Li )
Enter the length of the shell cylinder to the nearest body flange or head.
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8-21 includes the following note: lo and li are the lengths of the cylinders welded
to the flexible shell elements except, where two flexible shell elements are joined with a cylinder between
them, lo or li as applicable shall be taken as half the cylinder length. If no cylinder is used, lo and li shall
be taken as zero.
Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, since the TEMA procedure
automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this length if it is less than the
cylinder length.
Outer Cylinder on the Thick Expansion Joint
Check this field if there is a cylindrical section attached to the expansion joint at the OD. This will always
be true when you have an expansion joint with only a half convolution (1 FSE). It may also be true when
there is a relatively long cylindrical portion between two half convolutions, as in the case of certain inlet
nozzle geometries for heat exchangers.
Number of Desired Cycles
Enter the number of desired pressure cycles for this exchanger. This will be compared with the actual
computed cycle life of the expansion joint.
TUBESHEETS 17-19
Pop-Up Input Fields

Fillet or Groove Weld Length
If the tubes on your exchanger are welded to the tubesheet, then enter the fillet weld or groove weld leg
length. Some designs incorporate either only a groove or fillet weld, sometimes both are used. These
values are used to determine the weld strengths. PVElite will determine the minimum required weld sizes
afm and agm. Refer to section UHX-15 in the ASME Code for more details. This input is not active for
the PD:5500 code.
Weld Type
Following options are available for the connecting tube/tubesheet welds:
Full Strength A full strength tube-to-tubesheet weld is one in which the joint
strength is equal to or greater than the maximum allowable axial
tube strength.
Partial Strength A partial strength weld can be designed based on the actual
tube-tubesheet axial load.
Seal Weld/No Weld No calculations are performed in this case.
Design Strength
This term is Fd as defined in the Code paragraph UHX-15. The design strength should not be greater than
Ft (tube strength) which is pi.t.(do - t)Sa. This value is used to determine the minimum acceptable
fillet/groove weld size that connects the tube to the tubesheet.
This value is required for U-tube tubesheet exchanger. But, is optional for fixed and floating tubesheet
exchangers.
For partial strength tube-to-tubesheet joints on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, the higher of the
actual tube-to-tubesheet load and the user entered design strength will be used to size welds.
For full strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, tube strength (Ft) is used
to size welds.
Is Tube-Tubesheet Joint Tested
Check this box if the Tube-Tubesheet joint is tested. In that case the program will use the higher value of
factor fr from the table A-2 in ASME code, Sec VIII, Div 1. This input is not active for the PD:5500 code.
Tube Joint Reliability Factor
On selecting the appropriate Tube joint type, the program automatically fills in the value of factor Fr.
If TEMA design code is selected,
The ASME Code tube joint reliability factor is found in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Table
A-2, and is used to calculate the allowable tube-to-tubesheet joint loads. A typical value for tubes rolled
into two grooves is 0.70.
Table A-2, Efficiencies and Joint Types
Type Joint Description Fr.(test) Fr.(no test)
1 a Welded only, a >= 1.4t 1.00 .80
2 b Welded only, t <= a < 1.4 t .70 .55
3 b-1 Welded only, a < t .70 ...
4 c Brazed, examined 1.00 .80
5 d Brazed, not fully examined 0.50 .40
6 e Welded, a>=1.4t, exp. 1.00 .80
7 f Welded, a<1.4t, exp, with 2 or more .95 .75

grooves
8 g Welded, a<1.4t, exp, enhanced with 1 .85 .65

groove
9 h Welded a 1.4t, exp, not enhanced, 0 .70 .50

grooves
10 i Expanded, enhanced, 2 or more grooves .90 .70
11 j Expanded, enhanced, single groove .80 .65
12 k Expanded, not enhanced no grooves .60 .50
If PD:5500 is selected then use the table below to determine the efficiency and joint type.
Table 3.9-2, Efficiencies and Joint Types
Type Joint Description Fr.(1)
1 a Welded with min throat thk. >= tube thk. .80
2 b Welded with min throat thk. < tube thk. .55

TUBESHEETS 17-21
3 c Expanded and welded with min throat thk. >= tube .80
thk.
4 d Expanded and welded with min throat thk. < tube .55
thk.
5 e Expanded only .50
6 f Explosion expanded/welded .80
Interface Pressure, Po and Pt
Enter the Interface pressures, Po and Pt, between the tube and the tubesheet hole
Po Interface Pressure that remains after expanding the tube at fabrication.

Pt Interface Pressure due to differential thermal growth.
These pressures are usually established analytically or experimentally. But, must consider the effect of
change in material strength at operating temperature.
This input is required only for the tube joint types i, j and k, as defined in table A-2 in ASME Sec VIII,
Div-1 App. A.
Is Welded Material Specified (not Seamless)
Check this box if the tube has a longitudinal weld seam or in other words it (not seamless) and the
material allowables are for welded product.
For computing allowable Tube-Tubesheet Joints loads, the allowable stress of a seamless tube is needed.
If the user selected a welded tube and clicks on this check box, then the tube allowable stress is divided by
0.85 to an equivalent allowable of a seamless tube.
This is per note in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 UHX-15.3 and App. A.
Actual Tubesheet Metal Temperature
Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubesheet under a realistic operating condition. This value does
not affect the thermal expansion design, but it is used to determine the elastic modulus of the tubesheet.
Is This a Kettle Type Heat Exchanger
Check here if the shell is shaped like a kettle. Kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figure N-1.2 and
Figure N-2 in TEMA standard Eighth Edition.
Length of Kettle Port Cylinder (LP)
Enter the length of the kettle port cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like a kettle.
The Kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figures N-1.2 and N-2 in the TEMA Standard (Eighth
Edition).
Thickness of Kettle Port Cylinder (TP)
Enter the thickness of the kettle port cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like a kettle.
The Kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figures N-1.2 and N-2 in the TEMA Standard (Eighth
Edition).
Mean Diameter of Kettle Port Cylinder (DP)
Enter the mean diameter of the Kettle port cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like a
kettle. The Kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figures N-1.2 and N-2 in the TEMA Standard
(Eighth Edition).
Length of Kettle Cylinder (LK)
Enter the length of the Kettle cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like a kettle. The
Kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figures N-1.2 and N-2 in the TEMA Standard (Eighth Edition).
Thickness of Kettle Cylinder (TK)
Enter the thickness of the Kettle cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like a kettle. The
Mean Diameter of Kettle Cylinder (DK)
Enter the mean diameter of the Kettle cylinder. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like a
kettle. The Kettle-type configuration is illustrated in Figures N-1.2 and N-2 in the TEMA Standard
(Eighth Edition).
Axial Length of Kettle Cone (LC)
Enter the axial length of the Kettle cone. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like a kettle. The
Thickness of Kettle Cone (TC)
Enter the thickness of the Kettle cone. This dimension is needed if the shell is shaped like a kettle. The
TUBESHEETS 17-23
Select Load Cases for Detailed Printout
When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the program will generate summarized results for
all the load cases in tabular form. To see the detailed equations and intermediate calculations for one or
more load cases, select those load cases. The available load cases are:
Load Case Description
Load Case No. Corroded Uncorroded
1 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca
2 Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca
3 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca
4 Fvs + Fvt + Th + Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca

Ca
5 Fvs + Pt + Th + Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
Ca
6 Ps + Fvt + Th + Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
Ca
7 Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Fvs + Fvt - Th - C

Ca
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell-side and Tube-side vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt - Shell-side and Tube-side Design Pressures.
Th - With or Without Thermal Expansion.
Ca - With or Without Corrosion Allowance.
Enter Shell/Channelside Vacuum Pressures
When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the user can specify shell/channel side vacuum
pressures. This should be a positive entry. For example for full atmospheric vacuum condition enter a
value of 15.0 psig. If no value is specified then 0 psi will be used.
Outside Diameter of Flanged Portion
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as "A" in the ASME code.

Thickness of Extended Portion of Tubesheet
Enter the flange thickness. This thickness will be used in the calculation of the required thickness. The
final results should, therefore, agree with this thickness to within about five percent.
Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the program range from 0.5 to
4.0 inches. If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the nominal size in this field,
and also enter the root area of one bolt in the Thread Series cell.
Thread Series
TEMA Bolt Table

UNC Bolt Table
Bolt Root Area
If you exchanger design has non-standard bolts, enter a 3 in the field above this one and enter the root area
of a single bolt in this field.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis.
Fillet Weld Between Flange and Shell/Channel
Enter the fillet weld height between the tubesheet flange and the shell or channel outside surface. PVElite
will use this number to calculate g1 (hub thickness at the large end).
Apply Bolt Load to the Tubesheet
Check this box if the bolt load is transferred to the tubesheet extended as the flange.
TUBESHEETS 17-25
Operating Bolt Load (Wm1)
Specify the alternate operating bolt load on the tubesheet extended as a flange. This value will be used if it
is greater than the operating bolt load computed by the program.
Seating Bolt Load (Wm2)
Specify the alternate seating bolt load on the tubesheet extended as a flange. This value will be used if it is
greater than the seating bolt load computed by the program.
Flange Design Bolt (W)
Specify the alternate flange design bolt load on the tubesheet extended as a flange. This value will be used
if it is greater than the flange design bolt load computed by the program.
in design when selecting the bolt circle. The program uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the
gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
correlations:
2 1/64 inch nubbin

the gasket.
Gasket Materials and Contact Facings

Flat Elastomers
1/16 inch thick 2.75 3700 II
1/32 inch thick 3.50 6500 II
3 ply 2.25 2200 II
2 ply 2.50 2900 II

TUBESHEETS 17-27
1 ply 2.75 3700 II


Monel 3.50 8000 II

4-6% Chrome 3.75 9000 II
Grooved metal
Solid flat metal
Ring Joint
Gasket Thickness
Nubbin Width
TUBESHEETS 17-29
figure below.
Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. Using the gasket properties such as the facing sketch, column,
M and Y and the known width, PVElite will compute the effectives seating width and the gasket loads
contributed by the partition gasket.
Enter the partition gasket factor M.
Partition Gasket Design Seating Stress Y
Partition Gasket Flange Face Facing Sketch
Enter the partition gasket flange face facing sketch.
TUBESHEETS 17-31
metallic ring.
Outer Cylindrical Element Thickness
Enter the actual wall thickness of the outer cylindrical element at the point where the expansion joint is
attached.
This value is shown on Figure E as 'to'.
Outer Cylindrical Element Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance for the outer cylindrical element.
Outer Cylindrical Element Length
Enter the length of the outer cylinder to the nearest body flange or head, or to the centerline of the
convolute.
be taken as zero.
automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this length if less than the
cylinder length.
This value is shown on Figure E as 'lo'.
Intermediate Calculations for Tubesheets Extended as Flange:
Two major additions to the tubesheet calculations occur when a tubesheet is extended as a flange. First, a
moment is added to the pressure moment which governs the thickness of most tubesheets. Second, a
moment exists on the portion of the tubesheet which serves as the flange, and the effects of this moment
must be evaluated. The TEMA standard requires that these conditions be evaluated using the rules in the
ASME Code, Appendix 2. Those rules, in turn, require the complete evaluation of bending moments on
the flange. It is those bending moment calculations which are reflected in this section of the output. The
flange design rules in PD:5500 are also very similar to the ASME Appendix 2 rules.
These calculations represent the basic bolt loading for the flanged portion of the tubesheet, and will be the
same for the mating flange. The actual bending moments may change when compared to the mating
flange. The flanged extension of the tubesheet is calculated as a ring type flange. Since no stresses are
shown, you need to check the adequacy of the bolting by comparing the required bolt area to the actual
bolt area. The bolt spacing correction factor is automatically included in the bending moment, such that
the moment is the force times the distance times the bolt correction.
Geometric Constants, Pressure and Thickness Calculations:
The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term 'eta' in the tubesheet thickness
equation. These rules are same for triangular, rotated triangular, square, and rotated square layouts. When
a tubesheet may be controlled by shear stress, the program requires the perimeter and area of the tubesheet
for the shear calculation. You will receive an error message when these values are required but not given.
The result will be conservative if you overestimate the area and underestimate the perimeter.
The G dimension is calculated based on the exchanger type and either the diameter of the pressure
component or the mean diameter of the gasket. TEMA standard states that for all the floating tubesheet
(except divided), the G shall be the G used for the stationary tubesheet. The T type floating tubesheet
should also be checked with actual gasket G of the floating tubesheet. In these cases, user can enter the G
dimension of the stationary tubesheet.
Similarly, the F dimension is calculated based on the exchanger type and the type of connection to the
shell and channel. These calculations are based on Table RCB-7.132 and Table RCB-7.133.
Differential Expansion Pressure:
The program contains tables of Young's modulus and the coefficient of thermal expansion. It selects these
values from the tables based on the materials classification you enter on the material editing screen of
the input spreadsheet. You should verify that the program has selected the right identification number for
the material. You should also check the values to ensure that they agree with your expectations. A good
place to find this data, and the source of these tables in the program, is the TEMA Standard, tables D-10
and D-11. The following table displays the program identification numbers for the materials in this
standard:
Chart Number Cross Ref. to Elastic Chart Chart Name
1 3 TE-1 : Carbon and Low Alloy Steels
2 4 B31.3 : 5Cr - 9Cr
3 6 B31.3 : 18Cr - 8Ni
4 6 TE-1 : 27Cr
5 6 B31.3 : 25Cr20Ni
6 8 B31.3 : 67Ni30Cu
TUBESHEETS 17-33
7 1 B31.3 : 3.5Ni
8 10 B31.3 : Aluminum
9 7 B31.3 : Cast Iron
10 13 B31.3 : Bronze
11 12 B31.3 : Brass
12 9 B31.3 : 70 Cu - 30Ni
13 6 B31.3 : Ni - Fe - Cr
14 6 B31.3 : Ni - Cr - Fe
15 7 B31.3 : Ductile Iron
16 14 TEMA : Plain Carbon Stl & C - Mn Stl.
17 14 TEMA : C - Si, C - 1/2Mo & Cr - 1/2Mo
18 14 TEMA : C - Mn - Si, 1-1/4Cr - 1/2Mo & 3Cr -

1Mo
19 14 TEMA : Mn - Mo
20 20 TEMA : 2 - 1/2 & 3 - 1/2Ni
21 17 TEMA : 2 - 1/4Cr - 1Mo
22 18 TEMA : 5Cr - 1/2Mo
23 18 TEMA : 7Cr - 1/2Mo & 9Cr - 1Mo
24 19 TEMA : 12Cr & 13Cr
25 19 TEMA : 15Cr & 17 Cr
26 15 TEMA : TP316 & TP317
27 15 TEMA : TP304
28 15 TEMA : TP321
29 15 TEMA : TP347
30 15 TEMA : 25 Cr-12Ni, 23 Cr-12Ni, 25Cr-20Ni
31 23 TEMA : Aluminum 3003
32 23 TEMA : Aluminum 6061

33 32 TEMA : Titanium, Grades 1, 2, 3, 7
34 21 TEMA : Ni-Cu (Alloy 400)
35 24 TEMA : Ni - Cr - Cr - Fe (Alloy 600)
36 25 TEMA : Ni - Fe - Cr (Alloy 800 & 800H)
37 35 TEMA : Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo - Cu (Alloy 825)
38 34 TEMA : Ni - Mo (Alloy B)
39 27 TEMA : Ni - Mo-Cr (Alloy 276)
40 28 TEMA : Nickel (Alloy 200)
41 33 TEMA : 70-30 Cu - Ni
42 22 TEMA : 90 - 10 & 80 - 20 Cu - Ni
43 29 TEMA : Copper
44 30 TEMA : Brass
45 29 TEMA : Aluminum Bronze
46 29 TEMA : Copper - Silicon
47 31 TEMA : Admiralty
48 37 TEMA : Zirconium
49 15 TEMA : Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu - Cb (Alloy
20Cb)
50 38 TEMA : Ni - Cr -Mo - Cb (Alloy 625)
51 39 TEMA : Tantalum
52 40 TEMA : Tantalum with 2.5% Tungsten
53 43 TEMA : 17 - 19 CR ( TP 439 )
54 44 TEMA : AL-6XN
55 47 TEMA : 2205 (S311803)
56 48 TEMA : 3RE60 (S31500)
57 41 TEMA : 7 MO (S32900)
58 42 TEMA : 7 MO PLUS (S32950)

TUBESHEETS 17-35
59 45 TEMA : AL 29-4-2
60 46 TEMA : SEA-CURE
61 16 TEMA : C-Si, C-1/2 Mo & Cr- 1/2Mo
62 16 TEMA : C-Mn-Si, 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo & 3 CR - 1Mo
63 17 TEMA : C-Mn-Si 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo & 3 CR - 1Mo
When PD:5500 is selected, then the material band is mapped to nearest TEMA number, which is then used
to look up the Young's modulus and the coefficient of thermal expansion. This is necessary since 5500
does not provide tables of thermal expansion versus temperature.
When a fixed tubesheet is analyzed, the program calculates the following information:
1 The minimum tubesheet thickness per RCB-7.131.

2 The values G, F, and ETA per RCB-7.132 and RCB-7.133
3 The equivalent differential expansion pressure per RCB-7.161
4 The equivalent bolting pressure per RCB-7.162
5 The effective shell side design pressure per RCB-7.163
6 The effective tube side design pressure per RCB-7.164
7 The required thickness per RCB-7.132 or RCB-7.133
8 The shell longitudinal stress per RCB-7.22
9 The tube longitudinal stress per RCB-7.23
10 The allowable tube compressive stress per RCB-7.24
11 The tube to tubesheet joint loads per RCB-7.25
If the tube or shell longitudinal stresses are being exceeded, it can be caused by the differential thermal
expansion between the tubes and the shell. For example, when a tube is under compressive stress and the
shell is under tensile stress, this indicates that the tube is trying to expand more than the shell. In this case
an expansion joint can be used to relieve this axial stress. You can either put a thin expansion joint by
checking the appropriate box (designed using the Thin Joint module) or a thick expansion joint (which
can be designed the Tubesheet module or the Thick Joint module).
Display of Results on Status Bar
As the user enters the data, program performs the calculation and displays the important results on the
status bar. Any error messages are also displayed. This allows a quick design of the tubesheet and makes it
easier to try various configurations to select the best one. Any failures are indicated in red. Here is a
sample:
Designing a Thick Expansion Joint in the Tubesheet Module:
After you input the thick expansion joint geometry in the Tubesheet module, the program uses the
following process to design the expansion joint:
1 Compute the expansion joint spring rate

2 Use the expansion joint spring rate in the fixed tubesheet calculations
3 Use the results of the tubesheet calculation, along with the prime pressures (P’s, P’t, Pd) to compute
the expansion joint stresses.
4 Run a corresponding expansion joint calculation for each tubesheet load case. The program displays
the results for the worst case. (Detailed results are also available).
The procedure followed when designing PD:5500 tubesheets is similar to the one shown here.
Example
18-1
C H A P T E R 1 8
Chapter 18: WRC 107\FEA
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................18-2
Example..............................................................................18-30
Introduction
This chapter discusses the WRC 107/FEA Module in PVElite. To begin, make sure that the current
analysis type is WRC 107/FEA. This can be determined when viewing the MAIN MENU. There is also an
interface for performing finite element analysis (FEA) of nozzle-shell junctions.
WRC 107 is a method for determining stresses on the shell of a vessel when a nozzle or some rectangular
attachment is being loaded. A typical case is to analyze the vessel stresses on a nozzle due to external
piping loads. These loads are obtained from a piping flexibility analysis. This type of stress analysis is
based on "Local Stresses in Spherical and Cylindrical Shells due to External Loadings," Welding Research
Council Bulletin 107, August 1965, and revision 1979, based on the prior work of P.P. Bijlaard.
There is also a stress summation capability. The program computes overall stress intensities on a
vessel/nozzle intersection in accordance with ASME Section VIII Division 2. Local vessel stress
calculations for sustained, expansion, and occasional loads along with pressure stresses are transformed
into code-defined stress components. The output, in the form of Pm, Pl, and Q and their appropriate
combinations, can be compared with Section VIII Div. 2 allowable values.
There are times when the applicability of the WRC bulletin 107 is in question or a particular design is out
of the scope of the bulletin. Examples include large nozzles, hillside nozzles, and lateral nozzles. In these
cases and others, FEA is the best way to get accurate results. The FEA interface in PVElite uses an
encapsulated finite element program (NozzlePro) available from Paulin Research Group
(www.paulin.com). To run the FEA, the user should purchase the NozzlePro program and install it. Then
from the TOOLS MENU, choose CONFIGURATION and click on MISCELLANEOUS and set the path to the
installation directory of NozzlePro. PVElite will automatically run it and present the results on the PVElite
screen.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields

Enter the Attachment Number for this Analysis
The attachment number should start out at 1 and continue by ones for each successive attachment to be
analyzed. These whole integer numbers will be reflected in the input echo generated by the program.
This number can be between up to 5 digits in length.
Enter the Attachment Description for this Analysis
The Description ID can be any combination of numbers and letters up to 15 characters. This label is for
user reference and should be meaningful for the analysis. In addition, note that the attachment description
will be reflected in the output and also in the display of errors (if any exist).
WRC 107\FEA 18-3
Merge
Use this option to bring in data from the Shells and Heads module. Just select the shell you want to
model this nozzle with, and all the appropriate data will be brought in from that shell.
Import Nozzle Data
Imports nozzle information from a PVElite input file (.pvi).
Choose the Analysis Type Between WRC 107 and FEA
To perform a Finite Element Analysis (FEA) on the nozzle-vessel junction, you must purchase NozzlePro
from the Paulin Research Group (www.paulin.com) and install it under the PVElite folder. User can also
install NozzlePro in any folder, but should enter its installation path in CodeCalc, from the TOOLS MENU,
choose CONFIGURATION and click on MISCELLANEOUS. Some additional input will be required for the
FEA run.
Select the Attachment Type
For WRC 107 analysis possible options are:
Typical Pipe Nozzle

Square Attachment ( lug type )
Rectangular Attachment ( lug type )
If the attachment in question is a pipe nozzle then select ‘Round’. WRC 107 also analyzes other load
bearing attachments such as square or rectangle. An example of a rectangular attachment is a vessel
support lug. Illustrations of these attachments can be seen in the WRC107 bulletin. At this time FEA can
only be performed on round attachments.
Hollow or Solid Attachment
This input is only required for performing a WRC 107 analysis.. One may note that round-hollow
attachments are converted to round-solid attachments for the cylinder to cylinder case. In addition,
rectangular attachments on spherical shells cannot be analyzed using this method. Also, round-hollow
attachments are analyzed on spherical vessels.
Enter the Type of Vessel Being Analyzed
The Welding Research Council Bulletin #107 recognizes two types of vessels in which the stress
intensities can be calculated. These are cylindrical and spherical vessels.
If users decide to perform a finite element analysis then the following vessel types are permitted:
Cylindrical
Spherical
Elliptical
Torispherical
Conical
Flat Head
Enter The Diameter Basis For The Vessel
If the vessel on which you are analyzing has dimensions specified based on the inside diameter, choose
ID. If the diameter basis is outside, choose OD. These are the only acceptable inputs for this cell.
Diameter of Vessel
Enter the diameter of the vessel in the units displayed. The diameter basis for the vessel is a user defined
value and appears above with the vessel wall thickness, diameter basis and corrosion allowance known,
PVElite will automatically determine the mean radius.
Enter The Vessel Wall Thickness
Enter the thickness of the vessel wall in this field. If, the vessel in question is pipe and a 12.5 % mill
tolerance is wished to be used then enter the actual thickness of the vessel wall times 0.875. PVElite does
not make any modification to this value unless a corrosion allowance is specified.
Enter The Corrosion Allowance of The Vessel
If a corrosion allowance is to be used then enter it in this field. The vessel wall thickness will be
decreased by this amount and the mean radius will be adjusted accordingly.
Material Name
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. Click the Material
Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected material. If you type the name in this
input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a matching name. Some typical material names
(standard ASME material):
WRC 107\FEA 18-5
Plates & Bolting

SA-516 55
SA-516 60
SA-516 65
SA-516 70
SA-193 B7
SA-182-F1
SA-182 F1
SA-182 F11
SA-182 F12
SA-182 F22
SA-105
SA-36
SA-106 B
Stainless Steels
SA-240 304
SA-240 304L
SA-240 316
SA-240 316L
SA-193 B8
Aluminum
SB-209
SB-234
Titanium
SB-265 1
Nickel
SB-409
SB-424
Enter the Attachment Type that is Being Analyzed
If the attachment in question is a pipe nozzle then select round. WRC 107 also analyzes other load
bearing attachments such as square or rectangle. An example of a rectangular attachment is a vessel
support lug. Illustrations of these attachments can be seen in the WRC107 bulletin.
Input Vessel Fatigue Curve
Select the fatigue curve based on the type of material. Fatigue curves are listed in ASME Section VIII,
Division 2, Appendix 5. Possible entries are:
S. Number Material
1 Low Carbon Steels, UTS <130 ksi
2 Low Alloy Steels to 700 degree F
3 Martensitic Stainless Steels to 700 degree F
4 Austenitic Stainless Steels to 700 degree F
5 Wrought 70 Copper, 30 Nickel.
6 Nickel-Chromium-Moly-Iron Alloys up to 800 degree F
Input Loads in WRC 107 Convention
Check this field if you would like to input the forces and moments in the traditional WRC107 convention.
Leave this field unchecked if you would like to input loads in Global Coordinates and perform the stress
summation. The program will NOT perform the Div. 2 stress summation and S.I. check if this field is
checked. This option is only available when running a WRC 107 calculation.
Input Loads in Global Coordinates and Allowable Stresses
Check this field if you would like to input loads in Global Coordinates and input cold/hot Div. II
allowable stresses. The program will perform Stress Summation and check against S.I. allowables if at
Sustained (unrelenting) loadings are known. If you are performing FEA the program will ask for
additional information.
Input Sustained (SUS) Loadings
Check this field if you would like to input Sustained loads in Global Coordinates. The Stress summation
will be performed and the stress intensities will be checked based on the different load cases.
Input Expansion (EXP) Loadings/ Input Operating (OPE) Loadings
This inputs operation depends on if the user is performing a WRC 107 analysis or FEA (finite element
analysis). For a WRC 107 run, check this field if you would like to input EXPansion loads in Global
Coordinates. In that case, total Stress summation will be performed and the overall stress intensities will
be checked for each loading cases.
For a FEA run, check this field if you would like to input OPErating loads in Global Coordinates.
Note: For graphics plot of EXPansion loads — temporarily set sustained and occasional to not checked.
WRC 107\FEA 18-7
Input Occasional (OCC) Loadings
Check this field if you would like to input Occasional loads in Global Coordinates. For WRC 107, the
Stress summation will be performed and the stress intensities will be checked based on loading cases.
Note: For graphics plot of OCCasional loads — temporarily set sustained and expansion to not checked.
Pop-Up Input Fields

Enter the Diameter Basis for the Nozzle
If the junction that is being analyzed is a nozzle, enter the diameter basis here. Select the nozzle's diameter
basis from the pull-down menu.
Nozzle Wall Thickness
Enter the nozzle wall thickness. WRC 107 will use this thickness when the hollow attachment is used. If
the standard 12.5% mill tolerance is to be deducted, simply multiply the standard wall thickness by 0.875
directly on the spreadsheet.
Nozzle Diameter
Enter the nozzle diameter. Both the nozzle diameter and thickness must be specified. The nozzle diameter
should be entered in accordance with the nozzle diameter basis. The units are displayed above.
Enter the corrosion allowance for the nozzle.
Material Name
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the Material Database. Click the
Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected material. If you type the name in
this input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a matching name. Some typical material names
(standard ASME material name):
Plates & Bolting

SA-516 55
SA-516 60
SA-516 65
SA-516 70
SA-193 B7
SA-182-F1
SA-182 F1
SA-182 F11
SA-182 F12
SA-182 F22
SA-105
SA-36
SA-106 B
Stainless Steels
SA-240 304
SA-240 304L
SA-240 316
SA-240 316L
SA-193 B8
Aluminum
SB-209
SB-234
Titanium
SB-265 1
Nickel
SB-409
SB-424
Reinforcement
Select the type of reinforcement (if present) from the list. Selecting a reinforcement type causes a pop-up
window to appear for prompts concerning reinforcing pad or hub dimensions.
In a finite element analysis attachments can have a reinforcement pad or hub type self-reinforcement.
Results are available for the some critical locations such as the nozzle-shell junction and the edge of the
pad.
WRC 107\FEA 18-9
While in WRC 107 analysis (due to the limitations of the bulletin) only the reinforcement pad can be
considered. When the reinforcing pad dimensions are included the program performs two analyses for this
situation. The first analysis uses the nozzle OD and the vessel wall thickness plus the reinforcing pad
thickness. The second analysis takes the pad into account by making the nozzle OD equal to the
reinforcing pad diameter and assuming a solid attachment.
Parameter C11 (Full Length of Attachment)
Attachments other than nozzles can be analyzed using the WRC 107 method. The dimension C11 is the
FULL length of the attachment in the circumferential direction. Most often these types of attachments are
lifting lugs or vessel support lugs.
Parameter C22 (Full Length of Attachment)
The parameter C22 is the FULL length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction.
Pad Diameter
Enter the diameter of the reinforcing pad along the surface of the vessel. This information will be used to
calculate the stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad using a solid attachment model. The reinforcement
pad is explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. If external corrosion is to be considered, enter the corroded pad
thickness. In WRC 107, when a pad is used the combined vessel+pad thickness is used for the stress
computation at the edge of the nozzle. The corroded vessel thickness is used for the stress computation at
the edge of the pad. The reinforcement pad is explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
Enter Pad Parameter C11(Full Length)
With square/rectangle attachment, enter the FULL length of the PAD in the circumferential direction. The
definition of C1 in WRC 107 is the half length of the attachment in the circumferential direction. The
change was made for user convenience.
Enter Pad Parameter C22 (Full Length)
With square/rectangle attachment, enter the FULL length of the PAD in the longitudinal direction. The
definition of C1 in WRC 107 is the half length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction. The change
was made for user convenience.
Hub Thickness/Hub Height/Bevel Height
Enter the appropriate dimension based on the diagram below.

Figure A - Hub Nozzle Dimensions
Insert or Abutting Nozzle?
If the nozzle is welded to the outside of the vessel wall, it is abutting the vessel wall. If the hole in the
vessel is bigger than the nozzle OD and the nozzle is welded into the hole, it is inserted.
Enter the projection of the nozzle from the vessel wall to the nozzle flange.
Enter the projection of the nozzle into the vessel, measured along the centerline of the nozzle.
Thickness of Nozzle Insert (if Different)
Enter the thickness of the internally projected part of the nozzle, if it is different from the nozzle
thickness.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet between Nozzle and Shell / Pad
It is an optional field. Enter the fillet leg size.
Input Nozzle Fatigue Curve
Select the fatigue curve based on the type of material. Fatigue curves are listed in ASME Section VIII,
Division 2, Appendix 5. Possible entries are. This input is only required if you performing fatigue analysis
using the FEA option.
S. Number Material
1 Low Carbon Steels, UTS <130 ksi
2 Low Alloy Steels to 700 degree F
3 Martensitic Stainless Steels to 700 degree F

WRC 107\FEA 18-11
S. Number Material
4 Austenitic Stainless Steels to 700 degree F
5 Wrought 70 Copper, 30 Nickel.
6 Nickel-Chromium-Moly-Iron Alloys up to 800 degree F
Enter the total length of the cylinder or a conical geometry.
Attached Shell Length
This is an optional entry. Enter the length of the shell attached to the head. Set this value based on the
proximity of the nozzle to the edge of the head, and of the concern for any discontinuity stress in this area.
Attached Shell Thickness
This is an optional entry. Enter the thickness of the shell attached to the head. Set this value based on the
proximity of the nozzle to the edge of the head, and of the concern for any discontinuity stress in this area.
If left blank this entry defaults to the thickness of the head.
Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads
Length of Straight Flange
Enter the length of straight flange portion for Conical or Torispherical heads.
Inside Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads
The crown radius for a torispherical head is referred to as the dimension L, per ASME Section VIII Div. 1.
This dimension is usually referred to as "DR" in many head catalogues. Even though the head catalogues
list these heads as being "OD" heads, the crown radius is given on the inside diameter basis. Note the
illustrated picture in the catalogue and where the arrows for "DR" and "IKR" point ( to the inside of the
head).
For more information see Appendix 1-4 in the Code
Inside Knuckle Radius for Torispherical Heads
This dimension is r, per ASME Section VIII Div. 1. This dimension is usually referred to as "IKR" in
many head catalogues. Even though the head catalogues list these heads as being "OD" heads, the knuckle
radius is given on the inside diameter basis. Note the illustrated picture in the catalogue and where the
arrows for "DR" and "IKR" point ( to the inside of the head).
For more information see Appendix 1-4 in the Code
Small End Diameter
Enter the small end diameter for the cone.
Is There a Knuckle?
Check here if this cone has a knuckle.
Knuckle Radius at Small End
Enter the knuckle radius of the small end. Direction of a conical head or shell is from the large end to the
small end. So, the positive vertical direction is when the large end of the cone is the bottom end and the
small end of the cone is the top end.
Knuckle Radius at Large End
Enter the Knuckle radius of the large end. Direction of a conical head or shell is from the large end to the
small end. So, the large end of the cone is the bottom end and the small end of the cone is the top end.
Design Pressure (for input with WRC107 convention)
Enter the design pressure of the vessel in this field using the units above. The pressure stress equation is of
the following form:
Longitudinal Stress = Pressure * ri2 / ( ro2 - ri2 )

Hoop Stress = 2 * Longitudinal Stress.
For the spherical case the membrane stress due to internal pressure uses the Lame type equation to
compute the stress at both the upper and lower surfaces of the vessel at the edge of the attachment.
Radial Load
Enter the value for the load which is trying to push or pull the nozzle in/out of the vessel. Positive loads
try to "push" the nozzle while negative loads try to "pull" the nozzle. The program does not account for
the effect of pressure thrust. However, if you enter the Global Coordinates (Stress Summation), the
program will consider pressure thrust if the user indicates so.
Circumferential Shear Load
Enter the circumferential shear load VC from B to A in the units above. If the vessel is spherical then enter
the shear load V2 from D to C. The sign convention should be in accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
WRC 107\FEA 18-13
Longitudinal Shear Load
Enter the longitudinal shear load VL from D to C in the units above. If the vessel is spherical then enter
the shear load V1 from B to A. The sign convention should be in accordance with the WRC 107 bulletin.
Circumferential Moment
Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1 in the units displayed above. The sign convention should be
in accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Longitudinal Moment
Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2 in the units displayed above. The sign convention should be in
accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Torsional Moment
Enter the torsional moment in the units displayed above. The sign convention should be in accordance
with the WRC107 bulletin.
Note: See Figure D for the WRC 107 load convention.
Compute Maximum Radial Force/Compute Maximum Circumferential Moment/Compute

Maximum Longitudinal Moment
Often times a vessel designer would like to determine the maximum force or moment on an attachment
while keeping the other 5 constant. By checking to one of these fields PVElite will iterate and determine
the maximum force or moment to produce a desired stress intensity. If your geometry includes a
reinforcing pad, PVElite will perform the same type analysis at the edge of the reinforcing pad. The above
loads produce the highest local bending loads and will usually govern the design. This is why the shear
loads and torsional moment are not options.
Compare Maximum Stress Intensity to
This entry should be a stress value between 1.5 - 3 times the hot allowable stress for the vessel material as
taken from Section II Part D of the ASME Code. The allowable used depends upon the type of loads. For
example if the load is of sustained type (pressure, weight) then the allowable should be 1.5*hot allowable
stress or if the loads are from thermal expansion then the allowable should be 3.0*hot allowable stress.
PVElite will use this number to compare computed stress intensities if one of the Compute Maximum
fields was checked. Note that in the results PVElite performs the analysis using the input values. After
that has been completed, PVElite will then iterate for the maximum force or moment as it has been
instructed to.
Vessel/Nozzle Centerline Direction Cosines
Enter the vessel/nozzle centerline direction cosine. The direction of nozzle is positive when pointing
inwards into the vessel.
For finite element analysis these direction cosines are used to determine the angle between the nozzle and
the vessel. Also note that the direction for a conical vessel is from the big end to small end.
For WRC 107 analysis, the centerlines of the vessel and nozzle are required to be perpendicular to each
other. The direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle centerline must NOT be collinear. If they are, as
in the case of a nozzle in head, the vessel direction vector shall be changed so that it is perpendicular to
the nozzle centerline. A typical input for a nozzle on the side of a vertical vessel would be:
Vessel Direction Vector (0.0, -1.0, 0.0)

Nozzle Direction Vector (1.0, 0.0, 0.0)
The program uses these direction vectors to transfer the global forces and moments from a piping program
such as CAESAR II (from each load case) into the somewhat confusing WRC 107 sign/load convention.
Note: The sign of the vessel centerline direction vector can be +positive or -negative follows the location
of data point (A->D) convention defined by WRC 107, e.g. for a vertical vessel, if point A is at the bottom
of the nozzle, then the Y direction cosine of the vessel will be -1.0. Remember points A and B are always
lie along the direction of the vessel. The nozzle direction vector is defined as a vector pointing from the
nozzle connection to the centerline of the vessel. Cold Stress Intensity Allowable (Smc)
Override Angle Between Nozzle and Vessel?
The program computes the angle between the vessel and the nozzle by taking the dot product between
their direction cosines. Click here to override that computed value of angle. This value is used only for
FEA.
Nozzle Orientation Reference Vector
The nozzle orientation reference vector defines the reference axis from where the orientation of the nozzle
can be measured by the nozzle orientation angle. For example, if nozzle orientation reference axis is along
x-axis and nozzle orientation angle is zero then the nozzle is located along the x-axis as seen in figure
below.
WRC 107\FEA 18-15
Figure B - Nozzle Orientation Angle from the Reference Vector
Nozzle Orientation Angle from the Reference Vector
This is the angle that describes the nozzle position around the circumference of the vessel from the
orientation reference vector. The reference orientation vector should be entered above on this dialog. For
example, if the nozzle orientation reference axis is along the x-axis and the nozzle orientation angle is zero
then the nozzle is located along the x-axis as seen in the previous figure.
Nozzle Offset from the Vessel Centerline
Enter the offset distance from the Shell/Head Centerline to the Nozzle Centerline.
Nozzle Distance from Top End of the Vessel
Enter the distance from the positive end of the vessel to the point where the nozzle or branch centerline
intersects the vessel centerline.
Global Forces/Moments (SUS, EXP, OCC)
Enter the value of nozzle forces or Moments from the restraint summary of the CAESAR II output and/or
other calculations. Three loading sets may be included in these calculations. For WRC 107, enter the loads
according to each category shown on the screen, where
SUS Primary Loads (typically Weight+Pressure+Forces)
EXP Secondary Loads (Thermal Expansion)
OCC Occasional Loads (typically Wind, Seismic)

For FEA, enter the loads according to each category shown on the screen, where
SUS Primary Loads (typically Weight+Pressure+Forces)
OPE Operating Loads (typically

Weight+Disp+Temp+Pressure+Forces)
OCC Occasional Loads (typically Wind, Seismic)
Internal Pressure (P)
Enter the system design pressure. It shall always be a positive (or 0) entry. The pressure thrust force P*A
will be added to the value of the nozzle radial load UNLESS the user deactivates and disables the
following field. This value is used only if the user is performing WRC 107 analysis.
Include Pressure Thrust Force
Check this box if you wish to include the pressure thrust force as part of the radial load. This value is used
only if the user is performing WRC 107 analysis.
Internal Pressure (Pvar)
Enter the DIFFERENCE between the peak pressure of the system and the system design pressure. It shall
always be a positive (or 0) entry. The additional thrust load due to this pressure difference will also be
accounted for in the nozzle radial loading UNLESS a response of N to Include Pressure Thrust was
entered above.
This entry will be superimposed onto the system design pressure to evaluate the primary membrane stress
due to occasional loads. This value is used only if the user is performing WRC 107 analysis.
Additional Input for WRC 107

WRC 107 Version
There are 3 options available here. The first option is the original August 1965 version of this industry
standard. The second option is the March 1979 and option 3 is the March 1979 use B1 and B2. In 1979 the
Welding Research Council noted that if certain curves were flipped, the computed stress results matched
theoretical results more closely. In that same year an adjustment was made to allow this stress
computation method to compute a maximum stress that did not lie on the stress points A, B, C or D. This
is referred to as computation of the off-angle maximums. Thus, we can infer the third option is probably
the most accurate.
Use Interactive Control
In many instances, the geometric parameter Beta which is computed for cylindrical shell geometry's,
exceeds the parameter Gamma for certain WRC107 curves. When this occurs PVElite will pause and
display a message "Beta too Big" or "Beta too Small". If the response to Use Interactive Control is "No"
then PVElite will use the last point on the curve that is available. If the response to Interactive Control is
WRC 107\FEA 18-17
"Yes" PVElite an optional input will pause and ask you to enter what you believe the value of the stress
parameter should be. This will involve having the WRC107 bulletin with all of the curves available.
Include WRC 107 SIF (Kn, Kb)
Check this field to include the WRC 107 Stress Concentrations (Kn & Kb). The program will estimate and
use the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb per Appendix B of the WRC-107 Bulletin.
For normal analysis, do not check this field. And DO NOT check the next field Pressure Stress Indices
Per Div. 2. They should be checked when fatigue analysis is required. You may check ASME VIII Div.2
AD-160 to see if you need to consider fatigue effect. Please note that the program currently DOES NOT
perform the fatigue analysis per Div.2 Appendix 4 & 5 rules. The program simply multiplies the stresses
by the factors and/or indices to compute the peak stresses. These peak stresses can then be manually used
to perform fatigue evaluation.
For more information on fatigue analysis see "WRC-107 Elastic Analysis v/s Fatigue Analysis". You can
access this information in the June 2000 edition of the COADE Mechanical Engineering News (pages 24-28)
or via our Website www.coade.com/newsletters/jun00.pdf.
Fillet Radius Between Vessel & Nozzle (r)
Enter the fillet radius between the nozzle and the vessel shell. The program will use this value to calculate
the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb per Appendix B of the WRC-107 Bulletin.
Entering 0 here will set Kn and KB = 1.0.
If you have a re-pad, the same Kn and Kb will be used for the vessel and pad intersection.
Include Pressure Stress Indices
Check this field to include the stress indices described in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2, primarily to account for
the stress intensification at vessel-nozzle junction under internal pressure. They are used to compute peak
stresses which are needed to perform fatigue analysis. The stress indices can be found in the Table AD-
560.7 of the Code.
Compute WRC-368 Pressure Stress per WRC
Check this box to compute pressure, stresses in the shell and nozzle per WRC-368. WRC-368 provides a
method for calculating the stresses in cylinder to cylinder intersections (such as cylinder to nozzle
junction), due to the internal pressure and radial thrust loadings.
Note: Using WRC-368 along with WRC 107/297 is not accurate when calculating the combined stress
from pressure and external loads.
For more information on WRC-368 pressure thrust see "Modeling of Internal Pressure and Thrust Loads
on Nozzles Using WRC-368". You can access this information in the July 2001 edition of the COADE
Mechanical Engineering News (pages 9-13) or via our Website www.coade.com/newsletters/jul01.pdf.
Additional Input for FEA

Specify File Name for FEA
Enter the file name that will form the prefix for the FEA analysis files. Filenames can be any
alphanumeric combination up to 7 characters in length without quotes and spaces. For example, noz and
b012.
Specify FEA Mesh Density
Select the type of mesh: Fine or Crude. When the user selects a fine mesh they will be prompted to specify
the mesh density multiplier. A higher mesh density value produces a finer finite element mesh. Which
produces more accurate results but takes more time to solve. Typical values are between 1-2.
The CRUDE MESH option along with the PREVIEW THE FINITE ELEMENT MESH option can be used to
check the initial mesh.
Specify S.C.F. for Vessel
This is an optional input. This is the Notch Effect Multiplication factor for computing the peak stresses.
They are defined in the ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Appendix 4. A typical value is 1.35.
They will only affect the fatigue failure stress case.
Specify S.C.F. for Nozzle
This is an optional input. This is the Notch Effect Multiplication factor for computing the peak stresses.
They are defined in the ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Appendix 4. A typical value is 1.35.
They will only affect the fatigue failure stress case.
Number of Operating Cycles
This is an optional input. Used only to select the allowable fatigue stress from S-N curves. It defaults to
7000 cycles if not specified or if 0.
Number of Occasional Cycles
This is an optional input. If zero then the occasional load is treated like a static load. If non-zero then it
will be assumed that occasional load input is the "range" of occasional loads, and a fatigue analysis of
occasional loads will be performed.
WRC 107\FEA 18-19
FEA Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure for the vessel and the nozzle. When performing a finite element analysis, the
internal pressure is positive and the external pressure is negative. WRC 107 can only analyze internal
pressure.
FEA Design Temperature
Enter the operating temperature for the vessel. This value is used to compute the hot allowable stress for
the vessel and the nozzle.
Do Not Cut Hole in Header for Branch?
Check this box if there is no opening in the vessel due to the nozzle. For example, in case of a support
trunnion there will not be an opening whereas an injector pipe will have one.
Consider Thermal Strains?
Check this box if the nozzle and vessel are at different temperatures or, if there is a through the wall
temperature gradient. Most analysis of single nozzles in pressure vessels "do not" require the analysis of
thermal strains.
Vessel Inside Temperature, Vessel Outside Temperature, Nozzle Inside Temperature and
Nozzle Outside Temperature
Enter the inside and outside surface temperatures for the nozzle and the vessel, used for computing the
thermal expansion.
Run Analysis in Silent Mode?
Check this box to run in silent mode. In silent mode, when the program is running, the status windows
from NozzlePro will not be visible. In some cases these windows provide additional information about
possible errors.
Preview the Finite Element Mesh?
Check this box to preview the finite element mesh for this problem. Then on running the analysis the finite
element mesh will be shown.
WRC 107 Stress Calculations
The program computes stress intensities in accordance with WRC 107 and includes the effects of
longitudinal and hoop stresses due to internal pressure. If the geometry includes a circular reinforcing pad,
PVElite will perform two analyses on the geometry. The first analysis will compute the stresses at the edge
of the nozzle. The second stress analysis will be at the edge of the reinforcing pad.
PVElite uses the Lamé equation to determine the exact hoop stress at the upper and lower surface of the
cylinder around the edge of the attachment. The hoop stress equations, as well as the longitudinal stress
equation are as follows:
For spherical shells the program uses the following equation:
For each run performed a table of dimensionless stress factors for each loading will be displayed for
review. Any table figure followed by an exclamation point (!) means that the curve figure for that loading
has been exceeded.
Why are the stresses at Edge of the Pad the same as at the Edge of the Nozzle?
Since the stress is a direct product of the stress factor, the stresses computed at the edge of the pad may be
same as those at the edge of the nozzle if the curve parameter for that type of stress has been exceeded.
What are the Allowable Stresses?
The stress intensities computed should typically be between 1.5 and 3.0 times the hot allowable stress for
the vessel material at operating temperature. If the results are less than 1.5 Sa then the configuration and
loading are acceptable. If the load is self-relieving, that is if it would relax or disappear after only a small
rotation or translation of the attachment, the allowable stress intensity would increase to 3.0 Sa. Since
many geometries do not fall within the acceptable range of WRC107, it may be necessary to use a more
sophisticated tool to solve the problems where the diameter of the vessel is very large in comparison with
the nozzle or where the thickness of the vessel or nozzle is small. An example of a more sophisticated tool
would be a FEA (finite element analysis) program.
WRC 107\FEA 18-21
Figure C - WRC 107 Module Geometry Diagram
Spherical Shells Cylindrical Shells
To Define WRC Axes: To Define WRC Axes:

1. P-axis: Along the Nozzle centerline and 1. P-axis: Along the Nozzle centerline and
positive entering the vessel. positive entering the vessel.
2. M1-axis: Perpendicular to the nozzle 2 . MC-axis: Along the vessel centerline and
centerline along convenient global axis. positive to correspond with any parallel global
axis.
3. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis into the M1
axis and the result is the M2-axis. 3. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with the MC axis
and the result is the ML-axis.
To Define WRC Stress Points:
To Define WRC Stress Points:
u—upper, means stress on outside of vessel
u—upper, means stress on outside of wall at junction.
vessel wall at junction.
l—lower, means stress on inside of vessel at
l—lower, means stress on inside of vessel junction.
at junction.
A—Position on vessel at junction, along
A—Position on vessel at junction, along negative MC axis.
negative M1 axis.
B—Position on vessel at junction, along
B—Position on vessel at junction, along positive MC axis.
positive M2 axis.
C—Position on vessel at junction, along
C—Position on vessel at junction, along positive ML axis.
positive M2 axis.
D—Position on vessel at junction, along
D—Position on vessel at junction, along negative ML axis.
negative M2 axis.
Note: Shear axis "VC" is parallel, and in the
same direction as the bending axis "ML."
Shear axis "VL" is parallel, and in the opposite
direction as the bending axis "MC."
Figure D - WRC 107 Axis Convention
WRC107 Stress Summations
The ASME Section VIII, Division 2 code provides for a fairly elaborate procedure to analyze the local
stresses in vessels and nozzles (Appendix 4-1 "Mandatory Design Based On Stress Analysis"). Only the
elastic analysis approach will be discussed here. You should always refer to the applicable code if any of
the limits described in this section are approached, or if any unusual material, weld, or stress situation
exists, or there are non-linear concerns such as the material's operation in the creep range.
The first step in the procedure is to determine if the elastic approach is satisfactory. Section AD-160
contains the exact method and basically states that if all of the following conditions are met, then fatigue
analysis need not be done:
a The expected design number of full-range pressure cycles does not exceed the number of allowed
cycles corresponding to an Sa value of 3Sm (4Sm for non-integral attachments) on the material
fatigue curve. The Sm is the allowable stress intensity for the material at the operating
temperature.
b The expected design range of pressure cycles other than startup or shutdown must be less than 1/3 (1/4
for non-integral attachments) the design pressure times (Sa/Sm), where Sa is the value obtained on
the material fatigue curve for the specified number of significant pressure fluctuations.
c The vessel does not experience localized high stress due to heating.
d The full range of stress intensities due to mechanical loads (including piping reactions) does not
exceed Sa from the fatigue curve for the expected number of load fluctuations.
Once the user has decided that an elastic analysis will be satisfactory, either a simplified or a
comprehensive approach may be taken to the vessel stress evaluation. Both methods will be described in
detail below, after a discussion of the Section VIII Div. 2 Requirements.
WRC 107\FEA 18-23
ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of Nozzle
Ideally in order to address the local allowable stress problem, the user should have the endurance curve for
the material of construction and complete design pressure/temperature loading information. If any of the
elastic limits are approached, or if there is anything out of the ordinary about the nozzle/vessel connection
design, the code should be carefully consulted before performing the local stress analysis. The material
Sm table and the endurance curve for carbon steels are given in this section for illustration. Only values
taken directly from the code should be used in design.
There are essentially three criteria that must be satisfied before the stresses in the vessel wall due to nozzle
loads can be considered within the allowables. These three criteria can be summarized as:
Pm < kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary membrane
stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane plus
bending), respectively; and K, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot material
allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (Smh + Smc) / 2.
Due to the stress classification defined by Section VIII, Division 2 in the vicinity of nozzles, as given in
the Table 4-120.1, the bending stress terms caused by any external load moments or internal pressure in
the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, should be classified as Q, or the secondary stresses,
regardless of whether they were caused by sustained or expansion loads. This causes Pb to disappear, and
leads to a much more detailed classification:
Pm - General primary membrane stress (primarily due to internal pressure);
Pl - Local primary membrane stress, which may include:
Membrane stress due to internal pressure;

Local membrane stress due to applied sustained forces and moments.
Q - Secondary stresses, which may include:
Bending stress due to internal pressure;

Bending stress due to applied sustained forces and moments;
Membrane stress due to applied expansion forces;
Bending stress due to applied expansion forces and moments
Membrane tress due to applied expansion moments
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contain three parts: two stress components in
normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these stresses, the following rules apply:
1 Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, i.e. Pm, Pl, and Q.
2 Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh.
3 Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm and Pl; compute the resultant stress
intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh.
4 Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute the resultant
stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg.
5 If there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types may be repeated using a k value
of 1.2.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII, Division 2
and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, Pb, is not applicable to the shell stress
evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division 2 requirements. Under the same
analogy, the peak stress limit may also be written as:
Pl + Pb + Q + F < Sa
The above equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met based on the
statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
"If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for cyclic
operation is required and it may be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135 has been
satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design, fabrication, testing and
inspection of this division."
Example Fatigue Curve (For Values of Sa)
Figure E - Fatigue Curve

WRC 107\FEA 18-25
The equations used in PVElite to qualify the various stress components can be summarized as follows:
Pm(SUS) < Smh

Pm(SUS + OCC) < 1.2Smh
Pm(SUS) + Pl(SUS) < 1.5Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) < 1.5(1.2)Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(Smc + Smh)
If some of the conditions of in ASME VIII Div.2, AD-160 are not satisfied, you probably need to perform
the formal fatigue analysis. Peak stresses are required to be calculated or estimated. You may consider
using AD-560 "Alternative Rules for Nozzle Design" instead of Article 4-6 "Stresses in Openings for
Fatigue Evaluation" to calculate the peak pressure stress for the opening. If all conditions of AD-560.1
through AD-560.6 are satisfied, the stress indices given in Table AD-560.7 may be used. If user clicked
the corresponding box, the program will use these pressure stress indices to modify the primary stress due
to internal pressure (hoop and longitudinal stresses). For external loads, the highest peak stress are usually
localized in fillets and transitions. If the user decides to use WRC107 stress concentration factors (Kn,
Kb), the fillet radius between the Vessel and Nozzle is required. (If a reinforcing pad is used, the program
assumes the same pad fillet radius.) The program will make a crude approximation and use WRC107
Appendix-B equations (3) and (4) to estimate Kn and Kb. The tension and bending stresses are thus
modified using Kn and Kb respectively. The program outputs the local stresses for 4 pairs of points (upper
and lower) at the intersection. The user should not direct the program to perform the stress summations.
Instead the user should determine which stresses should be added based on locations in order to obtain the
peak stress level, then use Appendix-4 & 5 rules and fatigue curves depending on operation cycles. Based
on comparisons with finite element analysis, it is known that the top tip of the fillet weld on the nozzle
usually experiences the highest peak stress due to external loads. So it is conservative to add all the peak
stresses after including both pressure stress indices and concentration factors. Note that the stress
summation may ONLY be used to check stress intensities, not stress levels. You need the peak stress
level to perform fatigue analysis. The current stress summation routine does not compare stress level with
fatigue allowables per Appendix-5. However, you may find the stress summation results useful to
compare the combined effect due to the stress concentration factor and pressure stress indices.
For more information on fatigue analysis see "WRC-107 Elastic Analysis v/s Fatigue Analysis". You can
access this information in the June 2000 edition of the COADE Mechanical Engineering News (pages 24-28)
or via our Website www.coade.com/newsletters/jun00.pdf.
Finite Element Analysis (FEA):
Using the interface within PVElite and Paulin Research Group's NozzlePro program, you can perform FEA
and WRC 107 within the same module. FEA can model more types of vessel and nozzle geometries.
This modules causes the ASME Section VIII Div. 1 allowable stress values, which may be conservative in
some cases. Users can modify to Div. 2 values if they want to.
FEA generates graphical results showing various ASME stress states. The important results and a sample
printout display below
The ASME overstressed areas are reported.
ASME Overstressed Areas

Pad Edge Weld for Nozzle 1
Pl 1.5(k)Smh Primary Membrane Load Case 2
20,116 18,000 Plot Reference:
psi psi 1) Pl < 1.5(k)Smh (SUS,Membrane) Case 2
111%
1 The next report, the Highest Primary Stress Report, outlines the stresses at critical location like the
nozzle-shell junction and the edge of the pad.
2 The Highest Secondary and fatigue Stress Reports are also provided.
3 Next, the program lists Nozzle Stress Intensification factors for use in a beam type pipe stress analysis
program such as CAESAR II.
4 Then NozzlePro computes the maximum individual allowable loads and simultaneously acting
allowable loads. Both Primary and Secondary loads are reported.
SECONDARY Load Maximum Conservative Realistic

Individual Simultaneous Simultaneous
Occurring Occurring Occurring
Type (Range):
Axial Force (lb.) 398030. 120631. 180946.
Inplane Moment (in. lb.) 5306513. 1137199. 2412363.
Outplane Moment (in. lb.) 3358105. 719650. 1526608.
Torsional Moment (in. lb.) 2343568. 710264. 1065396.
Pressure (psi) 344. 111. 111.
PRIMARY Load Maximum Conservative Realistic

Type (Range):
Axial Force (lb.) 618455. 178300. 267450.
Inplane Moment (in. lb.) 5998639. 1222872. 2594104.
Outplane Moment (in. lb.) 5458219. 1182725. 2508939.

WRC 107\FEA 18-27
PRIMARY Load Maximum Conservative Realistic

Type (Range):
Torsional Moment (in. lb.) 2938301. 847110. 1270665.
Pressure (psi) 422. 111. 111.
The conservative simultaneous loads will produce stresses that are approximately 60-to-70% of the
allowable. The Realistic Allowable Simultaneous loads are the maximum loads that can be applied
simultaneously, they produce stresses that are closer to 100% of the allowable. The Maximum Individual
Occurring Primary Pressure can be taken as a finite element calculation of the MAWP for the nozzle.
Nozzle-Shell junction flexibilities are also available. These flexibilities can be used to accurately model
the flexibility of the junction and can be included in the pipe stress program that is used to model the
piping system attaching to the nozzle.
Thus, users will have a choice of performing either an WRC 107 or a finite element analysis from within
the same module, without redundant input. As with any finite element program users should visually
check the finite element mesh for errors and make sure the FEA results make sense from stress analysis
perspective.
Technical queries regarding FEA results should be addressed to Paulin Research Group
(www.paulin.com).
Example
Examples illustrating these principles are located in the PVElite\Examples directory.

Figure F - Vessel and Nozzle direction cosines
After confirming that the geometry guidelines per WRC 107 are met, the actual preparation of the WRC
107 calculation input can now begin. One of the most important steps in the WRC 107 procedure is to
identify the correlation between the stress output global coordinates and the WRC 107 local axes. PVElite
performs this conversion automatically. The user will, however, have to identify the vectors defining the
vessel as well as the nozzle centerline. The following figure is provided to illustrate the definition of the
direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle.
WRC 107\FEA 18-29
Figure G - Converting Forces/Moments in CAESAR II Global Coordinates to WRC 107 Local Axes
Notice that in order to define a vessel direction vector, the user first needs to designate the output data
points (A->D) as defined by the WRC 107 Bulletin. Note that the line between data points B and A
defines the vessel centerline (except for nozzles on heads, where the vessel centerline will have to be
defined along a direction which is perpendicular to that of the nozzle). Since, in the vessel/nozzle
configuration shown, point A is assigned to the bottom of the nozzle, the vessel direction vector can be
written as (0.0, -1.0, 0.0), while the nozzle direction vector is (1.0, 0.0, 0.0). The nozzle direction vector is
always defined as the vector pointing from the vessel nozzle connection to the centerline of vessel.
For different load cases (SUS, EXP, OCC), the restraint loads (forces and moments) can be obtained from
typical piping stress analysis program like CAESAR II. These loads reflect the action of the piping on the
vessel. The following data would then be entered into the WRC 107 program. Note that if you choose to
enter the loads in the Global convention, the program will supply a pass/fail status at the end of the report.
Summary of Restraint Loads on the Vessel
Load X lb Y lb Z lb MX ft. MY ft. lb MZ ft. lb

lb
Sustained -26 -1389 32 -65 127 4235
Expansion 8573 23715 -5866 31659 -5414 -525

WRC 107 Local Components
Load Force Force Force Moment Moment Moment

P(+X) VL(-Y) VC(+Z) T(-X) MC (+Y) ML(+Z)
Sustained -26 -1389 32 -65 127 4235
Expansion 8573 23715 -5866 31659 -5414 -52583
Example
19-1
C H A P T E R 1 9
Chapter 19: LEGS and LUGS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................19-2
Vessel Leg Input.................................................................19-8
Leg Results.........................................................................19-10
Support Lug Input ..............................................................19-10
Lifting Lug Input................................................................19-13
Output.................................................................................19-16
Baseplate Input...................................................................19-17
Baseplate Results................................................................19-20
Trunnion Input....................................................................19-20
Trunnion Results ................................................................19-24
Example..............................................................................19-24
Introduction
This chapter discusses the LEG & LUG module. To use the LEG & LUG module click on the LEG &
LUG icon on the toolbar or select it from the analysis menu. The basic capabilities of the LEG & LUG
module are to analyze structural members (legs), support lugs and lifting lugs. The basic required
information for each of these analysis types is shown below.
Vessel design internal pressure

Design temperature for the attachment
Vessel outside diameter
Weight of vessel operating and dry
Vessel dimensions
Additional horizontal force on vessel
Location of horizontal force above grade
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
The design temperature for the attachment is used to compute the material properties for attachment being
analyzed. In most cases the actual attachment temperature will be different from the vessel design
temperature. The controlling stress for support lug and vessel leg calculations is the yield stress. The
material yield stress can be looked up in the tables in ASME Section II Part D.
The weight of the vessel should be the weight of the vessel while it is operating. This should include
operating fluid, trays, insulation etc. Support lug calculations should use the same loading conditions.
However since vessels are typically lifted "dry" the empty weight of the vessel should be used when
performing lifting lug calculations. There is a separate field for lifting weight of the vessel.
Item Number
Enter the a positive integer value (i.e. 1) in this cell. This number will not be used in the analysis but will
be displayed on the screen while the program is executing.
Vessel Description
Enter a meaningful descriptor for this analysis. This will be displayed on the screen and in the output
reports. An example might be Cryogen - 1. An alphanumeric combination up to 15 characters may be
used.
LEGS and LUGS 19-3
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure that the vessel will be operating at. This value will not be used by the program,
however, the pressure will be an input item for WRC 107. This is also a good number to have for
information purposes.
Design Temperature of Attachment
The temperature entered in this cell should correspond to the temperature of the attachment in question. It
would be reasonable to assume that vessel legs are much cooler than the actual metal temperature of the
pressure vessel. The controlling stress for leg and support lug design is the yield stress of the material at
the leg/lug temperature. If the attachment is not at ambient, enter the yield stress at that temperature. This
value available in ASME Section II Part D. Alternately, the cold yield stress may be multiplied by the
ratio of the hot allowable stress to the cold allowable stress. This should be acceptable in most cases.
Outside Diameter of Vessel
Enter the outside diameter of the vessel to which the supports are attached. Any factors such as external
corrosion should be accounted for at this time. PVElite will assume the vessel is one diameter from the top
to the bottom of the vessel.
Shell Thickness
Enter the shell thickness. This input is used only in the case of a support lug with a full reinforcement ring.
Shell thickness is required to compute the Area and Moment of Inertia of the shell-ring junction.
Enter the shell corrosion allowance. This input, along with the shell thickness is used only in the case of a
support lug with a full reinforcement ring. Shell thickness is required to compute the area and Moment of
Inertia of the shell-ring junction.
Tangent to Tangent Length of Vessel
Enter the vessel length from tangent to tangent. This value in combination with the next input parameter,
will be used to compute the height of the top of the tower above grade. Knowing the elevation at the top,
the wind pressure can be computed for the support lug and leg calculations.
Shell Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the Material Database. Click the
Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected material. If you cannot find the
material you need in the Material Database, you can add its specification and properties by selecting
TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS.
Type of Analysis
Use the table below to determine the appropriate analysis type:
Analysis Type Description
Support Lug If the vessel rests on support lugs select this option. The program prompts
you to enter all information necessary to determine the stress in these types
of supporting attachments.
Vessel Leg If the vessel rests on vessel legs select this option. The program prompts
you to enter all information necessary to perform an AISC Unity Check on
the vessel legs. This option also allows you to design the leg, baseplate and
anchor bolts.
Lifting Lug If the vessel is lifted by lug type attachments select this option. The program
prompts you to enter information pertaining to the lifting lugs.
Trunnion If the vessel is lifted by a trunnion select this option. The program prompts
you to enter information pertaining to the trunnion design.
Note: You can also perform a local stress analysis on the trunnion per WRC
107 methods.
Analyze Baseplate
Check this box for designing the baseplate and anchor bolts per Moss and Bednar.
Additional Horizontal Force on Vessel
Enter the additional horizontal force exerted on the vessel due to external loads. An example of such
would be the reaction imposed by the thermal expansion of a piping system. For more information see
Figure A - External Force Illustration.
Figure A - External Force Illustration

LEGS and LUGS 19-5
Location of Horizontal Force on Vessel
Enter the location of the external force above the base point. For more information see Figure A - External
Force Illustration.
Operating Weight of Vessel (total vertical load)
Enter the total weight of the vessel in this cell. This weight should include all operating fluids, equipment
loads, and other equipment attached to the vessel.
Height of Bottom Tangent Above Grade
Enter the distance from the ground to the bottom tangent of the vessel. If you are performing a leg
analysis this distance should be equal to the length of the legs. This value will be used along with the
tangent-to-tangent length to determine the centroid where the wind loads and seismic shear loads are
applied. These horizontal shear forces cause bending around the legs and support lugs. For more
information see Figure A - External Force Illustration.
Occasional Load Factor (AISC A5.2)
With many types of construction codes and occasional load factor can be used to increase the allowable
stress for an event that is considered occasional in nature. Such occasional loads are Wind, Seismic, and
the lifting of a vessel. The occasional load factor will be multiplied by the other terms in the allowable
stress equation to get the overall allowable. If you do not wish to take credit for such an increase in the
allowable, enter a 1 in this field. The default is 1.33.
Apply Wind Loads to Vessel
If you wish to enter wind loads on your vessel check this field. You will then be prompted for the
necessary parameters to compute the wind pressure on the vessel.
Apply Seismic Loads to Vessel
If you wish to have a seismic analysis check this field. If you do so, the seismic zone or seismic factor Cs
will be needed.
Pop-Up Input Fields

Force Coefficient
Enter the force coefficient (Cf) for the vessel here. The acceptable range of input is between 0.5 and 1.2.
This can be seen as Table 12 in ANSI A58.1. For ASCE 7-95, refer to p32-33.
Additional Area
The user may wish to consider the additional area exposed to the wind from piping, platforms, insulation
etc. PVElite will automatically compute an effective diameter with the input diameter known.
Wind Pressure on Vessel
If your vessel specification calls for a constant wind pressure design, and you know what that pressure is,
enter it here. Most Wind Design codes have minimum wind pressure requirements, so check those
carefully. The wind pressure will be multiplied by the area calculated by the program to get a shear load
and a bending moment.
If you enter a positive number here, PVElite will use this number regardless of the information in the
following cells.
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value for the importance factor here. The importance factor accounts for the degree of hazard to
life and property. If the vessel is 100 miles ( 160 kilometers ) from the hurricane oceanline enter a 1.00. If
the vessel is at the hurricane oceanline enter 1.05. Values up to 1.11 are acceptable here. Refer to ASCE
#7 and ANSI 58.1 for more information on the importance factor (Table 1 and Table 5 in ANSI A58.1).
For ASCE 7-95, refer to Table 6-2).
Basic Wind Speed
Enter the basic wind speed which the vessel will be subject to. Positive values will be accepted. A
minimum value of 70 miles per hour is recommended.
Wind Exposure
Enter an integer here for the ASCE 7 wind exposure factor.
Exposure (A) Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in excess
of 70 ft.
Exposure (B) Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous
closely spaced obstructions having the size of single family dwellings.
Exposure (C) Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less than 30
feet. This category includes flat, open country and grasslands.
Exposure (D) Flat, unobstructed coastal areas directly exposed to wind flowing over large
bodies of water.
Note: Most petrochemical sites use Exposure C.
Use ASCE 7-95 Code
If you choose to use ASCE 7-95 code, check this field. Then type information in the following cells:
Type of Hill
Select the type of hill. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details.
LEGS and LUGS 19-7
None
2-D Ridge
2-D Escarpment
3-D Axisym Hill
Height of Hill or Escarpment (H)
Enter height of hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for detail.
Enter distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest to the building site. See ASCE 7-95.
Distance to Crest (Lh)
Enter distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the height of hill or
escarpment. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for detail.
Natural Frequency for the Structure (Fn) — Optional (Hz)
Enter the natural frequency for the structure. The program will use ASCE 7-95 part 6.6 category III if Fn <
1.0 Hz or TANTAN/OD > 4.0.
Damping Ratio (beta) — optional
Enter the damping ratio for the structure if you like to use ASCE 7-95 part 6.6 category III (if Fn < 1.0 Hz
or TANTAN/OD > 4.0).
Seismic Zone
Enter the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in ASCE #7. A
value of 0 will slightly increase the reaction force. A zone entry of 4 will produce the highest loads.
User Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS
When you enter a valid seismic zone and leave this field blank or 0, PVElite will look the seismic zone
factor up from an applicable table. This number is then used in conjunction with the operating weight of
the vessel to compute the forces which act on the supports. If for any reason the table value of Cs is
unacceptable, entry of a non-zero value will cause this to be used in lieu of the table value. This might
occur if the building code in your project specifications is different from the one used by PVElite.
Vessel Leg Input
The number of vessel legs must be between 3 and 16. The program computes the number of legs for
bending and shear of the vessel.
PVElite must have a valid material from which to determine material properties. You can select the
material from the Material Database by pressing the material database lookup button. If a material is not
contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/
EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the MAIN MENU.
Currently there are 929 structural shapes in the AISC database. PVElite is intended to perform unity
checks on I-beam and angle type sections. AISC's method for computing unity checks for angle sections is
rather complicated when compared to the corresponding method used for "I" type sections.
Each beam section has a strong and weak orientation. If the beam is attached such that the tangent to the
vessel is parallel to the beam's strong axis this designation is considered strong. If the designation is not
strong it must be weak.
If the legs are cross braced bending stresses are significantly reduced.
Number of Legs
Enter the number of legs attached to the vessel. This number must be greater than or equal to 3 and less
than 16. PVElite will determine the effective number of legs for bending and shear of the vessel.
Length of Legs
Enter the distance from the bottom leg support point to the attachment point on the vessel. This length
term is used in determining the legs resistance to bending. Long legs are more likely to buckle than shorter
legs. The distance of the tangent line of the vessel above grade should always be equal to the length of the
legs. If they are not the same PVElite will use the maximum of the two when determining the wind
pressure and the location of the centroid.
Effective Leg End Condition Factor K (used in Kl/r)
Enter in the value of K used as the effective end condition. This value usually ranges from 0.2 to 2.10. For
design of pressure vessel legs a value of 1.0 is commonly used. If your design specs call out for a different
value enter it here.
Material Specification for Legs
LEGS and LUGS 19-9
Leg Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
The leg allowable stress is not used to check structural steel. The yield stress at the design temperature is
used.
Leg Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
The leg allowable stress is not used to check structural steel. The yield stress at the operating temperature
is used.
AISC Member Designation
Enter the shape type of the leg on which the vessel is sitting. A complete list of shapes can be found in the
AISC structural steel handbook. All material shape information is current with the latest AISC code
standard. An example of a shape type may be W8X40 or W36X300. A 2 by 1/4 inch angle section would
have the designation L2X2X0.2500. This reference must be exact.
If your design incorporates pipe legs, check the pipe-leg selection box and fill in the ID and the OD of the
pipe leg.
Orientation to the Vessel
Each I-beam and channel has a strong and weak orientation. This means that these sections are more
easily bent around one as opposed to the other. If the member is attached such that the tangent to the
vessel is parallel to the beams strong axis select the strong option, otherwise select the weak option. If the
member is an angle and it is attached with one leg welded to the vessel or one flat welded to the vessel,
select strong. If both legs are welded to the vessel select diagonal.
Are the Legs Cross-Braced
If the legs are cross braced check this field. Cross bracing effectively stiffens the legs. Thus they will
experience a minimum of bending stress.
Are the Legs Pipe Legs
Check this box to activate the pipe ID and OD.
Pipe Legs Inside/Outside Diameter
Enter the diameter of the pipe leg (as determined by which cell you are entering data for) that is attached
to the vessel. You must account for any corrosion allowance to the inner or outer diameter when entering
this value. Please verify that the inside diameter is less than the outside diameter.
Leg Results
When a leg analysis is performed PVElite reads all of the data out of the structural database (AISC89.BIN).
The resulting leg loads are compared to the allowable leg compression loads as outlined in AISC
paragraph 1.5.1.3. Either the Kl/r > Cc or Kl/r < Cc formula will be shown as appropriate. The
combination of stresses due to bending and compression will be compared to the allowable per AISC
1.6.1. This is generally termed the AISC unity check. If the result is greater than 1.0 the member has
failed.
Support Lug Input
If the number of support lugs to be analyzed is between 2 and 16. PVElite assumes that each support lug
has two gussets equally spaced about a bolt hole. The distance between gussets is used to determine the
bending stress in the lug bottom plate. The lug bottom plate is analyzed as a beam on simple supports,
where the support spacing is the gusset spacing. The allowable stress in bending is 66 percent of the yield
stress, per the AISC manual. In addition, the stress in the gusset is one half of the lug force divided by the
gusset area. This compression is compared to the AISC compression allowable.
Usually when analyzing stresses in the lug plate the stresses in the wall of the vessel at the attachment
location should be checked. This can be accomplished by checking the box to perform WRC 107 analysis
from within the support lug dialog.
Support Lug Reinforcing Ring ( None, Girder Ring )
Select girder ring if the support lugs are reinforced with rings. If there are no stiffening rings for the
support lugs, select none.
Number of Support Lugs
Enter the number of support lugs on which the vessel is supported. This number must be greater than 1
and less than 17.
Location of Support Lugs Above Grade
Enter the height above grade to which the support lugs are attached to the vessel. This is used to determine
the reaction load on each support lug.
Distance from Vessel OD to Support Contact Point
Enter the distance from the outside wall of the vessel to where the support lug attaches to/rests on/ the
supporting member. This distance should be as short as possible to minimize bending on the support lug
and the vessel wall.
LEGS and LUGS 19-11
Material Specification for Support Lugs
Enter the material that the lugs are made of. An example of a of a common material is SA-516 70. To
properly initialize the material, type its name on this line even if the default is shown. Alternatively, you
can select the material from the Material Database by clicking the Material Database lookup button. If
selecting TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
Radial Width of Bottom Support Lug Plate
The radial width of the support lug is how far from the vessel wall the plate extends. For more information
see Figure B - Leg & Lug Module Geometry.
Lug Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
The lug allowable stress is not used as a failure comparison. The yield stress at the operating temperature
is used.
Lug Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
The lug allowable stress is not used as a failure comparison. The yield stress at the operating temperature
is used.
Circumferential Length of Bottom Support Lug Plate
Enter the distance measured along the vessel wall that the support lug plate extends.
Thickness of the Bottom Support Lug Plate
Enter the thickness of the plate on which the gussets rest. The bottom support plate is analyzed as a beam
on simple supports where the support spacing is the distance between gussets. The allowable stress is 66%
of the yield stress per the AISC steel construction manual.
Distance Between Gussets
Enter the gusset spacing in this cell. PVElite assumes that support lugs have two gussets, equally spaced
about a bolt hole (support point).
Mean Width of Gusset Plate
Enter the average width of the gusset plate. The width dimension is radially outward from the OD of the
vessel. If the top and bottom of the gussets are different widths, add them up and divide the result by 2.
For more information see Figure B - Leg & Lug Module Geometry.
Height of Gusset Plate
Enter the distance along the axis of the vessel that the gusset plate extends. This length will be used in the
AISC formulation to determine the stress in the gussets. For more information see Figure B - Leg & Lug
Module Geometry.
Thickness of Gusset Plate
Enter the thickness of the gusset plate. For more information see Figure B - Geometry for the Leg & Lug
Module.
Radial Width of Top Bar Plate or Top Ring
The radial width of the top bar/ring is how far from the vessel wall the top plate/ring extends. For more
information see Figure B - Leg & Lug Module Geometry.
Note: If there is no top bar/ring, enter the top width of the gusset.
Thickness of Top Bar Plate or Top Ring
Enter the thickness of the top bar plate/ring in the units above. If there is no top bar plate or top ring, enter
0 here.
Perform WRC 107 calculations on this Support Lug-Shell attachment ?
Check this box if you want to perform WRC 107 calculations on the Support Lug to Vessel junction.
WRC 107 only addresses rectangular, square or round attachment shapes, but other shapes (e.g. support
lug) can be modeled by converting to an equivalent rectangle which has:
The same moment of Inertia

The same ratio of length to width of the original attachment.
Program uses this approach to convert the lug into an equivalent rectangle. This approach is referenced in
WRC bulletin 198 by Dogde as, simple and direct, but is not derived by any mathematical or logical
reasoning. So, very large or critical loads should, be examined in depth.
Pad Width and Length
The reinforcing pad width is measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel. The pad width
must be greater than attachment width. The length of the attachment is measured along the long axis of the
vessel.
If the box is checked to perform the analysis and the pad properties are entered in, the program will
compute the stresses at the edge of the attachment and the edge of the pad. When computing the stresses at
the edge of the attachment, program adds the pad thickness to the shell thickness.
LEGS and LUGS 19-13
Lifting Lug Input
Generally there are two types of lifting lug orientations, flat and perpendicular. Flat lugs are generally
welded below the top head seam and extend far enough above the seam for the lifting cables to clear the
head and its nozzles. Perpendicular lugs (ears) are used to clear some obstruction at or near the top head
(such as a body flange) by moving the support point away from the vessel shell. They are also used as
tailing lugs.
The width of the lug is its dimension in the direction of orientation described above. The length is in the
vertical direction relative to the vessel.
The length of the welds will also need to be entered. For flat lugs the weld at the bottom will usually be
the same as the lug width. For perpendicular lugs the weld length will be the same as the thickness of the
lug.
PVElite will take the square root of the sum of the squares (W, N, and T) to determine the total shearing
load. The forces W and N cause bending loads on flat lugs while W and T cause bending loads on
perpendicular lugs. The corner of the weld group is where the stress will be checked at.
Review the example problems, and see Figure A - External Force Illustration and Figure B for further
clarification of input.
Material Specification for Lifting Lugs
Enter the material that the lugs are made of. An example of a of a common material is SA-516 70. To
properly initialize the material, type its name on this line even if the default is shown. Alternatively, you
can select the material from the Material Database by clicking the Material Database button. If a
material is not contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by
Lug Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
The lug allowable stress is multiplied by 0.6 for comparison to the shear stress above the hole in the lifting
lug. It is also multiplied by the occasional factor to get the allowable weld shear for combined loads.
Lug Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
The lifting lug allowable stress at ambient temperature should appear in this cell. The allowable stress at
the lug operating temperature is used for the allowable stress comparison.
Lug Orientation to Vessel
Select "Perpendicular" if the lug extends radially away from the vessel wall. These lugs are referred to as
ear-type lugs. They are typically used on the tops of horizontal vessels. If the lug extends in the same
direction as the vessel axis, select "Flat." This is a flat orientation.
If you are working with a perpendicular lug and there will be no bending stresses in the lug, you will need
to set the offset dimensions (moment arms) to 0. The program will run, but may give some warnings. This
type of lifting lug would be one on the top of a horizontal vessel and the vessel would be lifted by a
spreader bar equally distributing the weight load directly over each lug. Thus there would be no bending.
Contract Width or Height (Per. Lug) of Lifting Lug
The width of the lug is its dimension in the direction of orientation described in the lug orientation to
vessel wall. For perpendicular lugs this is the total height of the lug.
Thickness of Lifting Lug
Enter the thickness of the plate that the lifting lug was constructed from.
Diameter of Hole in Lifting Lug
Most lifting lugs have a circular hole cut or drilled into them. Enter the diameter of this hole.
Radius of Semi-Circular ARC of Lifting Lug
Enter the RADIUS of the semi-circular part of the lifting lug where the hole is located. Typically this will
be circular on flat lugs and semi-circular on perpendicular lugs.
Height of Lug from Center of Hole to Bottom
Enter the distance along the axis of the vessel from the center of the hole to the bottom of the lug.
Offset from Vessel OD to Center of Hole
Enter the distance from the center of the hole to base of the lifting lug. For perpendicular lugs this will be
to the vessel OD. If the orientation is flat, this will be one half the lug thickness.
Minimum Thickness of Fillet Weld Around Lug
This minimum is usually the distance from the root to the surface of the fillet weld (root dimension), and
is not the fillet weld leg size.
LEGS and LUGS 19-15
Length of Weld Around Sides of Lug
Enter the length of the long welds on the side of the lifting lug. PVElite will multiply this value by two
when determining the weld area.
Length of Weld Along Bottom of Lifting Lug
Enter the length of the short weld. This is usually the bottom weld.
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the lifting lug analysis. For more information see Figure D - Lifting
Orientation.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more information see Figure
D - Lifting Orientation.
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For more information
see Figure D - Lifting Orientation.
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more information see
Figure D - Lifting Orientation.
Figure B - LEG & LUG Module Geometry
Output
PVElite produces three basic types of results in the LEG & LUG module. Results for Legs, using the
methods described by AISC, results for Lifting Lugs, using basic engineering principles, and results for
Support Lugs, using AISC methods and formulae from pressure vessel text books and other engineering
reference texts.
The input for this module include some basic vessel parameters such as the vessel tangent-tangent length,
the diameter and the height of the bottom tangent above grade. If you are performing a Leg or Support
Lug calculation, the program follows these basic steps in order to determine the loads.
For evaluation of wind loads:
1 Determine the elevation of the top and bottom seam of the vessel.
2 Determine the wind pressure at both elevations, and take the average.
3 Determine the effective diameter of the vessel and its area.
4 Compute the centroid of the vessel.
5 Resolve the wind pressure and the area at the centroid.
LEGS and LUGS 19-17
For evaluation of seismic loads:
1 Determine the seismic zone factor from UBC table 23-I or use the one the user gave.
2 Multiply this value times the operating weight of the vessel.
3 Apply this load at the centroid of the vessel.
If both types of loadings are considered, PVElite will compute both and then choose the maximum of the
two.
Baseplate Input
The Baseplate Thickness calculation is included in the vessel leg analysis for I-beam, pipe, and angle leg
only, and can be activated by clicking the Analyze Baseplate check box.
The design is based on the method for I-beam leg described in the Pressure Design Manual by D. Moss
and is applied to the other leg shapes. PVElite will assume the following for all Baseplate Thickness
calculations:
Strong axis leg orientation

Bolts are installed along the length sides only (B dimension).
The leg is attached symmetrically on the baseplate.
It is advisable to check the baseplate dimensions using the graphic feature of PVElite.
Main Input Fields

Baseplate Design Methods
AISC
In this method, the thickness of the baseplate is calculated by assuming the baseplate is in compression
state; where as the anchor bolts are sized to resist the lifting force/moment. For more information refer to
second edition of Pressure Vessel Design Handbook by Bednar page 153.
In the Analyze mode, the baseplate thickness is calculated using the input baseplate dimensions (B &D).
However, in the Optimize mode, the baseplate thickness is calculated by maximizing the use of the
concrete strength. Please refer to AISC Handbook page 3-106.
The Total Number of Bolt per Base Plate are assumed to carry all the lifting load on the baseplate. It is
up to the user to specify the location of each bolt.
The Number of Bolt in Tension per Base Plate input is not required.
The Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, the "z" dimension, is not required..
The program assumes the leg is attached symmetrically on the base plate.
Moss
The Total Number of Bolt per Base Plate should be an even number. The program assumes that the
bolts are located along the length (B) of the base plate as shown in the left figure.
In case there is no wind/earth quake/horizontal loads, the Number of Bolt in Tension per Base Plate is
not required.
If there is wind/earth quake/horizontal loads, the Number of Bolt in Tension per Base Plate should be
the number of bolts along one length dimension, shown as three bolts in the figure. When this input is
left blank, its values is assumed to be half of the total number of bolts.
The program assumes the leg is attached symmetrically on the base plate.
The Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, the "z" dimension, is same along the width
and along the length.
Baseplate Length B
Enter the length "B" of the baseplate.
Baseplate Width D
Enter the width "D" of the baseplate.
Baseplate Thickness BTHK
Enter the available baseplate thickness.
Baseplate/Bolt Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. If a material is not a
contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting
TOOLS/EDITS/ADD MATERIALS from the Main Menu.
Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, "z"
Enter the "z" dimension of the baseplate. For more information see Figure C - Baseplate Dimension.
Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The bolt diameters included in the program range from 0.5 to 4.0 inches.
If you have bolts that are larger or smaller than this value, enter the nominal size in this field and also
enter the root area of one bolt in the Root Area cell.
LEGS and LUGS 19-19
Bolt Corrosion Allowance
If there is any corrosion allowance for the bolts then enter it here. The nominal bolt size is corrected for
this allowance.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry:
TEMA Bolt Table

UNC Bolt Table
User specified root area of a single bolt.
Bolt Root Area
If your geometry uses bolts that are not the standard TEMA or UNC types you must enter the root area of
a single bolt in this field.
Total Number of Bolts per Baseplate
Enter the total number of bolts per baseplate. At least two bolts are needed for uplift situations. The
program assumes that the bolts are located along the length "B" of the baseplate as shown in the figure
below.
Number of Bolts in Tension per Baseplate
Enter the total number of bolts in tension per baseplate. If there is an uplift the number of bolts in tension
per Baseplate should be at least 1. If there is no uplift the number of bolts in tension per Baseplate is not
required.
Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete
Enter the Nominal Compressive Stress of the Concrete to which the basering/baseplate is bolted. This
value is f'c in Jawad and Farr of FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
Water Content (gal) per 94 lb. f'c 28 day Ultimate

Sack of Cement Compressive Strength (psi)
7.50 2000
6.75 2500
6.0 3000
5.00 3750
Figure C - Baseplate Dimension
Baseplate Results
The Baseplate analysis produces the following results:
The thickness requirement is calculated using the 1.5 allowable plate bending stress and compared to
the input thickness.
The concrete bearing pressure is compared to the input allowable stress
The anchor bolt size is analyzed at the bending level (D. Moss) and the overall vessel moment
equilibrium (H. Bednar). In the absence of tension in the bolts, you should choose a practical bolt
size.
Trunnion Input
A hollow or solid circular trunnion with or without pad reinforcement can be analyzed using the
TRUNNION DESIGN module. The main considerations regarding the trunnion design are stresses at the
vessel/trunnion junction and on the trunnion itself. Bending stress, shear stress, bearing stress and the
Unity Check are calculated and compared with the appropriate allowables. Local stresses at the junction
can be analyzed using the WRC 107 Analysis Selection check box. The lifting orientation, vertical and
horizontal positions, and the orthogonal input forces are needed for WRC 107 Analysis.
LEGS and LUGS 19-21
PVElite assumes that the loads entered act on one trunnion. Typically vessels are lifted with two trunnions
thus the load is divided between them. An option is to analyze the trunnion with the maximum load acting
on that trunnion during the lift. The program multiplies this lifting load by the importance factor specified
by the user.
Before the analysis it is advisable to check the trunnion dimensions and the forces' magnitude and
direction using the graphic feature in CodeCalc.
The program does not subtract corrosion allowance (if any) and then enter the dimensions.
Main Input Fields

Trunnion Type (Hollow or Solid)
This input is required for performing shear and bending stress calculations and for WRC 107 Analysis.
Trunnion Outside Diameter
Enter the outside diameter of the trunnion. For more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Trunnion Thickness
Enter the thickness of the trunnion. For more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Projection Length
Enter the projection length of the trunnion. For more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Bail/Sling Width
Enter the bail or sling width used during erection. This input is required for locating the lifting load only.
No analysis is performed on the bail or sling. For more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Trunnion Material
Enter the material the trunnion is made of. Depending on the size and the availability, the trunnion can be
made of pipe or sheet plate. To properly initialize the material, type its name in this field even if the
default displays. If a material is not contained in the database, you can enter its specifications and
properties manually by selecting TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS from the Main Menu.
Reinforcement
This input is required to perform the WRC 107 Analysis.

Ring Outside Diameter
The ring outside diameter is only used to display a picture of the trunnion. This is not used in the
calculations. For more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Ring Thickness
The ring thickness is only used to display a picture of the trunnion. This is not used in the calculations. For
more information see Figure E - Trunnion Geometry.
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the trunnion analysis. This value will be used to perform WRC 107
Analysis on the trunnion.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more information see Figure
D - Lifting Orientation.
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For more information
see Figure D - Lifting Orientation.
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more information see
Figure D - Lifting Orientation.
Importance Factor
When the vessel is lifted from the ground it may be yanked abruptly. The importance factor takes this into
account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0 although values as high as 3.0 may be used. The
program multiplies the lifting load by the importance factor.
Perform WRC 107 Analysis on Trunnion
Click this box to perform WRC 107 Analysis on the trunnion/vessel junction.
LEGS and LUGS 19-23
Figure D - Lifting Orientation
Figure E - Trunnion Geometry

Trunnion Results
The ring outer diameter and thickness are not used in the calculations; they are used to display a picture
only.
There are four passing criteria used to calculate the trunnion design bending stress, shear stress, bearing
stress and the Unity Check. The following allowables are used:
Bending Stress: 0.66 *Sy*Occfac

Shear Stress: 0.40 *Sy*Occfac
Bearing Stress: 0.75 *Sy*Occfac
WRC 107 Analysis- local stresses at 8 points are evaluated and compared with the allowable (1.5 *
Sallow). For more information see the WRC 107 module.
Example
20-1
C H A P T E R 2 0
Chapter 20: PIPES and PADS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................20-2
Output.................................................................................20-7
Example..............................................................................20-8
Introduction
This chapter discusses the PIPE & PAD module in PVElite. PIPE & PAD computes the required wall
thickness and area of replacement for ANSI B31.3 intersections. These area of replacement rules are
based on the 1987 edition of ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping Code. Extruded
outlet headers are also analyzed.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields

Intersection Number
Enter an intersection number for this analysis. These should be positive integer values incremented by
one.
Intersection Description
Enter a 15 alphanumeric identifier for this intersection. This description will not be used in the analysis,
however, it will be used in the error checker and in the output reports. This identifier should have some
link to the actual intersection. An example might be "Int 12x4".
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure of the ANSI B31.3 intersection. This should be the pressure that the system will
operate at continuously. Most of the internal computations for areas, wall thickness etc. involve the design
pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the intersection. This temperature will be used to determine the allowable
stress of the branch. The user may note that if a new temperature is input the allowable stress information
of the branch is updated automatically.
Branch\Header\Pad Material Specification
Enter the material specification in this cell. A list of materials can be found in the PVElite User Guide or
you can select it from the Material Database by clicking the Material Database button. If a material is not
contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting
TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the MAIN MENU.
PIPES and PADS 20-3
Valid piping materials available are:
A-106 B A-285 C A-312 304 A-312 A-312 316 A-312

304L 316L
A-516 55 A-516 60 A-516 65 A-516 70 A-53 A A-53 B
A-335 P1 A-335 P2 A-335 P5 A-335 P11 A-335 P22 A-537 CL1
Any material can be used as long as the hot and cold allowables are properly specified.
Allowable Stress, Operating
The allowable stress of the material specified at the design temperature above should appear in this cell.
This stress will appear automatically if a valid material is selected. If the temperature is changed the
material properties will be updated automatically.
Allowable Stress, Ambient
The allowable stress of the material at ambient temperature above should appear in this cell. This stress
will appear automatically if a valid material is selected.
Branch Dimension Basis
Select the branch dimension basis in this field.
Pipe Normal or Actual Outside Diameter
If actual was entered in the field immediately above, then enter the actual outside diameter of the branch
in this cell. If nominal was entered above, enter the nominal outside diameter of the branch pipe. An
example is "10" for a 10 inch pipe.
Actual Thickness of Branch/Header
If the user has specified a 1 in the branch/header dimension basis field, then the actual wall thickness of
the branch will be entered in this cell. PVElite will reduce the wall thickness according to B31.3 if
appropriate values are entered for mill tolerance or corrosion allowance.
Nominal Thickness of Branch/Header
Enter the schedule for the branch/header wall. Enter a value in this field only if you selected Nominal for
the branch diameter and thickness basis. Otherwise enter a thickness in the field above. Type in the
schedule for the branch, i.e. SCH 40. Available schedules are:
SCH 10 SCH 80S

SCH 10S SCH 100
SCH 20 SCH 120

SCH 30 SCH 140
SCH 40 SCH 160
SCH 40S SCH STD
SCH 60 SCH-STG
SCH 80 SCH XX-STG
Mill Undertolerance, Percent
The mill undertolerance accounts for manufacturing deficiencies when pipe is produced. If for example a
value of 12.5 is entered, then the wall thickness of the pipe will be multiplied by (100 - 12.5)/100 or .875.
This is essentially a reduction in wall thickness. Valid entries are between 0 and 99%.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the estimated allowance for corrosion in this field. The difference of (wall thickness - (corrosion
allowance + mill tolerance)) must be greater than 0.
Basic Quality Factor for Longitudinal Joints
The basic quality factor is used in the wall thickness calculations for pipes under internal pressure only.
These factors are listed in the ANSI B31.3 piping code Table A-1B. For seamless and fully radiographed
pipe this value is 1.0. For electric resistance welded and spot welded materials it is usually 0.85.
Angle Between Branch and Header
Enter the angle between the centerline direction vector of the branch and the header. This is typically 90
degrees. The piping codes do not allow "hillside" type attachments. This angle is referred to as Beta and is
shown in Figure A. This is the smaller angle between the axes.
Does the Branch Penetrate a Header Weld
If the branch pipe passes through a weld seam on the header pipe check this field. Refer to ANSI B31.3
paragraph 304.3.3 under "t =" for more information.
Rate the Attached B16.5 Flange
If a flange is attached to the branch pipe and you wish to rate it check this field.
Header Dimension Basis
Enter the header dimension basis in this field. If the actual outside diameter is known select actual. If the
nominal schedule of the header is known select nominal.
PIPES and PADS 20-5
Reinforcing Pad Present
If the intersection being analyzed has a reinforcing pad, check this field. If selected, PVElite will
determine the area(s) available in the pad within the appropriate limits of reinforcement. In addition,
PVElite will also report the required pad diameter based on the given pad thickness and the required pad
thickness based on the given diameter.
Is There an Extruding Outlet ?
If the branch connection for this intersection is formed by the extrusion process then check this box. If
checked you will be prompted to enter in information required to determine the area in the extruded outlet.
Pop-Up Input Fields

Class of the Attached B16.5 Flange
If you answered Y to rate the attached B16.5 flange then enter the class of the flange attached to the
nozzle neck. Available classes of flanges are: CL 150, CL 300, CL 400, CL 600, CL 900, CL 1500, CL
2500.
Grade of the Attached B16.5 Flange
If the flange attached to the nozzle neck is to be rated then the grade of the flange must be entered here.
The allowable grades of B16.5 flanges are:
GR 1.1 Med C Steel GR 1.14 9Cr-1Mo

GR 1.2 High C Steel GR 2.1 Type 304
GR 1.4 Low C Steel GR 2.2 Type 316
GR 1.5 C-1/2Mo GR 2.3 Type 304L, 316L
GR 1.7 /2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo GR 2.4 Type 321
GR 1.9 -1/4Cr-1/2Mo GR 2.5 Type 347, 348
GR 1.10 2-1/4Cr-1Mo GR 2.6 Type 309
GR 1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo GR 2.7 Type 310
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of reinforcing element in this cell. All allowances for corrosion should be taken into
consideration by the user.
Pad Diameter Along Header Surface
Enter the length of the reinforcing element along the longitudinal axis of the header.
Thickness of Extruded Outlet, TX
The dimension TX of an extruded outlet header is the corroded finished thickness which is measured at a
height equal to the radius of curvature above the outside surface of the header.
Height of Extruded Outlet, HX
The dimension HX of an extruded outlet header is the height of the extruded outlet. This distance must be
greater than or equal to the radius of curvature RX, of the outlet.
Inside Diameter of Extruded Outlet, DX
DX is the inside diameter of the extruded outlet which is measured at the level of the outside of the
header. PVElite will automatically adjust the wall thickness of the outlet if the mill tolerance and/or the
corrosion allowance is specified.
Radius of Curvature, RX, of Extruded Outlet
RX is the radius of curvature of the external contoured part of the extruded outlet, which is measured in
the plane containing the axes of both the header and the branch.
Figure A - Pipe and Pad Module Geometry

PIPES and PADS 20-7
Figure B - Pipe and Pad Module Geometry Continued
Figure C - Extruded Outlet
Output
PVElite will generate output for maximum allowable working pressure new and cold as well as the
corroded condition. The hydrotest pressure is calculated as the maximum allowable working pressure at
the design condition times 1.5 the ratio of the allowable stress at ambient temperature to the allowable
stress at the design temperature.
The replaced area can only be within a certain zone. No credit will be given for reinforcement that lies
outside of the zone. Please note that these zones are different for extruded outlets.
If a reinforcing element is used PVElite will compute the required diameter for the given thickness and the
required thickness for the given diameter. If a pad is used in conjunction with an extruded outlet header
consult the piping code for details on this design. If the calculated diameter falls outside the limit of
reinforcement a message such as "EXCEEDS D2" or "EXCEEDS L4" will be displayed.
The MAWP for the given geometry is an estimate because of a slight non-linearity in the required
thickness calculation. To verify the MAWP plug the value back into the analysis as the design pressure
and check to see if the area required is equal to the area available.
Example
21-1
C H A P T E R 2 1
Chapter 21: BASE RINGS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................21-2
Calculations........................................................................21-2
Tailing Lug Analysis..........................................................21-15
Example..............................................................................21-17
Introduction
The PVElite BASE RING module performs thickness calculations and design for annular plate baserings,
top rings, bolting, and gussets. These calculations are performed using industry standard calculation
techniques as described below.
Calculations
Calculation Techniques
Thickness of a Base Ring Under Compression
The equation for the thickness of the base ring is the equation for a simple cantilever beam. The beam is
assumed to be supported at the skirt, and loaded with a uniform load caused by the compression of the
concrete due to the combined weight of the vessel and bending moment on the down-wind / down-
earthquake side of the vessel. The equation for the cantilever thickness is found in most of the common
vessel design textbooks, including Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment,
page 434, formula 12.12:
t = SQRT( 3 * fc * l ** 2 / s )
Where
fc = bearing stress on the concrete

l = cantilever length of base ring
s = allowable bending stress of base ring (typically 1.5 times Code allowable).
There are two commonly accepted methods of determining the bearing stress on the concrete. The
approximate method simply calculates the compressive load on the concrete assuming that the neutral axis
for the vessel is at the centerline. Thus the load per unit area of the concrete is, from Jawad & Farr
equation 12.1, equal to
fc = -W / A - M * c / I
Where
W = Weight of vessel (worst case).

M = Bending moment on vessel (worst case).
A = Cross sectional area of base ring on foundation
c = Distance from the center of the base ring to the edge
I = Moment of inertia of the base ring on the foundation
BASE RINGS 21-3
However, when a steel skirt and base ring are supported on a concrete foundation, the behavior of the
foundation is similar to that of a reinforced concrete beam. If there is a net bending moment on the
foundation, then the force upward on the bolts must be balanced by the force downward on the concrete.
But because these two materials have different elastic moduli, and because the strain in the concrete cross
section must be equal to the strain in the base ring at any specific location, then the neutral axis of the
combined bolt/concrete cross section will be shifted in the direction of the concrete. Several authors,
including Jawad & Farr (pages 428 to 433) and Megyesy (pages 70 to 73) have analyzed this
phenomenon. The program uses the formulation of Singh and Soler, Mechanical Design of Heat
Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components, pages 957 to 959. This formulation seems to be the most
readily adaptable to computerization, as there are no tabulated constants. Singh and Soler provide the
following description of their method:
In this case a neutral axis parallel to the y axis exists. The location of the neutral axis is identified by the
angle alpha. The object is to determine the peak concrete pressure p and the angle alpha.
For narrow base plate rings an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical iteration. It is
assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a thin ring of mean diameter c.
Assuming the foundation to be linearly elastic, and the base plate to be relatively rigid, Brownnell and
Young have developed an approximate solution which, can be cast in a form suitable for numerical
solution. Let the total tensile stress area of all foundation bolts be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought,
it is permissible to replace the bolts with a thin shell of thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt
circle diameter c, such that t = A / PI * c. We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting around the
ring, are replaced by a line load, varying in intensity with the distance from the neutral plane.
Let n be the ratio of Young's moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally varies between
10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (non-adhesive surface) and that the bolts
are effective only in tension (untapped holes in base plate), an analysis [similar to that given above] yields
the following results:
p = (2 * W + r2 * t * c * s) / [(t3 - t) * r1 * c]
s = (2 * (M - W * r4 * c) / (r2 * r3 * t * c ** 2)
alpha = acos [(s - n * p) / ( s + n * p )]
Where
t3 = width of base ring (similar to l in Jawad & Farr's equations above)

c = bolt circle diameter
r1-r4 = four constants based on the neutral axis angle, and defined in Singh & Soler
equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here.
These equations give the required 7 non-linear equations to solve for 7 unknowns, namely p, c, alpha, and
the ri (i = 1, 4) parameters. The simple iteration scheme described below converges rapidly. The iterative
solution is started with assumed values of s and p; say so and po [the program takes these from the
approximate analysis it has just performed]. Then alpha is determined via the above equation. Knowing
alpha the dimensionless parameters r1, r2, r3, and r4 are computed. This enables computation of
corrected values of p and s (say po' and so'). The next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose:
s1 = .5 * (so + so')
p1 = .5 * (po + po')
This process is continued until the errors ei and Ei at the ith iteration stage are within specified tolerances,
(ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value),
Where
ei = (si' - si) / si
Ei = (pi' - pi) / pi
Actual numerical tests show that the convergence is uniform and rapid regardless of the starting values of
so and po.
Once the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the base ring is
calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate method.
Thickness of Base Ring Under Tension
On the tensile side, if there is no top ring but there are gussets, there is disagreement on how to do the
analysis. For example, Megyesy uses a 'Table F' to calculate an equivalent bending moment, Dennis R.
Moss uses the same approach but gives the table (page 126-129), and Jawad & Farr use a 'yield-line'
theory (page 435-436). Since Jawad & Farr is both accepted and explicit, the program uses their equation
12.13:
t = SQRT{ (3.91 * F) / [Sy * ( x + y + z)]}
Where
x = 2*b/a
y = a / (2 * l)
z = d * ( 2 / a + 1 / [2 * l])
F = Bolt Load = Allowable Stress * Area
a = Distance between gussets
b = Width of base plate that is outside of the skirt
l = Distance from skirt to bolt circle
d = Diameter of bolt hole
Thickness of Top Ring Under Tension
If there is a top ring or plate, its thickness is calculated using a simple beam formula. Taking the plate to
be a beam supported between two gussets with a point load in the middle equal to the maximum bolt load,
we derive the following equation:
BASE RINGS 21-5
t = SQRT(6 * M / s)
Where
M = 2 * Ft * Cg / 8.0, bending moment from Megyesy, beam formulas, case 11, fixed
beam.
Ft = Bolt Load = Allowable Stress * Area
s = Allowable stress, 1.5 * plate allowable
Z = Section Modulus, from Megyesy, Properties of Sections
Z = Wt * t2 / 6.0
Wt = (Do/2.- Ds/2.- db) = Width of Section
Required Thickness of Gussets in Tension
If there are gussets, they must be analyzed for both tension and compression. The stress formula in tension
is just the force over the area, where the force is taken to be the allowable bolt stress times the bolt area,
and the area of the gusset is the thickness of the gusset times one half the width of the gusset (because
gussets normally taper).
Required Thickness of Gussets in Compression
In compression (as a column) we must iteratively calculate the required thickness. Taking the actual
thickness as the starting point, we perform the calculation in AISC 1.5.1.3. The radius of gyration for the
gusset is taken as 0.289 t per Megyesy, Fifth edition, page 404. The actual compression is calculated as
described above, then compared to the allowed compression per AISC. The thickness is then modified and
another calculation performed until the actual and allowed compressions are within one half of one
percent of one another.
Base Ring Design
When the user requests a base ring design, the program performs the following additional calculations to
determine the design geometry.
Selection of Number of Bolts
This selection is made on the basis of Megyesy's table in Pressure Vessel Handbook (Table C, page 67 in
the fifth edition). Above the diameter shown, the selection is made to keep the anchor bolt spacing at
about 24 inches.
Calculation of Load per Bolt
This calculation is made per Jawad & Farr, equation 12.3:
P = -W / N + 2 * M / (N * R)
Where
W = Weight of vessel
N = Number of bolts
R = Radius of bolt circle
M = Bending moment
Calculation of Required Area for Each Bolt
This is just the load per bolt divided by the allowable stress.
Selection of the Bolt Size
The program has a table of bolt areas, and selects smallest bolt with area greater than the area calculated
above.
Selection of Preliminary Base Ring Geometry
The table of bolt areas also contains the required clearances in order to successfully tighten the selected
bolt (wrench clearances and edge clearances). The program selects a preliminary base ring geometry based
on these clearances. Values selected at this point are the bolt circle, base ring outside diameter, and base
ring inside diameter.
Analysis of Preliminary Base Ring Geometry
Using the methods described above for the analysis section, the program determines the approximate
compressive stress in the concrete for the preliminary geometry.
Selection of Final Base Ring Geometry
If the compressive stress calculated above is acceptable, then the preliminary geometry becomes the final
geometry. If not, then the bolt circle and base ring diameters are scaled up to the point where the
compressive stress will be acceptable. These become the final base ring geometry values.
Analysis of Base Ring Thicknesses
The analysis then continues through the thickness calculation described above, determining required
thicknesses for the base ring, top ring, and gussets.
Basic Skirt Thickness
The required thickness of the skirt under tension and compression loads is determined using the same
formula used for the compressive stress in the concrete, except using the thickness of the skirt rather than
the width of the base ring:
s = -W / A - M * c / I
Where
BASE RINGS 21-7
W = Weight of vessel (worst case).

M = Bending moment on vessel (worst case).
A = Cross sectional area of skirt.
c = Distance from the center of the base ring to the skirt (radius of skirt).
I = Moment of inertia of the skirt cross section.
In tension this actual stress is simply compared to the allowable stress, and the required thickness can be
calculated directly by solving the formula for t. In compression, the allowable stress must be calculated
from the ASME Code, per paragraph UG-23, where the geometry factor is calculated from the skirt
thickness and radius, and the materials factor is found in the Code external pressure charts. As with all
external pressure chart calculations, this is an iterative procedure. A thickness is selected, the actual stress
is calculated, the allowable stress is determined, and the original thickness is adjusted so that the allowable
stress approaches the actual stress.
Stress in Skirt Due to Gussets or Top Ring
If there are gussets or gussets and a top ring included in the base plate geometry, there is an additional
load in the skirt. Jawad & Farr have analyzed this load and determined that the stress in the skirt due to the
bolt load on the base plate is calculated as follows:
s = (1.5 * F * b) / (PI * h * t ** 2)
Where
F = Total load in one bolt = load on one gusset

b = Width of the gusset at the base
t = thickness of the skirt
h = height of the gusset.
Jawad & Farr note that this stress should be combined with the axial stress due to weight and bending
moment, and should then be less than three times the allowable stress. They thus categorize this stress as
secondary bending. The program performs the calculation of this stress, and then repeats the iterative
procedure described above to determine the required thickness of the skirt at the top of the base ring.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields

Base Ring Number
The base ring number should start out at 1 and increment by 1 for each successive base ring analyzed. A
blank entry for the base ring number will cause PVElite not to analyze the data for that base ring.
Base Ring Description
Enter an optional alpha-numeric description for the base ring to be analyzed. This may be a project
number that will help keep track of the base ring.
Analyze or Design Base Ring
The Base Ring program in PVElite can either analyze existing base rings or design new ones. Two valid
entries are
Analyze—Existing Base rings

Design—New Base rings
When in Design mode, PVElite may change the following items:
Number of Bolts
Size of Bolts
Bolt Circle Diameter
Outside Diameter of the Base ring
Inside Diameter of the Base ring
Temperature of Base Ring
Normally base rings operate at temperatures which are near ambient. If the base ring is at a higher
temperature, enter it here, otherwise leave the default temperature.
Thickness of Base Ring (TBA)
Enter the actual thickness of base ring. Any allowances for corrosion or mill tolerance etc. should be
subtracted from this entered thickness. PVElite will compute the required base ring thickness using the
simplified method and the neutral axis shift method. The user entered thickness value will be used only for
comparison. Please refer to Figure A.
Base Ring\Skirt\Bolt Material Specification
Enter the base ring material. Plate materials such as SA-516 70 and SA-36 are commonly used. You can
select the material from the Material Database by pressing the Database button. If your material is not
present, enter the allowable stresses at the base ring design metal temperature.
Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
If your base ring material is not in the database, enter the hot allowable stress here.
This field is for the base ring ambient allowable stress.

BASE RINGS 21-9
Inside Diameter of Base Ring (DI)
Enter the inside diameter of the base ring. This entry must be greater than 0 and less than the bolt circle
diameter and the base ring OD. If the you have specified the program to design the base ring, PVElite may
change this value. A good approximation for the base ring ID should be entered when using either the
Analyze or Design option. Please refer to Figure A.
Outside Diameter of Base Ring (DO)
Enter the outside diameter of the base ring. This entry must be greater than the base ring ID and the bolt
circle diameter. When in design mode, PVElite may change this value. Please refer to Figure A.
The nominal bolt diameters accepted by PVElite range between 1/2 and 4 inches (1.27 and 10.16)
centimeters. Values outside of this range will not be accepted. When in design mode PVElite may change
the nominal bolt diameter. The bolt diameters are
Bolt Size(inches) Root Area (sq. in.)
1/2 0.126
5/8 0.202
3/4 0.302
7/8 0.419
1 0.551
1 1/8 .0728
1 1/4 0.929
1 3/8 1.155
11/2 1.405
1 5/8 1.680
1 3/4 1.980
1 7/8 2.304
2 2.652
2 1/4 3.423
2 1/2 4.292
2 3/4 5.259
Bolt Size(inches) Root Area (sq. in.)
3 6.324
3 1/4 7.487
3 1/2 8.749
3 3/4 10.108
4 11.566
This information was adapted from Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment,
(c) 1984, p 425.
Number of Bolts
Enter the bolts that the base ring design calls for. If the BASE RINGS program is in design mode, it may
change the number of bolts being used. The bolts are sized based on the maximum load per bolt in the
operating case. The computation of the load per bolt is referenced in Jawad and Farr, equation 12.3. The
number of bolts can be between 4 and 120.
Diameter at Bolt Circle (DC)
Enter the diameter of the bolt circle. This value must be greater than the base ring Id and less than the base
ring OD. When in design mode, PVElite may change the bolt circle diameter. Whenever this happens, it
will be reported in the output. The word DESIGN will appear followed by the value and description of the
input the program has changed. Please refer to Figure A.
Bolt Table
TEMA Bolt Table

UNC Bolt Table
Irrespective of the table used, the values will be converted back to the user selected units.
BASE RINGS 21-11
Nominal Compressive Stress of Concrete
Enter the Nominal Compressive stress of the Concrete to which the base ring is bolted. This value is f'c in
Jawad and Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.
Are Gussets to be Used?
If your base ring design includes the use of gusset plates, check this field, otherwise continue.
Thickness of Top Ring Plate (TTA) (if any)
If your base ring design incorporates a top ring, enter its thickness here. If a thickness greater than 0.0 is
entered, PVElite will compute the required thickness of the top plate. If no top ring thickness is entered,
PVElite will not perform top ring thickness calculations. Please refer to Figure A.
Radial Width of Top Ring/Plate (TOPWTH) (if any)
Enter the radial width of the top ring or plate, if any. This is simply the half of (top ring OD - top ring ID).
This value must be entered if you entered it in the last field, and must be positive. Please refer to Figure A.
Top Ring/Plate Type per Moss ( Type 3-Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring )
Enter the type of top ring or plate per Moss (Type 3 = Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring). Refer to Dennis
Moss "Pressure Vessel Design Manual" p129. If type 3 or 4 is entered, the program will calculate per
p130.
External Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance that would be applied to the skirt, base plate, gussets and top ring. The
external corrosion allowance will simply be added to the required thickness of these components.
Skirt Thickness
Enter the thickness of the skirt here. This entry must be greater than 0. PVElite will automatically compute
the required skirt thickness for both combinations of bending and axial stress. PVElite uses the ASME
code compression allowable B for axial stresses.
Skirt Temperature
If the skirt is at an elevated temperature, enter it here. Normally, skirts are at ambient temperature.
Outside Diameter of Skirt at Base (DS)
Enter the skirt OD at the junction of the skirt and base ring. This value should be greater than the base ring
ID and less than the base ring bolt circle. Please refer to Figure A.
Joint Efficiency for Skirt Weld at Bottom Head
Enter the joint efficiency for the weld that joins the skirt to the bottom head. This value depends on the
weld detail used. Typical values range between 0.49 and 1.0.
Skirt Diameter at Bottom Head
Enter the diameter of the skirt at the bottom head of the vessel. Not all skirts are cylindrical. Some skirts
are cone shaped and as such have different diameters at the top and bottom.
Dead Weight of Vessel
Enter the weight of the vessel with all peripheral equipment (ladders, cages, catwalks, packing) etc. The
working fluid of the vessel should not be included here. This entry is optional and can be 0.
Operating Weight of Vessel
Enter the operating weight of the vessel here. This includes all contents and associated "hardware". This
value must be greater than 0.
Test Weight of Vessel
Enter the test weight of the vessel here. This weight will include the fluid used for the hydrotest of the
vessel. This entry is optional and can be 0.
Operating Moment of Base Ring
Enter the total moment exerted on the skirt by the wind, reboilers, attached piping etc. when the vessel is
operating. This value must be greater than 0.
Test Moment on Base Ring
Enter the test moment on the base ring. The entry for the test moment is optional and can be 0.
Are Stress Multipliers to be Used?
If you wish to increase the allowable stress the program uses for the skirt design, check this field.
Pop-up Input Fields

User-Specified Root Area of a Single Bolt
If your base ring design calls out for special bolts, enter the root area of a single bolt in this filed. Note,
however, this option is mutually exclusive from the design option. If this condition is detected, the
numbers from Table 2 (UNC) will be used.
BASE RINGS 21-13
Thickness of Gusset Plates (TGA)
Enter the thickness of the gusset plates to be used for this base ring. Any allowances for corrosion should
be considered when making this entry. Please refer to Figure A.
Temperature for Gussets (if not ambient)
Enter the temperature for the gusset plates. Normally, the gussets will operate at ambient temperature. If
the temperature is above ambient, enter it here.
Height of Gussets (HG)
Enter the gusset dimension from the base ring to the top of the gusset plate. The forces in the skirt are
transmitted to the anchor bolts through the gussets. Please refer to Figure A.
Distance from Bolts to Gussets (CG)
Enter the distance from a bolt to the nearest gusset. Normally, each bolt will have two gussets. This
distance would be 1/2 of the spacing between the gusset plates. Please refer to Figure A.
Average Width of Gusset Plates
Enter the average width of the gusset plates.
Number of Gussets per Bolt
Enter the number of gussets per bolt. Usually, each bolt will have 2 gusset plates associated with it. For
base rings that have a large number of bolts, this may not always be the case. In these occasions, each bolt
may have a single gusset plate associated with it.
Elastic Modules for Plates
The elastic modulus is used to determine the allowable stress for plates in compression according to AISC.
This is a required value. For most common steels, this value is 29E6 psi.
Factor for the Skirt Allowable at the Skirt Top
This factor is multiplied by the skirt operating allowable wherever it is used. For example:
The skirt allowable stress at the top would be = stress multiplier X joint efficient X skirt operating
allowable. If you do not wish to use this value, enter a 1.00 for this value. This multiplier is usually
between 1 and 2.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (B) at Base (OPE)
This factor will be multiplied by the Code compression allowable B for the operating case. PVElite will
look at the minimum of this factor times its allowable and the skirt yield stress times its allowable
multiplier. This minimum value will then be used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in the
skirt.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (B) at Base (TEST)
This factor will be multiplied by the Code compression allowable B for the test case. PVElite will look at
the minimum of this factor times its allowable times 1.5 and the skirt yield stress times its allowable
multiplier. This minimum value will then be used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in the
skirt.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (OPE)
PVElite will multiply the skirt yield stress by this factor. The minimum of this result and the basic hot
allowable stress times its factor will be the skirt operating allowable stress. This minimum value will then
be used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in the skirt.
Skirt Comp Allowable Mult for (SY) at Base (TEST)
PVElite will multiply the skirt yield stress by this factor. The minimum of this result and the basic hot
allowable stress times its factor will be the skirt test allowable stress. This minimum value will then be
used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in the skirt.
Figure A - BASE RING Geometry

BASE RINGS 21-15
Tailing Lug Analysis
Figure B - Tailing Lug Edit Window
The Tailing Lug calculation is included in the base ring analysis for a single or dual type design as
depicted in Figure B Tailing Lug Edit Window. The design is based on a lift position where bending does
not occur on the tailing lug. The main considerations for the design are the section modulus, shear, and
bearing stress at the pinhole and the weld strength.
The location of the center of the pinhole will be assumed radially at the edge of the outer most of the top
ring or the base ring, which ever is larger. In the absence of the top ring/plate the height of the tailing lug
is required. The tailing lug is assumed to be the same material as the gusset or base ring. Note that all
input fields pertain to one tail lug.
Discussion of Input
Tailing Lug Input

Perform Tailing Lug Analysis
Click this check box to perform the Tailing Lug analysis.
Tail Lug Type
Select the type of tailing lug (single or dual) used and illustrated on the figure below.
Centerline offset
Enter the offset dimension (OS) for the dual tailing lug design only.
Lug Thickness
Enter the lug thickness of the tailing lug.
Pin Hole Diameter
Enter the pin hole diameter. The center of the pin hole will be placed radially in-line with the larger of the
outer most edge of the top ring or the base ring (OD).
Weld Size Thickness
Enter the leg weld size.
Lug Height (only if no top ring)
Enter the tailing lug height measured form the top of the base ring.
The tailing lug design consists of a three part analysis:
The base ring assembly (base ring, skirt and top ring),
The strength of weld
The tailing lug itself
It is assumed that bending does not occur in the tailing lug. In the absence of the top ring only the base
ring and the decay length (e) are considered for the section modulus calculation. The table below lists the
allowable stresses used to check the design strength.
Stress Type Allowable Value
Shear at Pin Hole 0.4 Sy

Bearing Stress 0.75 Sy
Weld Stress 0.49 Sallow
BASE RINGS 21-17
Example
22-1
C H A P T E R 2 2
Chapter 22: THIN JOINTS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................22-2
Example..............................................................................22-10
Introduction
THIN JOINTS calculates the stresses in a metal bellows expansion joint of the type typically used in
piping systems and heat exchangers. The module does elastic stress analysis for the stresses due to the
internal and external pressures, and closing or opening of the joint. The maximum combined stress is used
to calculate the cycle life of the joint, which is based on the appropriate formula in the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 26 Edition 2004.
The THIN JOINT module enables engineers and designers to evaluate or design metal bellows expansion
joints. Since the module uses ASME Code procedures for evaluating these joints, the calculations are
acceptable to fabricators, engineering contractors, and petrochemical companies. Thus a consistent design
basis and a simple way to perform the calculations will be established, and individual engineers will be
effective in evaluating these critical components.
The module calculates the required thickness and elastic stresses using formulas in ASME Section VIII
Code, Division 1, Appendix 26. These formulas take into account both internal and external pressures, and
axial joint movement. The appendix covers both reinforced and un-reinforced expansion joints for U-
shaped and toroidal types with multiple convolutions and up to a 0.2 inch nominal thickness.
Each curve in Appendix 26 was digitized. The program picks points off of the curves and interpolates for
the results used in the stress calculations. These parameters are displayed as part of the output.
If the selected joint is reinforced or un-reinforced PVElite will perform the various stress and cycle life
computations for that joint type. Thus, there will be no extraneous output for a joint type that is not of
interest. In addition, for reinforced expansion joints, the stresses in the reinforcing element and any bolted
fastener, which may be holding the ring together are calculated as well.
Main Input Fields

Item Number
Displays the thin walled expansion joint number. This should typically start at 1 and increase by one for
each expansion joint in the file.
THIN JOINTS 22-3
Description
Displays an alphanumeric description of the expansion joint in this field. This should relate in some way
to the expansion joint i.e. (a project id).
Design Cycle Life, Number of Cycles
Displays the number of cycles that the expansion joint is to be designed for. This value is to be compared
to the total number of cycles that this design will be capable of handling.
Design Temperature
Displays the design temperature of the expansion joint. During normal operation, expansion joints
typically run cooler than the piping/pressure vessel. Determine that temperature and enter it here.
Displays the internal pressure to be exerted on the expansion joint.
Design External Temperature
The program will automatically update materials properties for external pressure calculations when you
change the design temperature.
The design external pressure at this temperature is a completely different design case than the internal
pressure case. Therefore this temperature may be different than the temperature for internal pressure.
Many external pressure charts have both lower and upper limits on temperature. If your design
temperature is below the lower limit, use the lower limit as your entry to the program. If your temperature
is above the upper limit the component may not be designed for vacuum conditions.
Displays the design pressure for external pressure analysis. This should be a positive value, i.e. 14.7 psia.
If you enter a zero in this field the program will not perform external pressure calculations.
Value Result
0.00 No External Calculation
14.7 Full Vacuum Calculation

Displays the cumulative design length of the bellow section. For the U-Shaped type bellows, the bellow
design length can be determined by multiplying the total number of convolution (N) and convolution pitch
(q). The design length will also be used to perform the external pressure analysis. For more information
refer to the following figures.
Thin Joint Type
Select the Thin Joint Type using the figures below.
U-Shaped
Figure A - U-Shaped Thin Joint

THIN JOINTS 22-5
Toroidal
Figure B - Toroidal Thin Joint
Reinforcement/Collar Information
Enable this box to activate the reinforcement dialog for entering ring and collar information.
Expansion Joint Bellows Material
Typical expansion joints are formed from various materials: stainless steels, monels, and inconels. An
example of a material is SA-516 70.
Enter the allowable stress of the bellows material at the operating temperature. If your material is not in
the tables, you must enter the properties manually.
Enter the allowable stress of the bellows material at the ambient temperature. If your material is not in the
tables, you must enter the properties manually.
Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows operating temperature. Tables of
elasticity versus temperature can be found in the ANSI/ASME B31.3 CODE for PRESSURE PIPING
table C-6.
Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temperature
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the bellows material at the bellows ambient temperature. Tables of
table C-6.
Poisson's Ratio
Displays Poisson's ratio for the bellow material (vb).
Inside Diameter of Bellows
Displays the inside diameter of the bellows (Db). This value will normally be equal to the pipe or vessel
inside diameter. Some geometries are larger in diameter than the attached cylinder. Thus, the bellows ID
will be larger than the vessel/pipe id. For more information refer to Figures A and B.
Convolution Depth
The convolution depth is the distance from the top of the convolution to the trough of the convolution.
This is referred as the variable w in the ASME Code. For more information refer to Figure A.
Convolution Pitch
The convolution pitch is the distance between the tops of successive bellows convolutions. This is referred
to as q in the ASME Code. For more information refer to Figure A.
Expansion Joint Opening Per Convolution
Deltaq is the total equivalent axial displacement range per convolution.
For example, for a total design movement of 1 inch with an expansion joint that had 8 convolutions, this
would result in deltaq = 1/8 = 0.125 in/conv.
Number of Convolution
Displays the total number of convolutions
Nominal Thickness of One Ply
Displays the nominal thickness (t) of the plate that the expansion joint is to be made of before it is pressed
or formed. Expansion joints are typically thin compared to the matching pipe. The final thickness of
bellow is referred to nt in Figures A and B.
Number of Plies
Displays the total number of plies (n) used to form the bellow wall. The final thickness of bellow is
referred to nt in Figures A and B.
End Tangent Length
Displays the End Tangent Length as described as Lt in Figure A. The Lt variable is required for the U-
Shaped bellows analysis only.
THIN JOINTS 22-7
Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor
Displays the fatigue strength reduction factor (Kg) per the ASME code Appendix 26. This factor accounts
for geometrical stress concentration factors due to thickness variations; weld geometries, surface notches
or environmental conditions.
The range of factor Kg is between 1 and 4 with its minimum value for smooth geometrical shapes and its
maximum for 90 degree welded corners and fillet welds.
Fatigue strength reduction factors can be determined from theoretical, experimental, or photo elastic
studies.
Material Condition
Select the method of which the U-Shaped bellow is being made of. This selection will be used to
determine the multiplier Kf for the combined meridional membrane and bending stress allowables.
Material Condition Kf
Annealed 1.5
Formed 3.0
Reinforcing Ring Present
Some applications of expansion joints include a continuous reinforcing ring which lies in the
convolutions. If your application includes a reinforcing ring, enable this field.
Fastener Bolt Present
If the expansion design includes a reinforcing ring, it may be held together by a bolted geometry in lieu of
a welded ring geometry. If your application includes a fastener, enable this field.
Pop-Up Input Fields

Mean Diameter
Enter the mean diameter (Dm) of toroidal bellows convolution. For more information refer to Figure B.
Distance Between Attachment Weld
Enter the distance between toroidal bellows attachment welds (Lw). For more information refer to the
toroidal bellows in Figure B.
Convolution Mean Radius
Enter the mean radius of toroidal bellows convolution (r) as depicted in the toroidal bellows in Figure B.
Reinforcing Ring Present?
Check the check box to enable the entries for the reinforcing ring information.
Reinforcing Ring Material
Enter the reinforcing ring material. An example of a material is SA-516 70. You can select the material
from the Material Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in the
database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/EDIT/ADD
MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
Ring Material Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the ring material at the operating temperature. If your material is not in the
tables, these properties must be entered manually.
Ring Material Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the ring material at the ambient temperature. If your material is not in the
Cross Sectional Diameter
Enter the ring cross sectional diameter (Dr). For more information refer to Figure A.
Enter the modulus of elasticity (Er) for the ring material at the bellows design temperature. Tables of
table C-6.
Weld Joint Efficiency
Enter the longitudinal weld joint efficiency for reinforcing ring (Cwr) (see UW-12).
Fastener Bolt Present?
Check this box to enable the entries for the bolt information.
Fastener Bolt Material
Enter the fastener material. An example of a material is SA-516 70. You can select the material from the
Material Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in the database, you
can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the
Main Menu.
THIN JOINTS 22-9
Fastener Bolt Material Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the fastener bolt material at the operating temperature. If your material is not
in the tables, these properties must be entered manually.
Fastener Bolt Material Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the fastener bolt material at the ambient temperature. If your material is not in
the tables, these properties must be entered manually.
Effective Length of Fastener Bolt
Enter the effective length of one reinforcing fastener (Lf) that is being stressed. This is typically the
distance from the center of the nut to the center of the head on the bolt. For more information refer to
Figure A.
Fastener Cross-Sectional Area
Enter the cross-sectional metal area of one reinforcing fastener (Af) that retains the ring.
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the fastener material (Ef) at the bellows design temperature. Tables of
table C-6.
Collar Present?
Check this box to enable the entries for the collar information.
Collar Material
Enter the collar material. An example of a material is SA-516 70. You can select the material from the
Material Database by clicking the Database button. If a material is not contained in the database, you
can enter its specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/ EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the
Main Menu.
Collar Material Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the collar material at the operating temperature. If your material is not in the
Collar Material Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
Enter the allowable stress of the collar material at the ambient temperature. If your material is not in the
Cross Sectional Thickness
Enter the collar cross sectional thickness (tc). For more information refer to Figures A and B.
Cross Sectional Length
Enter the collar cross sectional length (Lc). For more information refer to Figure A. For the toroidal
bellows, Lc is determined by dividing the collar cross section area with the collar thickness.
Enter the modulus of elasticity (Ec) for the collar material at the bellows design temperature. Tables of
table C-6.
Weld Joint Efficiency
Enter the longitudinal weld joint efficiency for tangent collar (Cwc) (see UW-12)
Example
23-1
C H A P T E R 2 3
Chapter 23: THICK JOINTS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................23-2
Example..............................................................................23-11
Introduction
This module applies to fixed tubesheet exchangers, which require flexible elements to reduce shell and
tube longitudinal stresses, tubesheet thickness, or tube-to-tubesheet joint loads. Light gauge bellows type
expansion joints within the scope of the Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association
(EJMA) are not included within the purview of this paragraph. The analysis contained within these
paragraphs are based upon the equivalent geometry used in "Expansion Joints for Heat Exchangers" by S.
Kopp and M.F. Sayre; however, the formulas have been derived based upon the use of plate and shell
theory. Flanged-only and flanged-and-flued types of expansion joints can be analyzed with this method.
(TEMA 8th Edition, Paragraph RCB-8, page 61).
The formulas contained in the module are applicable based on the following assumptions:
Applied loadings are axial

Torsional loads are negligible
The flexible elements are sufficiently thick to avoid instability.
The flexible elements are axisymmetric.
All dimensions are in inches and all forces are in pounds.
(TEMA Eighth Edition, Paragraph RCB-8.1, page 61: note that other systems of units may be used for
input and output, since the program converts these to inches and pounds for its internal calculations.)
The sequence of calculations used by the program is as follows:
1 Select a geometry for the flexible element per RCB-8.21 (user input)
2 Determine the effective geometry constants per RCB-8.22.
3 Calculate the flexibility factors per RCB-8.3.
4 Calculate the flexible element geometry factors per RCB-8.4.
5 Calculate the overall shell spring rate with all contributions from flexible shell elements per RCB-8.5.
6 Calculate "FAX" for each condition as shown in Table RCB-8.6. This requires that you run the PVElite
TUBESHEET module to determine the differential expansion and shellside and tubeside equivalent
pressures.
7 Calculate the flexible element stresses per RCB-8.7
8 Compare the flexible element stresses to the appropriate allowable stresses per the Code, for the load
conditions as noted in step 6.
9 Modify the geometry and rerun the program if necessary.
Note: More than one analysis may be needed to evaluate the hydrotest and uncorroded conditions.
THICK JOINTS 23-3
Thick Expansion joints can also be designed in the TUBESHEET module. This integration allows PVElite
to automatically transfer the needed information between the tubesheet and the expansion joint
calculation.
Figure A shows the geometry for the THICK JOINT module. (TEMA Figure RCB-8.21 and RCB-8.22).
Both the input geometry and the equivalent geometry used for the analysis are shown. The discussion of
input data below uses the nomenclature shown on this figure.
The stresses computed from the TEMA standard are compared to their respective allowables, as per APP-
5 in ASME code Sec. VIII Div. 1. The cycle life is also computed to address the fatigue consideration.
Figure A - Thick Joint Module Geometry
Figure B - Flanged Only Expansion Joint

Main Input Fields

Expansion Joint Number
Enter an ID number for the expansion joint. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that
start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Expansion Joint Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Design Temperature for Shell and Expansion Joint
Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure.
PVElite will automatically update materials properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change the
design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible to update them for
the given temperature.
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter of the expansion joint bellows.
Note that this is not the diameter at the shell, but the inside diameter at the outside of the bellows.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'ID'.
Expansion Joint Outside Diameter
Enter the outside diameter of the expansion joint bellows.
Note that this is not the diameter at the shell, but the outside diameter at the outside of the bellows.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'OD'.
Expansion Joint Flange (Minimum) Wall Thickness
Enter the minimum thickness of the flange or web of the expansion joint, after forming. This will usually
be somewhat thinner than the unformed metal.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'te'.

THICK JOINTS 23-5
Enter the corrosion allowance for the expansion joint.
This value will be subtracted from the minimum thickness of the flange or web for the joint.
Material Name
Note that the program uses the external pressure charts to determine the modulus of elasticity and material
type for the analysis.
When you change the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the shell, the program will
automatically update this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by
hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME
Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the design temperature.
Expansion Joint Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
When you change the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the shell, the program will
automatically update this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by
hand, be sure to verify your entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure
Vessel Code Section II Part D at the ambient temperature.
Enter the inside diameter of the shell at the point where the expansion joint is attached.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'G'.
Enter the actual wall thickness of the shell at the point where the expansion joint is attached.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'ts'.
Enter the corrosion allowance for the shell wall.
Shell Cylinder Length
TEMA Paragraph RCB 8-21 included the following note: lo and li are the lengths of the cylinders welded
be taken as zero.
cylinder length.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'li'.
Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Offset (Straight Flange)
inside knuckle.
Enter the distance from the shell cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web and the shell
diameter for joints with a square inside corner.
Note that in both cases this distance is frequently zero.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'fa'.
Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an inside knuckle.
Enter zero for an expansion joint with a sharp inside corner.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'ra'.

THICK JOINTS 23-7
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Offset
inside knuckle.
Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web and the outer
diameter for joints with a square outside corner.
Note that in both cases this distance is frequently zero, and that for an expansion joint with a outside
radius but no outside cylinder, this distance is the distance from the end of the knuckle to the symmetrical
centerline of the joint.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'fb'.
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an outside knuckle.
Enter zero for an expansion joint with a sharp outside corner. (Flanged Only)
This value is shown on Figure A as 'rb'.
Enter the Number of flexible shell elements in the flanged/flued expansion joint. As shown in Figure B
above.
Is There an Outer Cylinder?
be true when you have an expansion joint with only a half convolute. It may also be true when there is a
relatively long cylindrical portion between two half convolutes, as in the case of certain inlet nozzle
geometries for heat exchangers.
Differential Expansion Pressure (from Tubesheet)
You need to run the PVElite TUBESHEET program in order to determine this value. It is listed in the
output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis of fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Shellside Design Pressure
You do not need to run the PVElite TUBESHEET program to get this value - it is simply the design
pressure for the shell.
Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet)
output from the TEMA tubesheet analysis.
Shellside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded
The TUBESHEET module computes the Shellside Prime Design Pressure, in both corroded and
uncorroded conditions.
Tubeside Design Pressure
You do not need to run the PVElite TUBESHEET program to get this value - it is simply the design
pressure for the channel.
Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet)
Tubeside Prime Design Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded
The TEMA TUBESHEET module computes the Tubeside Prime Design Pressure, in both corroded and
Analyze Differential Expansion?
Check this field if you wish to run an analysis for this case. We recommend that you analyze all the cases
at first, but you may wish to eliminate some cases that are not controlling from the final printout.
Differential Expansion Pressure (from Tubesheet) Corroded
The TEMA TUBESHEET module computes the Differential Expansion Pressure, in both corroded and
THICK JOINTS 23-9
Analyze Shellside Pressure
Analyze Tubeside Pressure
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside Pressure
Analyze Shellside + Differential Expansion
Analyze Tubeside + Differential Expansion
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside + Differential Expansion
Pop-Up Input Fields

attached.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'to'.

convolute.
be taken as zero.
cylinder length.
This value is shown on Figure A as 'lo'.
The three most significant results for the THICK JOINT analysis are the spring constant for the joint, the
stresses in the joint, and the cycle life for the joint. These are discussed below.
Spring Constant
The program does not calculate the deflection of the joint. Instead it calculates the spring constant for the
joint, which can be used in the Tubesheet program or elsewhere to determine the effect of the joint on the
heat exchanger design.
Stresses
The program calculates the combined meridional bending and membrane stresses in the expansion joint
and the attached cylinders. According to ASME, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix CC, this stress should
be limited to KS, where K is 1.5 for flat sections (the annular ring or cylinders) and 3.0 for curved areas of
the inner and outer torus (or sharp corners). S is the basic allowable stress for the expansion joint material
at operating temperature. Note, however, that this stress limit applies only to the stresses due to pressure -
stresses due to deflection are limited by fatigue considerations rather than stress allowables. Thus the
program only prints the allowable membrane plus bending stress for the case of shellside pressure.
THICK JOINTS 23-11
Cycle Life
The cycle life of the joint is analyzed using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
Appendix CC. For Series 3xx stainless steels, nickel-chromium iron alloys, nickel-iron chromium alloys
and nickel-copper alloys, the equation for cycle life is as follows:
N < [(2.2)/(( 14.2*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.03 )]^2.17
For carbon and low alloy steels, Series 4xx stainless steels, and high alloy steels, the equation for cycle
life is:
N < [(2.0)/(( 15*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.011 )]^2.17
Where:
Kg = The fatigue strength reduction factor which accounts for the geometrical stress concentration
factors due to local thickness variations, weld geometries, and other surface conditions. The
range of Kg is 1.0 <= Kg <= 4.0 with its minimum value for smooth geometrical shapes and its
maximum for 90 deg. welded corners and fillet welds. The program uses a Kg of 1.0 when the
knuckle radius is greater than three times the expansion joint thickness.
Sn = The maximum combined meridional membrane and bending stress range in a flexible
element due to the cyclic components of pressure and deflection.
Eb = The modulus of elasticity at design temperature. The program determines both the modulus
of elasticity and the material type from the name of the external pressure chart given by the user.
Example
24-1
C H A P T E R 2 4
Chapter 24: ASME TUBESHEETS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................24-2
Example..............................................................................24-27
Introduction
This module computes the required thickness for tubesheets and shell/channel/tube stresses according to
the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 part UHX, Edition 2004. Tubesheet types that are addressed are
U-tube, fully fixed and floating. PVElite also computes the allowable Tube-Tubesheet joint load per
ASME Sec. VIII Appendix A. Flanged and flued (thick) expansion joint for a fixed tubesheet is also
analyzed per TEMA standard, 8th edition and ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 Appendix 5.
The ASME TUBESHEETS module is based on the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 part UHX. This
module will also compute loads on the tubes and compare them to their allowable loads per the
appropriate equation in Appendix A. Gasketed geometries for both fixed, floating and U-tube exchangers
are also analyzed as well as the thickness of the flanged extension (the TEMA equation has been used).
This module is good for both square or rectangular tube patterns.
When this module is executed it will display the output including equations for a given input. Afterwards,
PVElite will iterate for the required thickness of the tubesheet. The shell side and tubeside corrosion
allowances will then be added to these final results. PVElite also performs the plasticity calculations for
fixed tubesheets if high discontinuity stresses exist at the attachment between the tubesheet and shell or
channel. PVElite contains all of the graphs and functions that appear in section UHX.
Program analyzes all the load cases as per the section UHX, which includes various combinations of
pressure and temperature, in both the uncorroded and corroded (if specified) conditions. A summary table
is provided at the end of the output. User can choose to view the detailed printout of any load case.
Program can also analyze a thick expansion joint attached to a fixed tubesheet. The expansion joint spring
rate and stresses are computed per TEMA standard. The actual stresses are then compared with the
allowables provided in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1, Appendix 5 to check the joint's adequacy.
ASME TUBESHEETS 24-3
Figure A - Geometry for ASME Tubesheet Program
Main Input Fields

Item Number
Type an ID number for the tubesheet. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start
at 1 and increase sequentially. Note, that more than one pressure or temperature case can be run. Press the
+ key, enter a new tubesheet number and change the relevant input items.
Tubesheet Description
Type an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional. Entering a description will help
you keep up with each item when reviewing the output.
Shell/Channel Merge
Use this option to import data from the Shells and Heads module. Select the shell you want to add to the
model, and hit enter, all the appropriate data for that shell will be copied automatically.
Shell Design Pressure
Type the design pressure for the shell side of the exchanger. If the shell side has external pressure, enter a
negative pressure. The program will add this pressure with the positive pressure on the tube (channel)
side.
Type the minimum wall thickness for the shell of the exchanger. This value is used by the program to
calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheets. It is used in the computation of the Beta parameter
as well as the spring rate and other factors.
Type the shell side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate the corroded
thickness of the shell.
Type the uncorroded inside diameter of the exchanger shell.
Shell Temperature for Internal Pressure
Enter the design metal temperature for the shell. This is the design temperature for determining allowable
stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is
a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Channel Design Pressure
Type the design pressure for the tube side of the exchanger. If the tube side has a vacuum design
condition, enter a negative pressure. The program will add the absolute value of this pressure with the
positive pressure on the other side.
Channel Wall Thickness
Type the minimum wall thickness for the channel of the exchanger. This value is used by the program to
calculate the characteristic diameter for all tubesheet types. An example of such a parameter is the Beta
dimension for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Channel Corrosion Allowance
Type the tube side corrosion allowance for the exchanger. This value is used to calculate the corroded
thickness of the channel.
Channel Inside Diameter
Type the uncorroded inside diameter of the exchanger channel.

Channel Temperature for Internal Pressure
Enter the design metal temperature for the shell. This is the design temperature for determining allowable
stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal expansion. There is
a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Shell/Channel/Tubesheet/Tube/Bolt Material Specification
Type the ASME code material specification. The program will display all the materials matching the name
and occurrence number. Alternatively, you can click the Material Database button to search for a
material name in the Material Database. Click the Material Edit Properties button to change the
properties of the selected material. If a material is not contained in the database, you can manually enter
its specification and properties by selecting TOOLS, EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
Allowable Stress, Operating Temperature
the design temperature the program will automatically update this field, but only for BUILT-IN materials.
If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with
the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the design temperature.
Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature
allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to verify conformance with the latest edition
of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Tube Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the tubes. This value will be used to look up the allowable stress values
for the tube material from the material tables.
Is Welded Material Specified (not Seamless)
Check this box if the tube has a longitudinal weld seam or in other words it (not seamless) and the
material allowables are for welded product.
For computing allowable Tube-Tubesheet Joints loads, the allowable stress of a seamless tube is needed.
If the user selected a welded tube and clicks this check box, then the tube allowable stress is divided by
0.85 to an equivalent allowable of a seamless tube. This is per the note in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 UHX-
15.3 and App. A.
Tube Wall Thickness
Enter the wall thickness of the tubes. This value is used to determine the total tube area and stiffness. The
following table displays thicknesses for some common tube gauges:
B.W.G. Gauge Thickness (Inches) B.W.G. Gauge Thickness (Inches)
7 .180 17 .058
8 .165 18 .049
10 .134 19 .042
11 .109 22 .028
13 .095 24 .022
14 .083 26 .018
15 .072 27 .016
16 .065
Tube Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance for the tube.
Number of Tubes Holes
Enter the number of tube holes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube area and
stiffness.
Note: For U-tube exchangers, the number of tube holes in the tubesheet is normally equal to 2 times the
number of tubes.
Tube Pattern (Triangular, Square)
Enter the pattern of the tube layout. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term
'eta' in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts.
The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts. In the ASME code square patterns have a
90 degree layout angle and triangular patterns have a 60 degree angle.
Tube Outside Diameter
Enter the outside diameter of the tubes. This is usually an exact fraction, such as .5, .75, .875, 1.0, or 1.25.
The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used to calculate the term 'eta' in the tubesheet formulas. These
rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or
rotated square layouts.
Tube Pitch
Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and pattern are used
to calculate the term "eta" in the tubesheet thickness equation. These rules are same for triangular and
rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for square or rotated square layouts.
Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center
Enter the distance from the centerline of the exchanger to the centerline of outermost tube.
Distance Between Innermost Tube Centers (UL)
ASME defines this input as the largest center-to-center distance between adjacent tube rows. This is not
the tube pitch, however the values for the tube pitch and this value may be the same.
The expanded portion of a tube is that part which is radially expanded outward. When the tube is
expanded it is also pressed into the tubesheet. Simply enter this expanded length. Some tubes are welded
into place and this value may be 0. The maximum this value can be is the thickness of the tubesheet.
Tube Side Pass Partition Groove Depth (hg)
Enter the tube side pass partition groove depth.
Length of Tubes
Enter the length of the tubes. For U-tubesheet exchanger this is the straight length of the tube. For fixed
tubesheet exchanger this is the overall length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the inside face of the
other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of the tubes.
Enter the Unsupported Tube Span, SL and Tube End Condition, K for MAX (k*SL)
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required. Where,
SL - Unsupported Span of the tube

k - Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. The table below displays the different values of k:
K End Condition for unsupported spans between ...
0.6 two tubesheets
0.8 a tubesheet and a tube support
1.0 two tube supports
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that the give maximum combination of k*SL. SL
for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first baffle or the tube span between two
support baffles.
Type of Tubesheet
Choose the type of tubesheet that you will be analyzing. ASME has four distinct types of tubesheets for
analysis purposes. These are Fixed and U Tube, Stationary and Floating tubesheets.
A fixed tubesheet exchanger is one that is subject to loads arising from differential thermal expansion
between the tubes and the shell. It consists of stationary tubesheets on both sides. A fixed tubesheet
exchanger can be further classified into Configurations A, B, C or D.
U Tube exchangers can be categorized as integral with the shell, channel, both or gasketed on both sides.
Floating tubesheet heat exchangers consist of a stationary tubesheet and a floating tubesheet.
Based on the selected tubesheet type, the program will automatically reset other inputs on this dialog, such
as tubesheet gasketed with which side or tubesheet integral with which side. Some Tubesheet
configurations are illustrated below:
Tubesheet is integral with the Shell and is gasketed

on the Channel side and is not extending as a flange.
Tubesheet is integral with the Shell and is gasketed

on the Channel side and is extending as a flange.
Tubesheet is gasketed on both the Shell and the

Channel sides and is not extended as a flange. In an
alternative arrangement the tubesheet is extending
as a flange.
Tubesheet is integral with both the Shell and the

Channel. This is a fixed tubesheet exchanger;
flanged and flued expansion joint is used to reduce
the differential thermal expansion between the tubes
and the shell.
Stationary and U-Tube Tubesheet Configurations Permitted per ASME Section UHX:
a Tubesheet integral with both the shell and the channel.

b Tubesheet integral with the shell, gasketed with the channel and extended as a flange.
c Tubesheet integral with the shell, gasketed with the channel and not extended as a flange.
d Tubesheet gasketed with both the shell and the channel
e Tubesheet integral with the channel, gasketed with the shell and extended as a flange.
f Tubesheet integral with the channel, gasketed with the shell and not extended as a flange.
Floating Tubesheet Configurations Permitted per ASME Section UHX:
A Tubesheet integral
B Tubesheet gasketed and extended as a flange.
C Tubesheet gasketed and not extended as a flange.
D Tubesheet internally sealed
Fixed Tubesheet Configurations Permitted per ASME Section UHX:
a Tubesheet integral with both the shell and the channel.

b Tubesheet integral with the shell, gasketed with the channel and extended as a flange.
c Tubesheet integral with the shell, gasketed with the channel and not extended as a flange.
d Tubesheet gasketed with both the shell and the channel
Type of Floating Heat Exchanger
Choose the floating tubesheet exchanger, the following types are listed in the ASME code:
Floating tubesheet exchanger with an immersed Floating head. Stationary tubesheet can be
configuration a, b, c, d, e, or f and floating tubesheet can be configuration A, B, or C.
Floating tubesheet exchanger with an Externally Sealed Floating head. Stationary tubesheet can be
configuration a, b, c, d, e, or f and floating tubesheet is configuration A.
Floating tubesheet exchanger with an Internally Sealed Floating head. Stationary tubesheet can be
configuration a, b, c, d, e, or f and floating tubesheet is configuration D.
Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature
Type the design metal temperature for the tubesheet. This is the design temperature for determining
allowable stresses only. This temperature is not assumed to be the metal temperature for thermal
expansion. There is a separate input field for the actual metal temperature.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the appropriate tubesheet thickness. For all types of exchangers, the complete initial calculations
will be performed and printed using the original tubesheet thickness. PVElite will converge on the
minimum required tubesheet thickness for the given loading condition.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Shell Side
Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the shell side. This value is combined with the tubesheet
corrosion allowance channel side to calculate the corroded thickness of the tubesheet.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Channel Side
Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the channel side. This value is combined with the tubesheet
corrosion allowance on the shell side to calculate the corroded thickness of the tubesheet.
Enter the Outside Diameter of the Tubesheet
This value is referred to as "A" in the ASME code. For tubesheets extended as flange, this will be the
diameter of the extended portion of the tubesheet.
Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both)
Select NONE if the tubesheet is not gasketed on either side.
Select SHELL if the gasket is only on the shell side of the exchanger.
Select CHANNEL if the gasket is only on the channel side of the exchanger.
Select BOTH if the gaskets are on both sides of the exchanger.
Tubesheet Integral With
Select the side to which the Tubesheet is integral with.
Tubesheet Extended as Flange
Check this box to indicate that the tubesheet is extended as flange for bolting.
Enter Dimension G for Backing Flange (for Tubesheets with Backing Ring) or Gc for
Tubesheets Gasketed with Shell and Channel
This input is used for two types of ASME tubesheet geometries:
If the tubesheet has a backing ring, then enter the G dimension for the backing ring. G is the mid point
of the contact between the backing flange and the tubesheet. In this case it is a required input.
If the tubesheet is gasketed with both the Shell and the Channel, then enter the channel gasket reaction
diameter, Gc in this input. The program computes the Shell gasket reaction diameter, Gs from the
gasket/flange properties specified. In this case, this input is optional, required only if Gc is different
from Gs.
Is There a Shell Band
The shell band can be used to reduce the bending stresses in the tubesheet, shell, or channel.
Fixed tubesheets where the shell is integral to the tubesheet, configuration a, b, or c, can have a different
thickness of shell adjacent to the tubesheet. The band of shell can be of a different material as well. If that
is the case then check this box.
Figure B - Shell Band Input
Total Area of Untubed Lanes (Al)
Enter the total area of all the untubed lanes on the tubesheet. It is limited to 4*Do*p.
Where
Do = Equivalent diameter of outer limit circle.

p = tube pitch
Expansion Joint Type
Select the appropriate expansion joint type. The following options are available.
None - Select this option when there is no expansion joint in the heat exchanger.
Thin Expansion Joint - Select this option if the expansion joint is a bellows type expansion joint. The
figure below shows a unreinforced bellows type expansion joint. In this case you should use the Thin
Joint module to design the bellows type expansion joints (both reinforced and unreinforced). Then
specify the computed spring rate.
Figure C - Thin Expansion Joint
Thick Expansion Joint - Select this option if the expansion joint is:
Flanged and flue

Flanged only
No flanged or no flue.
You can specify 2 design options:
Existing - specify the spring rate for the expansion joint
Analyze - specify the expansion joint. geometry and let the program compute spring rate and stresses.
For more information, see Figure D - Thick Expansion Joint.
Expansion Joint Design Option
Existing - Select this option if you already know the spring rate of the flanged/flued expansion joint.
Analyze - Select this option if you want the program to compute the spring rate of the expansion joint
and stresses induced in the expansion joint
standard RCB-8.
Enter the Expansion Joint Spring rate in uncorroded condition. Different inputs for the uncorroded and
corroded spring rates are required for running the multiple load cases in both conditions.
Figure D - Thick Expansion Joint
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter (ID)
Enter the inside diameter of the expansion joint, shown as "ID" in the figure above. This value is used by
the program to calculate the force on the cylinder, and the equivalent pressure of thermal expansion.
Expansion Joint Outside Diameter (OD)
Enter the outside diameter of the expansion joint, shown as "OD" in the figure above.
Expansion Joint Flange (Minimum) Wall Thickness (te)
Enter the minimum thickness of the flange or web of the expansion joint, after forming. This is usually
thinner than the unformed metal. This value is shown as te, in the above figure.
Enter the corrosion allowance for the expansion joint. This value will be subtracted from the minimum
thickness of the flange or web for the joint. Some common corrosion allowances are listed below:
0.0625 inches (2 mm) 1/16"

0.125 inches (3 mm) 1/8"
0.25 inches (6 mm) 1/4"
Expansion Joint Knuckle Offset (Straight Flange) (fa)
inside knuckle.
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Offset (fb)
outside knuckle. Enter the distance from the outer cylinder to the intersection of the expansion joint web
and the outer diameter for joints with a square outside corner. Note that in both cases this distance is
frequently zero, and that for an expansion joint with a outside radius but no outside cylinder, this distance
is the distance from the end of the knuckle to the symmetrical centerline of the joint.
Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Radius (ra)
Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an inside knuckle. Enter zero for an expansion joint
with a sharp inside corner.
Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Radius (rb)
Enter the knuckle radius for an expansion joint with an outside knuckle. Enter zero for an expansion joint
with a sharp outside corner. (Flanged Only)
Enter the number of flexible shell elements in the flanged/flued expansion joint. Two flexible shell
elements constitute 1 convolution of the Expansion Joint.
Shell Cylinder Length ( Li )
be taken as zero.
automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this length if it is less than the
cylinder length.
Outer Cylinder on the Thick Expansion Joint
be true when you have an expansion joint with only a half convolution (1 FSE). It may also be true when
there is a relatively long cylindrical portion between two half convolutions, as in the case of certain inlet
nozzle geometries for heat exchangers.
Pop-Up Input Fields

Fillet or Groove Weld Leg Length
If the tubes on your exchanger are welded to the tubesheet, then enter the fillet weld or groove weld leg
length. Some designs incorporate either only a groove or fillet weld. Sometimes both are used. These
values are used to determine the weld strengths and the required weld sizes.
Refer to paragraph UHX-15 in the ASME Code for more details.
Weld Type
Following options are available for the connecting tube/tubesheet welds:
Full Strength A full strength tube-to-tubesheet weld is one in which the design strength is
equal to or greater than the maximum allowable axial tube strength. In other
words the joint is at least as strong as the tube.
Partial Strength A partial strength weld can be designed based on the actual tube-tubesheet axial
load
Seal Weld/No Weld No calculations are performed in this case.
Information on these weld types can be found in the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 paragraph
UHX-15.
Design Strength
This term is Fd as defined in the Code paragraph UHX-15. The design strength should not be greater than
Ft (tube strength) which is pi.t.(do - t)Sa. This value is used to determine the minimum acceptable
fillet/groove weld size that connects the tube to the tubesheet.
This value is required for U-tube tubesheet exchanger. But, is optional for fixed and floating tubesheet
exchangers.
For partial strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, the higher of the
actual tube-to-tubesheet load and the user entered design strength will be used to size welds.
For full strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, tube strength (Ft) is used
to size welds.
Method for Computing Allowable loads for Tube-to-Tubesheet Joints
The following methods are available:
ASME Sec. VIII Div. I App. A This method is available for fixed and floating tubesheet heat
exchangers. It covers many types of tube-tubesheet joints, such as
welded, brazed and expanded.
ASME Sec. VIII Div. I UHX-15 This method provides rules for computation of allowable loads for
Full strength and Partial strength Tube-Tubesheet welds.
Classification for Tube Joint Connection (1 - 11)
Enter a value between 1 and 11 based on the following table from the ASME VIII appendix A table A-2.
1 a Welded only, a >= 1.4t 1.00 .80
2 b Welded only t <= a < 1.4t .70 .55
3 c Brazed examined 1.00 .80
4 d Brazed not fully examined 0.50 .40
5 e Welded a >= 1.4t, exp. 1.00 .80
6 f Welded a < 1.4t,exp,2 grooves .95 .75
7 g Welded a < 1.4t,exp,1 grooves .85 .65

8 h Welded a < 1.4t,exp,0 grooves .70 .50
9 i Expanded 2 or more grooves .90 .70
10 j Expanded single groove .80 .65
11 k Expanded no grooves .60 .50

Is Tube-Tubesheet Joint Tested
Check this box if the Tube-Tubesheet joint is tested. In that case the program will use the higher value of
factor fr from the table A-2 in ASME code, Sec VIII, Div 1.
ASME Tube Joint Reliability Factor
Enter a value between .40 and 1.0 based on the following table from ASME VIII appendix A table A-2.
This is needed when the tube connection class is not specified above. See the table above for these factors.
Interface pressure, Po and Pt
Enter the Interface pressures, Po and Pt, between the tube and the tubesheet hole
Po Interface Pressure that remains after expanding the tube at fabrication.

Pt Interface Pressure due to differential thermal growth.
These pressures are usually established analytically or experimentally. But, must consider the effect of
change in material strength at operating temperature.
This input is required only for the tube joint types i, j and k, as defined in table A-2 in ASME Sec VIII,
Div-1 App. A.
If there is no expansion joint, enter a zero (0.0). If there is a thin walled expansion joint, enter a one (1.0).
If there is a thick walled expansion joint, enter the actual spring constant for the joint. The expansion joint
spring rate should be calculated using the PVElite THICKJNT program, the rules in TEMA RCB-8, or a
similar analysis technique. The spring rate reported from the THICKJNT program is reported in units of
pounds per inch.
If there is no expansion joint, enter a zero (0.0). If there is a thin walled expansion joint, enter a one (1.0).
If there is a thick walled expansion joint, enter the actual spring constant for the joint. The expansion joint
spring rate should be calculated using the PVElite THICKJNT program, the rules in TEMA RCB-8, or a
similar analysis technique. The spring rate reported from the THICKJNT program is reported in units of
pounds per inch. The uncorroded and corroded spring rates are required for running the multiple load
cases in uncorroded and corroded condition.
Expansion Joint Projection from Shell ID
For fixed tubesheet heat exchangers that have an expansion joint enter the value (wj). This distance is
measured from the ID of the shell to the ID of the expansion joint. This geometry is illustrated in section
UHX of ASME Code VIII Div. 1 pressure vessel code.
Metal Temperatures
It is important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints or floating
tubesheets, that you enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may
have to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Frequently the metal
temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to thermal resistances. For example, if
the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat
transfer coefficient, then the tube temperature will be quite close to the shell temperature. Don't forget to
evaluate the condition of shellside or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this
design condition may govern the exchanger design.
Tubesheet Metal Temperature at the Rim. Enter the actual metal temperature for the tubesheet at the
rim, under realistic operating conditions.
Shell Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell at the tubesheet,
under realistic operating conditions.
Channel Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for the channel at the
tubesheet, under realistic operating conditions.
The following metal temperatures are required only for fixed tubesheet exchangers.
Mean Shell Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell along its length, under
realistic operating conditions.
Mean Tube Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the tube along its length, under
realistic operating conditions.
Run Multiple Load Cases for Fixed Tubesheet ?
Check this box if you want to run multiple load cases for the tubesheet design, per the ASME standard.
This is a requirement of the ASME code.
Load Case # Corroded Uncorroded
1 Fvs+Pt-Th+Ca Fvs+Pt-Th-Ca
2 Ps+Fvt-Th+Ca Ps+Fvt-Th-Ca
3 Ps+Pt-Th+Ca Ps+Pt-Th-Ca
4 Fvs+Fvt+Th+Ca Fvs+Fvt+Th-Ca
5 Fvs+Pt+Th+Ca Fvs+Pt+Th-Ca
6 Ps+Fvt+Th+Ca Ps+Fvt+Th-Ca
7 Ps+Pt+Th+Ca Ps+Pt+Th-Ca
8 Fvs+Fvt-Th+Ca Fvs+Fvt-Th-Ca
Note: Fvt, Fvs - User defined Shellside and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, PT - Shell side and Tube-side Design Pressures.
Th - With or without Thermal Expansion.
Ca - With or without Corrosion Allowance
Enter the Shell/Channelside Vacuum Pressures
When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the user can specify shell/channel side vacuum
pressures. This should be a positive entry. For example for full atmospheric vacuum condition enter a
value of 15.0 psig. If no value is specified then 0 psi will be used.
Select Load Cases for Detailed Printout
When analyzing the design with the multiple load cases, the program will generate summarized results for
all the load cases in tabular form. To see the detailed equations and intermediate calculations for one or
more load cases select those load cases.
Is This a Pressure Only Case?
The program designs the tubesheet under all the load cases. If you manually want to run the load cases
then use this input. If you check this box the allowable stress amplification factor of 2 will be used and
there will be no stresses due to differential thermal expansion.
Enter the ID of the Flanged Portion (required in some cases)
Enter the internal diameter of the shell/channel or floating head to which the tubesheet is gasketed.
If this input is left blank, the program uses either the shell or channel internal diameter, based on, the side
the tubesheet is gasketed on. But, this input is needed for a floating tubesheet exchanger, that is gasketed
to the floating head.
For tubesheets that are gasketed with both the shell and channel, this input is for the shell side.
Enter the OD of the Flanged Portion (required in some cases)
Enter the outer diameter of the flanged portion (shell/channel/floating head) to which the tubesheet is
gasketed.
If this input is left blank, it is set equal to the tubesheet OD. Specify this input, for cases where flanged
portion OD is different from the tubesheet OD.
For tubesheets that are gasketed with both the shell and channel, this input is for the shell side.
in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The
the gasket.
Enter the inner diameter of the gasket. The program uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the
the gasket.
Specify Gasket properties m and y
Note: For gasket properties, refer to the table in the Flange Module.
correlations:
Facing Sketch Description
2 1/64 inch nubbin
Gasket Thickness
Nubbin Width
figure below.
Enter the width of the pass partition gasket. Using the gasket properties specified and the known width,
PVElite will compute the effective seating width and compute the gasket loads contributed by the partition
gasket.
Specify Partition Gasket properties m and y
Note: For gasket properties, refer to the table in the Flange Module.
Specify Face Facing Sketch for Partition Gasket
Using Table 2-5.2 of the ASME code, select the facing sketch number for the partition gasket.
metallic ring.
Enter the nominal bolt diameter. The tables of bolt diameter included in the program range from 0.5 to 4.0
inches.
Thread Series
TEMA Bolt Table

UNC Bolt Table
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. This is usually an even number.
Fillet Weld Between Flange and Shell/Channel
Enter the fillet weld height between the tubesheet flange and the shell or channel outside surface. PVElite
will use this number to calculate g1 (hub thickness at the large end).
Operating Flange Bolt Load (Wm1)
Specify the alternate operating bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it is
greater than the operating bolt load computed by the program.
Seating Flange Bolt Load (Wm2)
Specify the alternate seating flange bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it
is greater than the seating bolt load computed by the program.
Flange Design Bolt Load (W)
Specify the alternate flange design bolt load such as from the mating flange. This value will be used if it is
greater than the flange design bolt load computed by the program.
Thickness of Extended Portion of Tubesheet
Enter the flange thickness. This thickness will be used ion the calculation of the required thickness. The
final results should therefore, agree with this thickness to within about five percent. Since the ASME Code
does not have a single equation to compute this required thickness, the appropriate formula from TEMA
8th edition was used.
Design Temperature for Integral Part
Enter the actual metal temperature for either the channel or shell part. This temperature will be used to
retrieve the elastic properties from the material tables.
Shell Band Material
Specify the material for the shell band. This material can be different than the shell material.
Shell Band Input
Fixed Tubesheets, in which the shell is integral to the tubesheet configuration A, B, or C, can have a
different thickness of shell adjacent to the tubesheet. The band of shell can be made of a different material
as well. This procedure can be used to reduce the bending stresses in the tubesheet, shell, or channel.
Refer to Figure B.
attached.
This value is shown on Figure D as 'to'.
convolute.
be taken as zero.
cylinder length.
This value is shown on Figure D as 'lo'.
Part UHX of the Code is divided into four major sections. The first section discusses u-tube exchangers,
the second discusses fixed tubesheet exchangers, the third section discusses floating tubesheet exchangers
and the fourth section discusses tube-to-tubesheet joint weld. There is a sequence of steps to follow when
performing calculations for each type of exchanger. PVElite will perform each step and print the applicable
formula substitution and answers for each step. All results shown are for the given geometry. In addition,
the program will iterate for the minimum thickness of the tubesheet. If needed PVElite will also perform
the second elastic iteration if high discontinuity stresses exist. The program can run multiple load cases for
the fixed tubesheet design as per the ASME code. The table below displays the load cases that are
considered for a fixed tubesheet exchanger.
1 Fvs+Pt-Th+Ca Fvs+Pt-Th-Ca
2 Ps+Fvt-Th+Ca Ps+Fvt-Th-Ca
3 Ps+Pt-Th+Ca Ps+Pt-Th-Ca
4 Fvs+Fvt+Th+Ca Fvs+Fvt+Th-Ca
5 Fvs+Pt+Th+Ca Fvs+Pt+Th-Ca
6 Ps+Fvt+Th+Ca Ps+Fvt+Th-Ca
7 Ps+Pt+Th+Ca Ps+Pt+Th-Ca
8 Fvs+Fvt-Th+Ca Fvs+Fvt-Th-Ca
Note: Fvt, Fvs - User defined Shell side and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, PT - Shell side and Tube-side Design Pressures.
Th - With or without Thermal Expansion.
Ca - With or without Corrosion Allowance
When running these load cases the program automatically adjusts the allowable stresses based on if it is a
pressure only load case or pressure + thermal load case.
Upset conditions may need to be analyzed. You can enter your own shell/channel vacuum pressures for
the multi-case analysis, e.g. 0, 15 psi. This will simulate one of the process fluid streams being stopped,
while the other stream continues.
In addition to satisfying stress criteria for the tubesheet, the tubes must also be capable of withstanding the
axial forces imposed on them due to differential thermal expansion. These forces must be less than the
allowable force on the tube per the ASME code equations (App A or UHX-15). Tube stresses are also
checked against the criteria in section UHX..
Finally, discontinuity stresses must be less than their allowables. If these allowables are exceeded, PVElite
will perform a second elastic iteration. This is where the plasticity of the integral component is considered.
Typically, when this iteration is performed, the stress values will decrease below their allowable values. If
for any reason they do not, the geometry of the unit must be reconsidered.
If your tubesheet contains a center groove, the groove depth should be subtracted from the overall
tubesheet thickness. Having a local shell band adjacent to the tubesheet can also reduce bending stress at
the junction of shell/channel and tubesheet.
Display of Results on Status Bar
As the user enters the data, program performs the calculation and displays the important results on the
status bar. Any error messages are also displayed. This allows a quick design of the tubesheet and makes it
easier to try various configurations to select the best one. Any failures are indicated in red. Here is a
sample:
Designing a Thick Expansion Joint in the Tubesheet Module:
After you input the thick expansion joint geometry in the Tubesheet module, the program uses the
following process to design the expansion joint:
3. Compute the expansion joint spring rate

4. Use the expansion joint spring rate in the fixed tubesheet calculations
5. Use the results of the tubesheet calculation, along with the prime pressures, P’s, P’t, Pd (computed
using the TEMA standard) to compute the expansion joint stresses.
6. Run a corresponding expansion joint calculation for each tubesheet load case. The program
displays the results for the worst case. (detailed results are also available).
Example
25-1
C H A P T E R 2 5
Chapter 25: HALF-PIPES
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................25-2
Example..............................................................................25-7
Introduction
HALF-PIPE performs pressure calculations for half-pipe jackets attached to cylindrical shells using the
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.
HALF-PIPE performs required thickness and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure calculations for
cylindrical shells with half-pipe jackets attached. The module is based on the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Edition 2004. Specifically, the module is based on the rules in
Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE.
The module first performs shell thickness calculations based on both the internal pressure and the
externally applied half-pipe jacket pressure. In addition to the thickness calculations, the jacket MAWP is
computed for both the input shell thickness and the required shell thickness. Once the required thickness
of the shell is determined, the half-pipe jacket thickness is calculated. Finally, based on the shell and
jacket thicknesses, an appropriate fillet weld size is calculated.
It is important to note the limitations of the HALF-PIPE module. First, the half-pipe jacket analysis
performed is only valid for the cylindrical geometries shown in Figure EE-4. These are the only two
geometries addressed by paragraph EE-1. The analysis of rectangular or square jacketed geometries is not
supported. The second limitation on the HALF-PIPE module is the acceptable Nominal Pipe Sizes.
Appendix EE only includes charts for Nominal Pipe Sizes 2, 3, and 4. Therefore, Nominal Pipe Sizes
greater than 4 or less than 2 will not be accepted in the input. Although there are no charts for Nominal
Pipe Sizes 2.5 and 3.5, HALF-PIPE will accept these sizes and perform iterations between the given
charts. Additionally, if the half-pipe is a nonstandard pipe size or has a formed radius, the actual radius is
used in the calculations. HALF-PIPE takes full account of corrosion allowance. Actual thickness values
and corrosion allowances are entered, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition.
Figure A - Acceptable HALF-PIPE Module Geometries

HALF-PIPES 25-3
Main Input Fields

Item Number
Type the Shell Section ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or numbers that start at 1
and increase sequentially.
Half-Pipe Section Description
Type an alphanumeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Inside Diameter of Shell
Type the inside diameter of the shell or head. The value entered should be the uncorroded dimension of
the inside diameter. This analysis is only valid for cylindrical shells, therefore, inputting inside diameter
values for torispherical, elliptical, spherical, or conical heads will produce erroneous results. Please refer
to 'Din' in Figure A.
Thickness of Shell
Type the thickness of the shell used to withstand the internal pressure. This thickness value will be tested
to see if it can withstand both the internal shell pressure and the externally applied jacket pressure. Please
refer to 'Ts' in Figure A.
Internal Pressure in Shell
Type the internal design pressure used in the vessel analysis. This value will be used as an initial check on
the required thickness of the shell. The value entered should be a positive value, i.e. 14.7 psia.
Type the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. PVElite will automatically update
material properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the
allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible for updating them for the given temperature.
Shell Section Material Name
Type the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable tables.
Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by right clicking and selecting
DATABASE, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the database, you can enter its
specification and properties manually by selecting TOOLS/EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
Shell Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
field, but only for BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be sure to verify your
entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at
the design temperature.
Shell Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
the ambient temperature.
Type the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the inside diameter for
Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal Seams
Type the efficiency of the welded joint for shell sections with welded seams. This will be the efficiency of
the longitudinal seam in the cylindrical shell. Refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in
determining this value.
Nominal Pipe Size of Half-Pipe Jacket
Type the nominal pipe size of the half-pipe jacket. The pipe size entered must lie within the range of
values supported in ASME Section VIII, Div. 1, Appendix EE. The supported sizes range between NPS 2
inch and NPS 4 inch.
If working in SI units, the proper conversion values must be entered. For example, if working with a NPS
50 pipe, the corresponding SI value of 5.08 cm must be entered. The following table lists the accepted
values for the NPS.
English Input NPS NPS SI
2.0 in 50 5.08 cm
2.5 in 65 6.35 cm
3.0 in 80 7.62 cm
3.5 in 90 8.89 cm
4.0 in 100 10.16 cm

HALF-PIPES 25-5
Radius of Formed Half-Pipe Jacket
Type the radius of the formed half-pipe. This value will be used rather than the standard nominal pipe
sizes. Please refer to 'r' in Figure A.
Thickness of Half-Pipe Jacket
Type the thickness of the jacket used to withstand the internal pressure. If the thickness value of the jacket
is not adequate to withstand the internal pressure, an acceptable thickness will be determined. Therefore, if
the program is used for design purposes, enter a minimal value for jacket thickness. Please refer to 'Tjck'
in Figure A. The program will determine an appropriate pipe schedule through iteration.
It is important to note that the program selected pipe schedules include a standard mill tolerance of 0.875
(a reduction of 12.5%). This tolerance will not, however, be included in the user input value of thickness.
This allows users to include their own mill tolerance in their input value, without having this value further
adjusted.
Design Pressure in Jacket
Type the internal design pressure used in the half-pipe jacket analysis. This value will be used to
determine the required thickness of both the shell and the jacket. The value entered should be a positive
value, i.e. 14.7 psia.
Design Temperature for Jacket Pressure
Type the temperature associated with the internal jacket pressure. PVElite will automatically update
material properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change the design temperature. If you entered the
allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible for updating them for the given temperature.
Jacket Material Name
Type the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable tables.
Alternatively, you can select the material from the Material Database by clicking the DATABASE button.
If a material is not contained in the database, you can enter its specification and properties manually by
Jacket Allowable Stress, Design Temperature
the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the jacket, the program will automatically update this
the design temperature.
Jacket Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature
the internal design temperature, or the thickness of the jacket, the program will automatically update this
entry to assure conformance with the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section II Part D
at the ambient temperature.
Corrosion Allowance of Jacket
Type the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the inside diameter for
the corrosion allowance you enter. Please refer to 'CAJ' in Figure A.
Shell Thickness Calculations
The first calculation the HALF-PIPE Module performs is the required thickness of the shell due to the
internal pressure. This value of required thickness is calculated using Equation 1 from Paragraph UG-27
of the ASME Code. The corroded value of thickness is used in this calculation. Because the exterior of the
shell wall is also used as the internal half-pipe jacket wall (for more information see the figure displayed
under the Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis section), both the corrosion allowance of the shell and the
corrosion allowance of the jacket must be accounted for. Both the calculation and the result are displayed
in this section of the output.
Once the required thickness due to inside pressure is determined, the required thickness due to the external
pressure (jacket pressure) is determined and displayed. This value is obtained through the pressure
calculations discussed in the next section.
Pressure Calculations for Input Shell Thickness
The calculations displayed in this section of the output are the external (jacket) pressure calculations,
performed using the input value of shell thickness. The first step in the pressure calculations is to
determine the K-factor from the appropriate chart. The chart is selected based on the Nominal Pipe Size of
the jacket and the K-factor is a factor of the shell inside diameter and the shell thickness. Both the chart
and K-factor are displayed in the output. As stated earlier, for Nominal Pipe Size 2.5 or 3.5, iteration is
performed between the charts to obtain the K-factor. When this is the case, the output will display the two
charts from which the iteration was performed.
The next step in the external pressure calculations is to determine the longitudinal stress. This calculation
accounts for the corrosion allowance by using a corroded value of the shell inside radius, as well as the
corroded value of the shell thickness. Using the longitudinal stress and the previously determined K-
factor, the permissible jacket pressure is determined using Equation 1, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE. The
permissible jacket pressure is considered the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure for the input shell
thickness, and it is compared to the input jacket design pressure.
HALF-PIPES 25-7
Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness Calculations
The input jacket thickness is tested to see if it is adequate to withstand the internal pressure of the jacket.
The calculation is based on Equation 2, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE. As in previous calculations, the
corrosion allowance is included in the thickness calculation. If the input thickness is not adequate, the
program iterates for an appropriate pipe thickness. The iteration begins with Schedule 5S pipe and
continues on until an acceptable schedule is found.
As mentioned in the Discussion of Input Data section of this chapter, the program selected pipe schedule
is adjusted by a standard mill tolerance value (0.875). The user input value of thickness, however, does not
use the mill tolerance adjustment. In the event that the input thickness is not adequate, both the selected
pipe schedule and the adjusted thickness are displayed in the output.
Minimum Fillet Weld Size Calculations
As mentioned in Paragraph EE-1, "The fillet weld attaching the half-pipe jacket to the vessel shall have a
throat thickness not less than the smaller of the jacket or shell thickness." Therefore, the program selects
the smaller of the two thicknesses, multiplies by a weld factor (1.414), and uses this value as the minimum
fillet weld size. The output report indicates which of the two thicknesses that the calculation was based
upon.
Summary of Results
The first values displayed in the summary section are the shell thickness values. The echo of the input
thickness is displayed along with the results of the two required thickness calculations. The comparison of
these results provides a quick check of whether the thickness of the shell is governed by the internal or
external pressure. The next three displayed values are the jacket pressure results. The input design
pressure is shown along with the MAWP for both the input thickness and the required thickness. The next
displayed values are those of the half-pipe jacket thickness. The input thickness is shown along with the
required thickness. Additionally, if the input thickness is not adequate, the thickness selected by the
program is displayed. Finally, the minimum fillet weld size is shown.
Example
26-1
C H A P T E R 2 6
Chapter 26: LARGE OPENINGS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................26-2
Example Problem ...............................................................26-4
Introduction
PVElite analyzes flat heads as discussed in Chapter 4 of this User Manual. However, the program will also
analyze a large nozzle in the welded flat head that has a large centrally located opening. This program is
based on the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1, Appendix 2 and Appendix 14 of the 2004 Edition.
This module computes three different kinds of stresses which act on flat heads that have a hole or nozzle
whose inside diameter is greater than 1/2 of the outside diameter of the flat head. Geometries with or
without an attached nozzle may be analyzed.
The first step in this process is to analyze the flange as a flat head and determine the total moment acting
on the flange for the operating case. Since there is no gasket, the gasket seating case is neglected. The
radial flange, tangential flange and longitudinal hub stresses are computed in accordance with Appendix 2.
These three stresses, Sr*, St*, Sh* and some geometry constants are used to determine the actual radial,
tangential, and longitudinal hub stresses. Two sets of stresses are computed, one for the head/shell
juncture, and the second for the opening head juncture. If all of the computed stresses are below the
allowable stresses, the geometry is considered satisfactory. If any stress is greater than its allowable, the
geometry must be reconsidered.
Figure A - Attached Nozzle Geometry

LARGE OPENINGS 26-3
Figure B - Geometry for an opening without an attached nozzle
Main Input Fields

Opening Diameter Bn:
Enter the new (un-corroded) inside diameter of the nozzle.
Large End Hub Thk (g1s)
Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub inside the shell labeled g1(shell) in Figure A or Figure B.
Small End Hub Thk (g0s)
Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub inside the shell labeled g0(shell) in Figure A or Figure B.
Hub Length (hs)
Enter the length of the hub inside the shell labeled h(shell) in Figure A or Figure B.
Large Eng Hub (g1n)
Enter the thickness of the large end of the hub of the nozzle labeled g1(nozzle) in Figure A or Figure B.
Small End Hub Thk (g0n)
Enter the thickness of the small end of the hub of the nozzle labeled g0(nozzle) in Figure A or Figure B.
Hub Length (hn)
Enter the length of the hub of the nozzle labeled h(nozzle) in Figure A or Figure B.
Example Problem
27-1
C H A P T E R 2 7
Chapter 27: RECTANGULAR VESSELS
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................27-2
Example Problem ...............................................................27-19
Introduction
RECTANGULAR VESSELS performs internal pressure calculations for rectangular vessels using the
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.
RECTANGULAR VESSELS performs stress calculations and Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
calculations for the rectangular, obround, and circular vessels described in the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2001, A-2003, Appendix 13. The calculations are taken from
sections 13-6 through 13-13.
The module will analyze the following vessels:
Fig. 13-2 (a)(1) - Vessel with equal long-side and short-side thickness. (Figure A)
Fig. 13-2 (a)(2) - Vessel with differing long-side thickness. (Figure B)
Fig. 13-2 (a)(3) - Vessel with rounded corners. (Figure C)
Fig. 13-2 (a)(4) - Reinforced vessel. (Figure D)
Fig. 13-2 (a)(5) - Non-continuous reinforced vessel with rounded corners.(Figure E)
Fig. 13-2 (a)(6) - Non-continuous reinforced vessel with rounded corners. (Figure F)
Fig. 13-2 (a)(7) - Rectangular vessel with single stay plate/row of bars. (Figure G)
Fig. 13-2 (a)(8) - Rectangular vessel with two stay plates/rows of bars. (Figure H)
Fig. 13-2 (b)(1) - Obround vessel. (Figure I)
Fig. 13-2 (b)(2) - Reinforced obround vessel. (Figure J)
Fig. 13-2 (b)(3) - Obround vessel with single stay plate/row of bars. (Figure K)
Fig. 13-2 (c)(1) - Circular vessel with single diametral plate. (Figure L)
The program first performs ligament efficiency calculations for those vessels with holes in the side plates.
The membrane and bending ligament efficiencies are used to adjust the stress calculations at the mid-side
of the plates. The ligament efficiency calculations are based on section 13-6, and are performed for both
uniform and multi diameter hole patterns.
Once the ligament efficiencies are determined, the individual stress calculations are performed.
Membrane, bending, and total stress calculations are performed as prescribed by the Code in Sections 13-7
through 13-13. These stresses are compared to their allowables, and a highest percentage of allowable
calculation is performed.
RECTANGULAR VESSELS 27-3
The final calculation performed by the RECTANGULAR VESSEL module is the Maximum Allowable
Working Pressure calculation. The program computes a M.A.W.P. for all three types of stresses
(Membrane, Bending, and Total). Additionally, depending on the specific geometry of those vessels
stayed by bars, an additional M.A.W.P. is computed per Equation 2 of UG-47.
The RECTANGULAR VESSEL module takes full account of the corrosion allowance. The program
uses the corroded condition for all dimensions in its calculations. The only exception is the reinforcement
calculations. The reinforcing member is assumed to be entered in its corroded state.
Figure A - Rectangular vessel with equivalent long side thickness (Type A1)
Figure B - Rectangular vessel with different long side thickness (Type A2)
Figure C - Rectangular vessel with rounded corner (Type A3)
Figure D - Reinforced rectangular vessel (Type A4)

Figure E - Non-continuously reinforced rectangular vessel (Type A5)
Figure F - Non-continuously reinforced vessel with rounded corners (Type A6)

Figure G - Vessel stayed by stay plate/stay bars (Type A7 or A7-B)
Figure H - Vessel stayed by stay plates/stay bars (Type A8 or A8-B)

Figure I - Obround vessel (Type B1)
Figure J - Reinforced obround vessel (Type B2)

Figure K - Obround vessel stayed by stay plate/stay bars (Type B3 or B3-B)
Figure L - Circular vessel stayed by single diametral plate (Type C1)
Main Input Fields

Item Number
Description
Enter a maximum 15 character alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Design Internal Pressure Rectangular Vessel
Enter the internal design pressure. The internal design pressure is a required entry. For vessel type C1
(Figure 20K), this is the entry for P1. If analyzing vessel type C1 be aware that P1 is associated with only
one of the two chambers. If both chambers are operating at the same pressure, then an equal value must be
entered for P2.
Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. PVElite automatically updates the
Material Name
selecting TOOLS/ EDIT/ADD MATERIALS, from the Main Menu.
Material Allowable Stress at Design Temperature
When the material temperature is specified, all material properties associated with that temperature will be
automatically updated for materials that appear in the database.
edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the design temperature.
Material Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature
edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the ambient temperature.
Minimum Yield Stress for This Material
Enter the yield stress for this material. The ASME Code, Section II Part D lists the yield stress for the
material at ambient temperature. For many kinds of analysis, this is the appropriate value to enter. If you
need to use the yield stress at design temperature, you can probably find it in the ASME Code, Section II
Part D.
If analyzing a reinforced vessel this is a required entry for both the shell material and the reinforcement
material. These entries are used in determining an allowable stress for both bending and total stresses, and
if this entry is left blank, the program will assume zero for the allowable stress.
Figure Number for Type of Vessel
Enter the ID of the type of rectangular vessel to be analyzed. The possible ID types are as follows:
ID Figure Vessel Type
A1 A Rectangular vessel with equal long-side plate

thickness
A2 B Rectangular vessel with unequal long-side thickness
A3 C Rectangular vessel with rounded corners
A4 D Reinforced rectangular vessel
A5 E Non-continuously reinforced rectangular vessel
A6 F Non-continuous reinforced with rounded corners
A7 G Rectangular vessel with single stay plate
A7-B G Rectangular vessel with single row of bars
A8 H Rectangular vessel with two stay plates
A8-B H Rectangular vessel with double row of bars
B1 I Obround vessel
B2 J Reinforced obround vessel
B3 K Obround vessel with single stay plate
B3-B K Obround vessel with single row of bars
C1 L Circular vessel with single diametral plate
Short-Side Length Dimension
Enter the design length of the short side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the particular vessel
being analyzed. For Figure:
A1 H Inside length of long-side of vessel
A2 h Inside length of long-side of vessel

A3 L1 Half-length of short-side minus the corner radius
A4 H Inside length of short-side of vessel
A5 L3 Half-length of short-side of vessel
A6 L3 Half-length of short-side of vessel
A7 h Inside length of short-side of vessel
A7-B h Inside length of short-side of vessel
A8 h Inside length of short-side of vessel
A8-B h Inside length of short-side of vessel
B1 2R Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side
B3-B 2R Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side
C1 *** No Entry Required ***
Minimum Thickness of Short-Side Plate
Type the minimum thickness of the short-side plate used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness
measured for an existing vessel. The short-side thickness value is a required entry for all vessel types. For
those vessels that the Code specifies a single thickness (A3 and C1), the short-side thickness is used for
both t1 and t2.
Joint Efficiency for Welded Seams
Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for vessels with welded joints. This joint efficiency value will be
used to adjust the corner and the mid-side allowable stress values. The mid-side joint efficiencies will not
be used if there are holes on the side of the vessel. Instead, the ligament efficiencies will be used to adjust
the actual stress values. Please be sure to refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in
determining this value. Typical values are
1.00 Full Radiography

0.85 Spot X - Ray
0.70 No - Radiography
Threaded Holes in Plates
If the plate has uniform or multi diameter holes, check this field in order to enter the pitch, diameter, and
depth parameters. Ligament efficiency calculations will be performed in order to adjust the calculated
actual stress values.
Type of Reinforcement
Enter the index for the type of reinforcement on the rectangular vessel.
When a reinforced vessel is selected, the first responses are those of the pitch distance and the delta value.
Long-Side Length Dimension
Enter the design length of the long-side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the particular vessel
being analyzed. For Figure:
A2 h Inside length of long-side vessel
A3 L2 Half-length of long-side minus the corner

radius
A5 L4 Half-length of long-side
A6 L4 Half-length of long-side of vessel
A7-B h Inside length of long-side of vessel
A8-B h Inside length of long-side of vessel
B1 L2 Half-length of long-side of vessel
B3-B L2 Half-length of long-side of vessel
C1 *** No Entry Required ***
Minimum Thickness of Long-Side Plate
Type the minimum thickness of the long-side plate used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness
measured for an existing vessel.
Per Appendix 13, vessels A3 and C1 (Figure 20C and 20K, respectively) are assumed to have equivalent
long and short-side thicknesses. Thus, the long-side thickness is not a required entry for these two vessel
types.
Minimum Thickness of End Plate
Type the minimum thickness of the end plate. If a valid thickness is entered, the end plate will be analyzed
per UG-34. If the thickness value entered is zero, or left blank, no calculations will be performed on the
end plate.
Corrosion Allowance
Type the appropriate corrosion allowance. The program adjusts the actual thickness and the inside
diameter of the vessel, and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter of the stay plate/bar.
C Factor for End Closure Plate/Vessel Head
The C Factor is used in the equation to compute the required thickness of welded end plates. Typical
values are 0.2 or 0.3. See UG-34 for details.
Pop-Up Input Fields

Type the design external pressure for figure A1 or A2 if you wish to have the external pressure
calculations performed. When entered, external pressure stress calculations as well as vessel stability
calculations will be performed.
Modulus of Elasticity
If an external pressure has been input, enter the Elastic Modulus of the material from Subpart 3 of Section
II, Part D at design temperature.
Length of Vessel
Type the length dimension of vessel type C1.
Minimum Thickness of 2nd Long-Side Plate
Type the minimum thickness of the 2nd long-side plate used to build the vessel, or the minimum thickness
measured for an existing vessel.
This entry is only used in the analysis of vessel type A2 (Figure B). Appendix 13 allows vessels of this
type to have differing long-side thickness. If analyzing a type A2 vessel this is a required entry.
Radius of Corner Section
Type the radius of the corner section for vessels A3 and A5. The program assumes each of the corner
sections to have equivalent radii.
Pitch Distance Between Reinforcement
Type the maximum pitch distance between reinforcing members. This value must be greater than or equal
to the width of the reinforcing member.
C-Factor
The C-factor is an attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces. This factor is taken from UG-47, and
will default to 2.1.
Delta
Type the material parameter used to calculate pitch.
Materials listed in Appendix 13, Table 13-8(3):
Material English SI
Carbon Steel 6000 15754.54
Austenitic SS 5840 15334.42
Ni-Cr-Fe 6180 16227.17
Ni-Fe-Cr 6030 15833.31
Aluminum 3560 9347.69
Nickel Copper 5720 15019.33
Unalloyed 4490 11789.65

Titanium
Unreinforced Length Dimension
Enter the unreinforced length dimension for vessel A6 (Figure F). This dimension is L11 for the short-side
and L21 for the long-side.
Minimum Thickness/Diameter of Stay Plate/Rod (T3)
Enter the minimum thickness of the stay plate, or the diameter of the rod, if analyzing a stayed vessel.
This is a required entry if analyzing type A7, A7-B, A8, A8-B, B3, or B3-B.
Minimum Thickness/Diameter of Stay Plate/Rod (T4)
Enter the minimum thickness of the stay plate, or the diameter of the rod, if analyzing a stayed vessel.
This is a required entry if analyzing type A8, or A8-B.
Is the Stay Plate/Rod Welded to the End Plate?
If you do not check this box, PVElite will perform the end plate calculations based on the entire long-side
length. If you do check this box, the program will use the dimensions of the compartment formed by the
stay plate.
Pitch Distance Between Bars
Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or equal to the
calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars.
Vessel Radius
Type the inside radius of the vessel type C1.
Pressure in 2nd Compartment
Type the internal pressure of the 2nd compartment in vessel C1. You must enter an internal design
pressure that is less than or equal to P1. In the event that the two compartments have equivalent pressure,
the value entered for P2 must equal the value entered for P1. If left blank, a value of zero is used for P2.
Center to Center Distance Between Poles
Type the maximum pitch distance between holes in the side plates of the vessel being analyzed. This pitch
distance is shown in Figure M. This value must be greater than the holes diameter.
Figure M - Plate with multi diameter holes
Diameter of Hole
Type the diameter (d0, d1, d2) of the hole of corresponding length (T0, T1, T2). If the hole is of uniform
diameter, then a value for d0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure M. The values for d0, d1, and d2
must be entered in decreasing diameter size.
Depth of Hole
Type the depth (T0, T1, T2) of the hole of corresponding diameter (d0, d1, d2). If the hole is of uniform
diameter, then a value for T0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure M. The sum of the values for T0,
T1, and T2 must equal to the entire side thickness.
Type of Reinforcing Ring
Three types of reinforcement are available:
Reinforcing Ring Type

None—No reinforcing ring.
Simple Bar Geometry—Enter the width, thickness, and length (if necessary) of the bar.
Section—Enter the area, moment of inertia, and distance to ring centroid.
Distance from Outside of Vessel
Type the distance from the outer surface of the vessel to the outermost point on the reinforcing bar or
beam.
Width of Reinforcing Member
Type the width of the reinforcing member. This value is the distance that the reinforcement remains in
contact with the vessel wall.
This value cannot be greater than the reinforcement pitch, as that would indicate that the reinforcement if
overlapping.
Length of Reinforcing Member
For vessel type A5, this entry represents the entire length of the discontinuous reinforcement.
No entry is required for other vessel types.
General Beam Section—Type the moment of inertia, cross-sectional area, and the distance from the
centroid.
Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Section
Type the cross sectional area for the beam section, which is being used as reinforcement.
Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Member
Type the moment of inertia for the beam section, which is being used as a reinforcement, in the direction
parallel to the surface of the vessel.
Centroid Distance from Outside of Vessel
Type the distance from the surface of the vessel to the centroid of the reinforcing ring. This distance
should be measured normal to the vessel surface.
Length of Reinforcing Member
For vessel type A5, this entry represents the entire length of the discontinuous reinforcement. No entry is
required for other vessel types.
In all cases the program includes the vessel wall in the calculation of the moment of inertia.
Ligament Efficiency Calculations
When the side plates have uniform or multi diameter holes, ligament efficiency calculations are performed
according to Section 13-6. For the case of uniform diameter holes, the ligament efficiency factors em and eb
for membrane and bending stresses, respectively, are considered to be the same. In the case of multi
diameter holes (see Figure M), the neutral axis of the ligament may no longer be at mid thickness of the
plate; in this case, for bending loads, the stress is higher at one of the plate surfaces than at the other
surface.
If the calculated values of em and eb are lower than the entered midpoint joint efficiencies, the calculated
stress values are divided by these calculated ligament efficiencies. It is important to note that if the
stresses have been adjusted by the ligament efficiencies, then the calculations for the allowable stresses
will assume an E value of 1.0. This avoids incorrectly increasing the stress values while decreasing the
allowables at the same time.
Reinforcement Calculations
The reinforcement calculations performed for vessels A4, A5, and B2 (Figures D, E, and J), are discussed
in section 13-8. The rectangular vessel program only addresses those vessels in which the reinforcement
on opposite side plates have the same moment of inertia. Additionally, the reinforcement for vessels A4
and B2 is assumed to be continuous, while A5 is assumed to be non-continuous.
The first reinforcement calculation is that of the maximum pitch between reinforcing member center lines.
Equation 1 of UG-47 is used to set a basic maximum distance. Using this maximum value, equations (1a)-
(1d) in Section 13-8 are used to obtain a maximum value for both the long and short-side plates. The
minimum calculated value should be considered the maximum distance between reinforcement center
lines. In addition to the above calculations, the geometry of the reinforcement must be checked.
Specifically, the width of the reinforcing members cannot physically exceed the pitch.
Once the pitch is determined, the moment of inertia of the composite section (shell and reinforcement) is
determined by the Area-Moment method. The moment of inertia calculations are performed for locations
where the plate is in compression, and then also performed for locations where the plate is in tension.
Equation (2) of Section 13-8 is used to calculate the maximum width of the shell plate, which can be used
to compute the effective moments of the composite section at locations where the shell plate is in
compression. At locations where the shell plate is in tension, an effective width equal to the actual pitch
distance is used in the computations.
Stress Calculations
The stress calculations are performed for membrane, bending, and total stresses. The calculations are
performed for both the inner and outer surface of the long and short-side plates. These actual stress values
are displayed along with their allowables in tabular form. A positive (+) stress indicates tensile stress,
while a negative (-) stress indicates compressive stress.
As previously discussed, the calculated values for the membrane and bending stresses are adjusted by the
ligament efficiency calculations if em and eb are less than the joint efficiency E. At the mid-side locations,
dividing the calculated value by the membrane or bending ligament efficiency increases the stresses. In
the event that the plates have holes but the ligament efficiencies are higher than the joint efficiency E,
there is no adjustment to the stress calculations; rather the allowables are adjusted by the value E.
Calculations performed on stay plates/bars are membrane stresses, and these stresses are used in the
M.A.W.P. calculations for membrane stresses. Computation of the stresses on end plates is performed if a
thickness value for the end plate is input. The calculations are performed per UG-34 with a C factor
entered by the user. These stresses are not used in the computation of the MAWP.
Allowable Calculations
Membrane stresses are in general compared to the adjusted allowable stress, SE. Note that for reinforced
members the program compares the membrane stress to the lower of the plate allowable stress or beam
allowable stress. Note also that when there are holes in the side, the joint efficiency may be set to 1.0 in
favor of a membrane efficiency, which is factored into the actual stress calculation as necessary.
Bending stresses and total stresses are in general compared to 1.5 times the adjusted allowable stress, SE.
Note that for reinforced members the program compares the actual stress to the lower of the plate
allowable stress or beam allowable stress, and also to the lower of 2/3 times the plate yield stress or beam
yield stress. It chooses the lowest of these four combinations as the allowable for reinforced cases. Note
also that when there are holes in the side, the joint efficiency at the mid-side may be set to 1.0 in favor of a
membrane efficiency which is factored into the actual stress calculations as necessary.
Highest Percentage of Allowable Calculations
After performing the actual stress calculation and computing the allowable stresses at all locations, the
program computes the highest stress/allowable ratio for each of the three stress types. The program
displays the highest percentage of the allowable used, and the actual stress value that this percentage
relates to.
MAWP Calculations
The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure is calculated for each of the three stress types. The
computation of the M.A.W.P. is performed by setting the stress equations equal to the allowables, and
solving for P. The minimum computed P value is considered to be the maximum allowable working
pressure for the particular stress type.
When analyzing vessels A7-B or A8-B (Figures G and H stayed by bars), an additional pressure rating is
computed. If the long-side height is greater than the pitch of the stay bars, then a pressure rating is
computed per Eq. (2) of UG-47 with the long-side height substituted for the pitch. If this value of pressure
is less than the previously calculated MAWPs, then this becomes the vessel pressure rating. Similarly for
vessel B3-B (Figure K stayed by bars), if (L2 + R/2) is greater than the pitch, then an additional pressure
rating is computed per Eq. (2) of UG-47 with (L2 + R/2) substituted for the pitch.
External Pressure Calculations
External pressure calculations are performed on vessel A1 and A2 if the user has entered a value for the
external pressure. These calculations are performed per Appendix 13, Section 13-14. First, the external
pressure is substituted for the internal pressure, and the calculations discussed previously are performed
again. Next, the four side plates and the end plates are checked for stability per equation (1) of 13-14(b).
Finally, the entire cross section is checked for column stability in accordance with equation (1) from
paragraph 13-14(c).
Example Problem
28-1
C H A P T E R 2 8
Chapter 28: WRC 297/ANNEX G
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................28-2
Sample Calculation ............................................................28-9
Introduction
The WRC 297/Annex G analysis module performs local stress calculations on cylinder-to-cylinder
attachments according to the Welding Research Council's bulletin number 297 or PD 5500, Annex G.
Additionally, it also analyzes cylinder on a sphere, solid attachment on either a cylinder on a sphere, per
PD 5500 Annex G.
Main Input Fields

Item Number
Description
Diameter Basis for Vessel
The dimension basis can be specified on either inside (ID) or outside (OD) dimension basis.
Vessel Diameter
Type the actual diameter of the vessel using the Id or OD as specified above.
Vessel Wall Thickness
Type the wall thickness of the vessel. This thickness should be measured at the intersection of the nozzle
and the vessel.
Vessel Corrosion Allowance
Type the corrosion allowance if there is any. The program will adjust the ID and thickness appropriately.
Design Pressure
The design pressure will be used to compute membrane stresses on the nozzle and vessel wall. It will also
be used to compute axial pressure thrust if instructed to do so.
WRC 297/ANNEX G 28-3
Design Temperature
This is design temperature for the vessel. This value is used to look up allowable stresses for the vessel
and nozzle materials from the ASME Section II Part D material table.
Vessel Material
The vessel material can be typed in or selected from the Material Database. Right click on this field to
access the properties for this material or access the database.
Vessel/Nozzle Stress Concentration Factor
This value typically varies from 1 to 3 and is a function of the quality of the weld and the local dimensions
in the immediate vicinity of the weld.
Stress concentration factors are a measure of a very local stress riser because of sharp corners, no fillet
radii, etc.
This stress concentration factor will apply for the stress calculations in the vessel and Nozzle on both the
inside and outside of the vessel.
This stress concentration factor is not used in any way with the pressure stress calculations. This input is
only active when WRC 297 method is selected.
Attachment Type
Select the type of attachment.
If WRC 297 method is selected then only round attachment type (a cylinder) permissible.
But, if PD5500, Annex G is selected than the option include, round, square or rectangular.
Diameter Basis for Nozzle
The dimension basis can be specified on either inside (ID) or outside (OD) dimension basis.
Diameter of Nozzle
Type the actual inside or outside diameter of the nozzle as appropriate.
Nozzle Wall Thickness
Type the minimum nozzle wall thickness at the shell to nozzle junction. This value should include any
allowances for mill tolerance.
Type the corrosion allowance for the nozzle. This value typically ranges from 0 to 3/16" or more
depending on the service and design specifications.
Does Attachment cut a hole in the shell?
Check this box if the attachment makes a hole in the vessel. Example of a hole being cut would be a
nozzle. On the other hand, a trunnion is a case where no hole is cut in the shell. The program applies a
stress concentration factor if hole is cut in the shell.
This input is only used for PD5500, Annex G.
Enter Full Attachment Length in Longitudinal Direction (2*Cx)
Attachments other than nozzles can be analyzed using the PD 5500 Annex G method. If one is analyzing
the junction of a square/rectangular solid and a cylinder or sphere, enter the FULL length of the
attachment in the longitudinal direction.
A square or a rectangular attachment on a sphere is converted to an equivalent round attachment of radius

ro, as follows:
ro = Sqrt(Cx * Cy)
Enter Full Attachment Length in Circumferential Direction (2*Cy)
attachment in the circumferential direction.

ro, as follows:
ro = Sqrt(Cx * Cy)
Is There a Reinforcing Pad?
If the nozzle has a pad, check this button and you will be prompted to enter in the diameter of the pad
along the vessel surface and the pad thickness. This will cause the program to perform stress calculations
at the edge of the pad.
Axial Force P (In WRC 107) or FR (In PD5500)
Type the value for the load, which is trying to push or pull the nozzle in/out of the vessel. The program
does not account for the effect of pressure thrust. In WRC 107 convention: Positive loads try to "push" the
nozzle while negative loads try to "pull" the nozzle. While in PD 5500 convention Positive loads try to
"pull" the nozzle while negative loads try to "push" the nozzle. The following Figure A and Figure B
should clarify these conventions.
Shear Force VC (In WRC 107) or FC (In PD5500)
Type the longitudinal shear load VC (or FC in BS 5500 convention) in the units above. Enter this value in
accordance with the convention used, either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The following Figure A and Figure B
Shear Force VL (In WRC 107) or FL (In PD5500)
Type the longitudinal shear load VL (or FL in PD 5500 convention) in the units above. Enter this value in
accordance with the convention used, either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The following Figure A and Figure B
Torsional Moment MT
Type the torsional moment in the units displayed above. Enter this value in accordance with the
convention used, either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following Figure A and Figure B should clarify these
conventions.
Circumferential Moment MC
Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1 in the units displayed above. Enter this value in accordance
with the convention used, either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The following Figure A and Figure B should
clarify these conventions. Note that this moment has opposite signs in these conventions.
Longitudinal Moment ML
Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2 in the units displayed above. Enter this value in accordance with
the convention used either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following Figure A and Figure B should clarify
these conventions.
Add Axial Pressure Thrust?
If this box is checked the force due to pressure times the internal pipe area will be added to or subtracted
from the radial load "P".
Use Stress Indices (AD 560.7)?
If this box is checked the nominal computed pressure stress on the vessel wall as defined in paragraph
AD-560.7 will be multiplied by the stress indices as they are listed in that paragraph of the ASME Code
Section VIII Division 2. This is essentially the computation of the surface stress intensity. If the design
specification requires the use of these indices, check this box. Please note that these indices are not used in
the calculation of the pressure stress on the nozzle. The program will multiply the pressure stress on the
nozzle by a factor of 1.2.
Figure A - WRC 107 Naming Convention
Figure B - PD 5500 Naming Convention

Additional Input for PD 5500, Annex G

Allowable Stress Increase Factor (Membrane + Bending)
This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f, to obtain an allowable stress for the maximum
membrane plus bending stress intensity. These stresses are in rows 27, 28 and 29 in the printout samples
in PD 5500 Annex W.
At the attachment junction (Nozzle neck) this factor normally has a value of 2.25 or lower.
At the edge of the pad, this factor is normally 2.0.
Print the Membrane Stress?
Check this box to compute membrane stress at the attachment junction and enter the allowable stress
intensity factor for it.
The example in Annex W does not compute the Membrane stress at attachment edge. As, the membrane
stress should already be checked by the user when selecting the wall thickness. Moreover, the membrane
stress computed per Annex G, at the attachment edge contains intensified stresses due to the presence of
the hole.
Allowable Stress Increase Factor (Membrane)
This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f, to obtain an allowable stress for the maximum
membrane stress intensity. These stresses are in rows 32, 33 and 34 in the printout samples in PD 5500
Annex W.
This entry normally has a value of 1.2 or lower at the edge of the reinforcement pad.
The example in Annex W does not compute the Membrane stress at attachment edge. As, the membrane
stress should already be checked by the user when selecting the wall thickness. Moreover, the membrane
stress computed per Annex G, at the attachment edge contains intensified stresses due to the presence of
the hole. If you would like to check the membrane stress at attachment junction then click the
corresponding check box and enter the allowable stress intensity factor for it. The allowable stress
intensity factor in this case would be higher than the factor at pad edge.
Stiffened Length of Vessel Section
Type the length of the vessel on which this nozzle lies. For vessels without stiffeners or cones this would
be the entire vessel length accounting for the heads as necessary. This value is used along with the
Distance from left Tangent field to compute the equivalent length for off center loading.
If this nozzle has a projection inside of the vessel, enter that length into this field. This value is used to
determine the pressure stress intensification factor from the graphs in Section 3 of the PD 5500 Code.
These curves for Cers/eps have been digitized and are used by the program. All of the curves for
protruding and flush nozzles are included for analysis.
Offset from Left Tangent Line
Type the distance that the centerline of the nozzles is with respect to the left tangent line or appropriate
line of support. This value is used in conjunction with the vessel length to compute the equivalent length
for off center loading.
Is the Location of the Nozzle in the Vessel Spherical?
If the nozzle is located within the spherical portion of an elliptical or torispherical head or is in a spherical
head then check this box. If you are entering this data manually ensure that you are entering the spherical
diameter. This is especially important for nozzles located in elliptical heads. Checking this box causes the
program to access the various curves used to compute the spherical factors for nozzles connected to
spheres per ANNEX G.
Reinforcing Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. Several geometric constants are computed using the shell
thickness. For the stress analysis case for the edge of the nozzle the pad thickness will be included. Please
note that WRC 297 does not specifically address the "reinforcing pad case". This is analyzed in a
consistent manner with the WRC 107 pad method.
Reinforcing Pad Diameter
Enter the reinforcing pad diameter along the surface of the vessel. This value will be used when the
program computes the stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad.
Enter Full Re-pad Length in Longitudinal Direction (2*Cx)
reinforcing pad (if present) in the longitudinal direction.

ro as follows:
ro = Sqrt(Cx * Cy)

Enter Full Re-pad Length in Circumferential Direction (2*Cy)
reinforcing pad (if present) in the circumferential direction.

ro as follows:
ro = Sqrt(Cx * Cy)
Sample Calculation
The WRC 297 stress evaluation method computes stress intensities in the nozzle and vessel wall at the
junction of the intersection on the upper and lower surface at eight different points. Typically, stress
intensities can be compared with the yield stress of the material at operating temperature. However, you
should read the WRC 297 bulletin carefully for further clarification and evaluation of stress results.
Since this method produces quite a bit of output, it may be useful to use the option to produce only the
summary of results. To do this use the TOOLS/CONFIGURATION option (miscellaneous tab) and check
the appropriate box to produce the results in a summary fashion. Note that this directive will affect all of
the generated reports in the file.
29-1
C H A P T E R 2 9
Chapter 29: Appendix Y
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................29-2
Gasket and Gasket Factors .................................................29-2
Example..............................................................................29-2
Introduction
This module performs stress evaluations of Class 1, category 1, 2, or 3 flanges that form identical flange
pairs. This module conforms to the latest version of the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix Y,
Edition 2004.
The analysis of an Appendix Y flange is similar in many ways to the Appendix 2 evaluation. However,
these flanges have metal-to-metal contact outside the bolt circle, unlike the types evaluated in Appendix 2.
These flanges typically have a soft, self sealing o-ring gasket that sits in the recess of one of the flange
faces. The loads on the flanges are generated in a very similar manner to those in Appendix 2. The actual
stress evaluation however is different.
This program evaluates flanges with or without hubs. A category 1 flange is an integral flange. The
integral type must have the hub information specified. A category 2 flange is a loose type flange with a
hub where the hub strengthens the assembly. A category 3 flange is a loose type flange where no credit is
taken for the strengthening effect of the hub. Based on user input (especially flange type and hub
information), the category is automatically determined.
Gasket and Gasket Factors
One critical value the program computes is the diameter of the load reaction. This value is termed G and is
a function of where the gasket sits on the flange face. The value of G is typically the average of the gasket
inner and outer diameters. For these types of flanges the gasket ID is usually equal to the flange face ID
and the gasket OD is usually equal to the flange face OD. Two other important factors are m and Y. The
value of m is the leak pressure ratio and Y is the gasket design seating stress. This Appendix takes these
gaskets to be self sealing (see the definition of Hg in the Code). Thusly the m and Y factors should both be
0.0. If any other value is entered the user values will be echoed but the program will use values of 0.0 for
both.
Example
30-1
C H A P T E R 3 0
Chapter 30: Miscellaneous Topics
In This Chapter
Heading Edit.......................................................................30-2
Heading Manipulation and Material Properties .................30-2
Heading Edit
Heading Edit mode allows the user to input and edit the heading and the title page for the current job. The
Set Title button is used to overlay a default title page into the title page text area. If desired this page can
be customized by editing the file Title.Hed. This is an ASCII Text file and can modified with Notepad,
Edit or any other ASCII text editor.
Heading Manipulation and Material Properties
Element materials may be selected for the Material Database button. When clicking the Material button,
the following screen displays:
Material Database
Miscellaneous Topics 30-3
By selecting and clicking material name, the material parameters display.
Click OK to load the material name and the appropriate material parameters are loaded in the element.
These parameters may be reviewed and modified through the Material Edit Window by pressing Enter
when the cursor is in the Material field.
The Material Edit Window lets you display and modify the material properties of the current element or
detail. Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here are directly from the program's
material database, otherwise the data are from the data structure of the current element or detail. If a newly
selected material can not be found in the program's material database, the program will assume that is a
"user-defined material", in this case the you must define all material properties in this window.
The following buttons are available in this window:
OK - Allows you to save the data to the memory then close the window.
Cancel - Allows you to close the window without saving the data.
Help - Displays information about this window.
Discussion of Input
Input Data
Material Name
Enter the name of the material for this element. This program contains a database which includes most of
the materials in the ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
TEMA Number
The TEMA number is used to determine the modulus of elasticity for a material at design temperature.
These values range from 1 to 52 and are located in the TEMA Tubesheet chapter.
Keyboard Commands
The following movements are defined for the keyboard within the program:
Begin line <Home>

Begin list <Home>
Delete character <Del.>
Delete prev. char <Backspace>
Delete window <Alt+F4>
End line <End>
End list <End>
Exit <Shift+F3>
Help <F1>
Hot key <Alt+char(with '_')>
Insert toggle <Ins>
Left word <Ctrl+left-arrow>
Mark <Ctrl+F5>
Maximize <Alt +>
Menu control <Alt>
Minimize <Alt ->
Move window <Alt+F7>
Next cell <Down_arrow>
Next Character <Right_arrow>
Next field <Tab>
Next window <Alt+F6>
Page down <Page Down>
Page up <Page Up>
Previous cell <Up_arrow>
Previous character <Left_arrow>
Previous field <Shift+Tab>
Refresh <F5>
Right word <Ctrl+right_arrow>
Select <Enter>
Size window <Alt+F8>
System button <Alt .>
Mouse Operation
The following movements are defined for the mouse within the program:
In Window Objects:
Choose <Left-down-click>
Select <Left-release>
In Vessel Graphics:
Select element <Left-release>
Select detail <Right-down-

click>
Enter the allowable stress for the element material at ambient temperature. (The ambient temperature for
most vessels will be 70° F or 100° F or 30° C). You can find this value in the ASME Code, Section II, Part
D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
Under normal circumstances, the program will look up this allowable stress for you. If you enter a valid
material name in the Material Input field, the program will search its database and determine the
allowable stress for the material at ambient temperature, and enter it into this cell. The program will also
determine the stress when you select a material name from the Material Selection window.
Enter the allowable stress for the element material at operating temperature. ( The operating temperature
for most vessels is defined to be the same as the design metal temperature for the internal pressure). You
can find this value in the ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
Allowable Stress at Hydrotest Temperature
Enter the allowable stress for the element material at Hydrotest temperature. ( The hydrotest temperature
for most vessels will be 40° F or 70° F or 10° C). You can calculate this value in the ASME Code, Section
II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
Most times the allowed hydrotest stress will just be 1.3 times the allowable stress for the vessel at ambient
temperature. Under some circumstances you may choose to use an allowable hydrotest stress of 0.9 times
the yield stress of the material at ambient temperature. This is especially helpful in the case of a tall
vertical process tower where the hydrotest pressure is increased by the height of the water used for testing.
Use of the higher hydrotest allowable stress may prevent the hydrotest case from controlling the thickness
of the vessel.
There is an option for PVElite to always use 0.9 times the yield stress when determining the hydrostatic
test allowable stress. This check box is on the Design/Analysis Constraints screen.
Nominal Density of this Material
Enter the nominal density of the material. Note that the program will use this value to calculate component
weights for this analysis. The typical density for carbon steel is 0.2830 lbs/in3.
P Number Thickness
Enter the thickness for the P number.
Table UCS-57 of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 lists the maximum thickness above which full
radiography is required for welded seams. This thickness is based on the P number for the material listed
in the allowable stress tables of the Code. If a seam is partially radiographed and the required thickness
exceeds the P number thickness, PVElite will automatically change the joint efficiency to 1.0 as stated in
the Code.
Yield Stress, Operating
Enter the yield stress for the material at operating temperature. This value is found in the ASME Code,
Section II, Part D. PVElite will automatically look up the yield stress from the Yield Stress database.
Unfortunately, not all materials have a yield stress at design temperature or the database may be
ambiguous. In that case, it is your responsibility to enter the appropriate value for the yield stress.
UCS-66 Chart Number
Enter values 1 through 4 to specify the UCS-66 Carbon Steel Material Curves A through D, respectively.
Enter 0 for materials, which are not carbon steel. Note that the Material Database returns the non-
normalized curve number; adjust the curve number if you are using a normalized material produced to fine
grain practice.
In some cases materials are impact tested when they are produced. Such an example is SA-350 LF2. For
these classes of materials a value of 5 will alert PVElite that this material is impact tested.
External Pressure Chart Name
The program uses the chart name to calculate the B value for all external pressure and buckling
calculations. It is important that you enter the name correctly. Under normal circumstances, the program
will look up this chart name for you. If you enter a valid material name in the Material Input field, the
program will search its database and determine the allowable stress for the material at ambient
temperature, and enter it into this cell. The program will also determine the stress when you select a
material name from the Material Selection window.
The following are the acceptable external pressure chart names:
Carbon Steel Materials

CS-1 UCS-28.1, Carbon and Low Alloy, Sy<30000
CS-2 UCS-28.2, Carbon and Low Alloy, Sy>30000
CS-3 UCS-28.3, Carbon and Low Alloy, Sy>38000
CS-4 UCS-28.4, SA-537
CS-5 UCS-28.5, SA-508, SA-533, SA-541
CS-6 UCS-28.6, SA-562 or SA-620
Heat Treated Materials

HT-1 UHT-28.1, SA-517 and SA-592 A, E, and F
HT-2 UHT-28.2, SA-508 Cl. 4a, SA-543,B,C
Stainless Steel (High Alloy) Materials

HA-1 UHA-28.1, Type 304
HA-2 UHA-28.2, Type 316, 321, 347, 309, 310, 430B
HA-3 UHA-28.3, Type 304L
HA-4 UHA-28.4, Type 316L, 317L
HA-5 UHA-28.5, Alloy S31500
Non Ferrous Materials

NFA-1 UNF-28.2, AL3003, O and H112
NFA-2 UNF-28.3, AL3003, H14
NFA-3 UNF-28.4, AL3004, O and H112
NFA-4 UNF-28.5, AL3004, H34
NFA-5 UNF-28.13, AL5154, O and H112
NFA-6 UNF-28.14, C61400 (Aluminum Bronze)
NFA-7 UNF-28.17, AL1060, O
NFA-8 UNF-28.18, AL5052, O and H112
NFA-9 UNF-28.19, AL5086, O and H112
NFA-10 UNF-28.20, AL5456, O
NFA-11 UNF-28.23, AL5083, O and H112
NFA-12 UNF-28.30, AL6061, T6, T651, T6510 and T6511
NFA-13 UNF-28.31, AL6061, T4, T451, T4510 and T4511
NFA-14 UNF-28.32, AL5454, O and H112
NFC-1 UNF-28.9, Annealed Copper
NFC-2 UNF-28.10, Copper-Silicon A and C
NFC-3 UNF-28.11, Annealed 90-10 Copper Nickel
NFC-4 UNF-28.12, Annealed 70-30 Copper Nickel
NFC-5 UNF-28.43, Welded Copper Iron Alloy Tube
NFC-6 UNF-28.48, SB-75 and SB-111 Copper Tube
NFN-1 UNF-28.1, Low Carbon Nickel
NFN-2 UNF-28.6, Ni
NFN-3 UNF-28.7, Ni Cu Alloy
NFN-4 UNF-28.8, Annealed Ni Cr Fe
NFN-5 UNF-28.15, Ni Mo Alloy B
NFN-6 UNF-28.24, Ni Mo Cr Fe
NFN-7 UNF-28.25, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu
NFN-8 UNF-28.27, Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800

NFN-9 UNF-28.29, Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800H
NFN-10 UNF-28.33, Ni Moly Chrome Alloy N10276
NFN-11 UNF-28.34, Ni Cr Fe Mo Cu Alloys G and G-2
NFN-12 UNF-28.36, Cr Ni Fe Mo Cu Co, SB-462, 463, etc.
NFN-13 UNF-28.37, Ni Fe Cr Si Alloy 330
NFN-14 UNF-28.38, Ni Cr Mo Grade C-4
NFN-15 UNF-28.39, Ni Mo Alloy X
NFN-16 UNF-28.40, Ni Mo Alloy B-2
NFN-17 UNF-28.44, Ni Cr Mo Co N06625 (Alloy 625)
NFN-18 UNF-28.45, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G-3)
NFN-19 UNF-28.46, Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G-3, >3/4)
NFN-20 UNF-28.47, Work Hardened Nickel
NFT-1 UNF-28.22, Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 1
NFT-2 UNF-28.28, Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 2
NFT-3 UNF-28.42, Titanium, Grade 1
NFZ-1 UNF-28.35, Zirconium, Alloy 702
NFZ-2 UNF-28.41, Zirconium, Alloy 705
You may add material data to the standard Material Database using the Edit/Add Materials option from
Tools on the Main Menu.
31-1
C H A P T E R 3 1
Chapter 31: Vessel Example Problems
In This Chapter
Vessel Example ..................................................................31-1
Vessel Example
1
Allowable Stress at Design Temperature • 12-4,
Index 15-4, 17-6

Allowable Stress At Operating Temperature •
16-3
Also Perform Soehren's Calculation? • 15-12
Amplification Factor ac • 6-1
1 Analysis • 3-10
1.60D.5 • 6-1 Analysis Menu • 10-6
1.60D10 • 6-1 Analysis, Performing an • 10-1
1.60D2 • 6-1 Analyze Menu • 3-1, 3-24, 10-1
1.60D5 • 6-1 Analyzing Heat Exchangers • 9-3
1.60D7 • 6-1 Analyzing Individual Vessel Components
Details • 3-50
3 Angle Between Nozzle and Shell • 5-1, 5-14
3D Viewer • 3-1 Angle Between Nozzle and Shell (Usually 90)
entered in descript • 5-1
A Angle Sections Rolled the Hard Way • 6-1
A Road Map for PVELITE • 3-3 ANSI Flange MAWP • 7-1
About the Documentation • 1-8 API 579 Introduction • 11-14
Above Ground Height • 6-1 Appendix 14 Large Opening • 4-13
Absolute • 6-1 Appendix Y • 29-1
Abutting Nozzle Insertion • 5-1 Apply Longitudinal Loads to Vessel • 16-5
Acc Based Factor Fv • 6-1 Apply Seismic Loads to Vessel • 16-5
Acc.Based Factor Fa • 6-1 Apply Wind Loads to Vessel • 16-4
Acceleration Zone • 6-1 Are There Axial Forces on the Cone? • 14-5
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT Area 2 Setting • 5-1
BY THE USER • 2 Area Calculations for Small Nozzles • 10-1
Acts During Wind or Seismic • 5-34 Area Of Tube Layout • 17-10
Actual Diameter and Thickness • 5-16 Area1 Setting • 5-1
Actual Nozzle Diameter Thickness • 12-14 ASCE • 6-1
Actual or Nominal Diameter of Nozzle • 5-16, ASCE - 95 Seismic Data • 6-47
12-7 ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data • 6-1, 6-39
Actual Schedule of Nozzle • 12-8 ASCE 7-93 Importance Factor • 6-1
Actual Thickness of Flange • 15-5 ASCE 7-93 Seismic Data • 6-1
Actual Thickness of Head • 15-4 ASCE 95 Wind Data • 6-1, 6-22
Actual Thickness of Nozzle • 5-17 ASCE Roughness Factor • 6-1
Actual Thickness of Shell • 12-5 ASCE Wind Data • 6-1, 6-17
AD-540.2 sketch b • 3-1 ASCE7-93 Seismic Data • 6-41
Adding Details • 3-1, 3-43 ASCE-95 Seismic Data • 6-1
Additional Reinforcing Pad Data • 5-28 ASME Code Weld Type • 5-1, 5-29
Additional Area • 16-8 ASME TUBESHEETS • 24-1
Additional Data for Reinforcing Pad • 5-1 ASME UG-99(b) • 6-1
Additional Input for FEA • 18-18 ASME UG-99(b) footnote 32 • 6-1
Additional Input for PD 5500, Annex G • 28-7 ASME UG-99(b) footnote 34 • 6-1
Additional Input for WRC 107 • 18-16 ASME UG-99(c) • 6-1
Allowable Calculations • 27-18 Aspect Ratio (D/2H) for Elliptical Heads • 16-13
Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature • 12- Assigning Detail • 5-3
4, 15-4, 17-6 Assigning Details to Elements • 5-1
Allowable Stress At Ambient Temperature • 16- Attachment Factor • 4-13
3 Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Ring • 14-8
Printed on 14 December, 2004

2 PVElite User Guide 2005
Channel Wall Thickness • 17-7

B Check Saddle Webs, & Base Plate • 16-4
B16.5 Flange • 5-1 Class for Attached B16.5 Flange • 5-14, 12-12
B16.5 Flange, Grade for Attached • 5-1 COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers • 1-
Back Ring Actual Thickness • 15-13 9
Backing Ring Inside Diameter • 15-12 Code Case 2168 for Nozzle Design • 6-1
Bar Thickness • 6-1 Code Case 2260/2261 • 3-1
Base Elevation • 6-1 Coefficient Cd • 6-1
Base Plate Length • 16-7 Combination Method • 6-1
Base Plate Thickness • 16-7 Component Analysis • 7-1, 7-10, 8-2, 8-3
Base Plate Width • 16-7 Component Analysis Main Menu • 10-1
BASE RINGS • 4-18, 21-1 Component Analysis Module • 10-1
Baseplate Input • 19-17 Component Analysis Tutorial • 10-1
Baseplate Length • 5-1, 5-38 Componsite Stiffener Height • 5-1
Baseplate Results • 19-20 Computation Control Tab • 10-1
Baseplate Thickness • 5-1, 5-38 Cone Actual Thickness • 14-4
Baseplate Width • 5-1, 5-38 Cone Axial Length • 14-5
Basering Analysis • 4-17 Cone Corrosion Allowance • 14-4
Basering Dialog • 4-17 Cone Description • 14-3
Basic Wind Speed • 16-8 Cone Diameter at Large End • 14-5
Blind Flange Thickness for Reinforcement • 3-1 Cone Diameter at Small End • 14-4
Body Flange • 4-15 Cone Diameter Basis (ID, OD) • 14-4
Bolt Correction Factor • 3-1 Cone Half Apex Angle • 14-5
Bolt Root Area • 15-12 Cone Joint Efficiency • 14-4
Bolted Cover Mating Flange • 9-47 Cone Length • 4-10
Bottom Lug Support Plate, Length of • 5-1 Cone Number • 14-3
Bottom Plate, Thickness of • 5-1 Cone\Cylinder\Ring\Knuckle Material Name •
Bottom Support Plate • 5-1 14-3
British Standard BS5500 • 7-1 Configuration • 10-1
British Wind Code BS-6399 • 6-33 Conical Head or Shell Segment • 4-10
Brownell and Young Method of Design • 4-18 CONICAL SECTIONS • 14-1
Building Heat Exchangers • 9-11 Construction Type • 6-1
Corroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate • 17-16
C Corroded Hydrotest • 6-1
Calculated Value of M for Torispherical Heads • Corrosion Allowance • 4-5, 16-2
10-1 Create / Review Units • 3-31
Calculating and Displaying Vessel-Analysis Crest Distance • 6-1
Results • 7-3 Critical Damping Ratio • 6-1
Calculations • 21-2 Cross Sectional Area • 5-10
Calculator • 3-33 Cross Sectional Area of Reinforcing Section •
Carbon Steel Materials • 30-8 14-8
Category Value • 6-1 Cross Sectional Area of Stiffening Ring • 16-13
Center Web Height • 5-1 Cross-Sectional Area • 5-1
Centerline Dimension • 5-1 Crown Radius • 4-9
Centerline Dimension (B) • 5-37 Crown Radius for Torispherical Heads • 16-13
Centerline Offset • 4-1, 4-19 Cylindrical Shell • 4-8
Channel Corrosion Allowance • 17-7
D
Channel Design Pressure • 17-7
Channel Inside Diameter • 17-7 Damping Factor • 6-1
Channel Metal Design Temperature • 17-7 Datum Line Distance • 6-1
Vessel Example Problems 3
Default units file • 10-1 Distance between Gussets • 5-1, 5-31

Defining the Basic Vessel • 3-42 Distance from Outside Diameter
Defining the Details • 5-7 or Diameter at Leg Centerline • 5-41
Density of Lining • 5-48 Distance From Saddle to Vessel Tangent • 16-6
Density of Liquid on Tray • 5-40 Distance From the Flange Centroid to Head
Density of Material • 30-7 Centerline • 15-11
Density of Packing • 5-43 Distance From Vessel Centerline To Saddle
Density Of Stored Liquid • 16-3 Base • 16-3
Depth of Groove in Tubesheet • 17-13 Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint • 5-1,
Depth of Groove Weld Between Nozzle and 5-30
Vessel • 5-18, 12-13 Distance or Straight Flange Length • 4-4
Depth of Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Distance to Centroid of Reinforcing Section •
Neck • 5-28 14-8, 16-13
Depth of Groove Weld Between Pad and Nozzle Distance to Crest (Lh) • 16-9
Neck • 12-14 Distance to Ring Centroid • 5-1, 5-10
Description • 12-3, 17-5 Distance to Site • 6-1
Design and Analysis of Vessel Details • 3-15 Distance to Site (x) • 16-9
Design Data • 6-1, 6-2 Do you want to set Area1 or Area 2 to 0 • 5-16
Design External Pressure • 4-7, 12-3 DXF File Generated by PVElite During Runtime
Design Internal Pressure • 4-6, 6-1, 12-3 • 3-55
Design Internal Temperature • 6-1 DXF File Generation Option • 3-1, 3-53
Design Modification • 6-1, 6-11
Design Pressure • 6-1 E
Design Pressure + Static Head • 6-1 E for Plates • 5-38
Design Temperature • 15-4 Earthquake Load Calculation • 7-1
Design Temperature for External Pressure • 4-7 EarthQuake Parameters Fa and Fv • 6-1
Design Temperature for Internal Pressure • 4-7 Edit / Add Materials • 3-31
Design Wind Speed • 6-1 Edit Menu • 10-1, 10-5
Detail Definition Buttons • 5-1, 5-4 Effective Material Diameter and Thickness
Detail ID • 5-1 Limits • 12-15, 12-16
Details, Definition of • 5-1 Efficiency of Shell Seam Through Which Nozzle
Diagnostic Menu • 10-17 Passes • 12-8
Diagnostics Menu • 3-1, 3-34, 10-1 EigenSolver • 3-1
Diameter and Thickness, Actual • 5-1 El Centro • 6-1
Diameter at Leg Centerline • 5-1 Element Additional Data • 4-7
Diameter of Bolt Circle • 15-5 Element Basic Data • 4-3
Diameter of Nozzle, Actual • 5-1 Element Data • 4-1
Diameter of Outer Tube Limit Circle • 17-11 Element's Diameter • 4-4
Diamter, Minimum • 5-1 Element's From Node • 4-1, 4-3
Differential Design Pressure (Used if > 0.0) • 17- Element's To Node • 4-1, 4-4
9 Elliptical Head • 4-8
DISCLAIMER • 4 Enter Required Thickness • 12-5
Discussion of Input • 16-2, 18-2, 19-2, 20-2, 21- Enter the Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads • 12-
7, 21-15, 30-4 11
Discussion of Input Data • 5-50, 11-4, 11-18, 12- Enter The Attachment Factor For Welded Flat
3, 13-4, 14-3, 15-3, 17-5, 22-2, 23-4, 24-3, 25- Heads • 12-11
3, 26-3, 27-8, 28-2 Enter the Large Diameter for Non-circular Flat
Discussion of Results • 4-20, 11-27, 12-14, 13- Heads • 12-11
18, 14-9, 15-13, 16-13, 17-31, 18-19, 21-16, Enter the Shell Design Length for External
23-10, 24-25, 25-6, 27-17, 28-9 Pressure • 12-10
Enter Tube-Tubesheet Joint Information • 17-9 Flohead Calculation • 10-1

Enter Unsupported Tube Span SL For Max Force Coefficient • 16-8
(k*SL) • 17-10 Force Factor • 6-1
Entering PVElite • 3-41 Force in X, Y, or Z Direction • 5-1, 5-33
ENTIRE AGREEMENT • 3 Force Modification Factor • 6-1
Equipment Class • 6-1 Force/Moment Combination Method • 5-34
Error Checking • 3-1, 3-9, 7-1 Forces and Moments • 5-1, 5-33
ESL Installation on a Network • 2-8 Friction Coefficient Between the Saddle and the
ESL Menu • 3-1, 3-39, 10-1, 10-18 Foundation, mu • 16-11
Example • 11-28, 12-17, 13-22, 14-11, 15-15, From Node • 5-1
16-16, 17-36, 18-30, 19-24, 20-8, 21-17, 22- Full Face Gasket Options • 15-6
10, 23-11, 24-27, 25-7, 29-2
Example Problem • 26-4, 27-19
G
Expansion Joint Data • 9-28 Gasket and Gasket Factors • 29-2
Expansion Joint Design Option • 17-16 Gasket Inner Diameter • 15-7
Expansion Joint Inside Diameter • 17-17 Gasket Outer Diameter • 15-7
Expansion Joint Knuckle • 17-17 Gasket Thickness • 15-11
Expansion Joint Type • 17-15 GENERAL • 4
Exposure Constant • 6-1 General Vessel Data • 6-1
External Design Pressure • 14-3 Generating Output • 8-2
External Design Temperature • 14-3 Grade for Attached B16.5 Flange • 5-14, 12-12
External Pressure calculations • 7-1 Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel • 5-1
External Pressure Calculations • 27-19 Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck • 5-
External Pressure Chart Name • 30-8 1
External Pressure Results • 14-9 Gussets • 5-1
External Pressure Results for Heads: • 15-13 Gussets Height • 5-1
External Software Lock • 2-3 Gussets, Mean Width • 5-1
Extra Weight • 16-3 Gussets, Thickness of • 5-1
Gust Response Factor • 6-1
F
Failure Path Calculations • 12-16
H
File Manager • 30-1 Half Apex Angle • 4-11
File Menu • 3-1, 3-22, 10-1, 10-3 Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections • 12-11
Finished Thickness • 4-5 Half Pipe Jacket • 5-49
Fireproofing with Insulation • 5-1 HALF-PIPES • 25-1
Flange Analysis • 4-15 Head Factor • 4-8
Flange Distance to Top • 6-1 Head Joint Efficiency • 16-6
Flange Face Facing Sketch • 15-10 Head Thickness • 16-6
Flange Face Inner Diameter • 15-7 Head Type • 16-6
Flange Face Outer Diameter • 15-7 Heading Edit • 30-2
Flange Input Data • 4-17 Heading Manipulation and Material Properties •
Flange Material • 5-29 30-2
Flange Merge • 17-13 HEAT EXCHANGERS • 9-1
Flange Type • 5-29 Heat Treated Materials • 30-8
FLANGES • 4-15, 4-17, 13-1 Heat-Treated Materials • 30-8
Floating Head Description • 15-3 Height above Ground • 6-1
Floating Head Identification Number • 15-3 Height of Center Web • 5-1, 5-39, 16-8
Floating Head Type (b, c, d) • 15-3 Height of Composite Stiffener • 5-1, 5-37
FLOATING HEADS • 15-1 Height of Gussets • 5-1, 5-31
Floating Tubesheets • 9-37 Height of Hill (H) • 6-1
Height of Hill or Escarpment (H) • 16-9 Inside Diameter of Ring • 5-1, 5-9
Height of Liquid Column, Operating • 12-4 Inside Head Depth • 4-8
Height of Liquid on Tray • 5-1, 5-40 Inside Knuckle Radius of Torispherical Head •
Height of Packed Section • 5-1, 5-43 12-11
Height of Stiffener from Shell Surface • 16-13 Inspecting the Model in 3D • 3-37
Height of Vessel Above Grade • 16-9 Installation Options • 6-1, 6-8
Height/Length of Insulation • 5-1 Installing PVElite • 2-5
Height/Length of Insulation / Fireproofing • 5-47 Insulation • 5-1, 5-46
Height/Length of Lining • 5-1, 5-48 Insulation Density • 5-1, 5-47
Height/Length of Liquid • 5-1, 5-45 Insulation or Fireproofing, Thickness of • 5-1
Help Menu • 3-1, 3-40, 10-1, 10-19 Intermediate Calculations for Flanged Portion of
Higher Long Stresses • 6-1 Head: • 15-14
Highest Percentage of Allowable Calculations • Internal Design Pressure • 14-3
27-19 Internal Design Temperature • 14-3
Hill Height • 6-1 Internal Pressure • 6-1
Hills, Types of • 6-1 Internal Pressure Calculations • 7-1
Hillside Nozzle Cylinder • 5-23 Internal Pressure Results • 14-9
Hillside Nozzle in Head • 5-27 Internal Pressure Results for the Head: • 15-13
HOOPS' License Grant • 5 Internal Temperature • 6-1
Horizontal Force Factor • 6-1 Introduction • 1-1, 4-2, 5-2, 5-49, 6-2, 7-2, 9-2,
HORIZONTAL VESSELS • 16-1 11-2, 12-2, 13-2, 14-2, 15-2, 16-2, 17-2, 18-2,
Hydro. Allowable Unmodified (Y/N) • 6-1 19-2, 20-2, 21-2, 22-2, 23-2, 24-2, 25-2, 26-2,
Hydrotest Calculations • 7-1 27-2, 28-2, 29-2
Hydrotest Position • 6-1 Invoking the Drawing • 3-1, 3-55
Hydrotest Type • 6-1 IS 875 Wind Code • 6-1, 6-24
Hydrotest, Seismic • 6-1 Is the Flange Slotted • 15-12
Hydrotest, Wind • 6-1 Is The Nozzle Outside the 80% Diameter Limit •
12-6
I Is There A Backing Ring? • 15-12
IBC • 6-1 Is This a Heat Exchanger • 6-1
IBC-2000 Earthquake Parameters • 6-50 Is This a Manway or Access/Inspection Opening
Impact Factor • 6-1 • 12-6
Importance Factor • 6-1 Is this a Welded Internal • 5-33
Importance Factor ( I ) • 16-8 Item Number • 16-2, 17-5
Include Hydrostatic Head Component • 12-4 Iterative Results Per Pressure, Area , And UG-
Include Missing Mass Components • 6-1 45 • 12-16
India's Earthquake Standard IS-1893 RSM and
SCM • 6-1, 6-46
J
Input Echo • 7-1 Jacket • 11-7, 11-28
Input Menu • 3-1, 3-18 Joint Efficiency for Longitudinal and
Input Processor • 3-1 Circumferential Seams • 4-6
Input Processors • 3-1 Joint Efficiency of Nozzle Neck • 5-1, 5-18
Insert Nozzle or Abutting Nozzle • 5-18, 12-8 Joint Efficiency of Shell Seam through which
Inside Crown Radius (L) of the Torispherical Nozzle Passes • 5-1, 5-17
Head • 12-11
Inside Crown Radius of Head • 15-4
K
Inside Depth of Flange From Flange Face to Keyboard Commands • 30-4
Attached Head • 15-12 Knuckle Bend Radius, Large End • 14-9
Inside Diameter at Base • 4-17 Knuckle Bend Radius, Small End • 14-9
Inside Diameter of Flange • 15-5 Knuckle Radius • 4-9
Knuckle Ratio for Torispherical Heads • 16-13 Lug Distances from Base • 6-1
Knuckle Thickness, Large End • 14-9 Lug Height • 5-1
Knuckle Thickness, Small End • 14-9 Lug Height (only if no Top Ring • 4-1
Lug Height (only if no Top Ring) • 4-19
L Lug Midpoint • 5-1
Large Cylinder Actual Thickness • 14-6 Lug Thickness • 4-1, 4-19
Large Cylinder Axial Length • 14-6 Lug Width • 5-1
Large Cylinder Corrosion Allowance • 14-6 Lugs • 5-1, 5-29
Large Cylinder Joint Efficiency • 14-6
M
Large Diameter Nozzle Calculations • 12-15
Large End Knuckle Radius • 4-12 M.A.W.P. and Static Head • 6-1
Large End Knuckle Thickness • 4-12 Main Input Fields • 5-50, 11-4, 12-3, 13-4, 14-3,
Large End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section, 15-3, 16-2, 17-5, 18-2, 19-2, 20-2, 21-7, 22-2,
Knuckle, Knuckle-Bar, Knuckle-Section) • 14- 23-4, 24-3, 25-3, 26-3, 27-8, 28-2
7 Main Menu • 3-1, 3-21, 10-3
LARGE OPENINGS • 26-1 Material Allowable Stress, Ambient
Lateral Nozzle in Cylinder • 5-24 Temperature • 14-4
Leg Orientation • 5-1, 5-41 Material Allowable Stress, Design Temperature •
Leg Results • 19-10 14-4
Legs • 5-1, 5-40 Material Definition • 30-2
LEGS and LUGS • 19-1 Material Name • 4-6, 30-4
Legs, Length of • 5-1 Material Specification • 15-4, 16-3
Legs, Number of • 5-1 Material Yield Stress • 5-1, 5-38
Length of Bottom Lug Support Plate • 5-30 Mating Flange Design Bolt Load (W) • 15-13
Length of Expanded Portion of Tube • 17-10 Mating Flange Loads? • 15-12
Length of Legs • 5-42 Mating Flange Operating Load (WM1) • 15-13
Length of Partition Gasket • 15-11 Mating Flange Seating Load (WM2) • 15-13
LICENSE GRANT • 2 MAWP Calculations • 27-19
Lifting Lug Input • 19-13 Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Sl • 6-1
Ligament Efficiency Calculations • 27-17 Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss • 6-1
Liguid on Tray • 5-1 Maximum Allowable Pressure New & Cold •
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES • 3 12-3
LIMITED WARRANTY • 3 Mean Width of Gussets • 5-1, 5-31
Lining • 5-1, 5-48 Merge Shell • 16-5
Lining Density • 5-1 Metal Temperature • 6-1
Lining, Thickness of • 5-1 Mexican Wind Code 1993 • 6-27
Liquid • 5-1, 5-44 Minimum Design Metal Temperature • 12-16
Liquid Density • 5-1, 5-45 Minimum Diameter and Thickness • 5-1, 5-17
Liquid Height From Bottom Of Tank • 16-3 Minimum Metal Temperature • 6-1
Liquid on Tray, Density of • 5-1 Miscellaneous Tab • 10-1
Load Case • 6-1 Miscellaneous Topics • 30-1
Load Cases • 9-32 Miscellaneous Weight • 5-33
Loads and Design Constraints • 3-1 Modification of Reinforcement Limit • 12-6
Local Shell Thickness • 5-1, 5-19 Modification of Reinforcing Limits • 5-15
Location of Reinforcing Ring (Shell, Cone) • 14- Moment about X, Y, or Z Axis • 5-1, 5-34
8 Moment of Inertia • 5-1, 5-10
Longitudinal Allowable Stresses • 7-1 Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Section • 14-8
Longitudinal Stress Constants • 7-1 Moment of Inertia of Stiffening Ring • 16-13
Longitudinal Stresses • 7-1 Moment Reduction Factor Tau • 6-1
Lug Bearing Width • 5-1, 5-30 Mouse Operation • 30-4
Number of Legs • 5-42

N Number of Lugs • 5-32
Name of Section Type • 5-10 Number of Ribs • 5-39, 16-7
Natural Frequency Calculation • 7-1 Number of Splits in Backing Ring (0, 1, OR 2) •
NBC Seismic Data • 6-1, 6-43 15-13
NBC Wind Data • 6-1, 6-21 Number of Trays • 5-40
Network Installation / Usage • 2-7 Number of Tube Holes • 17-9
Nominal Density of Material • 30-7
Nominal Density of this Material • 30-7
O
Nominal Diameter and Thickness • 5-1, 5-17 OD as the Basis for the shell Radius in Zick • 3-
Nominal Schedule of Nozzle • 5-1, 5-17 1
Nominal Thickness of Nozzle • 12-8 Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline •
Non Ferrous Materials • 30-9 5-1
Non-Circ. Small Diameter • 4-13 Offset Distance from Cylinder/Head Centerline
Non-Ferrous Materials • 30-9 (L1) • 5-14
Notes on Network ESLs • 2-9 Offset from Centerline • 5-1, 5-33
Novell File Server ESL Installation • 2-8 Operating Liquid Density • 12-4
Novell Workstation ESL Installation • 2-9 Optional Steps • 7-9
Nozzle Analysis • 5-1, 5-12 Ordinate Type • 6-1
Nozzle Angle Geometry • 12-9 Other Input Processors • 3-6
Nozzle Corrosion Allowance • 5-1, 5-17, 12-8 Outer Cylinder on the Thick Expansion Joint •
Nozzle Description • 5-1, 5-14 17-18
Nozzle Design Modifications • 6-1, 6-14 Output • 19-16, 20-7
Nozzle Design Pressure • 6-1 Output Menu • 3-1, 3-25, 10-1, 10-7
Nozzle Dialog Data • 5-11 Output Review • 3-1
Nozzle Diameter Basis • 5-1, 5-16, 12-7 Output Review and Report Generation • 3-13
Nozzle Diameter Limit • 5-1 Output/Review • 8-1
Nozzle In a Cylinder • 5-21 Outside Diameter of Flanged Portion • 15-5
Nozzle In a Head • 5-25 Outside Diameter of Ring • 5-1, 5-9
Nozzle Input Data • 5-1, 5-14 Outside Diamter • 5-1
Nozzle Insertion • 5-1 Overall Height of Lug • 5-31
Nozzle Inside Projection • 5-1, 5-18, 12-13 Overall M.A.W.P. and Static Head • 6-1
Nozzle Material Specification • 5-1, 5-16 Overall Width of Lug • 5-31
Nozzle Orientation • 5-20 Overriding Nozzle Weight • 5-19
Nozzle Outside Projection • 5-1, 5-18, 12-13 Overview • 2-2
Nozzle Schedule • 5-1
Nozzle Size and Thickness Basis • 5-1, 5-16, 12-
P
7 P instead of MAWP for UG-99B • 10-1
Nozzle Thickness • 3-1, 10-1 P Number Thickness • 30-7
Nozzle Thickness Limit • 5-1 Packed Section Height • 5-1
Nozzle Weight • 5-1 Packing • 5-1, 5-42
Nozzle, Thickness of Actual • 5-1 Packing Density • 5-1
Nozzles • 5-1 Pad Length • 5-1, 5-32
NOZZLES • 12-1 Pad Material • 5-1, 5-29
Nozzles, Small • 3-1 Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface • 5-
Nubbin Width • 15-11 1, 5-28
Number of Bolts • 15-6 Pad Outside Diameter Along Vessel Surface •
Number of Desired Cycles • 17-18 12-13
Number of Flexible Shell Elements • 17-18 Pad Thickness • 5-1, 5-28, 5-32, 12-13
Number of Grooves • 17-11
Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter • 5-1, 5- Precautionary Note • 9-50
28 Pressure Chart Name, External • 30-8
Pad Weld Leg Size at Outside Diameter • 12-13 Print Intermediate Calcs for External Pressure •
Pad Width • 5-1, 5-28, 5-32 12-11
Parameters, Required • 3-1 Printing Equations and Substitutions • 3-1
Partition Gasket Column for Gasket Seating: • Printing or Saving Reports to a File • 10-1, 10-27
15-11 Printing the Graphics • 10-27
Partition Gasket Design Seating Stress Y: • 15- Printing the Reports • 10-1, 10-27
11 Printing Water Volume in Gallons • 3-1, 10-1
Partition Gasket Factor M • 15-11 Printout in Rows, External • 10-1
Partition Gasket Nubbin Width • 15-11 Program Structure and Control • 3-1, 3-2
Partition Gasket Thickness • 15-11 Program Support / User Assistance • 1-9
Perform Area Calculations for Small Nozzles • Projection from Bottom • 6-1
12-6 Projection from Top • 6-1
Perform Saddle Check • 5-38 Purpose of this Chapter • 10-2
Perform Tailing Lug Analysis • 4-19 Purpose, Scope and Technical Basis • 5-49, 9-2,
Perform WRC 107 Calc • 5-1, 5-32 11-2, 14-2, 15-2, 22-2, 26-2, 27-2
Performance Criteria Factor P • 6-1 Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis • 11-14, 12-
Performing an Analysis • 10-19 2, 13-2, 17-2, 24-2, 25-2, 29-2
Performing the Analysis • 3-49 PVElite Analysis • 7-1
Perimeter Of Tube Layout (if Needed) • 17-10 PVElite Quick Start • 3-41
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Diameter Limit • PVElite Startup • 3-1
5-15, 12-12
Physical Maximum for Nozzle Thickness Limit • Q
5-15, 12-12 Quick Start with PVElite • 3-1
Pin Hole Diameter • 4-1, 4-19
PIPES and PADS • 20-1 R
Plates • 5-1 Radial Nozzle in Cylinder • 5-22
Platform Clearance • 5-1, 5-36 Radial Nozzle in Head • 5-26, 5-27
Platform End Angle (degrees) • 5-1, 5-35 Radial Width of Bottom Support Plate • 5-1, 5-
Platform Force Coefficient • 5-1, 5-36 30
Platform Grating Weight • 5-1, 5-35 Radial Width of Reinforcing Ring • 14-8
Platform Height • 5-1, 5-35 Radial Width of Top Plate/Ring • 5-1, 5-31
Platform Length • 5-1 Radiography, Degree of • 6-1
Platform Length (Non- Circular) • 5-36 Range Type • 6-1
Platform Railing Weight • 5-1, 5-35 Rating of attached flange • 12-7
Platform Start Angle (degrees) • 5-1, 5-35 Recording the Model • 3-1
Platform Weight • 5-1, 5-35 Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image
Platform Width • 5-1, 5-35 • 3-44
Platform Wind Area • 5-1, 5-35 RECTANGULAR VESSELS • 27-1
Platform Wind Area Calculation • 5-1 Redesign Pads to Reinforce Openings • 6-1
Platform Wind Area Calculation [Installation \ Reinforcement Calculations • 27-17
Misc. Options] • 5-36 Reinforcement Calculations Under External
Platforms • 5-1, 5-34 Pressure • 14-10
Plotting the Vessel Image • 3-1 Reinforcement Calculations Under Internal
Pop-up Input Fields • 11-8, 21-12 Pressure • 14-10
Pop-Up Input Fields • 12-10, 13-15, 14-7, 15-12, Reinforcing Limits, Modification of • 5-1
16-7, 17-19, 18-7, 19-5, 20-5, 22-7, 23-9, 24- Reinforcing Pad • 12-9
15, 27-13 Reloading last file at Startup • 10-1
Pre-1999 Addenda • 10-1 Report Content • 10-1
Report Generation • 3-1 Seismic Design Category • 6-1

Required and Available Areas • 12-15 Seismic Design Code • 6-1
Required Parameters, Setting Up • 3-1 Seismic for Hydrotest • 6-1
Required Thickness Calculations: • 15-14 Seismic for Hydrotest, Percent • 6-1
Required Thickness of Nozzle • 12-8 Seismic Load Input in G's • 6-1, 6-48
Required Thickness of Shell and Nozzle • 12-14 Seismic Zone • 6-1, 16-9
Response Modification Factor R • 6-1 Select the Addenda for the Material Database •
Response Modification R • 6-1 10-1
Response Spectrum • 6-1, 6-52 Selection of Reinforcing Pad • 12-15
Response Spectrum Name • 6-1 Set Area 1 or Area 2 Equal To 0 • 12-7
Results • 11-12 Setting Up the Required Parameters • 3-54
Results for a Whole Vessel • 10-1 Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and
Review • 8-2 Earthquake • 7-1
Review Screen • 8-2 Shell and Head Diameter Basis • 16-5
Reviewing the Results • 3-1, 3-50 Shell Corrosion Allowance • 12-6, 17-6
Reviewing the Results - The Output Option • 10- Shell Cylinder Length ( Li ) • 17-18
1, 10-26 Shell Design Pressure • 17-5
Rib Thickness • 5-1, 5-39 Shell Diameter • 12-5, 16-5
Ribs, Number of • 5-1 Shell Diameter Basis (ID or OD) • 12-5
Rigging Data • 6-1 Shell Inside Diameter • 17-6
Ring Centroid Distance • 5-1 Shell Joint Efficiency • 16-6
Ring Diameter, Outside • 5-1 Shell Length Tangent toTangent • 16-5
Ring Inside Diameter • 5-1 Shell Mean Metal Temperature • 17-7
Ring Material • 5-1, 5-9 Shell Metal Design Temperature • 17-6
Ring, Thickness of • 5-1 Shell or Head Type • 12-5
Rings • 5-1, 5-8 Shell Side (External) Corrosion Allowance • 15-
Risk Factor • 6-1 5
Roughness Factor • 6-1 Shell Side (External) Design Pressure • 15-3
Round Thickness to Nearest Nominal Size? • 3-1 Shell Thickness • 16-5
Running the Analysis • 3-1 Shell Thickness, Modification of • 6-1
Shell Tr Value • 5-1, 5-19
S Shell Wall Thickness • 17-6
Saddle Bearing Angle • 16-6 Shell, Nozzle or Pad Material Name • 12-4
Saddle Check • 5-1 Shell\Channel Tube\Tubesheet\ Bolt Material
Saddle Contact Angle • 5-1 Specification • 17-5
Saddle Contact Angle (degrees) • 5-37 SHELLS • 11-1
Saddle Dimension A • 5-1, 5-38 Shock Scale X|Y dir • 6-1
Saddle Reaction Force Factor • 16-4 Site Distance • 6-1
Saddle Wear Plate Design • 16-14 Skirt Support with Basering • 4-16
Saddle Width • 16-6 Small Cylinder Actual Thickness • 14-5
Saddles • 5-1, 5-36 Small Cylinder Axial Length • 14-6
Sample Calculation • 28-9 Small Cylinder Corrosion Allowance • 14-5
Section Identifier • 5-1, 5-42 Small Cylinder Joint Efficiency • 14-5
Section Type • 5-1 Small End Knuckle Radius • 4-12
Seismic • 5-1 Small End Knuckle Thickness • 4-12
Seismic Coefficient Av • 6-1 Small End Reinforcing (None, Bar, Section,
Seismic Coefficient Ca • 6-1 Knuckle, Knuckle-Bar, Knuckle-Section) • 14-
Seismic Coefficient Cc • 6-1 6
Seismic Coefficient Cv • 6-1 Soehren's Calculations: • 15-14
Seismic Data • 6-1, 6-37 Software Installation on a Network Drive • 2-7
Soil Factor • 6-1 Thickness of Gussets • 5-31

Soil Type • 6-1 Thickness of Insulation or Fireproofing • 5-47
Special Service • 6-1 Thickness of Lining • 5-48
Specifying Global Data • 3-1 Thickness of Ribs • 16-7
Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Thickness of Ring • 5-9
Constraints • 3-46 Thickness of Top Plate/Ring • 5-31
Spherical Cover / Backing Device • 9-43 Thickness of Wear Plate • 5-38
Spherical Head • 4-10 Thickness of Web • 16-7
SRSS • 6-1 Thickness, Minimum • 5-1
Stainless Steel (High Alloy) Materials • 30-8 THIN JOINTS • 22-1
Standard Bar Ring • 6-1 Thread Series • 15-5
Starting CodeCalc from PVElite • 10-2 To Node Diameter • 4-10
Starting the Alternative Nozzle Layout Method • Tools Menu • 3-1, 3-11, 3-25, 10-1, 10-7
5-21 Top Plate/Ring • 5-1
Starting the Installation Procedure • 2-3 Top Plate/Ring, Thickness of • 5-1
Steps for Calculating and Displaying Vessel- Toricone Dialog • 4-11
Analysis Results • 7-1 Toriconical • 4-11
Stiffener Type • 6-1 Torispherical Head • 4-9
Stiffening Ring Location • 16-12 Total Axial Force on Large End for External
Stiffening Ring Material Properties • 16-12 Pressure Case • 14-7
Stiffening Ring Present • 16-5 Total Axial Force on Large End for Internal
Stiffening Ring Properties • 16-12 Pressure Case • 14-7
Stiffening Rings for External Pressure, Selecting Total Axial Force on Small End for External
• 6-1 Pressure Case • 14-8
Straight Length of Tubes • 17-9 Total Axial Force on Small End for Internal
Stress Calculations • 27-18 Pressure Case • 14-8
Stress due to Combined Loads • 7-1 Total weight and detail moment • 7-1
Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel • Tower Deflection, Allowable • 3-1
10-27 TRADEMARKS • 5
Sump Head? • 4-8, 4-9 Tray Spacing • 5-1, 5-40
Support Lug Input • 19-10 Tray Weight Per Unit Area • 5-1, 5-40
Swap Diameter Basis • 4-7 Trays • 5-1, 5-39
System and Hardware Requirements • 2-2 Trays, Number of • 5-1
Trunnion Input • 19-20
T Trunnion Results • 19-24
Tail Lug Type • 4-1, 4-19 Tube Corrosion Allowance • 17-9
Tailing Lug Analysis • 4-1, 4-18, 21-15 Tube Design Temperature • 17-8
Tailing Lug Input Data • 4-19 Tube Hole Diameter • 17-11
Take Cone as Lines of Support for External Tube Input Data • 9-22
Pressure? • 14-7 Tube Mean Metal Temperature • 17-8
Tapped Hole Area Loss • 5-1, 5-19 Tube Outside Diameter • 17-9
TEMA Classification • 17-14 Tube Pattern (Triangular, Square) • 17-9
TEMA Number • 30-4 Tube Pitch • 17-9
TERM • 3 Tube Sheet Type • 17-11
Terrain Category • 6-1 Tube Side (Internal) Corrosion Allowance • 15-5
The Input Processor • 3-3 Tube Side (Internal) Design Pressure • 15-3
The Installation/Configuration Process • 2-1 Tube Wall Thickness • 17-8
The Review Screen • 8-2 Tubesheet Clamped • 17-14
THICK JOINTS • 23-1 Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Channel Side •
Thickness of Bottom Plate • 5-31 17-14
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Shell Side • 17- Vessel Description • 16-2

14 Vessel Design Pressure • 16-2
Tubesheet Design Code • 17-5 Vessel Design Temperature • 16-2
Tubesheet Extended as Flange? • 17-13 Vessel Detail Data • 5-1
Tubesheet Gasket (None, Shell, Channel, Both) • Vessel Details, Design and Analysis of • 3-1
17-13 Vessel Example • 31-1
Tubesheet Metal Design Temperature • 17-13 Vessel Example Problems • 31-1
Tubesheet Properties • 9-16 Vessel Leg Input • 19-8
Tubesheet Thickness • 17-14 Vessel OD • 5-1
Tubesheet Type and Design Code • 9-11 Vessel Translates During Occasional Load • 5-
TUBESHEETS • 9-2, 17-1 42
Tutorial Problem Printout • 10-1, 10-29 Vessel, Basic Definition of • 3-1
Tutorial/Master Menu • 3-1 Vibration Period • 6-1
Types of Hill • 16-9 View Menu • 3-1, 3-34, 10-1, 10-18
Vortex Shedding • 6-1
U
W
UBC 1997 Earthquake Data • 6-1, 6-48
UBC Earthquake Importance Factor • 6-1 Wall Thickness for Axial Stress, Selecting • 6-1
UBC Horizontal Force Factor • 6-1 Wall Thickness for External Pressure, Selecting
UBC Near Source Factor • 6-1 • 6-1
UBC Seismic Coefficient CA • 6-1 Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure, Selecting •
UBC Seismic Coefficient CV • 6-1 6-1
UBC Seismic Data • 6-1, 6-42 Wear Pad Extension Above Horn of Saddle •
UBC Seismic Zone • 6-1 16-7
UBC Wind Data • 6-1, 6-19 Wear Pad Thickness • 16-6
UBC Wind Importance Factor • 6-1 Wear Pad Width • 16-7
UCS-66 Chart Number • 30-8 Wear Plate Contact Angle (degrees) • 5-1, 5-38
UG-45 Minimum Nozzle Neck Thickness • 12- Wear Plate, Thickness of • 5-1
15 Web Location • 5-1, 5-39
Uncorroded Expansion Joint Spring Rate • 17-16 Web Location Center or Side • 16-7
Updates • 1-9 Web Thickness • 5-1, 5-39
Use ASCE 7-95 Code • 16-9 Weight • 5-1
Use Code Case 2260? • 10-1 Weight of Details • 7-1
Use Pre-99 Addenda Division 1 only • 3-1 Weight of Elements • 7-1
User Border Creation • 3-1, 3-54 Weight of One Lug • 5-1, 5-31
User Defined • 6-1 Weight, Miscellaneous • 5-1, 6-1
User Defined G for Floating Tubesheet • 17-14 Weights • 5-32
User Defined Longitudinal Force • 16-12 Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and
User Defined Wind Pressure On Vessel • 16-8 Inside Shell • 5-1, 5-18, 12-13
User Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS • 16-11 Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and
User-Defined Hydrostatic Test Pressure • 6-1 Shell or Pad • 5-1, 5-18, 12-13
User-Defined MAWP/MAPnc • 6-1 Weld Size Calculations • 12-16
User-Defined Wind Profile • 6-1, 6-26 Weld Size Thickness • 4-1, 4-19
Using Review • 8-3 Weld Strength Calculations • 12-16
Welded Flat Head • 4-12
V What Applications are Available? • 1-4
Velocity Zone • 6-1 What Distinguishes PVElite from our
Vessel Analysis Calculations • 7-1 competitors? • 1-3
Vessel Centerline, Distance or Offset • 5-1 What is PVElite? • 1-2
Vessel Components (Details), Individual • 3-1 What is the Purpose and Scope of PVElite? • 1-2
Width of Partition Gasket • 15-11

Width of Saddle • 5-1, 5-37
Width of Wear Plate • 5-1, 5-38
Wind • 5-1
Wind & Seismic Data • 6-1, 6-16
Wind Data • 6-1, 6-16
Wind Deflection • 7-1
Wind Design Code • 6-1
Wind Exposure • 16-8
Wind for Hydrotest • 6-1
Wind Load Calculation • 7-1
Wind Load Diameter Multiplier • 4-5
Wind Profile Data • 6-1
Wind Shape Factor • 3-1
Wind Speed • 6-1
Wind Zone Number • 6-1
Windows Server Installation • 2-9
WRC 107 Stress Calculations • 18-19
WRC 107\FEA • 18-1
WRC 297/ANNEX G • 28-1
WRC107 Stress Summations • 18-22
X
XY Coordinate Calculations • 7-1
Y
Yield Stress, Operating • 30-7
Z
Zero Period Acceleration • 6-1
Zone Number • 6-1

PV Elite Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PV Elite Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

12777 Jones Rd. Ste.

Dear PVElite User,

Some New Features of Version 2005 are:

Plus many others

Important Release Notes

PVElite Development Staff

ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER

IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED PORTION OF

COADE's entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:

SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT PERMIT LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR

HOOPS' License Grant

Chapter 1: Introduction 1-1

Chapter 2: The Installation/Configuration Process 2-1

Notes on Network ESLs ........................................................................................................................... 2-9

Chapter 3: Tutorial/Master Menu 3-1

Chapter 4: Element Data 4-1

Material Name ............................................................................................................................... 4-6

Chapter 5: Vessel Detail Data 5-1

Pad Thickness.............................................................................................................................. 5-28

Thickness of Wear Plate .............................................................................................................. 5-38

Chapter 6: General Vessel Data 6-1

ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data........................................................................................................................ 6-39

Chapter 7: PVElite Analysis 7-1

Chapter 8: Output/Review 8-1

Chapter 9: HEAT EXCHANGERS 9-1

Chapter 10: Component Analysis Tutorial 10-1

Summary - Seeing Results for a Whole Vessel .................................................................................... 10-27

Chapter 11: SHELLS 11-1

Chapter 12: NOZZLES 12-1

Chapter 13: FLANGES 13-1

Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 13-18

Chapter 14: CONICAL SECTIONS 14-1

Chapter 15: FLOATING HEADS 15-1

Chapter 16: HORIZONTAL VESSELS 16-1

Chapter 17: TUBESHEETS 17-1

Discussion of Results............................................................................................................................ 17-31

Chapter 18: WRC 107\FEA 18-1

Chapter 19: LEGS and LUGS 19-1

Chapter 20: PIPES and PADS 20-1

Chapter 21: BASE RINGS 21-1

Discussion of Input ................................................................................................................................. 21-7

Chapter 22: THIN JOINTS 22-1

Chapter 23: THICK JOINTS 23-1

Chapter 24: ASME TUBESHEETS 24-1

Chapter 25: HALF-PIPES 25-1

Discussion of Results.............................................................................................................................. 25-6

Chapter 26: LARGE OPENINGS 26-1

Chapter 27: RECTANGULAR VESSELS 27-1

Chapter 28: WRC 297/ANNEX G 28-1

Chapter 29: Appendix Y 29-1

Chapter 30: Miscellaneous Topics 30-1

P Number Thickness.................................................................................................................... 30-7

Chapter 31: Vessel Example Problems 31-1

What is the Purpose and Scope of PVElite?

PVElite features include:

What Distinguishes PVElite from our

What Applications are Available?

The following applications are available in PVElite.

Complete Vertical Vessels

Complete Horizontal Vessels

The following applications are available in PVElite:

Shells & Heads

All integral flange types